r88d KT Servo OMRON

Cat. No.
I571-E2-03
Accurax G5 servo system

with Analogue/Pulse control
Model:
R88D-KT_ Servo Drives
R88M-K_ Servomotors
USERS Manual
25.08.2011 11:01:06
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Accurax G5. This user's manual explains how to install and wire
the Accurax G5, set parameters needed to operate the G5, and remedies to be taken and
inspection methods to be used should problems occur.
Intended Readers
This manual is intended for the following individuals.
Those having electrical knowledge (certified electricians or individuals having equivalent or
more knowledge) and also being qualified for one of the following:
Those in charge of introducing FA equipment
Those designing FA systems
Those managing FA sites
Notes
This manual contains the information you need to know to correctly use the Accurax G5 and
peripheral equipment.
Before using the Accurax G5, read through this manual and gain a full understanding of the
information provided herein.
After you finished reading the manual, keep it in a convenient place so that the manual can be
referenced at any time.
Make sure this manual will also get to the end-user.
Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL
Items Requiring Acknowledgment

1. Terms of Warranty
(1) Warranty period
The warranty period of this product is 1 year after its purchase or delivery to the
specified location.
(2) Scope of warranty
If the product fails during the above warranty period due to design, material or
workmanship, we will provide a replacement unit or repair the faulty product free of
charge at the location where you purchased the product.
Take note, however, that the following failures are excluded from the scope of
warranty.
a) Failure due to use or handling of the product in any condition or environment not
specified in the catalog, operation manual, etc.
b) Failure not caused by this product
c) Failure caused by any modification or repair not carried out by OMRON
d) Failure caused by any use not intended for this product
e) Failure that could not be predicted with the level of science and technology
available when the product was shipped from OMRON
f) Failure caused by a natural disaster or any other reason for which OMRON is not
held responsible
Take note that this warranty applies to the product itself, and losses induced by a
failure of the product are excluded from the scope of warranty.
2. Limited Liability
(1) OMRON shall not assume any responsibility whatsoever for any special damage,
indirect damage or passive damage arising from this product.
(2) OMRON shall not assume any responsibility for programming done by individuals not
belonging to OMRON, if the product is programmable, or outcomes of such
programming.
3. Conditions for Intended Application

(1) If this product is combined with other product, the customer must check the standards
and regulations applicable to such combination. The customer must also check the
compatibility of this product with any system, machinery or device used by the
customer. If the above actions are not taken, OMRON shall not assume any
responsibility regarding the compatibility of this product.
(2) If the product is used in the following applications, consult your OMRON sales
representative to check the necessary items according to the specification sheet, etc.
Also make sure the product is used within the specified ratings and performance
ranges with an ample margin and implement safety measures, such as designing a
safety circuit, to minimize danger should the product fail.
a) Used in any outdoor application, application subject to potential chemical
contamination or electrical interference, or in any condition or environment not
specified in the catalog, operation manual, etc.
b) Nuclear power control equipment, incineration equipment, railway, aircraft and
vehicle equipment, medical machinery, entertainment machinery, safety system
or any other device controlled by an administrative agency or industry regulation
c) System, machinery or device that may threaten human life or property
d) Gas, water or electricity supply system, system operated continuously for 24
hours or any other equipment requiring high reliability
e) Any other application where a high level of safety corresponding to a) to d) above
is required
(3) If the customer wishes to use this product in any application that may threaten human
life or property, be sure to confirm beforehand that the entire system is designed in
such a way to notify dangers or ensure the necessary level of safety via design
redundancy, and that the product is wired and installed appropriately in the system
according to the intended application.
(4) Sample applications explained in the catalog, etc. are provided for reference purposes
only. When adopting any of these samples, check the function and safety of each
equipment or device.
(5) Understand all prohibited items and notes on use provided herein, so that this product
will be used correctly and that customers or third parties will not suffer unexpected
losses.
4. Specification Change
The product specifications and accessories explained in the catalog, operation manual,
etc. are subject to change, if necessary, for the reasons of improvement, etc. Contact
your OMRON sales representative to check the actual specifications of this product.
5. Scope of Service
The price of this product excludes costs of service such as dispatching engineers.
If you have any request regarding service, consult your OMRON sales representative.
6. Scope of Application
The above paragraphs are based on the assumption that this product is traded and used
in Japan.
If you wish to trade or use this product outside Japan, consult your OMRON sales
representative.
Safety Precautions Document

So that the Accurax G5 Servomotor and Servo Drive and peripheral equipment are used safely and correctly,
be sure to peruse this Safety Precautions document section and the main text before using the product in order
to learn all items you should know regarding the equipment as well as all safety information and precautions.
Make an arrangement so that this manual also gets to the end-user of this product.
After reading this manual, keep it with you at all times.
Explanation of Display
The precautions explained in this section describe important information regarding safety and must be followed
without fail.
The display of precautions used in this manual and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
When an incorrect handling can lead to a dangerous

situation, which may result in death or serious injury
Or, when a serious property damage may occur
Caution
When an incorrect handling can lead to a dangerous

situation, which may result in a minor or moderate
injury, and when only a property damage may occur
Even those items denoted by the caution symbol may lead to a serious outcome depending on
the situation. Accordingly, be sure to observe all safety precautions.
This symbol indicates an item you should perform or avoid in order to use the product
safely.
This symbol indicates an item you should perform or avoid in order to prevent
inoperative, malfunction or any negative effect on performance or function.
This symbol indicates an item that helps deepen your understanding of the product or
other useful tip.
Explanation of Symbols
Example of symbols
This symbol indicates danger and caution.
The specific instruction is described using an illustration or text inside or near
The symbol shown to the left indicates "beware of electric shock".
This symbol indicates a prohibited item (item you must not do).
The symbol shown to the left indicates "disassembly prohibited".
This symbol indicates a compulsory item (item that must be done).

The symbol shown to the left indicates "grounding required".
For Safe Use of This Product

Illustrations contained in this manual sometimes depict conditions without covers and safety shields for the
purpose of showing the details. When using this product, be sure to install the covers and shields as specified
and use the product according to this manual.
If the product has been stored for an extended period of time, contact your OMRON sales representative.
Danger
Be sure to ground the frame ground terminals of the driver and motor to 100 or less.
Electric shock may result.
Never touch the parts inside the driver.

While the power is supplied, do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, cables and
options.
Installation, operation and maintenance or inspection by unauthorized personnel is
prohibited.
Electric shock or injury may result.
Before carrying out wiring or inspection, turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 15
minutes.
Do not damage, pull, stress strongly or pinch the cables or place heavy articles on them.
Electric shock, stopping of product operation or burn damage may result.
Never touch the rotating part of the motor during operation.
Injury may result.
Never modify the product.
Injury or equipment damage may result.
Install a stopping device on the machine side to ensure safety.
* The holding brake is not a stopping device to ensure safety.
Injury may result.
Install an immediate stop device externally to the machine so that the operation can be
stopped and the power supply cut off immediately.
Injury may result.
When the power is restored after a momentary power interruption, the machine may restart
suddenly. Never come close to the machine.
* Implement remedies to ensure safety of people nearby even when the machine is
restarted.
Injury may result.
After an earthquake, be sure to conduct safety checks.
Electric shock, injury or fire may result.
Never drive the motor using an external drive source.
Fire may result.
Danger
Do not place flammable materials near the motor, driver or Regeneration Resistor.
Fire may result.
Install the motor, driver and Regeneration Resistor to non-flammable materials such as
metals.
Fire may result.
When you perform a system configuration using the safety function, be sure to fully
understand the relevant safety standards and the descriptions in the operation manual, and
apply them to the system design.
Injury or damage may result.
Do not use the cable when it is laying in oil or water.
Never connect a commercial power supply directly to the motor.
Fire or failure may result.
Do not perform wiring or any operation with wet hands.

Do not touch the key grooves with bare hands if a motor with shaft-end key grooves is being
used.
Injury may result.
Caution
Use the motor and driver in the specified combination.
Fire or equipment damage may result.
Do not store or install the product in the following environment:

Location subject to direct sunlight
Location where the ambient temperature exceeds the specified level
Location where the relative humidity exceeds the specified level
Location subject to condensation due to the rapid temperature change
Location subject to corrosive or flammable gases
Location subject to higher levels of dust, salt content or iron dust
Location subject to splashes of water, oil, chemicals, etc.
Location where the product may receive vibration or impact directly
Installing or storing the product in these locations may result in fire, electric shock or
equipment damage.
The driver radiator, Regeneration Resistor, motor, etc. may become hot while the power is
supplied or remain hot for a while even after the power supply is cut off. Never touch these
components.
A burn injury may result.
Storage and Transportation
Caution
When transporting the product, do not hold it by the cables or motor shaft.
Injury or failure may result.
Do not overload the products. (Follow the instruction on the product label.)
Use the motor eye-bolts only when transporting the motor.
Do not use them to transport the machine.
Installation and Wiring
Caution
Do not step on the product or place heavy articles on it.
Injury may result.
Do not block the intake or exhaust openings. Do not allow foreign objects to enter the
product.
Fire may result.
Be sure to observe the mounting direction.
Failure may result.
Provide the specified clearance between the driver and the inner surface of the control panel
or other equipment.
Fire or failure may result.
Do not apply strong impact on the motor shaft or driver.
Failure may result.
Wire the cables correctly and securely.
Runaway motor, injury or failure may result.
Securely tighten the unit mounting screws, terminal block screws and cable screws.
Failure may result.
Use crimp terminals for wiring.
If simple twisted wires are connected directly to the protective ground terminal, fire may
result.
Only use the power supply voltage specified in this manual.
Burn damage may result.
In locations where the power supply infrastructure is poor, make sure the rated voltage can
be supplied.
Equipment damage may result.
Provide safety measures, such as a breaker, to protect against short circuiting of external
wiring.
Fire may result.
If the product is used in the following locations, provide sufficient shielding measures.
Location where noise generates due to static electricity, etc.
Location where a strong electric or magnetic field generates
Location where exposure to radioactivity may occur
Location where power supply lines are running nearby
Using the product in these locations may result in equipment damage.
Connect an immediate stop relay in series with the brake control relay.
When connecting the battery, make sure the correct polarity is connected.
Battery damage or explosion may result.
Operation and Adjustment
Caution
Conduct a test operation after confirming that the equipment is not affected.
Before operating the product in an actual environment, check if it operates correctly based
on the parameters you have set.
Never adjust or set parameters to extreme values, as it will make the operation unstable.
Injury may result.
Separate the motor from the mechanical system and check its operation before installing the
motor to the machine.
Injury may result.
If an alarm generated, remove the cause of the alarm and ensure safety, and then reset the
alarm and restart the operation.
Injury may result.
Do not use the built-in brake of the motor for normal braking operation.
Failure may result.
Do not operate the Servomotor when an excessive load inertia is installed.
Failure may result.
Install safety devices to prevent idle running or lock of the electromagnetic brake or the gear
head, or leakage of grease from the gear head.
Injury, damage or taint damage may result.
If the driver fails, cut off the power supply to the driver on the power supply side.
Fire may result.
Do not turn ON and OFF the main driver power supply frequently.
Failure may result.
Maintenance and Inspection
Caution
After replacing the unit, transfer to the new unit all data needed to resume operation, before
restarting the operation.
Never repair the product by disassembling it.
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply when the unit is not going to be used for a prolonged
period of time.
Injury may result.
10
Location of Warning Label

This product bears a warning label at the following location to provide handling warnings.
When handling the product, be sure to observe the instructions provided on this label.
Warning label display location
(R88D-KTA5L)
Instructions on Warning Label
Disposal
When disposing of the battery, insulate it using tape, etc. and dispose of it by following the
applicable ordinance of your local government.
Dispose of the product as an industrial waste.
11
Items to Check after Unpacking
Items to Check after Unpacking

After unpacking, check the following items.
Is this the model you ordered?
Is there any damage sustained during shipment?
Accessories of This Product

Safety Precautions document x 1 copy
Connectors, mounting screws, etc. other than those in the table below are not supplied. They
must be prepared by the customer.
If any item is missing or a problem is found such as Servo Drive damage, contact the
OMRON dealer or sales office where you purchased your product.
Specifications
Main power
supply
connector
Control power
supply
connector
Motor
connector
Regeneration
Resistor
connector
Open
software
Safety
bypass
connector
50 W
Singlephase 100
VAC
100 W
200 W
400 W
100 W
200 W
Singlephase/3phase 200
VAC
Included
400 W
750 W
1 kW
1.5 kW
2 kW
3 kW
3-phase
200 VAC
5 kW
Included
7.5 kW
15 kW
600 W
1 kW
Included
1.5 kW
3-phase
400 VAC
2 kW
3 kW
5 kW
7.5 kW
15 kW
12
Included
Manual Revision History
Manual Revision History

The manual revision symbol is an alphabet appended at the end of the manual number found
in the bottom left-hand corner of the front or back cover.
Example
I571-E2-03
Revision symbol
Revision
symbol
Revision date
Description of revision and revised page
01
February 2010
First Print. European version
02
April 2011
Second Print. European version
03
August 2011
Third Print. European version
13
Structure of This Document

This manual consists of the following chapters.
Read the necessary chapter or chapters referring to below.
Outline
Chapter 1
Features and
System
Configuration
This chapter explains the features of this product, name of each part,
and applicable EC directives and UL standards.
Chapter 2
Standard Models
and External
Dimensions
This chapter explains the models of Servo Drive, Servomotor, and

peripheral equipment, as well as the external dimensions and
mounting dimensions.
Specifications
This chapter explains the general specifications, characteristics,

connector specifications and I/O circuits of the Servo Drive, general
specifications, characteristics, encoder specifications of the
Servomotor, and all other specifications including those of peripheral
equipment.
Chapter 4
System Design
This chapter explains the installation conditions, wiring methods

including wiring conforming to EMC directives and regenerative energy
calculation methods regarding the Servo Drive, Servomotor and
Decelerator, as well as the performance of External Regeneration
Resistors, and so on.
Chapter 5
BASIC
This chapter explains an outline of operations available in various
CONTROL mode CONTROL modes and explains the contents of setting.
Chapter 6
Applied
Functions
This chapter gives outline of applied functions such as damping

control, electronic gears, gain switching and disturbance observer, and
explains the contents of setting.
Chapter 7
Safety Function
This function stops the motor based on a signal from a Safety

Controller or safety sensor.
An outline of the function is explained together with operation and
connection examples.
Chapter 8
Parameters
Details
This chapter explains the set value and contents of setting of each
parameter.
Chapter 9
Operation
This chapter explains the operating procedures and how to operate in

each mode.
Chapter 10
Adjustment
Functions
This chapter explains the functions, setting methods and items to note
regarding various gain adjustments.
Chapter 3
14
Error and
Chapter 11
Maintenance
This chapter explains the items to check when problems occur, error
diagnosis using the alarm LED display and measures, error diagnosis
based on the operating condition and measures, and periodic
maintenance.
Chapter 12 Appendix
This chapter provides connection examples using OMRON's PLC and

Position Controller, as well as a list of parameters.
Table Of Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................1
Items Requiring Acknowledgment ...................................................2
Safety Precautions Document .........................................................4
Items to Check after Unpacking.......................................................12
Manual Revision History ..................................................................13
Structure of This Document .............................................................14
Chapter1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
Chapter2
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Chapter3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
Chapter4
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
Chapter5
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
Features and System Configuration

Outline ................................................................................................ 1-2
System Configuration ......................................................................... 1-3
Names and Functions......................................................................... 1-4
System Block Diagrams ..................................................................... 1-6
Applicable Standards.......................................................................... 1-11
Standard Models and External Dimensions

Servo System Configuration............................................................... 2-2
How to Read Model ............................................................................ 2-4
Standard Model List............................................................................ 2-6
External and Mounting Dimensions.................................................... 2-27
EMC Filter Dimensions....................................................................... 2-73
Specifications
Driver Specifications........................................................................... 3-2
Overload Characteristics (Electronic Thermal Function) .................... 3-58
Motor Specifications ........................................................................... 3-59
Cable and Connector Specifications .................................................. 3-95
Servo Relay Units and Cable Specifications ...................................... 3-128
External Regeneration Resistor Specifications .................................. 3-146
EMC Filter Specifications ................................................................... 3-148
System Design
Installation Conditions ........................................................................ 4-2
Wiring ................................................................................................. 4-8
Wiring Conforming to EMC Directives ................................................ 4-32
Regenerative Energy Absorption........................................................ 4-46
BASIC CONTROL Mode

Position Control .................................................................................. 5-2
Speed Control..................................................................................... 5-8
Torque Control.................................................................................... 5-14
Internally Set Speed Control............................................................... 5-19
Switching Control................................................................................ 5-22
Full Closing Control ............................................................................ 5-25
15
Table Of Contents
Chapter6
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
Chapter7
7-1
7-2
7-3
Chapter8
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
Chapter9
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
Applied Functions
Anti-vibration Control .......................................................................... 6-3
Adaptive Filter..................................................................................... 6-7
Notch Filter ......................................................................................... 6-9
Electronic Gear Function .................................................................... 6-12
Encoder Dividing Function.................................................................. 6-15
Brake Interlock.................................................................................... 6-20
Gain Switching Function..................................................................... 6-25
Gain Switching 3 Function.................................................................. 6-33
Torque Limit........................................................................................ 6-34
Sequence I/O Signal........................................................................... 6-37
Forward and Reverse Drive Prohibition Functions ............................. 6-43
Disturbance Observer Function.......................................................... 6-46
Friction Torque Compensation Function ............................................ 6-48
Inertia Ratio Switching Function ......................................................... 6-50
Hybrid Vibration Suppression Function .............................................. 6-52
Feed-forward Function ....................................................................... 6-53
Instantaneous Speed Observer Function ........................................... 6-57
Safety Function
Safe Torque OFF (STO) Function ...................................................... 7-2
Operation Example............................................................................. 7-5
Connection Example .......................................................................... 7-7
Parameters Details
Basic Parameters ............................................................................... 8-2
Gain Parameters ................................................................................ 8-10
Vibration Suppression Parameters..................................................... 8-21
Analog Control Parameters ................................................................ 8-26
Interface Monitor Setting Parameters................................................. 8-36
Extended Parameters......................................................................... 8-46
Special Parameters ............................................................................ 8-59
Operation
Operational Procedure ....................................................................... 9-2
Preparing for Operation ...................................................................... 9-3
Using the Front Display ...................................................................... 9-7
Setting the Mode ................................................................................ 9-8
Trial Operation.................................................................................... 9-34
Chapter10 Adjustment Functions

10-1 Gain Adjustment ................................................................................. 10-2
10-2 Realtime Autotuning ........................................................................... 10-4
10-3 Manual Tuning.................................................................................... 10-11
16
Table Of Contents
Chapter11 Error and Maintenance

11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
Error Processing................................................................................. 11-2

Warning List........................................................................................ 11-5
Alarm List............................................................................................ 11-6
Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 11-11
Periodic Maintenance ......................................................................... 11-22
Chapter12 Appendix
12-1 Connection Examples......................................................................... 12-2
12-2 Parameter List .................................................................................... 12-12
12-3 Safety Certification ............................................................................. 12-33
Index
17
18

This chapter explains the features of this product, name of each part, and
applicable EC directives and UL standards.
1-1 Outline ...........................................................................1-2

Outline of the Accurax G5............................................................... 1-2
Features of the Accurax G5 ............................................................ 1-2
1-2 System Configuration ..................................................1-3

1-3 Names and Functions ..................................................1-4
Driver Part Names .......................................................................... 1-4
Driver Functions.............................................................................. 1-5
1-4 System Block Diagrams...............................................1-6

1-5 Applicable Standards .................................................1-11
EC Directives ................................................................................ 1-11
UL and cUL Standards.................................................................. 1-11
Functional Safety .......................................................................... 1-11
1-1 Outline
1-1 Outline
Outline of the Accurax G5
With the Accurax G5, you can perform full closing control in addition to position control, speed
control and torque control.
Various models are available supporting wide-ranging motor capacities from 50 W to 5 kW and input
power supplies from 100 to 400 V. You will surely find a model that best suits your application.
Motors with high-resolution 20-bit incremental encoders and 17-bit absolute/incremental
encoders are available as standard models.
The Accurax G5 features realtime autotuning function and adaptive filter function that
automatically perform complicated gain adjustments. A notch filter can also be automatically
set to suppress machine vibration by reducing machine resonance during operation.
The damping control function of the Servomotor and Servo Drive realizes stable stopping
performance in a mechanism which vibrates because of the low rigidity of the load.
Features of the Accurax G5

The Accurax G5 has the following features.
7 Possible CONTROL modes Switching

You can switch among 7 CONTROL modes including the following: (1) position control, (2)
speed control, (3) torque control, (4) position and speed control, (5) position and torque control,
(6) speed and torque control, (7) full closing control. Desired modes can be selected with the
flexible driver according to your need. A single driver supports various applications.
Achievement of Accurate Positioning by Full Closing Control

Feedbacks from the external scale connected to the motor are used to accurately control positions.
Accordingly, position control is not affected by deviation caused by ball screws or temperature.
Wide Range of Power Supplies to Match Any Necessity

The Accurax G5 now has models supporting 400 V for use with large equipment, at overseas
facilities and in wide-ranging applications and environment. Since the utilization ratio of facility
equipment also increases, the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) will come down.
Safe Torque OFF (STO) Function to Ensure Safety

You can cut off the motor current to stop the motor based on a signal from an immediate stop
button or other safety equipment. In addition to the conventional stop method based on a
control signal, the STO function that permits direct stopping without a need to involve the
control circuit provides the immediate stop from 2 systems, thereby enhancing safety.
Suppressing Vibration of Low-rigidity Mechanisms during Acceleration/Deceleration

The damping control function suppresses vibration of low-rigidity mechanisms or devices
whose tips tend to vibrate.
2 vibration filters are provided to enable switching the vibration frequency automatically
according to the rotation direction and also via an external signal. In addition, the settings can
be made easily merely by just setting the vibration frequency and filter values, and you are
assured of stable operation even if the set values are inappropriate.
1-2
1-2 System Configuration
1-2 System Configuration

Controller (Voltage Output Type)
Analog
voltage
Programmable
Controller
SYSMAC CS
Motion Control Unit

CS1W-MC221/421 (-V1)
Pulse
train
'Accurax G5
AC Servomotor
R88D-KTx
SYSMAC + Position Control Unit (Pulse Train Output Type)

NC414
CN1
CN2
RUN SYNC
1
A1
B1
PA202
POWER
SYSMAC
CJ1G-CPU44
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
2
A2
B2
ERC ERH
3
A3
B3
4
A4
B4
AS
BS
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
COMM
OPEN
MACH
No.
x10 1
AXIS1
L1
AC100
-240V
INPUT
MCPWR
BUSY
L2/N
CN3
x10 0
CN4
AXIS2
NC
AXIS1
AXIS2
PERIPHERAL
NC
PORT
Programmable
Controller
SYSMAC CJ/CS
Position Control Unit

CJ1W-NC113/213/413
CJ1W-NC133/233/433
CJ1W-NC214/414
CJ1W-NC234/434
CS1W-NC113/213/413
CS1W-NC133/233/433
C200HW-NC113/213/413
INC
ABS
'Accurax G5
AC Servomotor
R88M-Kx
The following units support a motor with absolute encoder:

CJ1W-NC214/414
CJ1W-NC234/434
CS1W-MC221/421 (-V1)
1-3
1-3 Names and Functions

Driver Part Names
Display area
1
Monitor connector (CN5)

Operation area
USB connector (CN7)

Expansion connector (CN3)
Main circuit
power supply terminals
(L1, L2, and L3)
Safety connector (CN8)
Control circuit
power supply terminals
(L1C and L2C)
Charge lamp
Control I/O connector (CN1)
External Regeneration
Resistor connection
terminals (B1, B2 and B3)
Motor connection
terminals (U, V and W)
External scale connector (CN4)
Protective ground terminals
1-4
Encoder connector (CN2)
Driver Functions
Display Area
A 6-digit 7-segment LED display shows the driver status, alarm codes, parameters, and other
information.
Operation Area
Monitors the parameter setting and driver condition.
Charge Lamp
Lits when the main circuit power supply is turned ON.
Control I/O Connector (CN1)

Used for command input signals and I/O signals.
Encoder Connector (CN2)

Connector for the encoder installed in the Servomotor.
Expansion Connector (CN3)

A spare connector for expansion. Do not connect anything.
External Scale Connector (CN4)

Connector for an encoder signal used during full closing control.
Monitor Connector (CN5)

2 analog outputs to monitor values like motor rotation speed, torque command value, etc.
USB Connector (CN7)

Communications connector for the computer.
Safety Connector (CN8)

Connector for the safety devices.
If no safety device is used, keep the factory-set safety bypass connector installed.
1-5
1-4 System Block Diagrams

Size A: R88D-KTA5L/-01L/-02H
Size B: R88D-KT02L/-04H
Size C: R88D-KT04L/KT08H
L1
L2
CN B
CN A
FUSE
B2
+
FUSE
L3
B1
L1C
B3
FUSE
L2C
U
V
W
Voltage
detection
GR
GR
15 V
G1
SW power
supply main
circuit control
5V
3.3 V
2.5 V
1.5 V
E5 V
12 V
G2
Internal
control power
supply
Relay
drive
Regeneration
control
Current detection
Gate drive
Display and
setting circuit
area
MPU&ASIC
Position, speed and torque calculation control area
PWM control
CN1
CN2
Control Encoder
interface
1-6
Overcurrent
detection
CN4
CN5
CN7
CN8
External
scale
Analog
monitor
USB
Safety
Size D: R88D-KT10H/-15H
L1
CN B
CN A
FUSE
B2
+
B3
Internal Regeneration
Resistor
L2
L3
B1
FUSE
L1C
FUSE
L2C
U
V
W
Voltage
detection
GR
15 V
G1
SW power
supply main
circuit control
5V
3.3 V
2.5 V
1.5 V
E5 V
12 V
G2
Internal
control power
supply
Relay
drive
Regeneration
control
Overcurrent
detection
Current detection
Gate drive
Display and
setting circuit
area
MPU&ASIC
PWM control
Cooling fan
CN1
CN2
Control Encoder
interface
CN4
CN5
CN7
CN8
External
scale
Analog
monitor
USB
Safety
1-7
GR
Size D: R88D-KT06F/-10F/-15F
CN D
CN A
FUSE
L1
B1
B2
Internal Regen Resistor
L2
B3
N
FUSE
L3
Fuse (not installed)
CN B
CN C
24V
FUSE
0V
U
V
W
Voltage
detection
+
DC-DC
GR
15 V
G1
SW power
supply main
circuit control
5V
3.3 V
2.5 V
1.5 V
E5 V
12 V
G2
Internal
control power
supply
Relay
drive
Regeneration
control
Overcurrent
detection
Current detection
Gate drive
Display and
setting circuit
area
MPU&ASIC
PWM control
Cooling fan
CN1
CN2
Control Encoder
interface
1-8
CN4
CN5
CN7
CN8
External
scale
Analog
monitor
USB
Safety
Size E: R88D-KT20H
Size F: R88D-KT30H/-50H
Size G: R88D-KT75H
Size H: R88D-KT150H
L1
CN C
CN A
FUSE
B1
B2
L2
B3
N
L3
FUSE
FUSE
L2C
CN B
Voltage
detection
1
U
V
W
GR
GR
15 V
G1
SW power
supply main
circuit control
5V
3.3 V
2.5 V
1.5 V
E5 V
12 V
G2
Internal
control power
supply
Relay
drive
Regeneration
control
Overcurrent
detection
Current detection
Gate drive
Display and
setting circuit
area
MPU&ASIC
PWM control
Cooling fan
CN1
CN2
Control Encoder
interface
CN4
CN5
CN7
CN8
External
scale
Analog
monitor
USB
Safety
1-9
L1C
Size E: R88D-KT20F
Size F: R88D-KT30F/-50F
Size G: R88D-KT75F
Size H: R88D-KT150F
CN D
CN A
FUSE
L1
B1
B2
L2
B3
N
FUSE
L3
CN C
0V
U
V
W
Voltage
detection
+
+
DC-DC
GR
15 V
G1
SW power
supply main
circuit control
5V
3.3 V
2.5 V
1.5 V
E5 V
12 V
G2
Internal
control power
supply
Relay
drive
Regeneration
control
Overcurrent
detection
Current detection
Gate drive
Display and
setting circuit
area
MPU&ASIC
PWM control
Cooling fan
CN1
CN2
Control Encoder
interface
CN4
CN5
CN7
CN8
External
scale
Analog
monitor
USB
Safety
1-10
24V
FUSE
CN B
1-5 Applicable Standards
1-5 Applicable Standards

EC Directives
EC
directive
Product
Applicable standards
Low voltage
command
AC Servo Drive
EN 61800-5-1
AC Servomotor
EN60034-1/-5
EMC
directives
AC Servo Drive
AC Servomotor
EN 55011 class A group 1

IEC61800-3
EN61000-6-2
Note. To conform to EMC directives, the Servo Motor and Servo Drive must be installed under the conditions described
in "4-3 Wiring Conforming to EMC Directives" (P.4-32).
UL and cUL Standards

Standard
UL
standards
CSA
standards
Product
File number
AC Servo Drive
UL508C
E179149
AC Servomotor
UL1004-1
[100 V, 200 V]
3,000 r/min 50 to 750 W
E331224
UL1004
E179189
AC Servo Drive
CSA22.2 No. 14
E179149
AC Servomotor
CSA22.2 No. 100

[100 V, 200 V]
3,000 r/min 50 to 750 W
E331224
CSA22.2 No. 100
E179189
Functional Safety
Standard
Functional
safety
1-11
Product
AC Servo Drive
EN954-1 (Category 3)
ISO13849-1 (Performance level D)
EN61508 (SIL2)
EN62061 (SIL2)
EV61800-5-2 (STO)
IEC61326-3-1 (SIL2)

2
This chapter explains the models of Servo Drive, Servomotor, and peripheral
equipment, as well as the external dimensions and mounting dimensions.
2-1 Servo System Configuration .......................................2-2

2-2 How to Read Model.......................................................2-4
Servo Drive ..................................................................................... 2-4
Servomotor ..................................................................................... 2-5
2-3 Standard Model List .....................................................2-6

Servo Drive Model List.................................................................... 2-6
Servomotor Model List .................................................................... 2-7
Servo Drive and Servomotor Combination List............................. 2-12
Peripheral Equipment and Cable Model List................................. 2-15
2-4 External and Mounting Dimensions..........................2-27

Servo Drive Dimensions ............................................................... 2-27
Servomotor Dimensions................................................................ 2-45
External Regeneration Resistor Dimensions ................................ 2-72
2-5 EMC Filter Dimensions...............................................2-73
2-1 Servo System Configuration

Support Software
CX-One Software Package
Controller
(Including CX-Drive,
CX-MotionPro, CX-Motion,
CX-Programmer)
High-speed type
NC414
CN1
CN2
RUN SYNC
1
A1
B1
SYSMAC
CJ2H
CPU64
ERC ERH
2
A2
B2
3
A3
B3
4
A4
B4
AS
BS
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
COMM
BKUP
OPEN
MACH
No.
x10 1
AXIS1
MCPWR
BUSY
x10 0
CN3
CN4
PERIPHERAL
AXIS1
AXIS2
Direct connection cable for CJ1W-NC@@4

XW2Z-@@@J-G@
Position Control Unit Cable
Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2Z-@X
XW2@-20G@
External Signal
Standard type
NC113
MACH 23
No.
101
01
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
RUN
ERR/ALM
01
SYSMAC
CJ1G-CPU44
789
23
INH
PRPHL
RUN
ERC
ERH
100
COMM
20
OPEN
20
MCPWR
BUSY
Position Control Unit Cable (NC)
PERIFHERAL
CN1
Pulse Train Commands
Pulse Train Commands/Feedback Signals
4 56
PORT
XW2Z-@-A@
Servo Relay Unit

XW2B-@
Servo Drive Cable

XW2Z-@-B@
1
X
Position Control Unit (NC)

CJ1W-NC@@3 CS1W-NC@@3
C200HW-NC@@3
Programmable
Controller
SYSMAC CJ1/CS1
External Signal
CPU Unit
Built-in pulse
I/O function type
CJ1M-CPU2@
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units and Cable
XW2@-50G@
Built-in pulse
I/O function type
XW2Z-@@@J-B24
Pulse Train Commands
CP1H/CP1L
Analog Commands
Position Control Unit (NC)

CJ1W-NC214/414
CJ1W-NC234/434
789
Programmable
Controller
SYSMAC CJ2
456
AXIS2
PORT
SYSMAC + Controller (Analog output type)
Control Cables (for Motion Control Unit)

R88A-CPG
Programmable Controller
SYSMAC CS1
Analog Commands/Feedback Signals

Motion Control Unit (MC)
CS1W-MC221/421 (-V1)
Available to build the Absolute System.
2-2
USB
communications
Servo Drive
Motor power signals
AC Servomotors
Power Cables
Standard Cables
Without Brake
R88A-CA@@@@@SR-E
With Brake
R88A-CA@@@@@BR-E
Brake Cables (50 to 750 W max.)
Standard Cables
R88A-CAKA@@@BR-E
Accurax G5 drive
R88D-KT
Accurax G5 motor
Feedback Signals
100 VAC
200 VAC
400 VAC
Encoder Cables
R88M-K
3,000 r/min
2,000 r/min
1,000 r/min
Standard Cables
R88A-CRK@@@@@R-E
Peripheral Devices
Absolute Encoder Battery Cable

R88A-CRGD0R3C (-BS)
External encoder
External
Regeneration
Resistors
R88A-RR
(A battery is included with

model numbers ending in BS).
* Not required if a battery is connected

to the control connector (CN1).
2-3
2-2 How to Read Model

Servo Drive
The Servo Drive model can be identified by the Servo Drive type, applicable Servomotor
capacity, power supply voltage, etc.
R88D-KT01H
Accurax G5 Series Servomotor

Driver Type
T : Pulse/analog type
Capacity
A5 : 50 W
01 : 100 W
02 : 200 W
04 : 400 W
06 : 600 W
08 : 750 W
10 : 1 kW
15 : 1.5 kW
20 : 2 kW
30 : 3 kW
50 : 5 kW
75 : 7.5 kW
150 : 15 kW
Power Supply Voltage
L : 100 VAC
H : 200 VAC
F : 400 VAC
2-4
Servomotor
R88M-K10030H-BOS2
Accurax G5 Series Servomotor
2
Servomotor Capacity
050 : 50 W
100 : 100 W
200 : 200 W
400 : 400 W
600 : 600 W
750 : 750 W
900 : 900 W
1K0 : 1 kW
1K5 : 1.5 kW
2K0 : 2 kW
3K0 : 3 kW
4K0 : 4 kW
4K5 : 4.5 kW
5K0 : 5 kW
6K0 : 6 kW
7K5 : 7.5 kW
11K0 : 11 kW
15K0 : 15 kW
Rated Rotation Speed

10
15
20
30
: 1,000 r/min
: 1,500 r/min
: 2,000 r/min
: 3,000 r/min
Applied Voltage
F
H
L
C
T
S
: 400 VAC (incremental encoder specifications)

: 400 VAC (absolute encoder specifications)
Options
Blank :
B
:
O
:
S2 :
Straight shaft, no key

With brake
With oil seal
Straight, key, tapped
2-5
2-3 Standard Model List

Servo Drive Model List
Specifications
Single-phase 100 VAC
Single-phase/3-phase 200 VAC
3-phase 200 VAC
3-phase 400 VAC
2-6
Model
50 W
R88D-KTA5L
100 W
R88D-KT01L
200 W
R88D-KT02L
400 W
R88D-KT04L
100 W
R88D-KT01H
200 W
R88D-KT02H
400 W
R88D-KT04H
750 W
R88D-KT08H
1 kW
R88D-KT10H
1.5 kW
R88D-KT15H
2 kW
R88D-KT20H
3 kW
R88D-KT30H
5 kW
R88D-KT50H
7.5 kW
R88D-KT75H
15 kW
R88D-KT150H
600 W
R88D-KT06F
1 kW
R88D-KT10F
1.5 kW
R88D-KT15F
2 kW
R88D-KT20F
3 kW
R88D-KT30F
5 kW
R88D-KT50F
7.5 kW
R88D-KT75F
15 kW
R88D-KT150F
Servomotor Model List

3,000-r/min motors
Model
Specifications
With incremental encoder

Straight shaft
without key
50 W
Straight shaft
with key and tap
With absolute encoder

Straight shaft
without key
Straight shaft
with key and tap
R88M-K05030L
R88M-K05030L-S2
R88M-K05030S
R88M-K05030S-S2
100 W R88M-K10030L
R88M-K10030L-S2
R88M-K10030S
R88M-K10030S-S2
200 W R88M-K20030L
R88M-K20030L-S2
R88M-K20030S
R88M-K20030S-S2
400 W R88M-K40030L
R88M-K40030L-S2
R88M-K40030S
R88M-K40030S-S2
50 W
R88M-K05030H
R88M-K05030H-S2
R88M-K05030T
R88M-K05030T-S2
100 W R88M-K10030H
R88M-K10030H-S2
R88M-K10030T
R88M-K10030T-S2
200 W R88M-K20030H
R88M-K20030H-S2
R88M-K20030T
R88M-K20030T-S2
400 W R88M-K40030H
R88M-K40030H-S2
R88M-K40030T
R88M-K40030T-S2
750 W R88M-K75030H
R88M-K75030H-S2
R88M-K75030T
R88M-K75030T-S2
R88M-K1K030H
R88M-K1K030H-S2
R88M-K1K030T
R88M-K1K030T-S2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K530H
R88M-K1K530H-S2
R88M-K1K530T
R88M-K1K530T-S2
2 kW
R88M-K2K030H
R88M-K2K030H-S2
R88M-K2K030T
R88M-K2K030T-S2
3 kW
R88M-K3K030H
R88M-K3K030H-S2
R88M-K3K030T
R88M-K3K030T-S2
4 kW
R88M-K4K030H
R88M-K4K030H-S2
R88M-K4K030T
R88M-K4K030T-S2
5 kW
R88M-K5K030H
R88M-K5K030H-S2
R88M-K5K030T
R88M-K5K030T-S2
750 W R88M-K75030F
R88M-K75030F-S2
R88M-K75030C
R88M-K75030C-S2
1 kW
R88M-K1K030F
R88M-K1K030F-S2
R88M-K1K030C
R88M-K1K030C-S2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K530F
R88M-K1K530F-S2
R88M-K1K530C
R88M-K1K530C-S2
100 V
400 V 2 kW
R88M-K2K030F
R88M-K2K030F-S2
R88M-K2K030C
R88M-K2K030C-S2
3 kW
R88M-K3K030F
R88M-K3K030F-S2
R88M-K3K030C
R88M-K3K030C-S2
4 kW
R88M-K4K030F
R88M-K4K030F-S2
R88M-K4K030C
R88M-K4K030C-S2
5 kW
R88M-K5K030F
R88M-K5K030F-S2
R88M-K5K030C
R88M-K5K030C-S2
Without brakes
200 V 1 kW
2-7
Model
Specifications
Straight shaft
without key
Straight shaft
with key and tap
R88M-K05030L-B
R88M-K05030L-BS2
R88M-K05030S-B
R88M-K05030S-BS2
100 W R88M-K10030L-B
R88M-K10030L-BS2
R88M-K10030S-B
R88M-K10030S-BS2
200 W R88M-K20030L-B
R88M-K20030L-BS2
R88M-K20030S-B
R88M-K20030S-BS2
400 W R88M-K40030L-B
R88M-K40030L-BS2
R88M-K40030S-B
R88M-K40030S-BS2
50 W
R88M-K05030H-B
R88M-K05030H-BS2
R88M-K05030T-B
R88M-K05030T-BS2
100 W R88M-K10030H-B
R88M-K10030H-BS2
R88M-K10030T-B
R88M-K10030T-BS2
200 W R88M-K20030H-B
R88M-K20030H-BS2
R88M-K20030T-B
R88M-K20030T-BS2
400 W R88M-K40030H-B
R88M-K40030H-BS2
R88M-K40030T-B
R88M-K40030T-BS2
750 W R88M-K75030H-B
R88M-K75030H-BS2
R88M-K75030T-B
R88M-K75030T-BS2
R88M-K1K030H-B
R88M-K1K030H-BS2
R88M-K1K030T-B
R88M-K1K030T-BS2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K530H-B
R88M-K1K530H-BS2
R88M-K1K530T-B
R88M-K1K530T-BS2
2 kW
R88M-K2K030H-B
R88M-K2K030H-BS2
R88M-K2K030T-B
R88M-K2K030T-BS2
3 kW
R88M-K3K030H-B
R88M-K3K030H-BS2
R88M-K3K030T-B
R88M-K3K030T-BS2
4 kW
R88M-K4K030H-B
R88M-K4K030H-BS2
R88M-K4K030T-B
R88M-K4K030T-BS2
5 kW
R88M-K5K030H-B
R88M-K5K030H-BS2
R88M-K5K030T-B
R88M-K5K030T-BS2
750 W R88M-K75030F-B
R88M-K75030F-BS2
R88M-K75030C-B
R88M-K75030C-BS2
1 kW
R88M-K1K030F-B
R88M-K1K030F-BS2
R88M-K1K030C-B
R88M-K1K030C-BS2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K530F-B
R88M-K1K530F-BS2
R88M-K1K530C-B
R88M-K1K530C-BS2
50 W
Straight shaft
without key
Straight shaft
with key and tap
100 V
With brakes
200 V 1 kW
400 V 2 kW
R88M-K2K030F-B
R88M-K2K030F-BS2
R88M-K2K030C-B
R88M-K2K030C-BS2
3 kW
R88M-K3K030F-B
R88M-K3K030F-BS2
R88M-K3K030C-B
R88M-K3K030C-BS2
4 kW
R88M-K4K030F-B
R88M-K4K030F-BS2
R88M-K4K030C-B
R88M-K4K030C-BS2
5 kW
R88M-K5K030F-B
R88M-K5K030F-BS2
R88M-K5K030C-B
R88M-K5K030C-BS2
Note. Models with oil seals are also available.
2-8
1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min Motors

Model
Specifications
Straight shaft
without key
Straight shaft
without key
Straight shaft
with key and tap
R88M-K1K020H
R88M-K1K020H-S2
R88M-K1K020T
R88M-K1K020T-S2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K520H
R88M-K1K520H-S2
R88M-K1K520T
R88M-K1K520T-S2
2 kW
R88M-K2K020H
R88M-K2K020H-S2
R88M-K2K020T
R88M-K2K020T-S2
3 kW
R88M-K3K020H
R88M-K3K020H-S2
R88M-K3K020T
R88M-K3K020T-S2
200 V 4 kW
R88M-K4K020H
R88M-K4K020H-S2
R88M-K4K020T
R88M-K4K020T-S2
5 kW
R88M-K5K020H
R88M-K5K020H-S2
R88M-K5K020T
R88M-K5K020T-S2
7.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K7K515T
R88M-K7K515T-S2
11 kW ---
---
R88M-K11K015T
R88M-K11K015T-S2
15 kW ---
---
R88M-K15K015T
R88M-K15K015T-S2
400 W R88M-K40020F
R88M-K40020F-S2
R88M-K40020C
R88M-K40020C-BS2
600 W R88M-K60020F
R88M-K60020F-S2
R88M-K60020C
R88M-K60020C-BS2
1 kW
R88M-K1K020F
R88M-K1K020F-S2
R88M-K1K020C
R88M-K1K020C-S2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K520F
R88M-K1K520F-S2
R88M-K1K520C
R88M-K1K520C-S2
2 kW
R88M-K2K020F
R88M-K2K020F-S2
R88M-K2K020C
R88M-K2K020C-S2
400 V 3 kW
R88M-K3K020F
R88M-K3K020F-S2
R88M-K3K020C
R88M-K3K020C-S2
4 kW
R88M-K4K020F
R88M-K4K020F-S2
R88M-K4K020C
R88M-K4K020C-S2
5 kW
R88M-K5K020F
R88M-K5K020F-S2
R88M-K5K020C
R88M-K5K020C-S2
7.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K7K515C
R88M-K7K515C-S2
11 kW ---
---
R88M-K11K015C
R88M-K11K015C-S2
15 kW ---
---
R88M-K15K015C
R88M-K15K015C-S2
2-9
Without brakes
1 kW
Straight shaft
with key and tap
Model
Specifications
Straight shaft
without key
Straight shaft
with key and tap
R88M-K1K020H-B
R88M-K1K020H-BS2
R88M-K1K020T-B
R88M-K1K020T-BS2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K520H-B
R88M-K1K520H-BS2
R88M-K1K520T-B
R88M-K1K520T-BS2
2 kW
R88M-K2K020H-B
R88M-K2K020H-BS2
R88M-K2K020T-B
R88M-K2K020T-BS2
3 kW
R88M-K3K020H-B
R88M-K3K020H-BS2
R88M-K3K020T-B
R88M-K3K020T-BS2
200 V 4 kW
R88M-K4K020H-B
R88M-K4K020H-BS2
R88M-K4K020T-B
R88M-K4K020T-BS2
5 kW
R88M-K5K020H-B
R88M-K5K020H-BS2
R88M-K5K020T-B
R88M-K5K020T-BS2
7.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K7K515T-B
R88M-K7K515T-BS2
11 kW ---
---
R88M-K11K015T-B
R88M-K11K015T-BS2
15 kW ---
---
R88M-K15K015T-B
R88M-K15K015T-BS2
400 W R88M-K40020F-B
R88M-K40020F-BS2
R88M-K40020C-B
R88M-K40020C-BS2
600 W R88M-K60020F-B
R88M-K60020F-BS2
R88M-K60020C-B
R88M-K60020C-BS2
1 kW
R88M-K1K020F-B
R88M-K1K020F-BS2
R88M-K1K020C-B
R88M-K1K020C-BS2
1.5 kW R88M-K1K520F-B
R88M-K1K520F-BS2
R88M-K1K520C-B
R88M-K1K520C-BS2
2 kW
R88M-K2K020F-B
R88M-K2K020F-BS2
R88M-K2K020C-B
R88M-K2K020C-BS2
400 V 3 kW
R88M-K3K020F-B
R88M-K3K020F-BS2
R88M-K3K020C-B
R88M-K3K020C-BS2
4 kW
R88M-K4K020F-B
R88M-K4K020F-BS2
R88M-K4K020C-B
R88M-K4K020C-BS2
5 kW
R88M-K5K020F-B
R88M-K5K020F-BS2
R88M-K5K020C-B
R88M-K5K020C-BS2
7.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K7K515C-B
R88M-K7K515C-BS2
11 kW ---
---
R88M-K11K015C-B
R88M-K11K015C-BS2
15 kW ---
---
R88M-K15K015C-B
R88M-K15K015C-BS2
1 kW
With brakes

Straight shaft
without key
Note 1. Models with oil seals are also available.

Note 2. The rated rotation speed of Servomotors of 7.5 to 15 kW is 1,500 r/min.
2-10
Straight shaft
with key and tap
1,000-r/min Motors
Model
Specifications
Straight shaft
with key and tap
Straight shaft
without key
Straight shaft
with key and tap
900 W R88M-K90010H
R88M-K90010H-S2
R88M-K90010T
R88M-K90010T-S2
2 kW
R88M-K2K010H
R88M-K2K010H-S2
R88M-K2K010T
R88M-K2K010T-S2
200 V 3 kW
R88M-K3K010H
R88M-K3K010H-S2
R88M-K3K010T
R88M-K3K010T-S2
4.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K4K510T
R88M-K4K510T-S2
6 kW
---
R88M-K6K010T
R88M-K6K010T-S2
900 W R88M-K90010F
R88M-K90010F-S2
R88M-K90010C
R88M-K90010C-S2
2 kW
R88M-K2K010F
R88M-K2K010F-S2
R88M-K2K010C
R88M-K2K010C-S2
400 V 3 kW
R88M-K3K010F
R88M-K3K010F-S2
R88M-K3K010C
R88M-K3K010C-S2
4.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K4K510C
R88M-K4K510C-S2
6 kW
---
R88M-K6K010C
R88M-K6K010C-S2
900 W R88M-K90010H-B
R88M-K90010H-BS2
R88M-K90010T-B
R88M-K90010T-BS2
2 kW
R88M-K2K010H-B
R88M-K2K010H-BS2
R88M-K2K010T-B
R88M-K2K010T-BS2
200 V 3 kW
R88M-K3K010H-B
R88M-K3K010H-BS2
R88M-K3K010T-B
R88M-K3K010T-BS2
4.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K4K510T-B
R88M-K4K510T-BS2
6 kW
---
R88M-K6K010T-B
R88M-K6K010T-BS2
900 W R88M-K90010F-B
R88M-K90010F-BS2
R88M-K90010C-B
R88M-K90010C-BS2
2 kW
R88M-K2K010F-B
R88M-K2K010F-BS2
R88M-K2K010C-B
R88M-K2K010C-BS2
400 V 3 kW
R88M-K3K010F-B
R88M-K3K010F-BS2
R88M-K3K010C-B
R88M-K3K010C-BS2
4.5 kW ---
---
R88M-K4K510C-B
R88M-K4K510C-BS2
6 kW
---
R88M-K6K010C-B
R88M-K6K010C-BS2
---
---
---
---
Note. Models with oil seals are also available.
2-11
With brakes
Without brakes
Straight shaft
without key
Servo Drive and Servomotor Combination List

The tables in this section show the possible combinations of Accurax G5 Servo Drives and
Servomotors. The Servomotors and Servo Drives can only be used in the listed combinations.
-x at the end of the motor model number is for options, such as the shaft type, brake, oil seal
and key.
3,000-r/min Motors and Drivers

Servomotor
Voltage
Single-phase
100 V
Single-phase/
3-phase 100 V
Single-phase/
3-phase 200 V
Rated
output
With incremental
encoder
With absolute
encoder
Servo Drive
50 W
R88M-K05030L-x
R88M-K05030S-x
R88D-KTA5L
100 W
R88M-K10030L-x
R88M-K10030S-x
R88D-KT01L
200 W
R88M-K20030L-x
R88M-K20030S-x
R88D-KT02L
400 W
R88M-K40030L-x
R88M-K40030S-x
R88D-KT04L
50 W
R88M-K05030H-x
R88M-K05030T-x
R88D-KT01H
100 W
R88M-K10030H-x
R88M-K10030T-x
R88D-KT01H
200 W
R88M-K20030H-x
R88M-K20030T-x
R88D-KT02H
400 W
R88M-K40030H-x
R88M-K40030T-x
R88D-KT04H
750 W
R88M-K75030H-x
R88M-K75030T-x
R88D-KT08H
1 kW
R88M-K1K030H-x
R88M-K1K030T-x
R88D-KT15H
1.5 kW
R88M-K1K530H-x
R88M-K1K530T-x
R88D-KT15H
2 kW
R88M-K2K030H-x
R88M-K2K030T-x
R88D-KT20H
3 kW
R88M-K3K030H-x
R88M-K3K030T-x
R88D-KT30H
4 kW
R88M-K4K030H-x
R88M-K4K030T-x
R88D-KT50H
5 kW
R88M-K5K030H-x
R88M-K5K030T-x
R88D-KT50H
750 W
R88M-K75030F-x
R88M-K75030C-x
R88D-KT10F
1 kW
R88M-K1K030F-x
R88M-K1K030C-x
R88D-KT15F
1.5 kW
R88M-K1K530F-x
R88M-K1K530C-x
R88D-KT15F
2 kW
R88M-K2K030F-x
R88M-K2K030C-x
R88D-KT20F
3 kW
R88M-K3K030F-x
R88M-K3K030C-x
R88D-KT30F
4 kW
R88M-K4K030F-x
R88M-K4K030C-x
R88D-KT50F
5 kW
R88M-K5K030F-x
R88M-K5K030C-x
R88D-KT50F
3-phase 200 V
3-phase 400 V
2-12
1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min Motors and Drivers

Servomotor
Voltage
Single-phase/
3-phase 200 V
3-phase 200 V
With incremental
encoder
With absolute
encoder
Servo Drive
1 kW
R88M-K1K020H-x
R88M-K1K020T-x
R88D-KT10H
1.5 kW
R88M-K1K520H-x
R88M-K1K520T-x
R88D-KT15H
2 kW
R88M-K2K020H-x
R88M-K2K020T-x
R88D-KT20H
3 kW
R88M-K3K020H-x
R88M-K3K020T-x
R88D-KT30H
4 kW
R88M-K4K020H-x
R88M-K4K020T-x
R88D-KT50H*
5 kW
R88M-K5K020H-x
R88M-K5K020T-x
R88D-KT50H
7.5 kW
---
R88M-K7K515T-x
R88D-KT75H
11 kW
---
R88M-K11K015T-x
R88D-KT150H*
15 kW
---
R88M-K15K015T-x
R88D-KT150H
400 W
R88M-K40020F-x
R88M-K40020C-x
R88D-KT06F*
600 W
R88M-K60020F-x
R88M-K60020C-x
R88D-KT06F
1 kW
R88M-K1K020F-x
R88M-K1K020C-x
R88D-KT10F
1.5 kW
R88M-K1K520F-x
R88M-K1K520C-x
R88D-KT15F
2 kW
R88M-K2K020F-x
R88M-K2K020C-x
R88D-KT20F
3 kW
R88M-K3K020F-x
R88M-K3K020C-x
R88D-KT30F
4 kW
R88M-K4K020F-x
R88M-K4K020C-x
R88D-KT50F*
5 kW
R88M-K5K020F-x
R88M-K5K020C-x
R88D-KT50F
7.5 kW
---
R88M-K7K515C-x
R88D-KT75F
11 kW
---
R88M-K11K015C-x
R88D-KT150F*
15 kW
---
R88M-K15K015C-x
R88D-KT150F
* Use these combination with caution beacuse the Servo Drive and Servomotor have different capacities.
2-13
3-phase 400 V
Rated
output
1,000-r/min Motors and Drivers

Servomotor
Voltage
Rated
output
Singlephase/3900 W
phase 200 V
3-phase
200 V
3-phase
400 V
With incremental
encoder
Servo Drive
R88M-K90010H-x
R88M-K90010T-x
R88D-KT15H*
2 kW
R88M-K2K010H-x
R88M-K2K010T-x
R88D-KT30H*
3 kW
R88M-K3K010H-x
R88M-K3K010T-x
R88D-KT50H*
4.5 kW
---
R88M-K4K510T-x
R88D-KT50H*
6 kW
---
R88M-K6K010T-x
R88D-KT75H*
900 W
R88M-K90010F-x
R88M-K90010C-x
R88D-KT15F*
2 kW
R88M-K2K010F-x
R88M-K2K010C-x
R88D-KT30F*
3 kW
R88M-K3K010F-x
R88M-K3K010C-x
R88D-KT50F*
4.5 kW
---
R88M-K4K510C-x
R88D-KT50F*
6 kW
---
R88M-K6K010C-x
R88D-KT75F*
* Use these combination with caution beacuse the Servo Drive and Servomotor have different capacities.
2-14
Peripheral Equipment and Cable Model List

Encoder Cables (European Flexible Cables)
Specifications
[100 V and 200 V]
For 3,000-r/min motors of 50 to 750 W
(for both absolute encoders and incremental encoders)
[400 V]
For 3,000-r/min motors
1.5 m
R88A-CRKA001-5CR-E
3m
R88A-CRKA003CR-E
5m
R88A-CRKA005CR-E
10 m
R88A-CRKA010CR-E
15 m
R88A-CRKA015CR-E
20 m
R88A-CRKA020CR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CRKC001-5NR-E
3m
R88A-CRKC003NR-E
5m
R88A-CRKC005NR-E
10 m
R88A-CRKC010NR-E
15 m
R88A-CRKC015NR-E
20 m
R88A-CRKC020NR-E
2-15
[100 V and 200 V]

3,000-r/min motors of 1.0 kW or more
Model
Motor Power Cables (European Flexible Cables)

Model
Specifications
For motor without brake
[100 V and 200 V]
[200 V]
For 3,000-r/min motors of 1 to 2 kW
For 1,000-r/min motors of 900 W
[400 V]
For 3,000-r/min motors of 750 W to 2
kW
For 2,000-r/min motors of 400 W to 2
kW
[200 V and 400 V]

[200 V and 400 V]

For 1,500-r/min motors of 7.5 kW
For 1,000-r/min motors of 6 kW
[200 V and 400 V]

(1)Note:
2-16
For motor with brake
1.5 m
R88A-CAKA001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKA003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKA005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKA010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKA015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKA020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB001-5SR-E
R88A-CAGB001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB003SR-E
R88A-CAGB003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB005SR-E
R88A-CAGB005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB010SR-E
R88A-CAGB010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB015SR-E
R88A-CAGB015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGB020SR-E
R88A-CAGB020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB001-5SR-E
R88A-CAKF001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB003SR-E
R88A-CAKF003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB005SR-E
R88A-CAKF005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB010SR-E
R88A-CAKF010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB015SR-E
R88A-CAKF015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGB020SR-E
R88A-CAKF020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGD001-5SR-E
R88A-CAGD001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGD003SR-E
R88A-CAGD003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGD005SR-E
R88A-CAGD005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGD010SR-E
R88A-CAGD010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGD015SR-E
R88A-CAGD015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGD020SR-E
R88A-CAGD020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKE001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKE003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKE005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKE010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKE015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKE020SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKG001-5SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKG003SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKG005SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKG010SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKG015SR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKG020SR-E
It requires both, the

power cable R88ACAKAxxxSR-E and the
separate brake cable
R88A-CAKAxxxBR-E (1)
For the separate brake cable selection, see brake cables table in page 2-17
Brake Cables (European Flexible Cables)

Specifications
[100 V and 200 V]
[400 V]
For 1,500-r/min motors of 7.5 kW to 15 kW
Model
R88A-CAKA001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAKA003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAKA005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKA010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKA015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAKA020BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGE001-5BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGE003BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGE005BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGE010BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGE015BR-E
20 m
R88A-CAGE020BR-E
Encoder Cables (Japanese Non-Flexible Cables)

Specifications
[100 V and 200 V]
[100 V and 200 V]

[400 V]
Model
3m
R88A-CRKA003C
5m
R88A-CRKA005C
10 m
R88A-CRKA010C
15 m
R88A-CRKA015C
20 m
R88A-CRKA020C
30 m
R88A-CRKA030C
40 m
R88A-CRKA040C
50 m
R88A-CRKA050C
3m
R88A-CRKC003N
5m
R88A-CRKC005N
10 m
R88A-CRKC010N
15 m
R88A-CRKC015N
20 m
R88A-CRKC020N
30 m
R88A-CRKC030N
40 m
R88A-CRKC040N
50 m
R88A-CRKC050N
2-17
1.5 m
Motor Power Cables (Japanese Non-Flexible Cables)

Model
Specifications
For motor without brake
[100 V and 200 V]
[200 V]
[400 V]
For 3,000-r/min motors of 750 W to 2 kW
[400 V]
[400 V]
For 2,000-r/min motors of 7.5 kW
2-18
3m
R88A-CAKA003S
5m
R88A-CAKA005S
10 m
R88A-CAKA010S
15 m
R88A-CAKA015S
20 m
R88A-CAKA020S
30 m
R88A-CAKA030S
40 m
R88A-CAKA040S
50 m
R88A-CAKA050S
3m
R88A-CAGB003S
R88A-CAGB003B
5m
R88A-CAGB005S
R88A-CAGB005B
10 m
R88A-CAGB010S
R88A-CAGB010B
15 m
R88A-CAGB015S
R88A-CAGB015B
20 m
R88A-CAGB020S
R88A-CAGB020B
30 m
R88A-CAGB030S
R88A-CAGB030B
40 m
R88A-CAGB040S
R88A-CAGB040B
50 m
R88A-CAGB050S
R88A-CAGB050B
3m
R88A-CAGB003S
R88A-CAKF003B
5m
R88A-CAGB005S
R88A-CAKF005B
10 m
R88A-CAGB010S
R88A-CAKF010B
15 m
R88A-CAGB015S
R88A-CAKF015B
20 m
R88A-CAGB020S
R88A-CAKF020B
30 m
R88A-CAGB030S
R88A-CAKF030B
40 m
R88A-CAGB040S
R88A-CAKF040B
50 m
R88A-CAGB050S
R88A-CAKF050B
3m
R88A-CAGD003S
R88A-CAGD003B
5m
R88A-CAGD005S
R88A-CAGD005B
10 m
R88A-CAGD010S
R88A-CAGD010B
15 m
R88A-CAGD015S
R88A-CAGD015B
20 m
R88A-CAGD020S
R88A-CAGD020B
30 m
R88A-CAGD030S
R88A-CAGD030B
40 m
R88A-CAGD040S
R88A-CAGD040B
50 m
R88A-CAGD050S
R88A-CAGD050B
3m
R88A-CAGE003S
5m
R88A-CAGE005S
10 m
R88A-CAGE010S
15 m
R88A-CAGE015S
20 m
R88A-CAGE020S
30 m
R88A-CAGE030S
40 m
R88A-CAGE040S
50 m
R88A-CAGE050S
It requires both, the power

cable R88A-CAKAxxxS
and the separate brake
cable R88A-CAKAxxxB (1)
(1)Note:
Brake Cables (Japanese Non-Flexible Cables)

Specifications
[100 V and 200 V]
3m
R88A-CAKA003B
5m
R88A-CAKA005B
10 m
R88A-CAKA010B
15 m
R88A-CAKA015B
20 m
R88A-CAKA020B
30 m
R88A-CAKA030B
40 m
R88A-CAKA040B
50 m
R88A-CAKA050B
3m
R88A-CAGE003B
5m
R88A-CAGE005B
10 m
R88A-CAGE010B
15 m
R88A-CAGE015B
20 m
R88A-CAGE020B
30 m
R88A-CAGE030B
40 m
R88A-CAGE040B
50 m
R88A-CAGE050B
Encoder Cables (Japanese Flexible Cables)

Specifications
[100 V and 200 V]
[100 V and 200 V]

[400 V]
Model
3m
R88A-CRKA003CR
5m
R88A-CRKA005CR
10 m
R88A-CRKA010CR
15 m
R88A-CRKA015CR
20 m
R88A-CRKA020CR
30 m
R88A-CRKA030CR
40 m
R88A-CRKA040CR
50 m
R88A-CRKA050CR
3m
R88A-CRKC003NR
5m
R88A-CRKC005NR
10 m
R88A-CRKC010NR
15 m
R88A-CRKC015NR
20 m
R88A-CRKC020NR
30 m
R88A-CRKC030NR
40 m
R88A-CRKC040NR
50 m
R88A-CRKC050NR
2-19
For 2,000-r/min motors of 7.5 to 15 kW

Model
Motor Power Cables (Japanese Flexible Cables)

Model
Specifications
[100 V and 200 V]

[200 V]
[400 V]
[400 V]
(1)Note:
2-20
For motor without

brake
3m
R88A-CAKA003SR
5m
R88A-CAKA005SR
10 m
R88A-CAKA010SR
15 m
R88A-CAKA015SR
20 m
R88A-CAKA020SR
30 m
R88A-CAKA030SR
40 m
R88A-CAKA040SR
50 m
R88A-CAKA050SR
3m
R88A-CAGB003SR
R88A-CAGB003BR
5m
R88A-CAGB005SR
R88A-CAGB005BR
10 m
R88A-CAGB010SR
R88A-CAGB010BR
15 m
R88A-CAGB015SR
R88A-CAGB015BR
20 m
R88A-CAGB020SR
R88A-CAGB020BR
30 m
R88A-CAGB030SR
R88A-CAGB030BR
40 m
R88A-CAGB040SR
R88A-CAGB040BR
50 m
R88A-CAGB050SR
R88A-CAGB050BR
3m
R88A-CAGB003SR
R88A-CAKF003BR
5m
R88A-CAGB005SR
R88A-CAKF005BR
10 m
R88A-CAGB010SR
R88A-CAKF010BR
15 m
R88A-CAGB015SR
R88A-CAKF015BR
20 m
R88A-CAGB020SR
R88A-CAKF020BR
30 m
R88A-CAGB030SR
R88A-CAKF030BR
40 m
R88A-CAGB040SR
R88A-CAKF040BR
50 m
R88A-CAGB050SR
R88A-CAKF050BR
3m
R88A-CAGD003SR
R88A-CAGD003BR
5m
R88A-CAGD005SR
R88A-CAGD005BR
10 m
R88A-CAGD010SR
R88A-CAGD010BR
15 m
R88A-CAGD015SR
R88A-CAGD015BR
20 m
R88A-CAGD020SR
R88A-CAGD020BR
30 m
R88A-CAGD030SR
R88A-CAGD030BR
40 m
R88A-CAGD040SR
R88A-CAGD040BR
50 m
R88A-CAGD050SR
R88A-CAGD050BR
It requires both, the

power cable R88ACAKAxxxSR and the
separate brake cable
R88A-CAKAxxxBR (1)
Brake Cables (Japanese Flexible Cables)

Specifications
[100 V and 200 V]
Model
3m
R88A-CAKA003BR
5m
R88A-CAKA005BR
10 m
R88A-CAKA010BR
15 m
R88A-CAKA015BR
20 m
R88A-CAKA020BR
30 m
R88A-CAKA030BR
40 m
R88A-CAKA040BR
50 m
R88A-CAKA050BR
Specifications
Model
ABS battery cable (battery not supplied)
0.3 m
R88A-CRGD0R3C
ABS battery cable (R88A-BAT01G battery 1 supplied)
0.3 m
R88A-CRGD0R3C-BS
Analog Monitor Cable

Specifications
Analog monitor cable
Model
1m
R88A-CMK001S
Absolute Encoder Backup Battery

Specifications
2,000 mAh 3.6 V
Model
R88A-BAT01G
2-21
Absolute Encoder Battery Cables
Connectors
Specifications
Motor connector for encoder cable
2-22
Model
[100 V and 200 V]

For 3,000-r/min of 50 to 750 W
R88A-CNK02R
[100 V and 200 V]

For 3,000-r/min of 1 to 5 kW
For 2,000 r/min, 1,000 r/min
[400 V]
For 3,000 r/min, 2,000 r/min and
1,000 r/min
R88A-CNK04R
Control I/O connector (CN1)
R88A-CNU11C
Encoder connector (CN2)
R88A-CNW01R
External encoder connector (CN4)
R88A-CNK41L
Safety connector (CN8)
R88A-CNK81S
Power cable connector (for 750 W max.)
R88A-CNK11A
Brake cable connector (for 750 W max.)
R88A-CNK11B
Servo Relay Units (for CN1)

Specifications
Servo Relay Unit
Model
For CS1W-NC113/-NC133
For CJ1W-NC113/-NC133
For C200HW-NC113
XW2B-20J6-1B
For CS1W-NC213/-NC413/-NC233/-NC433
For CJ1W-NC213/-NC413/-NC233/-NC433
For C200HW-NC213/-NC413
XW2B-40J6-2B
For CJ1M-CPU21/-CPU22/-CPU23
XW2B-20J6-8A
XW2B-40J6-9A
For CQM1-CPU43-V1
For CQM1H-PLB21
XW2B-20J6-3B
Servo Relay Unit Cables for Servo Drives
Servo Drive cables
Model
For CS1W-NC113/-NC133, CJ1W-NC113/NC133, C200HW-NC113 (XW2B-20J6-1B)

For CS1W-NC213/-NC413/-NC233/-NC433,
CJ1W-NC213/-NC413/-NC233/-NC433,
C200HW-NC213/-NC413 (XW2B-40J6-2B)
For CQM1-CPU43-V1 or CQM1H-PLB21
(XW2B-20J6-3B)
1m
For CJM1-CPU21/-CPU22/-CPU23
(XW2B-20J6-8A/XW2B-40J6-9A)
1m
XW2Z-100J-B31
2m
XW2Z-200J-B31
Specifications
XW2Z-100J-B25
XW2Z-200J-B25
2m
2-23
Servo Relay Unit Cables for Position Control Units

Specifications
For CQM1H-PLB21 (XW2B-20J6-3B)
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A3
1m
XW2Z-100J-A3
For CS1W-NC113, C200HW-NC113 (XW2B20J6-1B)
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A6
1m
XW2Z-100J-A6
For CS1W-NC213/-NC413, C200HW-NC213/NC413 (XW2B-20J6-2B)
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A7
1m
XW2Z-100J-A7
For CS1W-NC133 (XW2B-20J6-1B)
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A10
1m
XW2Z-100J-A10
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A11
1m
XW2Z-100J-A11
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A14
1m
XW2Z-100J-A14
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A15
1m
XW2Z-100J-A15
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A18
1m
XW2Z-100J-A18
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A19
1m
XW2Z-100J-A19
0.5 m
XW2Z-050J-A33
1m
XW2Z-100J-A33
For CS1W-NC233/-NC433 (XW2B-20J6-2B)

cables
For CJ1W-NC113 (XW2B-20J6-1B)
For CJ1W-NC213/-NC413 (XW2B-20J6-2B)
For CJ1W-NC133 (XW2B-20J6-1B)
For CJ1W-NC233/-NC433 (XW2B-20J6-2B)
For CJ1M-CPU21/-CPU22/-CPU23 (XW2B20J6-8A/XW2B-40J6-9A)
2-24
Model
Control Cables
Specifications
Model
Specified cables for Position Control Unit

(line-driver output for 1 axis)
CJ1W-NC234/-NC434
XW2Z-100J-G9
5m
XW2Z-500J-G9
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G9

(open collector output for 1 axis)
CJ1W-NC214/-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G13
3m
XW2Z-300J-G13

(line-driver output for 2 axes)
CJ1W-NC234/-NC434
1m
XW2Z-100J-G13
5m
XW2Z-500J-G1
10 m
XW2Z-10MJ-G1

(open collector output for 2 axes)
CJ1W-NC214/-NC414
1m
XW2Z-100J-G5
3m
XW2Z-300J-G5
Specified cables for Motion Control Unit (for 1 axis)

CS1W-MC221-V1/-MC421-V1
1m
R88A-CPG001M1
2m
R88A-CPG002M1
3m
R88A-CPG003M1
5m
R88A-CPG005M1
1m
R88A-CPG001M2
2m
R88A-CPG002M2
3m
R88A-CPG003M2
5m
R88A-CPG005M2
1m
R88A-CPG001S
2m
R88A-CPG002S
1m
XW2Z-100J-B24
2m
XW2Z-200J-B24
Specified cables for Motion Control Unit (for 2 axes)

CS1W-MC221-V1/-MC421-V1
General control cables (with connector on one end)
Connector-terminal block cables
Connector-terminal block
M3 screw and for pin

terminals
XW2B-50G4
M3.5 screw and for fork/

round terminals
XW2B-50G5
M3 screw and for fork/round

terminals
XW2D-50G6
External Regeneration Resistors

Specifications
Model
Regeneration process capacity: 20 W, 50 (with 150C thermal sensor)
R88A-RR08050S
R88A-RR080100S
R88A-RR22047S
R88A-RR50020S
2-25
1m
Mounting Brackets (L-Brackets for Rack Mounting)

Specifications
R88D-KTA5L/-KT01L/-KT01H/-KT02H
R88A-TK01K
R88D-KT02L/-KT04H
R88A-TK02K
R88D-KT04L/-KT08H
R88A-TK03K
R88D-KT10H/-KT15H/-KT06F/-KT10F/-KT15F
R88A-TK04K
2-26
Model
2-4 External and Mounting Dimensions

Servo Drive Dimensions
Single-phase 100 VAC: R88D-KTA5L/-KT01L (50 to 100 W)
Single-phase/3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT01H/-KT02H (100 to 200 W)
Wall Mounting
External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
70
40
130
1400.5
(150)
6
280.5
(40)
2-27
150
5.2
Front Mounting (Using Front Mounting Brackets)

External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
130
70
40
19.5
2.5
7
5.2
5.2
1700.5
180
170
150
2
Square hole
R26
5.2
2.5
2-28
(40)
Single-phase/3-phase 100 VAC: R88D-KT02L (200 W)

Single-phase/3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT04H (400 W)
Wall Mounting
External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
70
55
130
5.2
1400.5
(150)
150
430.5
(55)

External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
70
55
130
19.5
47
2.5
5.2
150
170
180
1700.5
5.2
Square hole
R2.6
5.2
2.5
2-29
Single-phase/3-phase 100 VAC: R88D-KT04L (400 W)

Single-phase/3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT08H (800 W)
Wall Mounting
External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
70
65
170
4
5.2
1400.5
(150)
7.5
500.5
(65)

External dimensions
170
19.5
40
20
5.2
200.5
1700.5
R2.6
2.5
20
40
2-30
5.2
2.5
180
5.2
Mounting dimensions
70
65
150
170
150
Square hole
Single-phase/3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT10H/-KT15H (900 W to 1.5 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
70
170
4
1400.5
5.2
150
(150)
85
(85)
700.5
8.5
External dimensions
70
170
19.5
R2.6
10
5.2
40
5.2
R2.6
5.2
2.5
1700.5
5.2
150
170
180
5.2
10
(86)
85
60
40
Mounting dimensions
2.5
Square hole
10
400.5
2-31
3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT20H (2 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
(86)
85
17.5
70
50
42.5
5.2
R2.6
193.5
5.2
5.2
R2.6
R2.6
5.2
42.5
17.5
198
188
168
R2.6
5.2
5.2
50
Mounting dimensions
(168)
17.5
2-32
5.2
1880.5
250.5
500.5
(86)
3.5

External dimensions
(86)
85
17.5
193.5
70
50
42.5
5.2
R2.6
5.2
5.2
30.7
R2.6
2.5
5.2
42.5
17.5
198
R2.6
5.2
5.2
R2.6
188
168
2.5
50
Mounting dimensions
Square hole
17.5
5.2
1880.5
250.5
500.5
2-33
3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT30H/-KT50H (3 kW to 5 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
70
130
15
212
100
R2.6
65
5.2
5.2
5.2
R2.6
5.2
65
5.2
5.2
R2.6
15
250
240
220
R2.6
100
Mounting dimensions
6-M4
(220)
2400.5
500.5
15
1000.5
130
2-34

External dimensions
5.2
5.2
65
5.2
R2.6
70
130
100
15
212
40.7
2.5
R2.6
15
250
R2.6
5.2
5.2
5.2
65
R2.6
240
220
2.5
100
Mounting dimensions
Square hole
15
2400.5
6-M4
500.5
1000.5
130
2-35
3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT75H (7.5 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
233
90
71
90
5.2
R2.6
210
R2.6
90
3.5
11
5.2
70
334
R2.6
220
R2.6
235
210
R2.6 5.2
26
250
90
2.5
R2.6
5.2
90
90
11
26
71
Mounting dimensions
10-M4
235
220
45
27
180
233
2-36

External dimensions
233
90
71
90
90
26
210
5.2
R2.6
R2.6
R2.6 5.2
70
11
334
2.5
5.2
R2.6
210
90
R2.6
5.2
90
90
R2.6
235
250
220
2.5
11
26
71
Mounting dimensions
(227)*
Rectangular
hole
27.8
235
10-M4
45
180
(235)*
* Rectangular hole dimensions are reference values.
2-37
3-phase 200 VAC: R88D-KT150H (15 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
261
231
31
R3.5
31
70
270 (for Analog/pulse model)

271 (for EtherCAT model)
7.5
R3.5
450
435
231
Mounting dimensions
261
200
30.5
435
450
4-M6
2-38
3-phase 400 VAC: R88D-KT06F/-KT10F/-KT15F (600 W to 1.5 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
70
170
4
91
5.2
150
(150)
1400.5
700.5

External dimensions
19.5
5.2
Square hole
R2.6
5.2
10
5.2
5.2
2.5
150
170
180
5.2
170
70
2.5
1700.5
10
(92)
91
60
40
Mounting dimensions
400.5
40
2-39
14.5
3-phase 400 VAC: R88D-KT20F (2 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
94
85
17.5
50
5.2
42.5
5.2
70
193.5
1.5
5.2
250.5
5.2
1880.5
(168)
198
188
R2.6
R2.6
5.2 5.2
5.2
17.5
500.5
(94)
50

External dimensions
Mounting dimensions
94
70
85
193.5
50
5.2
30.7
2.5
198
5.2
250.5
Square hole
R2.6
R2.6
5.2 5.2
5.2
17.5
2-40
2.5
50
500.5
5.2
1880.5
42.5
5.2
188
17.5
168
168
3-phase 400 VAC: R88D-KT30F/-KT50F (3 kW to 5 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
130
100
15
212
70
5.2
5.2
65
5.2
Mounting dimensions
500.5
5.2
2400.5
(220)
250
240
220
15
5.2
5.2
5.2
65
15
1000.5
(130)
R2.6
100

External dimensions
130
100
5.2
5.2
65
5.2
212
70
500.5
40.7
2.5
250
240
220
Square hole
R2.6
15
5.2
5.2
5.2
65
15
5.2
R2.6
2400.5
15
Mounting dimensions
1000.5
2.5
100
2-41
R2.6
3-phase 400 VAC: R88D-KT75F (7.5 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
233
90
71
90
90
210
R2.6 5.2
R2.6
5.2
R2.6
210
26
3.5
11
5.2
70
334
R2.6
R2.6
90
235
250
220
2.5
R2.6
5.2
90
90
11
26
71
Mounting dimensions
10-M4
235
220
45
27
180
233
2-42

External dimensions
233
90
71
90
90
26
210
5.2
R2.6
R2.6
R2.6 5.2
70
11
334
2.5
5.2
R2.6
210
90
R2.6
5.2
90
90
R2.6
235
250
220
2.5
11
26
71
Mounting dimensions
(227)*
Rectangular
hole
27.8
235
10-M4
45
180
(235)*
* Rectangular hole dimensions are reference values.
2-43
3-phase 400 VAC: R88D-KT150F (15 kW)

Wall Mounting
External dimensions
261
231
31
R3.5
31
70
270 (for Analog/pulse model)

271 (for EtherCAT model)
7.5
R3.5
450
435
231
Mounting dimensions
261
200
30.5
435
450
4-M6
2-44
Servomotor Dimensions
3,000-r/min Motors (100 V and 200 V)
50 W/100 W (without Brake)
R88M-K05030x (-S2)/-K10030x (-S2)
INC
R88M-K05030x (-S2)/-K10030x (-S2)
ABS
Encoder connector
Motor connector
LL
4040
25
(Shaft end specifications with key and tap)
LM
25
6
6.2
8h6
30h7
1.5 min.
3h9
(Key groove P9)
M3 (depth 6)
46
0.
2
R4.2
24.3
Boss insertion position

(only for the ones with oil seal)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
LN
R88M-K05030x
72
48
23
R88M-K10030x
92
68
43
Note. Models with a key and tap are indicated with S2 at the end of the model number.
2-45
2
LN
14
12.5
3
R3.7
50 W/100 W (with Brake)

R88M-K05030x-B (S2)/-K10030x-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K05030x-B (S2)/-K10030x-B (S2)
ABS
Encoder connector
Brake connector
Motor connector
25
LL
4040
LM
25
3
14
12.5
3
8h6
30h7
LN
6.2
R3.7
46
0.
1.5 min.
2
R4.2
24.3
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
LN
R88M-K05030x-Bx
102
78
23
R88M-K10030x-Bx
122
98
43
2-46
3h9
(Key groove P9)
M3 (depth 6)

R88M-K20030x (-S2)/-K40030x (-S2)
INC
R88M-K20030x (-S2)/-K40030x (-S2)
ABS
6060
30
LM
44.5
Sh6
30 20 (200 W)
25 (400 W)
50h7
0.2
70
18 (200 W)
22.5 (400 W)
4 (200 W)
5 (400 W)
6.5
4h9 (200 W)
5h9 (400 W)
(Key groove P9)
8.5
11
Encoder connector
Motor connector
LL
M4, depth 8 (200 W)

M5, depth 10 (400 W)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
R88M-K20030x
79.5
56.5
11
R88M-K40030x
99
76
14

R88M-K20030x-B (S2)/-K40030x-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K20030x-B (S2)/-K40030x-B (S2)
ABS
Encoder connector
Brake connector
Motor connector
30
6.5
6060
44.5
Sh6
30 20 (200 W)
25 (400 W)
8.5
11
50h7
0.2
70
18 (200 W)
22.5 (400 W)
4 (200 W)
5 (400 W)
LL
LM
4h9 (200 W)
5h9 (400 W)
(Key groove P9)
M4, depth 8 (200 W)
M5, depth 10 (400 W)
1.5 min.
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
R88M-K20030x-Bx
116
93
11
R88M-K40030x-Bx
135.5
112.5
14
2-47
1.5 min.
750 W (without Brake)

R88M-K75030H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K75030T (-S2)
ABS
Encoder connector
Motor connector
112.2
35
86.2
8080
8
46
0.2
0
9
35
25
22
6h9
15.5
70h7
19h6
M5 (depth 10)
750 W (with Brake)

R88M-K75030H-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K75030T-B (S2)
ABS
Encoder connector
Brake connector
Motor connector
35
148.2
122.2
8080
8
35
25
22
6h9
15.5
19h6
70h7
46
0.2
0
9
2-48
M5 (depth 10)
1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW (without Brake)

R88M-K1K030H (-S2)/-K1K530H (-S2)/-K2K030H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K1K030T (-S2)/-K1K530T (-S2)/-K2K030T (-S2)
ABS
1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW (with Brake)

R88M-K1K030H-B (S2)/-K1K530H-B (S2)/-K2K030H-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K1K030T-B (S2)/-K1K530T-B (S2)/-K2K030T-B (S2)
ABS
Motor and brake

connector
Encoder connector
LL
55
LM
KB2
KB1
100100
55
6h9
M5 (depth 12)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K1K030x
141
97
66
119
R88M-K1K530x
159.5
115.5
84.5
137.5
R88M-K2K030x
178.5
134.5
103.5
156.5
R88M-K1K030x-Bx
168
124
66
146
R88M-K1K530x-Bx
186.5
142.5
84.5
164.5
R88M-K2K030x-Bx
205.5
161.5
103.5
183.5
2-49
11
M3, through
15.5
42
13
19h6
60
19h6
49
95h7
95h7
101
10
45
3 kW (without Brake)
R88M-K3K030H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K3K030T (-S2)
ABS
3 kW (with Brake)
R88M-K3K030H-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K3K030T-B (S2)
ABS
55
LM
KB2
112
120120
55
45
14
M3, through
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB2
R88M-K3K030x
190
146
168
R88M-K3K030x-Bx
215
171
193
2-50
8h9
7
22h6
60
2
16
18
41
49
110h7
113
12
22h6
Encoder connector
LL
110h7
Motor and brake

connector
M5 (depth 12)
4 kW/5 kW (without Brake)

R88M-K4K030H (-S2)/-K5K030H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K4K030T (-S2)/-K5K030T (-S2)
ABS
4 kW/5 kW (with Brake)

R88M-K4K030H-B (S2)/-K5K030H-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K4K030T-B (S2)/-K5K030T-B (S2)
ABS
LL
65
LM
KB2
KB1
65
6
55
16
M3, through
8h9
M8 (depth 20)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K4K030x
208
164
127
186
R88M-K5K030x
243
199
162
221
R88M-K4K030x-Bx
233
189
127
211
R88M-K5K030x-Bx
268
224
162
246
2-51
24h6
110h7
118
60
5
14
51
49
20
12
24h6
Encoder connector
130130
110h7
Motor and brake

connector
3,000-r/min Motors (400 V)

750 W/1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW (without Brake)
R88M-K75030F (-S2)/-K1K030F (-S2)/-K1K530F (-S2)/-K2K030F (-S2)
R88M-K75030C (-S2)/-K1K030C (-S2)/-K1K530C (-S2)/-K2K030C (-S2)
INC
ABS
750 W/1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW (with Brake)

R88M-K75030F-B (S2)/-K1K030F-B (S2)/-K1K530F-B (S2)/-K2K030F-B (S2)
R88M-K75030C-B (S2)/-K1K030C-B (S2)/-K1K530C-B (S2)/-K2K030C-B (S2)
Motor and brake
connector
100100
55
45
M3, through
11
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K75030x
131.5
87.5
56.5
109.5
R88M-K1K030x
141
97
66
119
R88M-K1K530x
159.5
115.5
84.5
137.5
R88M-K2K030x
178.5
134.5
103.5
156.5
R88M-K75030x-Bx
158.5
114.5
53.5
136.5
R88M-K1K030x-Bx
168
124
63
146
R88M-K1K530x-Bx
186.5
142.5
81.5
164.5
R88M-K2K030x-Bx
205.5
161.5
100.5
183.5
6h9
6
42
13
19h6
19h6
49
15.5
95h7
10
2-52
ABS
55
LM
KB2
KB1
60
101 (without brake)

103 (with brake)
Encoder connector
LL
95h7
INC
M5 (depth 12)
R88M-K3K030F (-S2)
INC
R88M-K3K030C (-S2)
ABS
3 kW (with Brake)
R88M-K3K030F-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K3K030C-B (S2)
ABS
55
LM
KB2
112
120120

55
8h9
M5 (depth 12)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB2
R88M-K3K030x
190
146
168
R88M-K3K030x-Bx
215
171
193
2-53
14
M3, through
22h6
60
2
16
18
41
4-9
22h6
113
12
45
110h7
Encoder connector
LL
110h7
Motor and brake

connector

R88M-K4K030F (-S2)/-K5K030F (-S2)
INC
R88M-K4K030C (-S2)/-K5K030C (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K4K030F-B (S2)/-K5K030F-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K4K030C-B (S2)/-K5K030C-B (S2)
ABS
130130
65
6
55
24h6
110h7
60
5
14
16
M3, through
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K4K030x
208
164
127
186
R88M-K5K030x
243
199
162
221
R88M-K4K030x-Bx
233
189
127
211
R88M-K5K030x-Bx
268
224
162
246
2-54
8h9
7
51
49
20
12
24h6
Encoder connector
65
118
LL
LM
KB2
KB1
110h7
Motor and brake

connector
M8 (depth 20)
1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min Motors (200 V)

1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW/3 kW (without Brake)
R88M-K1K020H (-S2)/-K1K520H (-S2)/-K2K020H (-S2)/-K3K020H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K1K020T (-S2)/-K1K520T (-S2)/-K2K020T (-S2)/-K3K020T (-S2)
ABS
1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW/3 kW (with Brake)

R88M-K1K020H-B (S2)/-K1K520H-B (S2)/-K2K020H-B (S2)/-K3K020H-B (S2)
R88M-K1K020T-B (S2)-K1K520T-B (S2)/-K2K020T-B (S2)/-K3K020T-B (S2)
2
LR
LR
130130
45 (1.0 to 2.0 kW)

55 (3.0 kW)
41 (1.0 to 2.0 kW)
51 (3.0 kW)
M3, through
Sh6
14
110h7
60
Sh6
49
5
16
8h9
7
LM
KB2
KB1
12
18 (1.0 to 2.0 kW)

20 (3.0 kW)
LL
M5, depth 12 (1.0 to 2.0 kW)

M8, depth 20 (3.0 kW)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K1K020x
138
55
94
22
60
116
R88M-K1K520x
155.5
55
111.5
22
77.5
133.5
R88M-K2K020x
173
55
129
22
95
151
R88M-K3K020x
208
65
164
24
127
186
R88M-K1K020x-Bx
163
55
119
22
60
141
R88M-K1K520x-Bx
180.5
55
136.5
22
77.5
158.5
R88M-K2K020x-Bx
198
55
154
22
95
176
R88M-K3K020x-Bx
233
65
189
24
127
211
2-55
116 (1.0 to 2.0 kW)

118 (3.0 kW)
Encoder connector
ABS
110h7
Motor and brake

connector
INC

R88M-K4K020H (-S2)/-K5K020H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K4K020T (-S2)/-K5K020T (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K4K020H-B (S2)/-K5K020H-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K4K020T-B (S2)/-K5K020T-B (S2)
ABS
18
3.2
140
413.5
23
114.3h7
35h6
60
70
55
50
M3, through
10h9
8
176176
30
Encoder connector
70
LM
KB2
KB1
35h6
LL
114.3h7
Motor and brake

connector
00
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K4K020x
177
133
96
155
R88M-K5K020x
196
152
115
174
R88M-K4K020x-Bx
202
158
96
180
R88M-K5K020x-Bx
221
177
115
199
2-56
M12 (depth 25)
7.5 kW (without Brake)

R88M-K7K515T (-S2)
ABS
7.5 kW (with Brake)
LL
LM
KB2
44
176 176
43.5
KB1
L3
L2
43.5
L1
Shaft end
24 3.2
113
96
90
4-13.5
42h6
45
M4, through
3
23
2 min.
Boss insertion positon
12h9
00
M16
(depth 32 min.)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
R88M-K7K515Tx
312
113
268
R88M-K7K515T-Bx
337
113
293
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
42
219
290
117.5
117.5
149
42
253
315
117.5
152.5
183
2-57
114.3h7
60
184
48
110
61.5
Encoder connector
Brake connector
(for model with brake only)
113
114.3h7
Motor connector
ABS
R88M-K7K515T-B (S2)

R88M-K11K015T (-S2)/-K15K015T (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K11K015T-B (S2)/-K15K015T-B (S2)
LL
LM
KB2
44
110
KB1
L3
57
57
L2
L1
4-13.5
32
26
55m6
200h7
60
205
61.5
48
220 220

116
98
90
45 M5,
16h9
through
(Key groove P9)
55m6
Encoder
connector
Brake connector
116
235
200h7
0
49 -0.2
10
Motor
connector
ABS
M20
(depth 40 min.)
2 min.
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
R88M-K11K015Tx
316
116
272
R88M-K15K015Tx
384
116
R88M-K11K015T-Bx
364
R88M-K15K015T-Bx
432
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
55
232
294
124.5
124.5
162
340
55
300
362
158.5
158.5
230
116
320
55
266
342
124.5
159.5
196
116
388
55
334
410
158.5
193.5
264
2-58
L3
1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min Motors (400 V)

R88M-K40020F (-S2)/-K60020F (-S2)
INC
R88M-K40020C (-S2)/-K60020C (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K40020F-B (S2)/-K60020F-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K40020C-B (S2)/-K60020C-B (S2)
ABS
Motor and brake

connector

55
45
42
M3, through
6h9
19h6
5
13
95h7
11
5
15.5
60
19h6
49
10
100100
M5 (depth 12)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K40020x
131.5
87.5
56.5
109.5
R88M-K60020x
141
97
66
119
R88M-K40020x-Bx
158.5
114.5
53.5
136.5
R88M-K60020x-Bx
168
124
63
146
2-59
101 (without brake)

103 (with brake)
55
LM
KB2
KB1
95h7
LL
Encoder connector
1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW/3 kW (without Brake)

R88M-K1K020F (-S2)/-K1K520F (-S2)/-K2K020F (-S2)/-K3K020F (-S2)
R88M-K1K020C (-S2)/-K1K520C (-S2)/-K2K020C (-S2)/-K3K020C (-S2)
INC
ABS
1 kW/1.5 kW/2 kW/3 kW (with Brake)

R88M-K1K020F-B (S2)/-K1K520F-B (S2)/-K2K020F-B (S2)/-K3K020F-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K1K020C-B (S2)/-K1K520C-B (S2)/-K2K020C-B (S2)/-K3K020C-B (S2)

Motor and brake
connector
LL
LR
LM
KB2
KB1
12
LR
130130
45 (1 to 2 kW)
55 (3 kW)
41 (1 to 2 kW)
51 (3 kW)
M3, through
4-9
7
18 (1 to 2 kW)
20 (3 kW)
16
Sh6
110h7
14
110h7
Sh6
8h9
60
116 (1 to 2 kW/without brake)

118 (3 kW/without brake)
118 (1 to 3 kW/with brake)
Encoder
connector
ABS
M5, depth 12 (1.0 to 2.0 kW)

M8, depth 20 (3.0 kW)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K1K020x
138
55
94
22
60
116
R88M-K1K520x
155.5
55
111.5
22
77.5
133.5
R88M-K2K020x
173
55
129
22
95
151
R88M-K3K020x
208
65
164
24
127
186
R88M-K1K020x-Bx
163
55
119
22
57
141
R88M-K1K520x-Bx
180.5
55
136.5
22
74.5
158.5
R88M-K2K020x-Bx
198
55
154
22
92
176
R88M-K3K020x-Bx
233
65
189
24
127
211
2-60

R88M-K4K020F (-S2)/-K5K020F (-S2)
INC
R88M-K4K020C (-S2)/-K5K020C (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K4K020F-B (S2)/-K5K020F-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K4K020C-B (S2)/-K5K020C-B (S2)
ABS
Motor and brake

connector
LL
Encoder
connector
70
LM
KB2
KB1
176176
18
3.2
140
4-13.5
70
55
50
M3, through
23
30
35h6
114.3h7
35h6
114.3h7
60
00
M12
(depth 25)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K4K020x
177
133
96
155
R88M-K5K020x
196
152
115
174
R88M-K4K020x-Bx
202
158
96
180
R88M-K5K020x-Bx
221
177
115
199
2-61
10h9
LL

R88M-K7K515C (-S2)
ABS
7.5 kW (with Brake)
LL
LM
KB2
44
176 176
43.5
KB1
L3
43.5
L1
Shaft end
24 3.2
42h6
114.3h7
60
45
M4, through
3
23
2 min.
113
96
90
4-13.5
184
48
110
L2
61.5
Encoder connector
Brake connector
113
114.3h7
Motor connector
ABS
00
M16
(depth 32 min.)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
R88M-K7K515Cx
312
113
268
R88M-K7K515C-Bx
337
113
293
KB1
KB2
L1
L2
L3
42
219
290
117.5
117.5
149
42
253
315
117.5
152.5
183
2-62
12h9
8
R88M-K7K515C-B (S2)

R88M-K11K015C (-S2)/-K15K015C (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K11K015C-B (S2)/-K15K015C-B (S2)
LL
LM
KB2
44
110
KB1
L3
220 220
57
57
L2
L1
4-13.5
32
26

116
98
90
45 M5,
16h9
through
(Key groove P9)
235
M20
(depth 40 min.)
2 min.
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
KB1
R88M-K11K015Cx
316
116
272
55
232
R88M-K15K015Cx
384
116
340
55
R88M-K11K015C-Bx
364
116
320
R88M-K15K015C-Bx
432
116
388
KB2
L1
L2
L3
294
124.5
124.5
162
300
362
158.5
158.5
230
55
266
342
124.5
159.5
196
55
334
410
158.5
193.5
264
2-63
55m6
200h7
60
205
61.5
48
ABS
55m6
Encoder
connector
Brake connector
116
200h7
0
49 -0.2
10
Motor
connector

R88M-K90010H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K90010T (-S2)
ABS
900 W (with Brake)

INC
R88M-K90010T-B (S2)
ABS
Motor and brake

connector
Encoder connector
LL
70
LM
KB2
77.5

70
6
45
41
4-9
116
M3, through
16
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB2
R88M-K90010x
155.5
111.5
133.5
R88M-K90010x-Bx
180.5
136.5
158.5
2-64
18
22h6
60
22h6
8h9
5
14
110h7
12
130130
110h7
R88M-K90010H-B (S2)
M5 (depth 12)

R88M-K2K010H (-S2)/-K3K010H (-S2)
INC
R88M-K2K010T (-S2)/-K3K010T (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K2K010H-B (S2)/-K3K010H-B (S2)
INC
R88M/-K2K010T-B (S2)/-K3K010T-B (S2)
ABS
80
3.2
140
413.5
3
35h6
114.3h7
60
M3, through
10h9
M12 (depth 25)
00
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K2K010x
163.5
119.5
82.5
141.5
R88M-K3K010x
209.5
165.5
128.5
187.5
R88M-K2K010x-Bx
188.5
144.5
82.5
166.5
R88M-K3K010x-Bx
234.5
190.5
128.5
212.5
2-65
23
80
55
50
18
176176
30
LM
KB2
KB1
35h6
Encoder connector
LL
114.3h7
Motor and brake

connector

R88M-K4K510T (-S2)
ABS
4.5 kW (with Brake)

R88M-K4K510T-B (S2)
Motor and
brake
connector
Encoder
connector
44
LL
LM
KB2
KB1
ABS
176 176
113
L2
43.5
43.5
L1
Shaft end
4-13.5
2 min.
M4, through
12h9
(Key groove P9)
42h6
42h6
3
23
114.3h7
60
140
45
113
96
90
0
37-0.2
24 3.2
114.3h7
61.5
M16
(depth 32 min.)
00
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
R88M-K4K510Tx
266
113
222
42
185
244
98
98
R88M-K4K510T-Bx
291
113
247
42
185
269
98
133
2-66
L2
R88M-K6K010T (-S2)
ABS
6 kW (with Brake)
R88M-K6K010T-B (S2)
Brake connector
113
Motor connector
43.5 43.5
L1
24 3.2
42h6

113
4-13.5
96
90
45 M4, through
12h9
(Key groove P9)
00
M16
(depth 32 min.)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
KB1
R88M-K6K010Tx
312
113
268
42
219
R88M-K6K010T-Bx
337
113
293
42
253
KB2
L1
L2
L3
290
117.5
117.5
149
315
117.5
152.5
183
2-67
2 min.
3
23
114.3h7
60
184
61.5
48
110
L2
L3
0
37-0.2
KB1
176 176
42h6
LL
LM
KB2
44
114.3h7
Encoder
connector
ABS

R88M-K90010F (-S2)
INC
R88M-K90010C (-S2)
ABS
900 W (with Brake)

INC
R88M-K90010C-B (S2)
ABS
Motor and brake

connector
LL
70
LM
KB2
KB1
12
130130

70
45
41
4-9
M3, through
16
M5 (depth 10)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
KB1
LL
LM
KB2
R88M-K90010x
155.5
111.5
77.5
133.5
R88M-K90010x-Bx
180.5
136.5
74.5
158.5
2-68
18
14
110h7
22h6
22h6
8h9
60
116 (without brake)

118 (with brake)
Encoder connector
110h7
R88M-K90010F-B (S2)

R88M-K2K010F (-S2)/-K3K010F (-S2)
INC
R88M-K2K010C (-S2)/-K3K010C (-S2)
ABS

R88M-K2K010F-B (S2)/-K3K010F-B (S2)
INC
R88M-K2K010C-B (S2)/-K3K010C-B (S2)
ABS
80
35h6
114.3h7
M3, through
10h9
8
413.5
3
23
80
55
50
M12 (depth 25)
00
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
R88M-K2K010x
163.5
119.5
82.5
141.5
R88M-K3K010x
209.5
165.5
128.5
187.5
R88M-K2K010x-Bx
188.5
144.5
82.5
166.5
R88M-K3K010x-Bx
234.5
190.5
128.5
212.5
2-69
60
3.2
140
18
176176
30
LM
KB2
KB1
35h6
Encoder connector
LL
114.3h7
Motor and brake

connector

R88M-K4K510C (-S2)
ABS
4.5 kW (with Brake)

R88M-K4K510C-B (S2)
Motor and
brake
connector
Encoder
connector
44
LL
LM
KB2
KB1
ABS
176 176
113
L2
43.5
43.5
L1
Shaft end
2 min.
M4, through
8
12h9
(Key groove P9)
42h6
42h6
3
23
114.3h7
60
140
45
0
37-0.2
113
96
90
4-13.5
114.3h7
61.5
24 3.2
M16
(depth 32 min.)
00
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
KB1
KB2
L1
R88M-K4K510Cx
266
113
222
42
185
244
98
98
R88M-K4K510C-Bx
291
113
247
42
185
269
98
133
2-70
L2
R88M-K6K010C (-S2)
ABS
6 kW (with Brake)
R88M-K6K010C-B (S2)
Brake connector
113
Motor connector
43.5 43.5
L3
L2
L1
24 3.2
42h6

113
4- 13.5
96
90
45 M4, through
12h9
(Key groove P9)
00
M16
(depth 32 min.)
Dimensions (mm)
Model
LL
LR
LM
KB1
R88M-K6K010Cx
312
113
268
42
219
R88M-K6K010C-Bx
337
113
293
42
253
KB2
L1
L2
L3
290
117.5
117.5
149
315
117.5
152.5
183
2-71
2 min.
3
23
114.3h7
60
184
61.5
48
110
KB1
176 176
0
37-0.2
44
42h6
LL
LM
KB2
114.3h7
Encoder
connector
ABS
External Regeneration Resistor Dimensions

External Regeneration Resistor
Thermal switch output
28
43.5
48
62
4.2
3
(0.75 mm2)
1.5
(0.3 mm2)
R88A-RR08050S/-RR080100S
t1.2
500
104
20
122
130
4.2
3
(0.75 mm2)
1.5
(0.3 mm2)
R88A-RR22047S
6
t1.2
500
20
200
220
230
25
2-72
43
78
10
360
386
402
40
76
5.2
R88A-RR50020S
2-5 EMC Filter Dimensions
2-5 EMC Filter Dimensions

W
M2
drive
mounts
H M1
2
output
flexes
External dimensions
Mount dimensions
Filter model
H
M1
M2
R88A-FIK102-RE
190
42
44
180
20
R88A-FIK104-RE
190
57
30
180
30
R88A-FIK107-RE
190
64
35
180
40
R88A-FIK114-RE
190
86
35
180
60
R88A-FIK304-RE
190
86
40
180
60
R88A-FIK306-RE
245
94
40
235
60
R88A-FIK312-RE
290
130
45
280
100
2-73
Specifications
This chapter explains the general specifications, characteristics, connector
specifications and I/O circuits of the Servo Drive, Servomotor and peripheral
devices.
3-1 Driver Specifications ....................................................3-2

General Specifications .................................................................... 3-2
Characteristics ................................................................................ 3-3
Main Circuit and Motor Connections............................................... 3-9
Control I/O Connector Specifications (CN1) ................................. 3-18
Control Input Circuits .................................................................... 3-28
Control Input Details ..................................................................... 3-32
Control Output Circuits.................................................................. 3-44
Control Output Details................................................................... 3-45
Encoder Connector Specifications (CN2) ..................................... 3-50
External Encoder Connector Specifications (CN4) ....................... 3-50
Monitor Connector Specifications (CN5)....................................... 3-54
USB Connector Specifications (CN7) ........................................... 3-55
Safety Connector Specifications (CN8) ........................................ 3-56
3-2 Overload Characteristics (Electronic Thermal Function)

......................................................................................3-58
Overload Characteristics Graphs.................................................. 3-58
3-3 Motor Specifications ..................................................3-59

General Specifications .................................................................. 3-59
Characteristics .............................................................................. 3-60
Encoder Specifications ................................................................. 3-94
3-4 Cable and Connector Specifications ........................3-95

Encoder Cable Specifications ....................................................... 3-95
Motor Power Cable Specifications ................................................ 3-98
Connector Specifications ............................................................ 3-108
Analog Monitor Cable Specifications .......................................... 3-111
Control Cable Specifications....................................................... 3-113
3-5 Servo Relay Units and Cable Specifications..........3-128

Servo Relay Units Specifications ................................................ 3-128
Position Control Unit-Servo Relay Unit Cable Specifications ..... 3-137
3-6 External Regeneration Resistor Specifications.....3-146

External Regeneration Resistor Specifications........................... 3-146
3-7 EMC Filter Specifications.........................................3-148
3-1 Driver Specifications

Select the Servo Drive matching the Servomotor to be used. Refer to "Servo Drive and
Servomotor Combination List"(P.2-12).
The same Accurax G5 AC Servo Drive can be used for either a pulse train input or analog
input. You can change the CONTROL mode according to the controller. (The default setting is
for position control with pulse train commands.)
General Specifications
Item
Ambient operating
temperature and operating
humidity
0 to 55C, 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
Storage ambient temperature

and humidity
-20 to 65C, 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
Operating and storage

atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Vibration resistance
10 to 60 Hz and at an acceleration of 5.88 m/s2 or less (Not to be run continuously at

the resonance point)
Impact resistance
Acceleration of 19.6 m/s2 max. 2 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Insulation resistance
Between power supply terminal/power terminal and FG terminal: 0.5 M min. (at 500
VDC Megger)
Dielectric strength
Between power supply/power line terminals and FG terminal: 1,500 VAC for 1 min at
50/60 Hz
Protective structure
Built into panel
International standard
Specifications
Specifications
EC
directive
EMC
directive
EN 55011, EN 61000-6-2, IEC 61800-3
Low voltage
command
EN 61800-5-1
UL standards
UL 508C
CSA standards
CSA22.2 No. 14
Functional safety
EN ISO13849-1:2008 (Performance Level d), IEC61800-5-2:2007 (STO),

EN61508:2001 (SIL2),EN954-1:1996 (CAT3)
Note 1. The above items reflect individual evaluation testing. The results may differ under compound conditions.
Note 2. Never perform dielectric strength or other megameter tests on the Servo Drive. Failure to follow this guideline
may result in damaging the internal elements.
Note 3. Depending on the operating conditions, some Servo Drive parts will require maintenance. For details, refer to
"11-5 Periodic Maintenance" (P.11-22).
3-2
Characteristics
100-VAC Input Type
Item
R88D-KTA5L
R88D-KT01L
R88D-KT02L
R88D-KT04L
Continuous output current (rms)
1.2 A
1.7 A
2.5 A
4.6 A
Input power
supply
Power
supply
capacity
0.4 KVA
0.4 KVA
0.5 KVA
0.9 KVA
Power
supply
voltage
Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60 Hz
Rated
current
1.4 A
Power
supply
voltage
Main
circuit
4.3 A
7.6 A
Control method
All-digital servo
Inverter method
IGBT-driven PWM method
PWM frequency
12.0 kHz
Weight
Approx. 0.8 kg
Approx. 0.8 kg
Approx. 1.0 kg
Approx. 1.6 kg
Maximum applicable motor capacity
50 W
100 W
200 W
400 W
Applicable
motor
INC
K05030L
K10030L
K20030L
K40030L
ABS
K05030S
K10030S
K20030S
K40030S
2,000-r/
min type
ABS
1,000-r/
min type
ABS
3,000 r/
min type
6.0 kHz
3-3
Specifications
Control
circuit
2.6 A
200-VAC Input Type

R88DKT01H
Item
R88DKT04H
R88DKT08H
R88DKT10H
R88DKT15H
1.2 A
1.6 A
2.6 A
4.1 A
5.9 A
9.4 A
Input power Main

supply
circuit
Power
supply
capacity
0.5 KVA
0.5 KVA
0.9 KVA
1.3 KVA
1.8 KVA
2.3KVA
Power
supply
voltage
Single-phase or 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz
Rated
current
1.3 A
Power
supply
voltage
3
Specifications
R88DKT02H
Control
circuit
2.4/1.3 *1 A 4.1/2.4 *1 A 6.6/3.6 *1 A 9.1/5.9 *1 A 14.2/8.1 *1 A
PWM frequency
12.0 kHz
Weight
Approx.
0.8 kg
Approx.
0.8 kg
Approx.
1.1 kg
Approx.
1.6 kg
Approx.
1.8 kg
Approx.
1.8 kg
100 W
200 W
400 W
750 W
1 kW
1.5 kW
Applicable
motor
INC
K05030H
K10030H
K20030H
K40030H
K75030H
K1K030H
K1K530H
ABS
K05030T
K10030T
K20030T
K40030T
K75030T
K1K030T
K1K530T
INC
K1K020H
K1K520H
ABS
K1K020T
K1K520T
INC
K90010H
ABS
K90010T
3,000-r/
min type
2,000-r/
min type
1,000-r/
min type
6.0 kHz
Control method
All-digital servo
Inverter method
*1. The left value is for single-phase input power and the right value is for 3-phase input power.
3-4
R88DKT20H
Item
R88DKT30H
R88DKT50H
R88DKT75H
R88DKT150H
13.4 A
18.7 A
33.0 A
44.0 A
66.1 A
Input power
supply
Power
supply
capacity
3.3 KVA
4.5 KVA
7.5 KVA
9.0 KVA
11.0 KVA
Power
supply
voltage
3-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/60 Hz
Rated
current
11.8 A
Power
supply
voltage
Main
circuit
Control
circuit
15.1 A
21.6 A
32.0 A
58.0 A
6.0 kHz
Weight
Approx.
2.7 kg
Approx.
4.8 kg
Approx.
4.8 kg
Approx.
13.5 kg
Approx.
21.0 kg
2 kW
3 kW
5 kW
7.5 kW
15 kW
Applicable
motor
INC
K2K030H
K3K030H
K4K030H
K5K030H
ABS
K2K030T
K3K030T
K4K030T
K5K030T
INC
K2K020H
K3K020H
K4K020H
K5K020H
ABS
K2K020T
K3K020T
K4K020T
K5K020T
K7K515T
K11K015T
K15K015T
INC
K2K010H
K3K010H
ABS
K2K010T
K3K010T
K4K510T
K6K010T
3,000-r/
min type
2,000-r/
min type
1,000-r/
min type
Control method
All-digital servo
Inverter method
Specifications
PWM frequency
3-5
400-VAC Input Type

R88DKT06F
Item
Continuous output
current (rms)
Specifications
I
n
p
u
t
p
o
w
e
r
s
u
p
p
l
y
Main
circuit
2.9 A
R88DKT10F
2.9 A
R88DKT15F
4.7 A
R88DKT20F
6.7 A
R88DKT30F
9.4 A
Power
supply
voltage
Rated
current
2.8 A
2.8 A
4.7 A
R88DKT50F
R88DKT75F
R88DKT150F
16.5 A
22.0 A
33.4 A
5.9 A
7.6 A
12.1 A
16.0 A
29.0
Control Power
circuit
supply
voltage
24 VDC (20.4 to 27.6 V)
PWM frequency
6.0 kHz
Weight
Approx.
1.9 kg
Approx.
1.9 kg
Approx.
1.9 kg
Approx.
2.7 kg
Approx.
4.7 kg
Approx.
4.7 kg
Approx.
13.5 kg
Approx.
21.0 kg
600 W
1 kW
1.5 kW
2 kW
3 kW
5 kW
7.5 kW
15 kW
INC
K75030F
K1K030F
K1K530F
K2K030F
K3K030F
K4K030F
K5K030F
ABS
K75030C
K1K030C
K4K030C
K2K030C K3K030C
K1K530C
K5K030C
INC
K40020F
K60020F
K1K020F
K1K520F
ABS
K11K015C
K4K020C
K40020C
K7K510C
K1K020C K1K520C K2K020C K3K020C
K15K015C
K5K020C
K60020C
INC
K90010F
K2K010F
ABS
K90010C
K2K010C K3K010C K6K010C
Maximum applicable
motor capacity
A
p
p
li
c
a
b
l
e
m
o
t
o
r
3,000r/min
type
2,000r/min
type
1,000r/min
type
Control method
All-digital servo
Inverter method
3-6
K2K020F
K3K020F
K4K020F
K5K020F
K3K010F
Protective Functions
Error detection
Description
Control power supply undervoltage
The DC voltage of the main circuit fell below the specified value while the
operation command (RUN) input was ON.
Overvoltage
The DC voltage in the main circuit is abnormally high.
Main power supply undervoltage
The DC voltage of the main circuit is low.
Overcurrent
Overcurrent flowed to the IGBT. Motor power line ground fault or short
circuit.
Driver overheat
The temperature of the driver radiator exceeded the specified value.
Overload
Operation was performed with torque significantly exceeding the rating for
several seconds to several tens of seconds.
Regeneration overload
The regenerative energy exceeds the processing capacity of the

Regeneration Resistor.
Encoder communications error
The encoder wiring is disconnected.
Encoder communications data error
Communications cannot be performed between the encoder and the driver.
Error counter overflow
The number of accumulated pulses in the error counter exceeded the set
value for the Error Counter Overflow Level (Pn014).
Excessive hybrid error
During full closing control, difference between position of load from external
scale and position of motor due to encoder was larger than the number of
pulses set by Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Overflow
Level (Pn328).
Overspeed
The motor rotation speed exceeded the maximum number of rotations.
Electronic gear setting error
The set value for the Electronic Gear Ratio (Pn009 to Pn010, Pn500 to
Pn503) is not appropriate.
Error counter value based on the encoder pulse reference exceeded 229
(536870912).
Interface I/O setting error
An error was detected in the interface I/O signal.
Overrun limit error
The motor exceeded the allowable operating range set in the Overrun Limit
Setting (Pn514) with respect to the position command input.
Parameter error
Data in the Parameter Save area was corrupted when the power supply
was turned ON and data was read from the EEPROM.
Parameters destruction
The checksum for the data read from the EEPROM when the power supply
was turned ON does not match.
Drive prohibition input error
The forward drive prohibition and reverse drive prohibition inputs are both
turned OFF.
Excessive analog input
A current exceeding the Excessive Analog Input (Pn424, Pn427 or Pn430)

was applied to the analog command input (pin 14).
Absolute encoder system down error
The voltage supplied to the absolute encoder is lower than the specified
value.
Absolute encoder counter overflow error The multi-rotation counter of the absolute encoder exceeds the specified
value.
ABS
Absolute encoder overspeed error
ABS
Absolute encoder 1-rotation counter
error
The motor rotation speed exceeds the specified value when only the battery
power supply of the absolute encoder is used.
A 1-turn counter error was detected.
ABS
3-7
Specifications
ABS
Error detection
Description
Absolute encoder multi-rotation counter

error
A multi-rotation counter error or phase-AB signal error was detected.
ABS
Absolute encoder status error
ABS
The rotation of the absolute encoder is higher than the specified value.
Encoder phase-Z error
A phase Z pulse was not detected regularly.
Encoder CS signal error
A logic error was detected in the CS signal.
External scale communications error
An error was detected in external scale connection and communications

data.
External scale status error
An external scale error code was detected.
Phases-A, B and Z connection error
An error was generated for connection of phases A, B, and Z of external

scale.
Motor non-conformity
The combination of the Servomotor and Servo Drive is not appropriate.

The encoder was not connected when the power supply was turned ON.
Specifications
3-8
Main Circuit and Motor Connections

When wiring the main circuit, use proper wire sizes, grounding systems, and noise resistance.
R88D-KTA5L/-KT01L/-KT02L/-KT04L
R88D-KT01H/-KT02H/-KT04H/-KT08H/-KT10H/-KT15H
Main Circuit Connector Specifications (CNA)
Symbol
L1
Name
Function
Main circuit power

supply input
L2
L3
Note. Single-phase should connect to L1 or L3.

L1C
L2C
Control circuit power

supply input
R88D-KTxL : Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60 Hz

R88D-KTxH : Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz
Motor Connector Specifications (CNB)

Symbol
B1
B2
B3
U
V
W
Name
Function
External
Regeneration
Resistor connection
terminals
Normally B2 and B3 are short-circuited.

If there is high regenerative energy, remove the short-circuit bar
between B2 and B3 and connect an External Regeneration Resistor
between B1 and B2. (Models from 750 W)
Motor connection
terminals
Phase U
Phase V
These are the output terminals to the Servomotor.

Be sure to wire them correctly.
Phase W
Precautions for Correct Use

Tighten the ground screws to the torque of 0.7 to 0.8 Nm (M4) or 1.4 to 1.6 Nm (M5).
3-9
3
Specifications
R88D-KTxL
(50 to 400 W) : Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60 Hz
(200 to 400 W) : 3-phase: 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz
R88D-KTxH
(50 W to 1.5 kW) : Single-phase: 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/
60 Hz
(100 W to 1.5 kW) : 3-phase: 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz
R88D-KT20H
Symbol
L1
L2
Name
Function
Main circuit power

supply input
R88D-KTxH (2 kW) :
3-phase: 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/60 Hz

supply input
R88D-KTxH : Single-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/60

Hz
L3
L1C
L2C

Symbol
Specifications
Name
Motor connection
terminals
V
W
Function
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W
External Regenerative Resistor (CNC)

Symbol
B1
Name
B3

between B2 and B3 and connect an External Regeneration
Resistor between B1 and B2.
NC
Do not connect.
B2
Resistor connection
terminals
Function

3-10
R88D-KT30H/-KT50H
Terminal Block Specifications
Symbol
L1
Name
Function
Main circuit power

supply input
R88D-KTxH (3 to 5 kW):

supply input

Hz
Resistor connection
terminals
B3

NC
Do not connect.
L2
L3
L1C
L2C
B1
B2
Motor connection
terminals
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W

Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.75 Nm (M4) or 1.5 Nm (M5).
If the torque for terminal block screws exceeds 1.2 Nm (M4) or 2.0 Nm (M5), the terminal block
may be damaged.
Tighten the fixing screw of the terminal block cover to the torque of 0.2 Nm (M3).
3-11
Specifications
R88D-KT75H
Symbol
L1
L2
Name
Function
Main circuit power

supply input
R88D-KTxH (7.5 kW):


supply input

Hz
Resistor connection
terminals
Connect an External Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2.
L3
L1C
L2C
B1
B2
NC
Do not connect.
DB1
Specifications
DB2
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals
DB3
Normally DB3 and DB4 are connected. When using an externally

connected Dynamic Brake Unit, remove the short bar from
between DB3 and DB4.
DB4
U
V
These terminals are used to control the MC for externally

connected dynamic brake resistance. Connect them if required.
Motor connection
terminals
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W

Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 1.5 Nm (M5).
If the torque for terminal block screws exceeds 2.0 Nm (M5), the terminal block may be damaged.
Tighten the ground screws to the torque of 1.4 to 1.6 Nm (M5).
3-12
R88D-KT150H
Symbol
L1
L2
Name
Function
Main circuit power

supply input
R88D-KTxH (15 kW):


supply input

Hz
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals

Resistor connection
terminals
L3
L1C
L2C
DB1
DB2
B1
B2
U
V
Do not connect.
Motor connection
terminals
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W

may be damaged.
3-13
Specifications
NC
R88D-KT06F/-KT10F/-KT15F/-KT20F
Symbol
L1
Name
Main circuit power
supply input
L2
Function
R88D-KTxF
(600 W to 2 kW) : 3-phase: 380 to 480 VAC (323 to 528 V)
50/60 Hz
L3

Symbol
Motor connection
terminals
Specifications
Name
Function
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W
External Regenerative Resistor (CNC)

Symbol
B1
Name
Resistor connection
terminals
Function
B3

NC
Do not connect.
B2
Control Circuit Connector Specifications (CND)

Symbol
24 V
0V
Name
supply input
Function
24 VDC 15%

3-14
R88D-KT30F/-KT50F
Terminal Block Specifications (TB1)
Symbol
24 V
0V
Name
supply input
Function
24 VDC 15%

Symbol
L1
Name
Function
Main circuit power supply

input
R88D-KTxF (3 to 5 kW):
Resistor connection
terminals
B3

NC
Do not connect.
L2
L3
B2
U
V
Motor connection
terminals
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W

may be damaged.
3-15
Specifications
B1
R88D-KT75F
Symbol
24 V
0V
Name
supply input
Function
24 VDC 15%

Symbol
L1
L2
Name
Function

input
R88D-KTxF (7.5 kW):

Resistor connection
terminals
L3
Specifications
B1
B2
NC
Do not connect.
DB1
DB2
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals
DB3

connected Dynamic Brake Unit, remove the short bar from
between DB3 and DB4.
DB4
U
V

Motor connection
terminals
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W

Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 1.5 Nm (M5).
If the torque for terminal block screws exceeds 2.0 Nm (M5), the terminal block may be damaged.
3-16
R88D-KT150F
Symbol
24 V
0V
Name
supply input
Function
24 VDC 15%

Symbol
DB1
DB2
L1
Function
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals


input
R88D-KTxF (15 kW):

Resistor connection
terminals
L3
B1
B2
NC
U
V
Do not connect.
Motor connection
terminals
Phase U
Phase V

Phase W

may be damaged.
3-17
3
Specifications
L2
Name
Control I/O Connector Specifications (CN1)

Control I/O Signal Connections and External Signal Processing for Position Control
+24 VCW 1 2.2 k
+CW 3
Reverse pulse
11 BKIR
Brake interlock
10 BKIRCOM
CW 4 220
500 kpps max.
+24 VCCW 2 2.2 k

35 READY Servo ready
+CCW 5
Forward pulse
completed output
34 READYCOM
CCW 6 220
CWLD 45
2 Mpps max.
Specifications
Alarm output
36 ALMCOM
110
3k
Forward pulse
37 /ALM
+CWLD 44 3 k 43 k
Reverse pulse
43 k
39 INP
Positioning
completion
38 INPCOMoutput
+CCWLD 46 3k 43 k
CCWLD 47
110
3 k
+24 VIN 7
12 to 24 VDC
Maximum
service
voltage
: 30 VDC
Maximum
output current
: 50 mADC
43 k
19 Z
Phase-Z output
(open-collector output)
4.7 k
25 ZCOM
Operation command
RUN 29
4.7 k
21 +A
Vibration filter
switching
DFSEL1
Encoder
phase-A output
22 A
26
4.7 k
49 +B
Encoder
Gain switching
48 B phase-B output
GSEL 27
4.7 k
Line-driver output
corresponding with
the EIA RS-422A
communications
method
(load resistance
120 min.)
23 +Z
Encoder
Electronic gear
switching GESEL1 28
24 Z phase-Z output
4.7 k
Error counter reset

ECRST 30
100 20 SEN
4.7 k
Alarm reset
1 F
RESET 31
Sensor ON
4.7 k
13 SENGND
4.7 k
CONTROL mode
switching
TVSEL 32
42 BAT
43 BATGND
4.7 k
Pulse prohibition
IPG 33
10 k 16 PCL
4.7 k
Reverse drive
prohibition
NOT 8
Forward drive
prohibition
POT 9
3.83 k
Forward torque limit input
17 AGND2
10 k 18 NCL
4.7 k
Backup battery*1
Reverse torque limit input
3.83 k
50 FG
Frame ground
*1. If a backup battery is connected, a cable with a battery is not required.

Note 1. The inputs of pins 8, 9 and 26 to 33, and outputs of pins 10, 11, 34, 35, 38 and 39, can be changed via parameter
settings.
Note 2. Pins 13, 20, 42 and 43 represent signals which are applicable when an absolute encoder is used.
3-18
Control I/O Signal Connections and External Signal Processing for Speed Control
Speed command
11 BKIR
REF 14 20 k
Maximum
Brake interlock
service voltage
10 BKIRCOM
: 30 VDC
Servo ready
Maximum
35 READY completed output output current
: 50 mADC
34 READYCOM
3.83 k
AGND 15
Forward torque limit input PCL 16 10 k

3.83 k
AGND1 17
Reverse torque limit input
37 /ALM
NCL 18 10k
Alarm output
3.83 k
36 ALMCOM
SEN 20 100
Sensor ON
SENGND 13
4.7 k
39 TGON
1 F
Motor rotation
speed detection
38 TGONCOM
output
19 Z
12 to 24 VDC
+24VIN 7
4.7 k
25 ZCOM
Phase-Z output
(open-collector
output)
Specifications
Operation command
RUN 29
4.7 k
Zero speed
designation VZERO 26
4.7 k
Gain switching
GSEL 27
4.7 k
Internally set speed

selection 3 VSEL3 28
21 +A
Encoder
phase-A output
22 A
4.7 k

49 +B
Encoder
phase-B output
48 B
4.7 k
Alarm reset
23 +Z
Line-driver output
corresponding with
the EIA RS-422A
communications
method
(load resistance
120 min.)
Encoder
phase-Z output
24 Z
RESET 31
4.7 k
CONTROL mode
switching
TVSEL 32
4.7 k

42 BAT
4.7 k
Reverse drive
prohibition
Backup battery*1
43 BATGND
NOT 8
4.7 k
Forward drive
prohibition
POT 9
50 FG
Frame ground

settings.
3-19
Control I/O Signal Connections and External Signal Processing for Torque Control
Torque command input
or speed limit
TREF1/VLIM 14 20 k
11 BKIR
Brake interlock
10 BKIRCOM
Servo ready
35 READY completed output
3.83 k
AGND1 15
Torque command input TREF2 16 10 k
34 READYCOM
3.83 k
AGND2 17
37 /ALM
SEN 20 100
Sensor ON
Maximum
service voltage
: 30 VDC
Maximum
output current
: 50 mADC
Alarm output
36 ALMCOM
SENGND 13
4.7 k
1 F
39 TGON
Motor rotation
speed detection
output
38 TGONCOM
19 Z
12 to 24 VDC
+24VIN 7
Phase-Z output
(open-collector
4.7 k
Specifications
25 ZCOM output)
Operation
command
RUN 29
4.7 k
Zero speed
designation VZERO
26
4.7 k
Gain switching
GSEL 27
21 +A
4.7 k
Encoder
phase-A output
22 A
Alarm reset
49 +B
RESET 31
Encoder
phase-B output
4.7 k
48 B
CONTROL mode
switching
TVSEL 32
Line-driver output
corresponding with
the EIA RS-422A
communications
method
(load resistance
120 min.)
23 +Z
4.7 k
Reverse drive
prohibition
NOT 8
Encoder
phase-Z output
24 Z
42 BAT
Backup battery*1
4.7 k
43 BATGND
Forward drive
prohibition
POT 9
50 FG
Frame ground

settings.
3-20
Control I/O Signal List

CN1 Control Inputs
CONTROL mode
Pin
number
Symbol
Function and interface

Position Speed Torque
24VCW
CW/puls/
FA
Name
24-V open-collector
input for command
pulse
Reverse pulse, feed

pulse, or 90 phase
difference signal
-CW/-puls/-FA (phase A)
24VCW
CW/puls/
FA
Input terminals for position command

pulses for both line driver and open
collector.
Changes to enable (set value: 0default
setting) according to the setting of
Command Pulse Input Selection
(Pn005).
Forward pulse,
direction signal, or 90
phase difference signal
-CW/-puls/-FA (phase B)
44
CWLD
45
-CWLD
46
CCWLD
47
-CCWLD
Reverse pulse (input for

line driver only)
Forward pulse (input for
line driver only)
Sensor ON Input
ABS
Input terminals for position command

pulses dedicated to the line-driver
output.
Changes to enable (set value: 1)
according to the setting of Command
Pulse Input Selection (Pn005).
This performs serial transmission of
multi-rotation data of the absolute
encoder and also outputs 1-rotation data
as the initial incremental pulses.
This input changes to enable (set value:
1) according to the setting of Absolute
Interface Function Selection (Pn616).
20
SEN
13
SENGND
Signal ground
This is a sensor ON signal ground.
42
BAT
Backup battery input
Backup battery connection terminals

when the absolute encoder power is
interrupted.(Connection to this terminal
is not necessary if you use the absolute
encoder battery cable for backup.)
ABS
43
BATGND
Speed command input
REF

1
14
TREF1
24-V open-collector
input for command
pulse
This is an analog input terminal for

speed command.
Use the Speed Command Scale
(Pn302) to change the rotation speed
scale for the command input.
Provides a torque command input (set
value: 0 or 2) according to the setting of
Torque Command/Speed Limit
Selection (Pn317).
Use the Torque Command Scale
3-21
3
Specifications
Full
closing
CONTROL mode
Pin
number
Symbol
Name

Speed limit input
14
VLIM
15
AGND1
This is an analog signal ground.
Forward torque limit

input
Provides a forward torque limit input (set

value: 0 or 4) or forward/reverse torque
limit input (set value: 5) according to the
setting of Torque Limit Selection
(Pn521).

2
16
Provides a speed limit input (set value:

1) according to the setting of Torque
Command/Speed Limit Selection
(Pn317).
Use the Speed Command Scale
(Pn302) to change the limit speed scale
for the analog input.
Analog ground 1
PCL
TREF2
Full
closing
Provides a torque command input (set

value: 1) according to the setting of
Torque Command/Speed Limit
Selection (Pn317).
Use the Torque Command Scale
17
AGND1
Analog ground 1
This is an analog signal ground.
18
NCL
Reverse torque limit

input
Provides a reverse torque limit input (set

value: 0 or 4) according to the setting of
Torque Limit Selection (Pn521).
24VIN
12 to 24-VDC power
supply input
This is the positive input terminal of the

external DC power supply for sequence
input (12 to 24 V).
Sequence input signal
These allocate the following function and logics according to the

settings of Input Signal Selection 1 to 10 (Pn400 to 409).
Reverse drive
prohibition input
This performs the drive prohibition input

in the reverse direction.
Changes to enable (set value: 0 or 2)
according to the setting of Drive
Prohibition Input Selection (Pn504).
This performs the drive prohibition input

in the forward direction.
according to the setting of Drive
Prohibition Input Selection (Pn504).

according to the setting of Vibration
Filter Selection (Pn213).
If the set value of Vibration Filter
Selection (Pn213) is 2, switching
between 4 settings is possible by
combining this with the vibration filter
switching input 2 (DFSEL2).
SI1 to SI10
NOT [8]
Forward drive
prohibition input
POT [9]
Vibration filter switching

1
8, 9, 26 to 33
Specifications
3-22
DFSEL1
[26]
CONTROL mode
Pin
number
Symbol
Name

Gain switching
This changes to enable (set value: 2)

according to the setting of GAIN
SWITCHING mode (Pn115 for position
control, Pn120 for speed control, or
Pn124 for torque control).
When the signal is OFF and ON, gain 1
and gain 2 change to enable,
respectively.
Switches the numerator for electronic

gear ratio.
You can switch maximum 4 electronic
gear ratio numerators by combining with
electronic gear switching input 2
(GESEL2).
Operation command
input
This turns ON the servo (motor power

supply starts).
Error counter reset

input
Resets the position error counter.

An edge (set value: 0) or level (set value:
1) can be selected according to the
setting of Error Counter Reset Condition
Selection (Pn517).
Release the alarm status.

The error counter is reset when the
alarm is reset.
Some alarms cannot be reset with this
input.
This signal switches the CONTROL

mode for Servo Drive.
Changes to enable (set value: 3 to 5)
according to the setting of CONTROL
mode Selection (Pn001).
Prohibits the position command pulse.

according to the setting of Command
Pulse Prohibition Input Setting (Pn518).
GSEL [27]
Electronic gear
switching 1
GESEL1
[28]
RUN [29]
Alarm reset input

RESET [31]
CONTROL mode
switching input
TVSEL [32]
Pulse prohibition input

IPG [33]
VSEL1 [33]

selection 1
VSEL2 [30]

selection 2
VSEL3 [28]

selection 3
Torque limit switching
TLSEL

2
DFSEL2
Full
closing
Use this input to select a desired Speed

Setting (Pn304 to 311) during the
internally set speed operation.
Switches the torque limit value via ON/

OFF.
according to the setting of Torque Limit
Selection (Pn521). The torque limit value
and operating direction vary according to
the set value.

according to the setting of Vibration
Filter Selection (Pn213).
Switching between 4 settings is possible
by combining this with the vibration filter
switching input 1 (DFSEL1).
3-23
Specifications
ECRST [30]
8, 9, 26 to 33
CONTROL mode
Pin
number
Symbol
Name
GESEL2
Electronic gear
switching 2
You can switch maximum 4 electronic

gear ratio numerators by combining with
electronic gear switching input 1
(GESEL1).
Zero speed designation

input
This signal forcibly sets the speed

command to 0.
Changes to enable (set value: 1 to 3)
according to the setting of Zero Speed
Designation Selection (Pn315).
Designates the motor rotation direction

for speed commands.
according to the setting of Speed
Command Direction Selection (Pn301).
VZERO
Speed command sign

input
VSING
3
Torque command sign
input
TSIGN
Emergency stop input

8, 9, 26 to 33
Specifications
EMG-STOP
Inertia ratio switching

input
JSEL
Full
closing
This signal designates the motor rotation

direction for torque commands.
according to the setting of Torque
Command Direction Selection (Pn318).
This is an emergency stop input.

When input, this becomes an
emergency stop input error and thereby
stop the motor.
This signal switches between inertia

ratio 1 and inertia ratio 2.
Be cautious that allocatable pin numbers are fixed for the following functions.
Error counter reset input (ECRST): Pin 30 only
Command pulse input prohibition input (IPG): Pin 33 only
The number in brackets indicates the pin number (allocation) at default setting. (The allocations
vary according to each CONTROL mode.)
CN1 Control Outputs

CONTROL mode
Pin
number
Symbol
Name
21
Encoder phase A
output
22
-A
Encoder phase A output
48
Encoder phase B
output
49
-B
Encoder phase B output
23
Encoder phase Z
output
24
-Z
Encoder phase Z output
3-24
Encoder signals (or external scale

signals during full closing control) are
output according to the setting of
Encoder Dividing Numerator (Pn011).
This is the line-driver output (equivalent
to RS-422). The maximum output
frequency is 4 Mpps.
Phase Z is output for encoder signals (or

external scale signals during full closing
control). This is the line-driver output
(equivalent to RS-422).
Full
closing
CONTROL mode
Pin
number
19
25
Symbol
Name

-Z
Encoder phase-Z
output
ZCOM
Encoder phase-Z
output common
SO1 to SO4
Sequence output signal These signals allocate the following functions according to the
settings of Output Signal Selections 1 to 4 (Pn410 to 413).
BKIR [11]
Brake interlock output
BKIRCOM
[10]
READY [35] Servo ready completed
READYCO
M [34]
Servo alarm
ALMCOM
[36]
INP1 [39]
Positioning completion
output 1
INP1COM
[38]
TGON [39]
WARN1COM
Zero speed detection

signal
This output turns ON when the motor

rotation speed is equal to Zero Speed
Detection (Pn434) or less.
Speed conformity
output
This output turns ON when the

command speed corresponds to the
motor rotation speed.
This output turns ON when the
difference between the command speed
and motor rotation speed is inside the
setting range of Speed Conformity
Detection Width (Pn435).
output 2
INP2COM
WARN1
If the position error is equal to

Positioning Completion Range 1
(Pn431) or less, this output turns ON
according to the setting condition of
Positioning Completion Condition
Selection (Pn432).
This output turns ON while the torque is

limited.
VCMPCOM
INP2
The output is OFF when an alarm is

generated for the Servo Drive.
Torque limiting output
ZSPCOM
VCMP
This output signal indicates that the

driver is turned ON and ready to start
operation.
It is turned ON when the control and
main power supply is established and
not in alarm status.
This output turns ON when the motor

rotation speed reaches the speed set in
Rotation Speed for Motor Rotation
Detection (Pn436).
TLIMTCOM
ZSP
Outputs the timing signal for operating

the electromagnetic brake on a motor.
Motor rotation speed

detection output
TGONCOM
[38]
TLIMT
Phase Z is output for encoder signals (or

external scale signals during full closing
control). Open-collector output
Warning output 1
If the position error is equal to

(Pn442) or less, this output turns ON
according to the setting condition of
Positioning Completion Condition
Selection (Pn432).
This output turns ON according to the

setting condition of Warning Output
Selection 1 (Pn440).
Full
closing
3-25
3
Specifications
/ALM [37]
10, 11, 34 to 39
CONTROL mode
Pin
number
Symbol
Name

WARN2
Warning output 2
WARN2COM
P-CMD
PCMDCOM
V-LIMIT
Specifications
10, 11, 34 to 39
ALM-ATB
ALMATBCOM
V-CMD
VCMDCOM
This output turns ON according to the

setting condition of Warning Output
Selection 1 (Pn440).
Position command
status output
This output turns ON when a positioning

command is input.
Speed limiting output
This turns ON during torque control or

speed limit status.
VLIMITCOM
Alarm clear attribute

output
This output turns ON when an alarm

occurs or the alarm can be cleared.
Speed command status

output
This output turns ON during speed

control or when a speed command is
input.
Full
closing
You cannot change the allocation for servo alarm output (/ALM). (The allocation is fixed.)
The number in brackets indicates the pin number (allocation) at default setting. (The allocations
vary according to each CONTROL mode.)
3-26
CN1 Pin Arrangement
+24VCW
+24VCCW
CW/
PULS/FA
CCW/
SIGN/FB
24-V
open-collector
input for
command pulse
3
Reverse pulses,
feed pulses, or 90
phase difference
signal (phase A)
5
Forward pulse,
direction signal, or
90 phase difference
signal (phase B)
+CW/
+PULS/+FA
+CCW/
+SIGN/+FB
SO1COM
11
NCL
SEN
Signal ground
AGND1
Analog
ground 1
AGND2
Analog
ground 2
39
SO2
General-purpose
output 2
/ALM
(SO3)
Alarm output
(general-purpose
output 3)
41
Sensor ON
undefined
+A
Encoder
phase Aoutput
Phase-Z
output
(open collector)
45
+Z
Encoder
phase Z+output
ZCOM
Phase-Z
(open collector)
common
Encoder
phase Zoutput
28
SI5
General-purpose
input 5
30
SI7
General-purpose
input 7
32
SI9
General-purpose
input 9
34
SO2COM
General-purpose
output 2
common
36
ALMCOM
(SO3COM)
Alarm output
common
(general-purpose
output 3 common)
38
SO4COM
General-purpose
output 4
common
General-purpose
output 4
BATGND
CWLD
Encoder
phase A+output
47
25
SI10
General-purpose
input10
SO4
General-purpose
input 3
40
43
23
24
General-purpose
input 1
SENGND
Reverse torque
limit input
21
22
SO1
37
19
20
SI2
17
General-purpose
input 8
General-purpose
input 2
35
Speed command 13
input, torque
REF/TREF1/
14
command input 1,
VLIM
speed limit input
Forward torque 15
limit input,
16 PCL/TREF2
torque command
input 2
18
+24VIN
SI3
General-purpose
input 6
SI8
12 to 24-VDC
power
supply input
26
General-purpose
input 4
CCWLD
49
+B
Absolute
encoder backup
battery input
Reverse pulse
(input for line
driver only)
Forward pulse
(input for line
driver only)
42
BAT
Absolute
encoder backup
battery input
44
+CWLD
Reverse pulse
(input for line
driver only)
46
+CCWLD
Forward pulse
(input for line
driver only)
48
Encoder
phase Boutput
Encoder
phase B+output
50
Note.Do not wire anything to unused pins (*).

For general-purpose inputs 1 to 10 (SI1 to 10) and general-purpose outputs (SO1, SO2 and SO4), use user
parameters Pn400 to Pn409 (Input Signal Selections 1 to 10) and Pn410 to Pn413 (Output Signal Selections 1 to
4) to set the function allocations.
The alarm output (/ALM) is fixed to general-purpose output 3.
To use an absolute encoder, connect a battery to either Pin 42 which is the backup battery input, or 43 which is
the battery holder for absolute encoder cable. (Never connect to both.)
Connectors for CN1 (Pin 50)

Name
Model
Driver connector
52986-3679
Cable plug
10150-3000PE
Cable case (shell kit)
10350-52A0-008
Manufacturer
Molex Japan
Sumitomo 3M
3-27
3
Specifications
12
General-purpose
output 1
common
SI6
33
9
10
SI4
31
General-purpose
input 1
SI1
24-V
open-collector
input for
command pulse
27
Reverse pulses,
feed pulses, or 90
phase difference
signal (phase A)
29
Forward pulse,
direction signal,or
90phase difference
signal (phase B)
Control Input Circuits

Speed Command Input, Torque Command Input and Speed Limit Input
20 k
47 k
REF/TREF1/VLIM14
Maximum
input voltage
10 V
47 k
470pF
1000 pF
47 k
15
1000 pF
470 pF
47 k
20 k
Specifications
1000 pF
TREL2/PCL/NCL16,18
Maximum
input voltage
12 V
14 k
20 k
20 k
1000 pF
10 k
17
The maximum allowable input voltage is 10 V for each input. The VR must be 2 k with B
characteristics and 1/2 W minimum. R must be 200 and 1/2 W minimum.
Position Command Pulse (Line Receiver Input)

When connecting with a line driver and a line receiver, up to 4 Mpps will be available.
(CWLD: 44, CWLD: 45, CCWLD: 46, CCWLD: 47)
Controller
Applicable
line driver
AM26LS31A or
equivalent
44,46
45,47
2 k
20 k
120
2 k
13
Applicable
line driver
20 k AM26C32 or
equivalent
The shielded twisted-pair cable should not exceed 20 m in length.
3-28
Position Command Pulse (Photocoupler Input)

Line Driver Input (500 kpps Maximum)
(CW: 3, CW: 4, CCW: 5, CCW: 6)
Controller
Driver
+
2.2 k
1000 pF
Applicable line driver

AM26LS31A or equivalent
220
The twisted-pair cable should not exceed 10 m in length.
Specifications
3-29
Open Collector Input

External 24-V power supply without a Current Limit Resistor (200 kpps maximum) (24 VCW: 1,
CW: 4, 24 VCCW: 2, CCW: 6)
Controller
Driver
Vcc 24 V
2.2 k
2.2 k
1000 pF
220
3
Specifications
External control power supply (200 kpps maximum) (CW: 3, CW: 4, CCW: 5, CCW: 6)
Controller
Driver
Vcc
2.2 k
2.2 k
1000 pF
220
Select a Current Limit Resistor (R) appropriate for Vcc.32

VCC
Vcc 1.5
R 220
10mA
(7 to 15 mA)
24 V
2 k (1/2 W)
12 V
1 k (1/2 W)
5V
0 (short)

The open collector wiring should not exceed 2 m in length.
3-30
General-purpose Input
External power supply
12 VDC 5% to
24 VDC 5%
+24VIN
SI1
4.7 k
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
Power supply capacity

50 mA or more
(per unit)
4.7 k
Signal level
ON level: 10 V or more
OFF level: 3 V or less
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
SI2
Minimum ON time 40 ms
To another input circuit GND common
To other input circuit
3
Sensor Input
Specifications
Sensor ON Input ABS
+5 V
SEN
20
100
4.7 K
At high level
Approx. 1 mA
1 F
7406 or equivalent
SENGND
13
SENGND
A PNP transistor is recommended.

The signal level is as follows.
H level: 2.0 V or more, L level: 0.8 V or less
3-31
Control Input Details

Details on the input pins for the CN1 connector are described here.
High-speed Photocoupler Input

Pin 3: Reverse pulse (CW), feed pulse (PULS), or phase A (FA)
Pin 5: Forward pulse (CCW), direction signal (SIGN), or phase B (FB)
Function
Specifications
The functions of these signals depend on the settings of the Command Pulse Rotation Direction
Switching Selection (Pn006) and the COMMAND PULSE mode Selection (Pn007).
Pn005 Pn006 Pn007 COMMAND
Set
Set
Set
PULSE
value value value
mode
0/2
90 phase
difference
signals
(quadruple
multiplier)
Input pins
Motor reverse command
3: FA
4: FA
5: FB
6: FB
Reverse
3: CW
pulse/forward 4: CW
pulse
5: CCW
6: CCW
Feed pulse/
direction
signal
Motor forward command
3: PULS
4: PULS
5: SIGN
6: SIGN
Note 1. If the Command Pulse Rotation Direction Switching Selection (Pn006) is set to 1, the rotation direction will be
reversed.
Note 2. If the photocoupler LED is turned ON, each signal will go high as shown above.
3-32
Command Pulse Timing for Photocoupler Inputs

COMMAND PULSE
mode
Timing
Forward command
Feed pulse/direction
signal
Maximum input frequency
Line driver:
500 kpps
Open collector:
200 kpps
Reverse command
Direction signal
t1 t2
t2 t1 t2
Feed pulse
t1
t1
T
t2 > 2.5 s
t2 > 1.0 s
2.5 s
1.0 s
T 5.0 s
T 2.0 s
(/T) 100 50 (%)
(/T) 100 50 (%)
3
Specifications
t1 0.1 s
Reverse command
Reverse pulse
t2
Forward pulse
t1
t1
At 200 kpps
At 500 kpps
t1 0.5 s
t1 0.1 s
t2 > 2.5 s
t2 > 1.0 s
2.5 s
1.0 s
T 5.0 s
T 2.0 s
(/T) 100 50 (%)
(/T) 100 50 (%)
Forward command
90 phase difference
signals
Line driver:
500 kpps
Open collector:
200 kpps
At 500 kpps
t1 0.5 s
Forward command
Reverse pulse/forward
pulse
Line driver:
500 kpps
Open collector:
200 kpps
At 200 kpps
Reverse command
Phase-A pulse
t1
t1
Phase-B pulse
At 200 kpps
At 500 kpps
t1 0.5 s
t1 0.1 s
10 s
4.0 s
T 20 s
T 8.0 s
(/T) 100 50 (%)
(/T) 100 50 (%)
3-33
Line Receiver Input

Function
The functions of these signals depend on the settings of the Command Pulse Rotation Direction
Switching Selection (Pn006) and the COMMAND PULSE mode Selection (Pn007).
Pn005 Pn006 Pn007 COMMAND

Set
Set
Set
PULSE
value value value
mode
Specifications
0/2
Input pins
90 phase
difference
signals
(quadruple
multiplier)
44: FA
45: FA
46: FB
47: FB
Reverse
pulse/
forward
pulse
44: CW
45: CW
46: CCW
47: CCW
Feed pulse/ 44: PULS

direction
45: PULS
signal
46: SIGN
47: SIGN
Motor forward command
Motor reverse command
Note 1. If the Command Pulse Rotation Direction Switching Selection (Pn006) is set to 1, the rotation direction will be
reversed.
3-34
Command Pulse Timing for Line Receiver Inputs

COMMAND PULSE
mode
Timing
Forward command
Feed pulse/direction
signal
Line driver:
4 Mpps
Reverse command
Direction signal
t1 t2
t2 t1 t2
Feed pulse
t1
t1
T
3
t1 20 ns
t2 > 500 ns
Specifications
250 ns
T 500 ns
(/T) 100 50 (%)
Reverse pulse/forward
pulse
Line driver:
4 Mpps
Forward command
Reverse command
Reverse pulse
t2
Forward pulse
t1
t1
t1 20 ns
t2 > 500 ns
250 ns
T 500 ns
(/T) 100 50 (%)
Forward command
90 phase difference
signals
Line driver:
4 Mpps
Reverse command
Phase-A pulse
t1
t1
Phase-B pulse
T
t1 20 ns
4.0 s
T 8.0 s
(/T) 100 50 (%)
3-35
Sensor ON Input (SEN)

Pin 20: Sensor ON input (SEN)
Pin 13: Signal ground (SENGND)
Function
This input changes to enable (set value: 1) according to the setting of Absolute Interface
Function Selection (Pn616).
When the SEN signal turns ON, this performs serial transmission of multi-rotation data of the
absolute encoder and also outputs 1-rotation data as the initial incremental pulses.
If the SEN signal is OFF, motor power supply is not possible even when the RUN signal
(Operation command) is input. The RUN signal changes to enable after the SEN signal turns
ON and the normal operation of encoder becomes ready.
Backup Battery Input (BAT)
Specifications
Pin 42: Backup battery input (BAT)

Pin 43: Backup battery input (BATGND)
Function
Backup battery connection terminals when the absolute encoder power is interrupted.
Normally do not connect anything to this terminal, because a battery is connected to the battery
holder for absolute encoder battery cable. (Never connect to both. Failure may result.)
Speed Command Input (REF), Torque Command Input (TREF1) and Speed Limit Input (VLIM)
Pin 14: Speed command input (REF), torque command Input (TREF1) and speed limit input
(VLIM)
Pin 15: Analog input ground (AGND1)
Function
During speed control
Speed command is input. Use the Speed Command Scale (Pn302) to change the rotation speed
During torque control
This signal provides either a torque command input (set value: 0 or 2) or speed limit input (set
value: 1) according to the setting of Torque Command/Speed Limit Selection (Pn317).
In the case of torque command input 1 (TREF1), you can use Torque Command Scale (Pn319)
to change the rotation speed scale relative to the command input.
In the case of speed limit input (VLIM), you can use the Speed Command Scale (Pn302) to
change the limit speed scale relative to the analog input.
3-36
Torque Command Input 2 (TREF2) and Forward Torque Limit Input (PCL)
Pin 16: Torque command input 2 (TREF2) and forward torque limit input (PCL)
Pin 17: Analog input ground 2 (AGND2)
Function
During position control, speed control or full closing control
This signal provides a forward torque limit input (set value: 0 or 4) or forward/reverse torque limit
input (set value: 5) according to the setting of Torque Limit Selection (Pn521).
You can use Analog Torque Limit Scale (Pn527) to change the torque limit scale relative to the
analog input.
This signal provides a torque command input (set value: 1) according to the setting of Torque
Command/Speed Limit Selection (Pn317).
In the case of torque command input 2 (TREF2), you can use Torque Command Scale (Pn319)
to change the rotation speed scale relative to the command input.
Reverse Torque Limit Input (NCL)
Function
During position control, speed control or full closing control
This signal provides a reverse torque limit input (set value: 0 or 4) according to the setting of
Torque Limit Selection (Pn521).
You can use Analog Torque Limit Scale (Pn527) to change the torque limit scale relative to the
analog input.
Operation command (RUN)

Pin 29: Operation command (RUN)
This is the allocation at default setting. You can change the logics and allocations for input
terminals (CN1 to 8, 9 and 26 to 33) according to the settings of Input Signal Selection 1 to 10
(Pn400 to 409).
You must always allocate the Operation command (RUN). If not, the servo does not turn ON.
Function
This input turns ON the power drive circuit for the main circuit of the Servo Drive. If this signal
is not input (servo OFF), the motor cannot drive.
Forward Drive Prohibition Input (POT) and Reverse Drive Prohibition Input (NOT)
Pin 9: Forward drive prohibition input (POT)
Pin 8: Reverse drive prohibition input (NOT)
This is the allocation at default setting. Note, however, that both signals are set to disable (drive
prohibition is disabled). You can use Drive Prohibition Input Setting (Pn504) to change these
settings. Also, you can change the logics and allocations for input terminals (CN1 to 8, 9 and
26 to 33) according to the settings of Input Signal Selection 1 to 10 (Pn400 to 409).
Function
These 2 signals are drive prohibition (overtravel) inputs in forward and reverse directions.
If Drive Prohibition Input Setting (Pn504) is 1, you can use the setting of Stop Selection
(Pn505) to select the operation to be taken upon input of each prohibit signal.
If Drive Prohibition Input Setting (Pn504) is 2, drive prohibition input protection (E380) actuates
upon input of a drive prohibition.
3-37
Specifications
Pin 18: Reverse torque limit input (NCL)

Pin 17: Analog input ground 2 (AGND2)
Alarm Reset Input (RESET)

Pin 31: Alarm reset input (RESET)
(Pn400 to 409).
The input logic for the alarm reset input (RESET) is always contact a. (You cannot set contact
b.)
Function
It is the external reset input for servo alarm. (A reset occurs at the rising edge of this input.)
Inputting for 120 ms or more releases an alarm condition.
An alarm reset also resets the content of the error counter, upon which the position loop
becomes no longer effective.
Eliminate the cause of the alarm before resuming operation. To prevent danger, turn OFF the
Operation command (RUN) first, then input the alarm reset signal.
Some alarms cannot be reset with this input.
3
Specifications
Error Counter Reset Input (ECRST)

Pin 30: Error counter reset input (ECRST)
This is the allocation at default setting. You can change the functions for input terminals (CN1
to 8, 9 and 26 to 33) according to the settings of Input Signal Selection 1 to 10 (Pn400 to 409).
You can only allocate the error counter reset input (ECRST) to pin 30 (SI7). Allocating to any
other terminal generates an error counter reset signal allocation error (A332).
The input logic for the error counter reset input (ECRST) is always contact a. (You cannot set
contact b.)
Function
Inputting the error counter reset resets the content of the error counter, upon which the position
loop becomes no longer effective.
You can use Error Counter Reset Condition Selection (Pn517) to set the status (level) signal
(ON) or differential (rising edge) signal (from OFF to ON).
Input the differential signal for at least 100 s, or status signal for at least 1 ms. A reset may
not occur if the time is shorter.
CONTROL mode Switching (TVSEL)

Pin 32: CONTROL mode switching (TVSEL)
(Pn400 to 409).
Function
If the CONTROL mode Selection (Pn001) is set to 3 to 5, the CONTROL mode can be switched
as given in the following table.
Pn001 set value
3-38
OFF (FIRST CONTROL mode)
ON (SECOND CONTROL mode)
Position control
Speed control
Position control
Torque control
Speed control
Torque control
Gain Switching (GSEL)

Pin 27: Gain switching (GSEL)
(Pn400 to 409).
Function
This signal changes to enable (set value: 2) according to the setting of GAIN SWITCHING
mode (Pn115 for position control, Pn120 for speed control, or Pn124 for torque control).
When the signal is OFF and ON, gain 1 and gain 2 change to enable, respectively.
Vibration Filter Switching 1 (DFSEL1) and Vibration Filter Switching 2 (DFSEL2)

Pin 26: Vibration filter switching 1 (DFSEL1)
No allocation: Vibration filter switching 2 (DFSEL2)
(Pn400 to 409).
Use the sequence signal to switch among the 4 filters for use in damping control when the
setting of Vibration Filter Selection (Pn213) is enable (set value: 1 or 2).
Pn213 set
value
DFSEL1
DFSEL2
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Vibration
filter 1
Vibration
filter 2
Enabled
Vibration
filter 3
Vibration
filter 4
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
2
Enabled
Enabled
Electronic Gear Switching 1 (GESEL1) and Electronic Gear Switching 2 (GESEL2)

Pin 28: Electronic gear switching 1 (GESEL1)
No allocation: Electronic gear switching 2 (GESEL2)
(Pn400 to 409).
Function
Use these 2 signals to switch among up to 4 electronic gear ratio numerators.
GESEL1
GESEL2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Electronic
Gear 1
Electronic
Gear 2
Electronic
Gear 3
Electronic
Gear 4
Pn009 valid
Pn500 valid
Pn501 valid
Pn502 valid
Electronic Gear Ratio Denominator (Pn010) is a common setting.

3-39
Specifications
Function
Pulse Prohibition Input (IPG)

Pin 33: Pulse prohibition input (IPG)
This is the allocation at default setting. However, Command Pulse Prohibition Input (Pn518) is
set to disable (set value: 1). To use this, change Pn518 to enable (set value: 0). You can
change the functions for input terminals (CN1 to 8, 9 and 26 to 33) according to the settings of
Input Signal Selection 1 to 10 (Pn400 to 409).
You can only allocate the pulse prohibition input (ECRST) to pin 33 (SI10). Allocating this input
to any other terminal generates a pulse prohibition input allocation error (A337).
Function
You can use this input to forcibly stop the command pulse input.
When this input is ON, the driver ignores the command pulse input and does not count pulses.
Internally Set Speed Selection 1, 2 and 3 (VSEL1, 2 and 3)
3
Specifications
Pin 33: Internally set speed selection 1 (VSEL1) Pin 30: Internally set speed selection 2
(VSEL2)
Pin 28: Internally set speed selection 3 (VSEL3)
This is the allocation at default setting. However, Command Speed Selection (Pn300) is set to
disable (set value: 0). To use this, change Command Speed Selection (Pn300) to enable (set
value: 1 to 3). You can change the logics and allocations for input terminals (CN1 to 8, 9 and
26 to 33) according to the settings of Input Signal Selection 1 to 10 (Pn400 to 409).
Function
Perform speed control according to the internal speed set value in the parameter.
You can select from up to 8 internal speed set values.
Pn300 set value
VSEL1
VSEL2
VSEL3
Speed command selection
OFF
OFF
No. 1 Internally Set Speed (Pn304)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Analog speed command input (REF)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
To use the internally set speed, use the zero speed designation input (VZERO) as contact b.(If
this is OFF, the speed command becomes 0.)The zero speed designation input (VZERO) is
set to disable (set value: 0) by default. To use this, change Zero Speed Designation Selection
(Pn315) to enable (set value: 1 to 2).
(If the zero speed designation input is not used, the motor turns at No. 1 Internally Set Speed
(Pn304) when the servo turns ON.)
3-40
Zero Speed Designation (VZERO)

No allocation: Zero speed designation (VZERO)
There is no allocation at default setting. Also, Zero Speed Designation Selection (Pn315) is set
to disable (set value: 1). You can change the logics and allocations for input terminals (CN1 to
8, 9 and 26 to 33) according to the settings of Input Signal Selection 1 to 10 (Pn400 to 409).
Function
You can use this input to forcibly change the speed command to 0.
This signal changes to enable (set value: 1 to 3) according to the setting of Zero Speed
Designation Selection (Pn315).
Pn300 set value
Operation when ON
Zero speed designation is disabled.
The speed command becomes 0.
The speed command becomes 0, and a position lock occurs at a motor rotation
speed equal to Position Lock Level Setting (Pn316) or less.
A position lock occurs at a command speed equal to Position Lock Level Setting (Pn316) or less.
Speed Command Sign Input (VSIGN)

No allocation: Speed command sign designation (VSIGN)
There is no allocation at default setting. Also, Speed Command Direction Selection (Pn301) is
set to disable (set value: 0). You can change the logics and allocations for input terminals (CN1
Function
You can use this input to designate the rotation direction relative to the speed command.
If Speed Command Direction Selection (Pn301) is enable (set value: 1), the polarity of analog
command input and rotation direction at internal command speed become disabled.
Pn301 set value
Pn303 set value
VSIGN
0
Operation
Disabled
0
1
OFF
1
Setting
Disabled
ON
Pn301 set value
VSIGN
OFF
0
ON
OFF
1
ON
Analog speed command input (REF) Motor rotation direction

Voltage (0 to 10 V)
Forward operation
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Reverse operation
Voltage (0 to 10 V)
Reverse operation
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Forward operation
Voltage (0 to 10 V)
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Voltage (0 to 10 V)
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Internal command speed
Forward operation
Reverse operation
Motor rotation direction
(Forward command: 0 to 20,000 r/min)
Forward operation
(Reverse command: 20,000 to 0 r/min)
Reverse operation
Forward operation
Reverse operation

Forward operation
Reverse operation
3-41
3
Specifications
Torque Limit Switching (TLSEL)

No allocation: Torque Limit Switching (TLSEL)
There is no allocation at default setting. You can change the logics and allocations for input
(Pn400 to 409).
Function
This input is used for switching the torque limit value.
This signal changes to enable (set value: 3 or 6) according to the setting of Torque Limit
Selection (Pn521).
Pn521 set value
TLSEL
Forward
Reverse
OFF
Pn013 (No. 1 Torque Limit)
ON
OFF
ON
Pn525 (Forward External Torque Limit) Pn526 (Reverse External Torque Limit)
3
Specifications
Torque Command Sign Input (TSIGN)

No allocation: Torque command sign input (TSIGN)
There is no allocation at default setting. Also, Torque Command Direction Selection (Pn318) is
set to disable (set value: 0). You can change the logics and allocations for input terminals (CN1
Function
You can use this input to designate the rotation direction relative to the torque command.
If Torque Command Direction Selection (Pn301) is enable (set value: 1), the polarity of torque
command input is disabled.
Pn318
Set value
Pn320
Set value
TSIGN
0
Operation
Disabled
0
1

(TREF)
Motor rotation
direction
Voltage (0 to 10 V)
Forward operation
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Reverse operation
Voltage (0 to 10 V)
Reverse operation
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Forward operation
Voltage (0 to 10 V)
OFF
1
Setting
Disabled
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Forward operation
Voltage (0 to 10 V)
ON
Voltage (10 to 0 V)
Reverse operation
Emergency Stop Input (EMG-STP)

No allocation: Emergency stop input (EMG-STP)
There is no allocation at default setting. You can change the logics and allocations for input
(Pn400 to 409).
Function
This is an external alarm stop input.
Upon input of an emergency stop, the system stops according to the set value of Stop
Selection for Alarm Generation (Pn510).
3-42
Inertia Ratio Switching Input (JSEL)

No allocation: Inertia ratio switching input (JSEL)
(Pn400 to 409).
Function
You can switch the inertia ratio between Inertia Ratio 1 (Pn004) and Inertia Ratio 2 (Pn613).
When this signal is OFF, Inertia Ratio 1 (Pn004) becomes valid. If ON, Inertia Ratio 2 (Pn613)
becomes valid.
3
Specifications
3-43
Control Output Circuits

Position Feedback Output
Servo Drive
Controller
R = 120 to 180
21 +A
+A
Phase A
22 A
Output line driver

AM26C31 or
equivalent
Phase B
49 +B
+B
48 B
23 +Z
+Z
24 Z
Specifications
Phase Z
25 ZCOM
0V
+5 V
Phase A
Phase B
Phase Z
0V
GND
0V
Shell FG
FG
Applicable line receiver

AM26C32 or equivalent
FG
Phase-Z Output (Open Collector Output)

Driver
Controller
19 Z
Maximum service voltage: 30 VDC or less
Maximum output current: 50 mA or less
0V
25 ZCOM
Shell
FG
FG
FG
Sequence Output
Servo Drive
10 +
External power supply 12 to 24 VDC

Maximum output current: 50mA max.
Di
Di: Surge voltage prevention diode

(Use a high-speed diode.)
3-44
Control Output Details

Control Output Sequence
Control power supply
(L1C and L2C)
ON
OFF
Approx. 100 to 300 ms
Internal control
power supply
MPU initialization
completed
OFF
ON
Approx. 1.5 s
Approx. 2 s
Iinitialization *3
OFF
0 s or more
ON
Specifications
Main circuit power

supply
(L1, L2 and L3)
ON
OFF
Approx. 10 ms after initialization and main circuit ON *2
Servo ready
completed output
(READY)
Alarm output
(ALM)
Positioning
completion output
(INP)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0 ms or more
Operation
command input
(RUN)
ON
OFF
Approx. 2 ms
Dynamic brake
ON
OFF
Approx. 60 ms
Motor power supply
Pn437
ON
OFF
Approx. 4 ms
Brake interlock
output (BKIR)
1 to 6 ms
ON
OFF
100 ms or more*1
Servo position, speed,

torque input
ON
OFF
*1. In this section, the hardware inputs the servo ON signal, but the signal is not accepted.
*2. The servo ready completed output turns ON the moment the conditions of MPU initialization completed and main
circuit power supply establishment are both satisfied.
*3. Operation of the protective function starts approx. 1.5 seconds after the start of MPU initialization following an
establishment of internal control power supply. Make sure all I/O signals which connect to the amplifier (especially
forward/reverse direction, drive prohibition input and external scale input) are established before operation of the
protective function starts. Also, you can increase this time with Pn618 "Power Supply ON Initialization Time."
3-45
Encoder Outputs (Phases A, B and Z)

Pin 21: A, 22: -A, 48: -B, 49: B, 23: Z, 24: -Z
Function
It outputs the phase A, phase B, and phase Z encoder signals for the Servomotor.
The encoder outputs conform to the RS-422 communication method.
You can use External Feedback Pulse Dividing Numerator Setting (Pn324) and External
Feedback Pulse Dividing Denominator Setting (Pn325) to set the dividing ratio.
The logical relation of phase B to the phase A pulse and the output source are set in the External
Feedback Pulse Direction Switching (Pn326).
The ground for the output circuit line driver is connected to the signal ground (SENGND). It is not
isolated.
The maximum output frequency is 4 Mpps (after quadruple multiplier).

The output frequency the motor encoder resolution (Pn324/Pn325) 4 motor rotation speed
(r/min)/60
Specifications
The output phases are as shown below. (They are the same for both incremental and absolute
encoders.)
Phase A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase B
Phase Z
Phase Z
Synchronous
If the motor encoder
resolution Pn324/Pn325
is a multiple of 4, phases Z
and A are synchronized.
3-46
Asynchronous
In cases except for the one
on the left, phases A and Z
are not synchronized.
Brake Interlock Output (BKIR)

Pin 11: Brake interlock output (BKIR)
Pin 10: Brake interlock output common (BKIRCOM)
This is the allocation at default setting. You can change the allocations of output terminals
(CN1 to 10, 11, 34, 35, 38 and 39) according to the settings of Output Signal Selections 1 to 4
(Pn410 to 413).
Function
This outputs an external brake timing signal according to the settings of the Brake Timing when
Stopped (Pn437) and Brake Timing during Operation (Pn438).
Servo Ready Completed Output (READY)
Function
This output signal indicates that the driver is turned ON and ready to start operation.
It is turned ON when the control and main power supply is established and not in alarm status.
Alarm Output (/ALM)

Pin 37: Alarm Output (/ALM)
Pin 36: Alarm output common (ALMCOM)
The alarm output terminal is fixed to pin 36 or 37.
Function
The output is turned OFF when the driver detects an error.
This output is OFF at power supply ON, but turns ON when the driver's initial processing has
been completed.
Positioning Completion Output 1 (INP1) and Positioning Completion Output 2 (INP2)

Pin 39: Positioning completion output 1 (INP1)
Pin 38: Positioning completion output common (INP1COM)
No allocation: Positioning completion output 2 (INP2)
No allocation: Positioning completion output 2 (INP2COM)
(Pn410 to 413).
Function
The INP1 turns ON when the error counter accumulated pulse is less than or equal to the
Positioning Completion Range 1 (Pn431) set value.
The INP2 turns ON when the error counter accumulated pulse is less than or equal to the
Positioning Completion Range 2 (Pn442) set value.
The output turns ON according to Positioning Completion Condition Selection (Pn432).
3-47
3
Specifications
Pin 35: Servo ready completed output (READY)

Pin 34: Servo ready completed output common (READYCOM)
(Pn410 to 413).
Speed Conformity Output (TGON)

Pin 39: Speed conformity output (TGON)
Pin 39: Speed conformity output common (TGONCOM)
This is the allocation at default setting. You can change the allocations of output terminals (CN1 to
10, 11, 34, 35, 38 and 39) according to the settings of Output Signal Selections 1 to 4 (Pn410 to 413).
Function
It turns ON when the speed of the Servomotor exceeds the set value of the Rotation Speed for
Motor Rotation Detection (Pn436).
Torque Limiting Signal (TLIMT)

No allocation: Torque limiting signal (TLIMT)
No allocation: Torque limiting signal common (TLIMCOM)
3
Specifications
Function
This output turns ON while the torque is limited.
Zero Speed Detection Signal (ZSP)

No allocation: Zero speed detection signal (ZSP)
No allocation: Zero speed detection signal common (ZSPCOM)
Function
This output turns ON when the motor rotation speed is equal to Zero Speed Detection (Pn434) or less.
Speed Conformity Output Signal (VCMP)

No allocation: Speed conformity output signal (VCMP)
No allocation: Speed conformity output signal common (VCMPCOM)
(Pn410 to 413).
Function
This output turns ON when the command speed corresponds to the motor rotation speed.
This output turns ON when the difference between the command speed and motor rotation
speed is inside the setting range of Speed Conformity Detection Width (Pn435).
Warning Output 1 (WARN1) and Warning Output 2 (WARN2)

No allocation: Warning output 1 (WARN1) and warning output 2 (WARN2)
No allocation: Warning output 1 common (WARN1COM) and warning output 2 common
(WARN2COM)
(Pn410 to 413).
Function
The output turns ON according to the setting conditions of Warning Output Selection 1 (Pn440)
and Warning Output Selection 2 (Pn441).
3-48
Position Command Status Output (P-CMD)

No allocation: Position command status output (P-CMD)
No allocation: Position command status output common (P-CMDCOM)
(Pn410 to 413).
Function
This output turns ON when a positioning command is input.
Speed Limiting Output (V-LIMIT)

No allocation: Speed limiting output (V-LIMIT)
No allocation: Speed limiting output common (V-LIMITCOM)
(Pn410 to 413).
This turns ON during torque control or speed limit status.
Alarm Clear Attribute Output (ALM-ATB)

No allocation: Alarm clear attribute output (ALM-ATB)
No allocation: Alarm clear attribute output common (ALM-ATB COM)
(Pn410 to 413).
Function
This output turns ON when an alarm occurs or the alarm can be cleared.
Speed Command Status Output (V-CMD)

No allocation: Speed command status output (V-CMD)
No allocation: Speed command status output common (V-CMDCOM)
(Pn410 to 413).
Function
This output turns ON during speed control or when a speed command is input.
3-49
Specifications
Function
Encoder Connector Specifications (CN2)

Pin
number
Name
E5V
Encoder power supply 5 V Power supply output for the encoder
E0V
Encoder power supply GND
BAT
Battery
BAT
Battery
PS
Encoder phase S
input
PS
Encoder phase S
input
Shell
FG
Frame ground
Specifications
Symbol
Backup power supply output for the absolute encoder
Encoder signal I/O (serial signal)
Frame ground

Name
Model
Driver connector
53460-0629
Cable connector
55100-0670
Manufacturer
Molex Japan
External Encoder Connector Specifications (CN4)

Connects to the external encoder.
Pin
number
1
Symbol
Name

Use at 5.2 V 5% and at or below 250 mA.
E5V
External encoder power supply
output
E0V
PS
/PS
EXA
/EXA
EXB
/EXB
EXZ
10
/EXZ
Shell
FG
External encoder signal I/O

(Serial signal)
This is connected to the control circuit ground connected to

connector CN1.
Performs the serial signal input and output.
Performs the input and output of phase A, B, and Z signals.
External encoder signal input

(Phase A, B, and Z signals)
Frame ground
Frame ground

Name
Model
Connector MUF-PK10K-X
3-50
Manufacturer
JST Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Connection of External Encoder Input Signal and Processing of External Signals

5V
E5V
External encoder power supply output
52 V 5%
E0V
250 mA max
Serial number
Phase A
Phase B
2
GND
+EXS
EXS
+EXA
EXA
+EXB
EXB
+EXZ
4.7 k
4.7 k
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
4.7 k
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
EXZ 10
FG
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
Specifications
Phase Z
Shell
FG
External Encoder Input Signals List

External encoder I/O (CN4)
Pin
number
Symbol
E5V
E0V
EXS
EXS
EXA
EXA
EXB
EXB
EXZ
10
EXZ
Name
External encoder power

supply output
External encoder power supply 5.2 VDC 5%, 250

mA max.
If the above capacity is to be exceeded, provide a
separate power supply.
External encoder signal

Serial interface
This is an external encoder serial bi-directional

signal.*(Conforming to EIA485)
Maximum response frequency 400 Mpps
External encoder signal

90 phase difference input
(Phases A, B and Z)
This is an external encoder 90 phase input signal.*

Maximum response frequency 4 Mpps (quadruple
multiplier)
EXA
t1
t1
EXB
t1
t1
t2
t1>0.25 s
t2>1.0 s
Connect external encoder signals to the serial interface (EXS/EXS) or 90 phase difference input
according to the encoder type.
3-51
Connector for CN4 (Pin 10)

Name
Model
MUF connector
Manufacturer
MUF-PK10K-X
JST Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Example of Connection with External Encoder

90 Phase Difference Input Type (Pn323 = 0)
Driver side (CN4)
External encoder side
5V
E5V
E0V
52 V 5% 250 mA max
+5 V
Power supply area
Specifications
0V
Phase A
Phase B
Phase Z
GND
PA
+EXA
/PA
EXA
PB
+EXB
/PB
EXB
PC
+EXZ
/PC
EXZ 10
FG
FG
4.7 k
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
4.7 k
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
4.7 k
Photocoupler input
1.0 k
Shell
FG
Serial Communications Type, Incremental Encoder Specifications (Pn323 = 1)

Magnescale incremental by Sony
Manufacturing Systems Corporation SR75/SR85
Driver side (CN4)

5V
E5V 1
E0V 2
GND
+EXS 3
EXS 4
Serial number
FG
FG
Shell
FG
3-52
Serial Communications Type, Absolute Encoder Specifications (Pn323 = 2)

Absolute encoder by
Mitutoyo Corporation
ABS ST771A/ST773A
Driver side (CN4)

5V
E5V 1
3 4 11
+5 V
1 2 13
GND
E0V 2
GND
7 +REQ/+SD
+EXS 3
8 REQ/+SD
EXS 4
Serial number
Shell
FG
FG
Shell
FG
Specifications
3-53
Monitor Connector Specifications (CN5)

Monitor Output Signals List
Monitor output (CN5)
Pin
Number
Symb
ol
Name
Analog monitor output 1
Outputs the analog signal for the monitor.

Default setting: Motor rotation speed 1 V/(1,000 r/min)
You can use Pn416 and Pn417 to change the item and
unit.
You can use Pn421 to change the output method.
Analog monitor output 2
Outputs the analog signal for the monitor.

Default setting: Motor rotation speed 1 V/(1,000 r/min)
You can use Pn418 and Pn419 to change the item and
unit.
You can use Pn421 to change the output method.
AM1
Specifications
3
2
AM2
GND
Analog monitor ground
Ground for analog monitors 1, 2
Not used
Do not connect.
Not used
Do not connect.
Not used
Do not connect.

Name
Model
Manufacturer
Connector housing
51004-0600
Molex Japan
Connector terminal
50011-8000
Molex Japan
Monitor output circuit

Servo Drive
1 k
1/2 AM1/AM2
Monitor equipment
3 GND
3-54
USB Connector Specifications (CN7)

Through the USB connection with computer, operations such as parameter setting and
changing, monitoring of control status, checking error status and error history, and parameter
saving and loading can be performed.
Pin
number
Symbol
Name
VBUS
Use this function for computer communication.
Reserved for manufacturer use Do not connect.
SENGND
Signal ground
USB signal terminal
Signal ground
Specifications
3-55
Safety Connector Specifications (CN8)

Connection of Safety I/O Signals and Processing of External Signals
SF1+
4 4 k
12 to 24 VDC
1 k
SF1
Specifications
3
SF2+
10
6 4 k
12 to 24 VDC
EDM+
Maximum service voltage:
30 VDC or less
Maximum output current:
50 mADC
EDM
1 k
SF2
Shell
FG
Safety I/O Signals List

Safety I/O (CN8)
Pin
Number
Symbol
SF1
SF1
SF2
SF2
EDM
EDM
Shell
FG
Name
Reserved
Do not connect.
Safety input 1
Inputs 1 and 2 for operating the STO function, which are

2 independent circuits. This input turns OFF the power
transistor drive signals in the Servo Drive to cut off the
current output to the motor.
Safety input 2
EDM output
A monitor signal is output to detect a safety function

failure.
Frame ground
Connected to the ground terminal inside the Servo Drive.
Connector for CN8 (Pin 8)

Name
Industrial Mini I/O Connector
(D-SHAPE1)
3-56
Model
2013595-1
Manufacturer
Tyco Electronics AMP KK
Safety Input Circuit

Servo Drive
SF1+
12 VDC 5% to
24 VDC 5%
4.7 k
1.0 k
Signal level
ON level: 10 V or more
OFF level: 3 V max.
SF1
SF2+
4.7 k
1.0 k
SF2
Photocoupler
input
Photocoupler
input
Servo Drive
10
8 EDM
7 +EDM
X
Di

12 to 24 VDC
Maximum output current: 50 mA max.
Di: Surge voltage prevention diode

(Use a high-speed diode.)
3-57
Specifications
EDM Output Circuit
3-2 Overload Characteristics (Electronic Thermal Function)
3-2 Overload Characteristics

(Electronic Thermal Function)
An overload protection function (electronic thermal) is built into the driver to protect the driver
and motor from overloading.
If an overload does occur, first eliminate the cause of the error and then wait at least 1 minute
for the motor temperature to drop before turning ON the power again.
If the alarm reset is repeated at short intervals, the motor windings may burn out.
Overload Characteristics Graphs

The following graphs show the characteristics of the load ratio and electronic thermal function's
operation time.
3
Specifications
Time [sec]
100
[100 V, 200 V]
3,000-r/min motors
50 W
100 W (100 V)
100 W (200 V)
200 W
400 W
750 W
10
0.1
115
100
150
200
250
Time [sec]
100
300 Torque [%]
[200 V]
3,000-r/min motors 1.0 kW to 5.0 kW
2,000-r/min motors
1,000-r/min motors
[400 V]
3,000-r/min motors
2,000-r/min motors
1,000-r/min motors
10
0.1
115
100
150
200
250
300 Torque [%]
When the torque command = 0, and a constant torque command is continuously applied after
3 or more times the overload time constant has elapsed, the overload time t [s] will be:
t [s] Overload time constant [s] log e (1 Overload level [%] / Torque command [%]) 2
(The overload time constant [s] depends on the motor. The standard overload level is 115%.)
3-58
3-3 Motor Specifications

The following Accurax G5 AC Servomotors are available.
3,000-r/min motors
2,000-r/min motors
1,000-r/min motors
There are various options available, such as models with brakes, Decelerators, or different
shaft types.
Select a Servomotor based on the mechanical system's load conditions and the installation
environment.
General Specifications
3
3,000-r/min motors
Item
Ambient operating
temperature and
operating humidity
0 to 40C, 20% to 80% RH

(with no condensation)
Storage ambient
20 to 65C, 20% to 80%
temperature and humidity RH (with no condensation)
Guaranteed maximum
temperature of 80C (72
hours at normal
temperature)
1 to 5 kW
900 W to 15 kW
0 to 40C, 20% to 85% RH (with no condensation)
20 to 65C, 20% to 85% RH (with no condensation)

Guaranteed maximum temperature of 80C (72 hours at
normal temperature)
Operating and storage

atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Vibration resistance *1
Acceleration of 49 m/s2
24.5 m/s2 max. in X, Y, and Z directions when the motor is stopped
Impact resistance
Acceleration of 98 m/s2 max. 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Insulation resistance
Between power terminal and FG terminal: 20 M min. (at 500 VDC Megger)
Dielectric strength
1,500 VAC between power terminal and FG terminal (sensed current 10 mA) for 1 min
(voltage 200 V)
1,800 VAC between power terminal and FG terminal (sensed current 10 mA) for 1 min
(voltage 400 V)
1,000 VAC between brake terminal and FG terminal (sensed current 10 mA) for 1 min
Protective structure
IP67 (except for through-shaft parts and motor and encoder connector pins)
International standard
EC
EMC
directive directive
Low
voltage
directive
EN 55011 class A group 1

EN61000-6-2, IEC61800-3 and IEC61326-3-1
EN60034-1/-5
UL standards
UL1004
CSA standards
CSA22.2 No. 100
*1. The amplitude may be amplified by machine resonance. Do not exceed 80% of the specified value for extended periods of time.
Note 1. Do not use the cable when it is laying in oil or water.
Note 2. Do not expose the cable outlet or connections to stress due to bending or the weight of the cable itself.
3-59
Specifications
50 to 750 W
1,000-r/min motors
2,000-r/min motors
Characteristics
3,000-r/min Motors
100 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
K10030L
K20030L
K40030L
K05030T
K10030S
K20030S
K40030S
Rated output
*1
50
100
200
400
Rated torque
*1
Nm
0.16
0.32
0.64
1.3
Rated rotation speed
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
6,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
0.48
0.95
1.91
3.8
Rated current *1
A (rms)
1.2
1.6
2.5
4.6
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
5.1
6.9
10.6
19.5
Without brake kg m2
0.02510-4
0.05110-4
0.1410-4
0.2610-4
kg m2
0.02710-4
0.05410-4
0.1610-4
0.2810-4
0.2110%
Rotor
inertia
With brake
Applicable load inertia
30 times the rotor inertia max. *
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.1110%
0.1310%
0.1910%
Power rate Without brake kW/s

*1
With brake
kW/s
10.1
19.8
29.0
62.4
9.4
18.8
25.4
58.0
Mechanical Without brake ms

time constant With brake
ms
1.37
1.07
0.65
0.46
1.48
1.13
0.74
0.50
Electrical time constant
ms
0.80
0.91
3.0
3.4
Allowable radial load
*3
68
68
245
245
Allowable thrust load
*3
58
58
98
98
kg
Approx. 0.32
Approx. 0.47
Approx. 0.82
Approx. 1.2
kg
Approx. 0.53
Approx. 0.68
Approx. 1.3
Approx. 1.7
KTA5L
KT01L
KT02L
KT04L
210-7
210-7
1.810-6
1.810-6
Weight Without brake

With brake
Radiator plate dimensions (material) 100 80 t10 (AI)

Applicable drivers (R88D-)
Brake specifications
Specifications
Unit
K05030H
m2
130 120 t12 (AI)
Brake inertia
kg
Excitation voltage *4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.3
0.3
0.36
0.36
Static friction torque
Nm
0.29 min.
0.29 min.
1.27 min.
1.27 min.
Attraction time *
ms
35 max.
35 max.
50 max.
50 max.
*5
ms
20 max.
20 max.
15 max.
20 max.
Release time
Backlash
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
39.2
39.2
137
137
Allowable total work
4.9103
4.9103
44.1103
44.1103
3-60
100 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K05030H
K10030L
K20030L
K40030L
K05030T
K10030S
K20030S
K40030S
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
30,000 max.
(Speed of 2,800 r/min or more must not be changed in less than 10 ms.)
Brake limit
10 million times min.
Rating
Continuous
Type B
Insulation class
3
Specifications
3-61
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Specifications
Unit
K05030H
K10030H
K20030H
K40030H
K05030T
K10030T
K20030T
K40030T
Rated output *1
50
100
200
400
Rated torque *1
Nm
0.16
0.32
0.64
1.3
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
6,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
0.48
0.95
1.91
3.8
Rated current *1
A (rms)
1.2
1.1
1.5
2.4
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
5.1
4.7
6.5
10.2
Without brake kg m2
0.02510-4
0.05110-4
0.1410-4
0.2610-4
kg m2
0.02710-4
0.054 10-4
0.1610-4
0.2810-4
30 times the rotor inertia max.*2
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.1110%
0.2110%
0.3110%
0.3910%
10.1
19.9
29.0
62.4
9.4
18.8
25.4
58.0
Rotor
inertia
With brake

*1
With brake
kW/s
time
With brake
ms
constant
1.37
1.12
0.58
0.44
1.48
1.20
0.66
0.47
ms
0.80
0.77
3.2
3.4
Allowable radial load *3
68
68
245
245
Allowable thrust load *3
58
58
98
98
kg
Approx. 0.32
Approx. 0.47
Approx. 0.82
Approx. 1.2
kg
Approx. 0.53
Approx. 0.68
Approx. 1.3
Approx. 1.7
With brake

3-62
KT01H
130 120 t12 (AI)

KT01H
KT02H
KT04H
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K10030H
K20030H
K40030H
K05030T
K10030T
K20030T
K40030T
Brake inertia
kg m2
210-7
210-7
1.810-6
1.810-6
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.3
0.3
0.36
0.36
Nm
0.29 min.
0.29 min.
1.27 min.
1.27 min.
Attraction time *
ms
35 max.
35 max.
50 max.
50 max.
Release time *5
ms
20 max.
20 max.
15 max.
15 max.
Backlash
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
39.2
39.2
137
137
4.9103
4.9103
44.1103
44.1103
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
30,000 max.
(Speed of 2,800 r/min or more must not be changed in less than 10 ms.)
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type B
3-63
Specifications
K05030H
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Specifications
Unit
K75030H
K1K030H
K1K530H
K75030T
K1K030T
K1K530T
Rated output *1
750
1000
1500
Rated torque *1
Nm
2.4
3.18
4.77
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
6,000
5,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
7.1
9.55
14.3
Rated current *1
A (rms)
4.1
6.6
8.2
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
17.4
28
35
Without brake kg m2
0.8710-4
2.0310-4
2.8410-4
kg m2
0.9710-4
2.3510-4
3.1710-4
20 times the rotor inertia max. 15 times the rotor inertia max. *2
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.4210%
0.37
0.45

*1
With brake
kW/s
65.6
49.8
80.1
58.8
43.0
71.8

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.39
0.61
0.49
0.43
0.71
0.55
ms
5.4
5.8
6.3
490
490
490
196
196
196
kg
Approx. 2.3
Approx. 3.5
Approx. 4.4
kg
Approx. 3.1
Approx. 4.5
Approx. 5.4
Rotor
inertia
With brake
With brake
320 300 t20 (AI)
KT15H
3-64
KT08H
KT15H
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K1K030H
K1K530H
K75030T
K1K030T
K1K530T
Brake inertia
kg m2
0.3310-4
0.3310-4
0.3310-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
17
19
19
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.7010%
0.8110%
0.8110%
Nm
2.5 min.
7.8 min.
7.8 min.
Attraction time *
ms
50 max.
50 max.
50 max.
Release time *5
ms
15 max. *6
15 max. *6
15 max. *6
1 (reference value)
Backlash
Allowable work per

braking
392
392
392
4.9105
4.9105
4.910-5
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type B
Specifications
K75030H
Type F
3-65
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Specifications
Unit
K2K030H
K3K030H
K4K030H
K5K030H
K2K030T
K3K030T
K4K030T
K5K030T
Rated output *1
2000
3000
4000
5000
Rated torque *1
Nm
6.37
9.55
12.7
15.9
r/min
3,000
Maximum rotation speed
r/min
5,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
19.1
28.6
38.2
47.7
Rated current *1
A (rms)
11.3
18.1
19.6
24.0
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
48
77
83
102
Without
brake
kg m2
3.68x10-4
6.50x10-4
12.9x10-4
17.4x10-4
With brake
kg m2
4.01x10-4
7.85x10-4
14.2x10-4
18.6x10-4
30 times the rotor inertia max. *2
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.44
0.41
0.49
0.49
Without
brake
kW/s
110
140
126
146
With brake
kW/s
101
116
114
136
ms
0.44
0.41
0.51
0.50
ms
0.48
0.49
0.56
0.54
ms
6.7
11
12
13
490
784
196
343
Without
brake
kg
Approx. 5.3
Approx. 8.3
Approx. 11.0
Approx. 14.0
With brake
kg
Approx. 6.3
Approx. 9.4
Approx. 12.6
Approx. 16.0
KT50H
KT50H
Rotor
inertia
Power
rate*1
Mechanical Without
brake
time
constant
With brake
Weight
4,500
Radiator plate dimensions (material)
380 x 350 x t30 (Al)
Applicable drives (R88D-)
KT20H
3-66
KT30H
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Unit
K3K030H
K4K030H
K5K030H
K2K030T
K3K030T
K4K030T
K5K030T
Brake inertia
kg m2
0.33x10-4
1.35x10-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
19
22
Current consumption
A
(at 20C)
0.81 10%
0.90 10%
Nm
7.8 min.
11.8 min.
16.1 min.
Attraction time *5
ms
50 max.
80 max.
110 max.
Release time *5
ms
15 max. *6
Backlash
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
392
1,470
4.9x106
2.2x106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
50 max. *7
Specifications
Item
K2K030H
3-67
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Specifications
Unit
K75030F
K1K030F
K1K530F
K2K030F
K75030C
K1K030C
K1K530C
K2K030C
Rated output *1
750
1000
1500
2000
Rated torque *1
Nm
2.39
3.18
4.77
6.37
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
5,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
7.16
9.55
14.3
19.1
Rated current *1
A (rms)
2.4
3.3
4.2
5.7
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
10
14
18
24
Without brake kg m2
1.6110-4
2.0310-4
2.8410-4
3.6810-4
kg m2
1.9310-4
2.3510-4
3.1710-4
4.0110-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.78
0.75
0.89
0.87

*1
With brake
kW/s
35.5
49.8
80.1
110
29.6
43
71.8
101

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.67
0.60
0.49
0.45
0.8
0.70
0.55
0.49
ms
5.9
5.8
6.5
6.6
490
490
490
490
196
196
196
196
kg
Approx. 3.1
Approx. 3.5
Approx. 4.4
Approx. 5.3
kg
Approx. 4.1
Approx. 4.5
Approx. 5.4
Approx. 6.3
KT15F
KT20F
Rotor
inertia
With brake
With brake

3-68
KT10F
KT15F
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K1K030F
K1K530F
K2K030F
K75030C
K1K030C
K1K530C
K2K030C
Brake inertia
kg m2
0.3310-4
0.3310-4
0.3310-4
0.3310-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
17
19
19
19
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.7010%
0.8110%
0.8110%
0.8110%
Nm
2.5 min.
7.8 min.
7.8 min.
7.8 min.
Attraction time *
ms
50 max.
50 max.
50 max.
50 max.
Release time *5
ms
15 max. *6
15 max. *6
15 max. *6
15 max. *6
Backlash
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
392
392
392
392
4.9105
4.9105
4.9105
4.9105
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
Specifications
K75030F
3-69
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Specifications
Unit
K3K030F
K4K030F
K5K030F
K3K030C
K4K030C
K5K030C
Rated output *1
3000
4000
5000
Rated torque *1
Nm
9.55
12.7
15.9
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
5,000
4,500
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
28.6
38.2
47.7
Rated current *1
A (rms)
9.2
9.9
12.0
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
39
42
51
Without brake kg m2
6.5010-4
12.910-4
17.410-4
kg m2
7.8510-4
14.210-4
18.610-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.81
0.98
0.98

*1
With brake
kW/s
140
126
146
116
114
136

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.40
0.51
0.50
0.49
0.56
0.54
ms
12
13
13
490
784
784
196
343
343
kg
Approx. 8.3
Approx. 11.0
Approx. 14.0
kg
Approx. 9.4
Approx. 12.6
Approx. 16.0
KT50F
KT50F
Rotor
inertia
With brake
With brake

3-70
KT30F
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K4K030F
K5K030F
K3K030C
K4K030C
K5K030C
Brake inertia
kg m2
0.3310-4
0.3310-4
1.3510-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
19
22
22
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.8110%
0.9010%
0.9010%
Nm
11.8 min.
16.1 min.
16.1 min.
Attraction time *
ms
80 max.
110 max.
110 max.
Release time *5
ms
15 max. *6
50 max. *7
50 max. *7
Backlash
1(reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
392
1470
1470
4.9105
2.2106
2.2106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
Specifications
K3K030F
3-71
*1. These are the values when the motor is combined with a driver at normal temperature (20C, 65%). The momentary
maximum torque indicates the standard value.
*2. Applicable load inertia.
The operable load inertia ratio (load inertia/rotor inertia) depends on the mechanical configuration and
its rigidity. For a machine with high rigidity, operation is possible even with high load inertia. Select an
appropriate motor and confirm that operation is possible.
If the dynamic brake is activated frequently with high load inertia, the Dynamic Brake Resistor may burn.
Do not repeatedly turn the servo ON/OFF while the dynamic brake is enabled.
*3. The allowable radial and thrust loads are the values determined for a limit of 20,000 hours at normal operating
temperatures.
The allowable radial loads are applied as shown in the following diagram.
Radial load
Thrust load
Shaft center (LR/2)
Specifications
*4. This is a non-excitation brake. (It is released when excitation voltage is applied.)
*5. The operation time is the value (reference value) measured with a surge suppressor (CR50500 by Okaya Electric
Industries Co., Ltd.).
*6. Direct current switching with a varistor (Z15D151 by Ishizuka Electronics Co.).
*7. Direct current switching with a varistor (TNR9G820K by Nippon Chemi-Con Corporation).
Torque-Rotation Speed Characteristics for 3,000-r/min Motors

3,000-r/min motor (100 VAC)
The following graphs show the characteristics with a 3-m standard cable and a 100-VAC input.
R88M-K05030H/T (50 W)
Power supply voltage
dropped by 10%
0.48 (4000)
(N m)
0.5
0.48
0.3
Momentary operation range

0.25 0.16
0.16
(N m)
1.0 0.95
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)
R88M-K20030L/S (200 W)

dropped by 10%
0.95 (3700)

0.5 0.32
0.32
0.56
0.4
Continuous operation range 4300
0.16
0.08
Continuous operation range

0
R88M-K10030L/S (100 W)
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)
(N m)
2.0 1.91
1.0

0.64
0.64
0.8
0.64
0.32
0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
(r/min)
R88M-K40030L/S (400 W)
(N m)
4.0 3.8

3.8 (2600) dropped by 10%

2.0
1.3
1.3

0
3-72

1.91 (2600) dropped by 10%
1.7
1.3
0.32
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)

R88M-K05030H/T (50 W)
dropped by 10%
0.48 (4000)
(N m)
0.5
R88M-K10030H/T (100 W)
0.48

0
0.3
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)
4.0 3.8

1.3
1.3
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)
R88M-K1K530H/T (1.5 kW)

(N m)
15 14.3
1000
2000
3000
4.0
40 38.2
4000 5000
(r/min)
2000
3000

6.37
1000
7.0
6.37
2000
3000
(3800) 9.55 (4200)
10 9.55

5 3.18
3.18
0
1000
2000
3000
6.0
4.0
1.9
4000 5000
(r/min)
R88M-K3K030H/T (3 kW)

dropped by 10%
(3300) 19.1 (3700)
20 19.1

dropped by 10%
(N m)
0.60
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)
(N m)
0.32
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)
(N m)
30 28.6

dropped by 10%
(3100) 28.7 (3400)

15 9.55
9.55
4000 5000
(r/min)
1000
2000
3000
12.0
8.0
5.7
4000 5000
(r/min)
R88M-K5K030H/T (5 kW)

12.7
12.7
1000
3.4
3.0
2.4

0
1.3
1.1
0.64

0

dropped by 10%
(2800) 38.2 (3100)

2.4
0.64
R88M-K1K030H/T (1 kW)

dropped by 10%
(3200) 7.1 (3600)
8.0 7.1
4.0
R88M-K4K030H/T (4 kW)
(N m)
0.16
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

(r/min)
(N m)

0
1.0
0.32

0
10
4.77
0.32
R88M-K2K030H/T (2 kW)

dropped by 10%
(3200) 14.3 (3600)
4.77

0.5
50 47.7
25
10.0
4000 5000
(r/min)

dropped by 10%
(N m)
(2800) 47.8 (3200)

15.9
15.9
15.0

0
1000
2000
3000
4000 5000
(r/min)
3-73
3
Specifications
2.0
1.7
0.64

dropped by 10%
(4000)
1.91 (4600)
(N m)
2.0 1.91
R88M-K75030H/T (750 W)

dropped by 10%
(3100) 3.8 (3600)
(N m)
20
0.95 (5000)
1.0 0.95
0.08
R88M-K40030H/T (400 W)
7.5

dropped by 10%
(N m)
0.9

0.25 0.16
0.16
2.0
R88M-K20030H/T (200 W)

R88M-K75030F/C (750 W)
dropped by 10%
(N m)
8 7.16
4
R88M-K1K030F/C (1 kW)
(3500)
7.16 (3800)
1000
2000
3000
2.6
1.6
4000 5000
(r/min)
R88M-K2K030F/C (2 kW)
(3300)
20 19.1
10 9.55
5
Specifications
6.37
19.1 (3700)
6.37
7.0
1000
2000
3000
1000
(N m)
30 28.6
15
2.0

0
3.18

10
3.18
2000
3000
6.0
4.0
4000 5000
(r/min)
4000 5000
(r/min)
1000
2000
3000

7.5
4.77
1000
(N m)
40 38.2
20
50 47.7
4000 5000
(r/min)
1000

dropped by 10%
(2800) 47.7 (3200)
15.9
15.9
15

0
3-74
1000
2000
3000
2000
3000
4000 5000
(r/min)

dropped by 10%
(2800) 38.2 (3100)

25
4.0

12.7
12.7
R88M-K5K030F/C (5 kW)
(N m)
4.77
12.0
8.0
5.7

0
15 14.3

dropped by 10%
(3200) 14.3 (3600)
R88M-K4K030F/C (4 kW)

dropped by 10%
(3100) 28.7 (3400)

9.55
9.55
(N m)
1.9
R88M-K3K030F/C (3 kW)

dropped by 10%
(N m)

dropped by 10%
(3800) 9.55 (4200)
(N m)

2.39
2.39
R88M-K1K530F/C (1.5 kW)
4000 5000
(r/min)
2000
3000
10
4000 5000
(r/min)
Use the following Servomotors in the ranges shown in the graphs below. Using outside of
these ranges may cause the motor to generate heat, which could result in encoder malfunction.
R88M-K05030L/S/H/T
(50 W: With oil seal)
R88M-K10030L/S/H/T
Rated torque ratio [%]
Without brake
100%
With brake
Without brake
With brake
100%
10
20
30
R88M-K40030L/S/H/T
(400 W: Without oil seal)
90%
Without brake
With brake
100%
80%
70%
10
20
30
10
20
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
30
R88M-K1K530H/T/F/C
(1.5 kW)
Without brake

With brake
100%
With brake
100%
85%
75%
10
20
30
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
R88M-K2K030H/T/F/C
(2 kW)
With brake
100%
10
20
30
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
R88M-K3K030H/T/F/C
(3 kW)
Without brake
10
20
30
10
20
30
Without brake
Without brake
With brake
100%
90%
85%
10
20
30
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
R88M-K4K030H/T/F/C
(4 kW)
85%
70%
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
With brake
100%
90%
85%
10
20
30
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
R88M-K5K030H/T/F/C
(5 kW)
With brake
100%
70%
10
20
30
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
3-75
Specifications
100%
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
R88M-K40030L/S/H/T
With brake
75%
70%
70%
60%
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]
R88M-K20030L/S/H/T
1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min Motors

200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
K1K520H
K2K020H
K1K020T
K1K520T
K2K020T
Rated output *1
1,000
1,500
2,000
Rated torque *1
Nm
4.77
7.16
9.55
r/min
2,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
14.3
21.5
28.6
Rated current *1
A (rms)
5.7
9.4
11.5
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
24
40
49
Rotor
inertia
Without brake kg m2
4.6010-4
6.7010-4
8.7210-4
-4
-4
10.010-4
With brake
kg m
5.9010
7.9910
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.63
0.58
0.64

*1
With brake
kW/s
49.5
76.5
105
38.6
64.2
91.2

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.80
0.66
0.66
1.02
0.80
0.76
ms
9.4
10
10
*3
490
490
490
196
196
196
kg
Approx. 5.2
Approx. 6.7
Approx. 8.0
kg
Approx. 6.7
Approx. 8.2
Approx. 9.5
KT10H
KT15H
KT20H
1.3510-4
1.3510-4
1.3510-4
With brake
Radiator plate dimensions
(material)
275 260 t15 (AI)
Specifications
Unit
K1K020H
m2
Brake inertia
kg
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
14
19
19
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.5910%
0.7910%
0.7910%
Nm
4.9 min.
13.7 min.
13.7 min.
Attraction time *5
ms
80 max.
100 max.
100 max.
Release time *
ms
Backlash
Allowable work per
braking
3-76
70 max.
*6
50 max.
*6
50 max. *6
1 (reference value)
J
588
1,176
1,176
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
K1K020H
Item
K1K520H
K2K020H
K1K020T
K1K520T
K2K020T
Unit
7.810
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
1.510
1.510
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K3K020H
K4K020H
K5K020H
K3K020T
K4K020T
K5K020T
3,000
4,000
5,000
Rated torque *1
Nm
14.3
19.1
23.9
r/min
2,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
43.0
57.3
71.6
Rated current *1
A (rms)
17.4
21.0
25.9
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
74
89
110
Without brake kg m2
12.910-4
37.610-4
48.010-4
kg m2
14.210-4
38.610-4
48.810-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.59
0.70
0.70

*1
With brake
kW/s
159
97.1
119
144
94.5
117

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.57
0.65
0.63
0.63
0.66
0.64
ms
12
20
19
784
784
784
343
343
343
kg
Approx. 11.0
Approx. 15.5
Approx. 18.6
kg
Approx. 12.6
Approx. 18.7
Approx. 21.8

(material)
380 350 t30 (AI)
470 440 t30 (AI)
KT30H
KT50H
Rotor
inertia
With brake
With brake
Specifications
Rated output *1
KT50H
3-77
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
K4K020H
K5K020H
K3K020T
K4K020T
K5K020T
Brake inertia
kg m2
1.3510-4
4.710-4
4.710-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
22
31
31
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.9010%
1.310%
1.310%
Nm
16.2 min.
24.5 min.
24.5 min.
Attraction time *5
ms
110 max.
80 max.
80 max.
Release time *5
ms
50 max. *6
25 max. *7
25 max. *7
Backlash
Specifications
Unit
K3K020H
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
1470
1372
1372
2.2106
2.9106
2.9106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
3-78
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
K7K515T
K11K015T
K15K015T
Unit
Rated output *1
7,500
11,000
15,000
Rated torque *1
Nm
47.8
70.0
95.0
r/min
1,500
r/min
3,000
2,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
119.0
175.0
224.0
Rated current *1
A (rms)
44.0
54.2
66.1
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
165
203
236
Without
brake
kg m2
10110-4
21210-4
30210-4
With brake
kg m2
10710-4
22010-4
31110-4
10 times the rotor inertia max.*4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.77
0.92
1.05
Without
brake
kW/s
226
231
302
With brake
kW/s
213
223
293
Rotor
inertia
Power
rate*1
Mechanical Without
brake
time
constant
With brake
ms
0.58
0.80
0.71
ms
0.61
0.83
0.74
ms
21
31
32
1,176
2,254
490
686
Without
brake
kg
Approx. 36.4
Approx. 52.7
Approx. 70.2
With brake
kg
Approx. 40.4
Approx. 58.9
Approx. 76.3
550 x 520 x t30 (Al)
670 x 630 x t35 (Al)
KT75H
KT150H
Weight
3
Specifications
Item
KT150H
3-79
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Specifications
Unit
K7K515T
K11K015T
K15K015T
Brake inertia
kg m2
4.710-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
34
26
Current consumption
A
(at 20C)
1.410%
10%
Nm
58.8 min.
100 min.
Attraction time *5
ms
150 max.
300 max.
Release time *5
ms
50 max.
140 max.
Backlash
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
1,372
2,000
2.9106
4.0106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
5,000
3,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
3-80
7.110-4
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K40020F
K60020F
K1K020F
K1K520F
K40020C
K60020C
K1K020C
K1K520C
400
600
1,000
1,500
Rated torque *1
Nm
1.91
2.86
4.77
7.16
r/min
2,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
5.73
8.59
14.3
21.5
Rated current *1
A (rms)
1.2
1.5
2.8
4.7
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
4.9
6.5
12
20
Without brake kg m2
1.6110-4
2.0310-4
4.6010-4
6.7010-4
kg m2
1.9010-4
2.3510-4
5.9010-4
7.9910-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
1.27
1.38
1.27
1.16
22.7
40.3
49.5
76.5
19.2
34.8
38.6
64.2
Rotor
inertia
With brake

*1
With brake
kW/s
time
With brake
ms
constant
0.70
0.62
0.79
0.66
0.83
0.72
1.01
0.79
ms
5.7
5.9
10
10
490
490
490
490
196
196
196
196
kg
Approx. 3.1
Approx. 3.5
Approx. 5.2
Approx. 6.7
kg
Approx. 4.1
Approx. 4.5
Approx. 6.7
Approx. 8.2
With brake
(material)
320 300 t20 (AI)
275 260 t15 (AI)
KT06F
KT10F
KT06F
3
Specifications
Rated output *1
KT15F
3-81
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
K60020F
K1K020F
K1K520F
K40020C
K60020C
K1K020C
K1K520C
Brake inertia
kg m2
1.3510-4
1.3510-4
1.3510-4
1.3510-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
17
17
14
19
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.7010%
0.7010%
0.5910%
0.7910%
Nm
2.5 min.
2.5 min.
4.9 min.
13.7 min.
Attraction time *5
ms
50 max.
50 max.
80 max.
100 max.
Release time *5
ms
15 max. *7
15 max. *7
70 max. *6
50 max. *6
Backlash
3
Specifications
Unit
K40020F
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
392
392
588
1176
4.9105
4.9105
7.8105
1.5106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
temperatures.
10 7.16
7.16

0
1000
2000
10.0
6.0
4.8
3000 (r/min)
3-82
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K2K020F
K3K020F
K4K020F
K5K020F
K2K020C
K3K020C
K4K020C
K5K020C
Rated output *1
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
Rated torque *1
Nm
9.55
14.3
19.1
23.9
r/min
2,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
3,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
28.7
43.0
57.3
71.6
Rated current *1
A (rms)
5.9
8.7
10.6
13.0
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
25
37
45
55
m2
8.7210-4
12.910-4
37.610-4
48.010-4
kg m2
10.010-4
14.210-4
38.610-4
48.810-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
1.27
1.18
1.40
1.46

*1
With brake
kW/s
105
159
97.1
119
91.2
144
94.5
117

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.68
0.56
0.60
0.60
0.78
0.61
0.61
0.61
ms
10
12
21
19
490
784
784
784
196
343
343
343
kg
Approx. 8.0
Approx. 11.0
Approx. 15.5
Approx. 18.6
kg
Approx. 9.5
Approx. 12.6
Approx. 18.7
Approx. 21.8

(material)
275 260 t15

(AI)
380 350 t30

(AI)
470 440 t30 (AI)
KT20F
KT30F
KT50F
Rotor
inertia
Without brake kg
With brake
Specifications
With brake
KT50F
3-83
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K5K020F
K2K020C
K3K020C
K4K020C
K5K020C
1.3510-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
Current consumption
(at 20C)
5
1.3510-4
4.710-4
4.710-4
19
22
31
31
0.7910%
0.9010%
1.310%
1.310%
Nm
13.7 min.
16.2 min.
24.5 min.
24.5 min.
ms
100 max.
110 max.
80 max.
80 max.
ms
50 max. *6
50 max. *6
25 max. *7
25 max. *7
Backlash
K4K020F
kg m2
Release time *5
Specifications
K3K020F
Brake inertia
Attraction time *
K2K020F
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
1176
1470
1372
1372
1.5106
2.2106
2.9106
2.9106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
3-84
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
K7K515C
K11K015C
K15K015C
Unit
Rated output *1
7,500
11,000
15,000
Rated torque *1
Nm
47.8
70.0
95.9
r/min
1,500
r/min
3,000
2,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
119.0
175.0
224.0
Rated current *1
A (rms)
22.0
27.1
33.1
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
83
101
118
Without
brake
kg m2
10110-4
21210-4
30210-4
With brake
kg m2
10710-4
22010-4
31110-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
1.54
1.84
2.10
Without
brake
kW/s
226
231
302
With brake
kW/s
213
223
293
Rotor
inertia
Power
rate*1
Mechanical Without
brake
time
constant
With brake
ms
0.58
0.80
0.71
ms
0.61
0.83
0.74
ms
21
31
32
1,176
2,254
490
686
Without
brake
kg
Approx. 36.4
Approx. 52.7
Approx. 70.2
With brake
kg
Approx. 40.4
Approx. 58.9
Approx. 76.3
550 x 520 x t30 (Al)
670 x 630 x t35 (Al)
KT75F
KT150F
Weight
3
Specifications
Item
KT150F
3-85
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Specifications
Unit
K7K515C
K11K015C
K15K015C
Brake inertia
kg m2
4.710-4
7.110-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
34
26
Current consumption
A
(at 20C)
1.410%
1.0810%
Nm
58.8 min.
100 min.
Attraction time *5
ms
150 max.
300 max.
Release time *5
ms
50 max.
140 max.
Backlash
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
1,372
2,000
2.9106
4.0106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
5,000
3,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
Torque-Rotation Speed Characteristics for 1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min Motors

1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min motor (200 VAC)
R88M-K1K020H/T (1 kW)
R88M-K1K520H/T (1.5 kW)
R88M-K2K020H/T (2 kW)

With brake
100%
70%

dropped by 10%
(2000) 21.5 (2300)
(N m)
21.5
20
30 28.6

10 7.16
10
20
30
R88M-K3K020H/T (3 kW)
1000

dropped by 10%
50 43.0
25
(2200) 43.0 (2400)

14.3
14.3
3-86
1000
2000
3000 (r/min)
28.0
20.0
9.5
3000 (r/min)
50
25.0
19.1

1000
2000
9.55
1000
2000
3000 (r/min)
13.0
3000 (r/min)

dropped by 10%
(N m)
70
(1900) 57.3 (2100)
25 19.1
9.55
R88M-K5K020H/T (5 kW)

dropped by 10%
57.3
15.0
11.0
Continuous operation range 6.4
15
6.0
4.8
R88M-K4K020H/T (4 kW)
(N m)
(N m)
2000
(2000) 28.6 (2200)

10.0
7.16
Ambient
temperature
40 [C]

dropped by 10%
(N m)
71.6
(1900) 71.6 (2100)

35 23.9
23.9
0
1000
2000
20.0
3.0
3000 (r/min)
R88M-K7K515T (7.5 kW)
R88M-K11K015T (11 kW)

dropped by 10%
(2200) 119.0(2500)
(N m)
119.0
(N m)
R88M-K15K015T (15 kW)

dropped by 10%
(1700) 175.0(2000)
175.0

dropped by 10%
(1500) 224.0(1700)
(N m)
224.0
150
100
47.8
50
60.0
47.8(1500)
1000
75
70.0
2000
3000
r/min
70.0(1500)
95.5(1500)
95.5
100
95.5
57.0
2000 r/min
1000
52.5
12.0
200
130.0
2000 r/min
1000
1,500-r/min and 2,000-r/min motor (400 VAC)

R88M-K40020F/C (400 W)
dropped by 10%
(2400) 5.73 (2700)
(N m)
6 5.73
3.5
1.91
1.91
2.0
1000
3000 (r/min)
2000
R88M-K1K520F/C (1.5 kW)
21.5
10 8.59
20
10.0
6.0
7.16
1000
3000 (r/min)
2000
R88M-K4K020F/C (4 kW)
(N m)
57.3
50

25 19.1
19.1
25.0

1000
2000
3000 (r/min)

dropped by 10%
(1700) 175.0(2000)
175.0
9.55
28.6 (2200)
15.0
11.0
9.55
1000
25
3000 (r/min)
2000
(N m)
71.6
1000
1000
3000 (r/min)
2000

dropped by 10%
(N m)
119.0
100
20.0
(2200) 119.0(2500)
47.8
47.8(1500)
3.0
3000 (r/min)
2000
28.0
20.0
9.5
14.3
14.3
50
R88M-K7K515C (7.5 kW)

dropped by 10%
(1900) 71.6 (2100)

35 23.9
23.9
3000 (r/min)
2000

dropped by 10%
(2200) 43.0 (2400)
50 43.0

0
1000
(N m)

15
13.0
R88M-K11K015C (11 kW)

(N m)
(2000)
6.0
4.77
4.0
4.77
R88M-K3K020F/C (3 kW)

dropped by 10%
30 28.6
3000 (r/min)
2000
(N m)
70
1000
R88M-K5K020F/C (5 kW)

dropped by 10%
(1900) 57.3 (2100)
15 14.3
2.86
2.86

10 7.16
(N m)
4.5

dropped by 10%
(2000) 14.3 (2200)
10 Momentary operation range
R88M-K2K020F/C (2 kW)

dropped by 10%
(2000) 21.5 (2300)
(N m)

dropped by 10%
(2100) 8.59 (2400)
(N m)
R88M-K1K020F/C (1 kW)
1000
2000
60.0
12.0
3000
r/min
R88M-K15K015C (15 kW)

(N m)
224.0

dropped by 10%
(1500) 224.0(1700)
150
75
70.0
70.0(1500)
130.0
1000
200
100
95.5
95.5(1500)
52.5
2000 r/min
1000
95.5
57.0
2000 r/min
3-87
Specifications

3
R88M-K60020F/C (600 W)
Use the following Servomotors in the ranges shown in the graphs below. Using outside of
these ranges may cause the motor to generate heat, which could result in encoder malfunction.
R88M-K5K020H/T/F/C (5 kW)
(N m)
20 19.3

dropped by 10%
(1600) 19.3 (1800)
R88M-K7K515T/C (7.5 kW)

100%
100%
90%
90%

8.59
10 8.59
14.0
8.0

0
R88M-K15K015T/C (15 kW)
1000
2000 (r/min)
10
20
30
Ambient
temperature
40 [ C]
10
Specifications
3-88
20
30
Ambient
temperature
40 [ C]
1,000-r/min Motors
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K90010H
K2K010H
K3K010H
K90010T
K2K010T
K3K010T
K4K510T
K6K010T
Rated output *1
900
2,000
3,000
4,500
6,000
Rated torque *1
Nm
8.59
19.1
28.7
43.0
57.0
r/min
1,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
2,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
19.3
47.7
71.7
107.0
143.0
Rated current *
A (rms)
7.6
17.0
22.6
29.7
38.8
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
24
60
80
110
149
Without brake kg m2
6.7010-4
30.310-4
48.410-4
79.110-4
10110-4
kg m2
7.9910-4
31.410-4
49.210-4
84.410-4
10710-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
0.86
0.88
0.96
1.02
1.04

*1
With brake
kW/s
110
120
170
233
325
92.4
116
167
219
307

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.66
0.75
0.63
0.55
0.54
0.78
0.78
0.64
0.63
0.57
20
23
With brake
ms
11
18
21
*3
686
1176
1470
196
490
kg
Approx. 6.7
Approx. 14.0
Approx. 20.0
Approx. 29.4
Approx. 36.4
kg
Approx. 8.2
Approx. 17.5
Approx. 23.5
Approx. 33.3
Approx. 40.4
470 x 440 x
t30 (Al)
550 x 520 x
t30 (Al)
KT75H
KT75H
With brake
270 260 t15 (AI)
KT15H
KT30H
4.710-4

(material)
588
KT50H
Brake inertia
kg m2
1.3510-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
19
31
34
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.7910%
1.310%
1.410%
Nm
13.7 min.
24.5 min.
58.8 min.
ms
100 max.
80 max.
150 max.
Release time *5
ms
50 max. *6
25 max. *7
50 max. *7
Backlash
1 (reference value)
Attraction time
*5
1764
3-89
Specifications
Rotor
inertia
200 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K90010H
K2K010H
K3K010H
K90010T
K2K010T
K3K010T
K4K510T
K6K010T
Allowable work per

braking
1176
1372
1.5106
2.9106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
5,000
400 VAC
Specifications
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K90010F
K2K010F
K3K010F
K90010C
K2K010C
K3K010C
K4K510C
K6K010C
Rated output *1
900
2,000
3,000
4,500
6,000
Rated torque *1
Nm
8.59
19.1
28.7
43.0
57.3
r/min
1,000
Momentary maximum
rotation speed
r/min
2,000
Momentary maximum
torque *1
Nm
19.3
47.7
71.7
107.0
143.0
Rated current *1
A (rms)
3.8
8.5
11.3
14.8
19.4
Momentary maximum
current *1
A (rms)
12
30
40
55
74
Without brake kg m2
6.7010-4
30.310-4
48.410-4
79.110-4
10110-4
kg m2
7.9910-4
31.410-4
49.210-4
84.410-4
10710-4
Torque constant *1
N m/A
1.72
1.76
1.92
2.05
2.08

*1
With brake
kW/s
110
120
170
233
325
92.4
116
167
219
307

time
With brake
ms
constant
0.66
0.76
0.61
0.55
0.54
0.79
0.78
0.62
0.63
0.57
ms
11
18
22
20
23
686
1176
1470
196
490
kg
Approx. 6.7
Approx. 14.0
Approx. 20.0
Approx. 29.4
Approx. 36.4
kg
Approx. 8.2
Approx. 17.5
Approx. 23.5
Approx. 33.3
Approx. 40.4

(material)
270 260
t15 (AI)
470 440 t30 (AI)
KT15F
KT30F
Rotor
inertia
With brake
With brake
3-90
1764
588
KT50F
550 x 520 x
t30 (Al)
KT50F
KT75F
400 VAC
Model (R88M-)
Item
Unit
K2K010F
K3K010F
K90010C
K2K010C
K3K010C
K4K510C
K6K010C
Brake inertia
kg m2
1.3510-4
24 VDC 10%
Power consumption
(at 20C)
19
31
34
Current consumption
(at 20C)
0.7910%
1.310%
1.410%
Nm
13.7 min.
24.5 min.
58.8 min.
Attraction time *
ms
100 max.
80 max.
150 max.
Release time *5
ms
50 max. *6
25 max. *7
50 max. *7
Backlash
4.710-4
1 (reference value)
Allowable work per

braking
1176
1372
1.5106
2.9106
Allowable angular
acceleration
rad/s2
10,000
Brake limit
Rating
Continuous
Insulation class
Type F
3
Specifications
K90010F
5,000
3-91
temperatures.
dropped by 10%
(1400) 47.7 (1600)
(N m)
50 47.7

25 19.1
19.1

0
Specifications
28.0
18.0
9.6
2000 (r/min)
1000
Torque-Rotation Speed Characteristics for 1,000-r/min Motors

1,000-r/min motor (200/400 VAC)
R88M-K90010H/T/F/C
(100 W)
(N m)
20 19.3
R88M-K2K010H/T/F/C
(2 kW)

dropped by 10%
(1600) 19.3 (1800)

8.59
10 8.59
(N m)
50 47.7
14.0
1000
2000 (r/min)
R88M-K4K510T/C
(4.5 kW)
(N m)
107.0

dropped by 10%
(1500) 107.0(1700)
(N m)
150
43.0
43.0
70.0
50.0
143.0
57.3
57.3
3-92
1000
2000 r/min
100.0
57.3
28.0
1000
2000 r/min
22.0
40.0
28.7

dropped by 10%
(1500) 143.0(1700)
75
2000 (r/min)

dropped by 10%
(1400) 71.7 (1600)

35 28.7
R88M-K6K010T/C
(6 kW)
100
50
1000
(N m)
71.7
70
28.0
18.0

0

dropped by 10%
(1400) 47.7 (1600)

25 19.1
19.1
8.0
R88M-K3K010H/T/F/C
(3 kW)
1000
20.0
14.0
2000 (r/min)
Temperature Characteristics of the Motor and Mechanical System

Accurax G5-Series AC Servomotors use rare earth magnets (neodymium-iron magnets). The
temperature coefficient for these magnets is approx. -0.13%/C.
As the temperature drops, the motor's momentary maximum torque increases, and as the
temperature rises, the motor's momentary maximum torque decreases.
The momentary maximum torque rises by 4% at a normal temperature of 20C compared to a
temperature of -10C. Conversely, the momentary maximum torque decreases about 8% when
the magnet warms up to 80C from the normal temperature.
Generally, when the temperature drops in a mechanical system, the friction torque and the load
torque increase. For that reason, overloading may occur at low temperatures.
In particular, in systems that use a gearbox, the load torque at low temperatures may be nearly
twice as much as the load torque at normal temperatures.
Check whether overloading may occur during starting at low temperature.
Also check to see whether abnormal motor overheating or alarms occur at high temperatures.
An increase in load friction torque seemingly increases load inertia.
Therefore, even if the driver gains are adjusted at a normal temperature, the motor may not
operate properly at low temperatures. Check to see whether there is optimal operation even at low
temperatures.
3
Specifications
3-93
Encoder Specifications
Incremental Encoder Specifications
Item
Encoder system
Specifications
Optical encoder
20 bits
Number of output
pulses
Phases A and B: 262,144 pulses/rotation

Phase Z:
1 pulse/rotation
Power supply voltage 5 VDC 5%
Specifications
Power supply current
180 mA (max.)
Output signals
S, S
Output interface
RS485 compliance
Absolute Encoder Specifications

Item
Encoder system
Specifications
Optical encoder
17 bits
Number of output
pulses
Phases A and B: 32,768 pulses/rotation

Phase Z:
1 pulse/rotation
Maximum rotations
32,768 to 32,767 rotations or 0 to 65,534 rotations
Power supply
voltage
5 VDC 5%
Power supply current 110 mA (max.)
3-94
Applicable battery
voltage
3.6 VDC
Current consumption
of battery
265 A (for a maximum of 5 s right after power interruption)

100 A (for operation during power interruption)
3.6 A (when power is supplied to driver)
Output signals
S, S
Output interface
RS485 compliance
3-4 Cable and Connector Specifications
3-4 Cable and Connector

Specifications
Encoder Cable Specifications
These cables are used to connect the encoder between the servo drive and the servomotor.
Select the cable matching the servomotor. The cables listed are flexible, shielded and have
IP67 protection.
Encoder Cables (European Flexible Cables)
R88A-CRKAxCR-E
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CRKA001-5CR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CRKA003CR-E
3m
R88A-CRKA005CR-E
5m
R88A-CRKA010CR-E
10 m
R88A-CRKA015CR-E
15 m
R88A-CRKA020CR-E
20 m
6.9 dia.
Connection configuration and external dimensions
(6.9)
L
Servo Drive side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Symbol Number
E5V
1
E0V
2
BAT+
3
BAT
4
S+
5
S
6
FG
Shell
Red
Black
Orange
Orange/White
Blue
Blue/White
[Servo Drive side connector]

Connector model
55100-0670 (Molex Japan)
Cable
0.34 mm2 2C + 0.22 mm2 2P
or
AWG22 2C + AWG24 2P
Motor side
Number Symbol
6
E5V
3
E0V
5
BAT+
2
BAT
7
S+
4
S
1
FG
[Motor side connector]
Angle clamp model
JN6FR07SM1 (Japan Aviation Electronics)
Connector pin model
LY10-C1-A1-1000 (Japan Aviation Electronics)
3-95
Specifications
Cable types
(For both absolute encoders and incremental encoders: [100 V and 200 V] For 3,000-r/min
motors of 50 to 750 W)
R88A-CRKCxNR
Cable types
(For both absolute encoders and incremental encoders: [100 V and 200 V] For 3,000-r/min
motors of 1 kW or more, [400 V] 3,000-r/min motors, 2,000-r/min motors and 1,000-r/min
motors)
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CRKC001-5NR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CRKC003NR-E
3m
R88A-CRKC005NR-E
5m
R88A-CRKC010NR-E
10 m
R88A-CRKC015NR-E
15 m
R88A-CRKC020NR-E
20 m
7.6 dia.

(7.6)
Specifications
L
Servo Drive side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Symbol Number
E5V
1
E0V
2
BAT+
3
BAT
4
S+
5
S
6
FG
Shell
Red
Black
Orange
Orange/White
Blue
Blue/White
[Servo Drive side connector]

Connector model
3-96
Cable
1 mm2 2C + 0.22 mm2 2P
or
AWG17 2C + AWG24 2P
Motor side
Number Symbol
4
E5V
1
E0V
6
BAT+
5
BAT
3
S+
7
S
9
FG
Straight plug model
JN2DS10SL2-R (Japan Aviation Electronics)
Cable clamp model
JN1-22-22S-10000 (Japan Aviation Electronics)
Absolute Encoder Battery Cable Specifications

Use the following cable when using an absolute encoder.
Cable Model
Model
Length (L)
R88A-CRGD0R3C
0.3 m
Weight
Approx. 0.1 kg
Connection Configuration and External Dimensions
3
43.5
905
Servomotor side
t=12
18. 8
31
18. 8
R88D-Kx
43.5
t=27.2
Battery holder
R88M-Kx
t=12
Wiring
Servo Drive side
Symbol Number
E5V
1
E0V
2
3
BAT +
4
BAT
S+
5
6
S
FG
Shell
Servomotor side
Red
Black
Orange
Orange/White
Blue
Blue/White
Battery holder
Symbol Number
1
BAT +
2
BAT
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Shell
Symbol
E5V
E0V
BAT +
BAT
S+
S
FG
Connector socket:
Connector plug: 55100-0670 (Molex Japan)
3-97
Specifications
Servo Drive side
300
110
Motor Power Cable Specifications

These cables connect the servo drive and the servomotor. Select the cable matching the
servomotor.
The cables listed are flexible, shielded and have IP67 protection.
Power Cables without Brakes (European Flexible Cables)

R88A-CAKAxSR-E
Cable types
[100 V and 200 V] (For 3,000-r/min motors of 50 to 750 W)
3
Specifications
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CAKA001-5SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKA003SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKA005SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKA010SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKA015SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKA020SR-E
20 m
6.7 dia.

(50)
(6.7)
Driver side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Red
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
M4 crimp terminal
Motor side
Number Symbol
1
Phase U
2
Phase V
3
Phase W
4
FG
Angle plug model
Cable
0.5 mm2 4C or AWG20 4C
JN8FT04SJ1 (Japan Aviation Electronics)

Connector pin model
ST-TMH-S-C1B-3500-A534G (Japan Aviation Electronics)
Note: for servomotors with brake a separate cable R88A-CAKAxxxBR-E is needed.
3-98
R88A-CAGBxSR-E
Cable types
200 V:
(For 3,000-r/min motors of 1 to 2 kW, 2,000-r/min motors of 1 to 2 kW, 1,000-r/min motors of 900 W)
400 V:
(For 3,000-r/min motors of 750W to 2 kW, 2,000-r/min motors of 400 W to 2 kW, 1,000-r/min
motors of 900 W)
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB003SR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB005SR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB010SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB015SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB020SR-E
20 m
12.7 dia.
(70)
(12.7)
Servo Drive side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-1
Black-2
Black-3
Green/Yellow
M4 crimp terminal
Cable
2.5 mm2 4C or AWG14 4C
Motor side
Number Symbol
A
Phase U
B
Phase V
C
Phase W
D
FG
Right angle plug model
N/MS3108B20-4S (Japan Aviation Electronics)
Cable clamp model
N/MS3057-12A (Japan Aviation Electronics)
3-99
Specifications
R88A-CAGB001-5SR-E
R88A-CAGDxSR-E
Cable types
(For 3,000-r/min motors of 3 to 5 kW, 2,000-r/min motors of 3 to 5 kW, 1,000-r/min motors of
2 to 3 kW)
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CAGD001-5SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGD003SR-E
3m
R88A-CAGD005SR-E
5m
R88A-CAGD010SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGD015SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGD020SR-E
20 m
13.2 dia.
3
Specifications
(70)
(13.2)
Servo Drive side
L
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-1
Black-2
Black-3
Green/Yellow
M5 crimp terminal
Motor side
Number Symbol
A
Phase U
B
Phase V
C
Phase W
D
FG
Cable
4 mm2 4C or AWG11 4C

Cable clamp model
3-100
R88A-CAKExSR-E
Cable types
(For 1,500-r/min motors of 7.5 kW, 1,000-r/min motors of 6 kW)
Model
Length (L)
R88A-CAKE001-5SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKE003SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKE005SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKE010SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKE015SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKE020SR-E
20 m
(70)
L
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Specifications
Servo Drive side
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-1
Black-2
Black-3
Green/Yellow
Motor side
Number
A
B
C
D
M5 crimp terminal
Symbol
Phase U
Phase V
Phase W
FG

Cable

Cable clamp model
3-101
R88A-CAKGxSR-E
Cable types
(For 1,500-r/min motors of 11 kW to 15 kW)
Model
Length (L)
R88A-CAKG001-5SR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKG003SR-E
3m
R88A-CAKG005SR-E
5m
R88A-CAKG010SR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKG015SR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKG020SR-E
20 m
Specifications
(70)
Servo Drive side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-1
Black-2
Black-3
Green/Yellow
M5 crimp terminal
Motor side
Number
A
B
C
D
Symbol
Phase U
Phase V
Phase W
FG

Cable

Cable clamp model
3-102
Power Cables with Brakes (European Flexible Cables)

R88A-CAGBxBR-E
Cable types
200 V:
900 W)
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CAGB001-5BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGB003BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGB005BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGB010BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGB015BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGB020BR-E
20 m
12.5 dia.
Specifications
(150)
(12.5)
Servo Drive side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-5
Black-6
0.5
0.5
Black-1
Black-2
Black-3
Green/Yellow
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
M4 crimp terminal
Cable
2.5 mm2 4C + 0.5 mm2 2C
or
AWG14 4C + AWG20 2C
Motor side
Number Symbol
G
Brake
H
Brake
A
NC
F
Phase U
I
Phase V
B
Phase W
E
FG
D
FG
C
NC
Cable clamp model
3-103
R88A-CAKFxBR-E
Cable types
400 V:
(For 3,000-r/min motors of 750W to 2 kW, 2,000-r/min motors of 400 W to 2 kW, 1,000-r/min
motors of 900 W)
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CAKF001-5BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKF003BR-E
3m
R88A-CAKF005BR-E
5m
R88A-CAKF010BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKF015BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKF020BR-E
20 m
12.5 dia.
Specifications
(150)
(12.5)
Servo Drive side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-5
Black-6
0.5
0.5
Black-1
Black-2
Black-3
Green/Yellow
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
M4 crimp terminal
Cable
2.5 mm2 4C + 0.5 mm2 2C
or
AWG14 4C + AWG20 2C
Motor side
Number Symbol
A
Brake
B
Brake
I
NC
D
Phase U
E
Phase V
F
Phase W
G
FG
H
FG
C
NC
Cable clamp model
3-104
R88A-CAGDxBR-E
Cable types
2 to 3 kW)
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CAGD001-5BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGD003BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGD005BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGD010BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGD015BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGD020BR-E
20 m
13.5 dia.
Specifications
(150)
(13.5)
Servo Drive side
Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Motor side
Number Symbol
A
Brake
B
Brake
I
NC
D
Phase U
E
Phase V
F
Phase W
G
FG
H
FG
C
NC
Servo Drive side

Black-5
Black-6
0.5
0.5
Black-1
Black-2
Black-3
Green/Yellow
4
4
4
4
M4 crimp terminal
Cable
4 mm2 4C + 0.5 mm2 2C [Motor side connector]
or
AWG11 4C + AWG20 2C Right angle plug model
Cable clamp model
3-105
Brake Cables (European Flexible Cables)

R88A-CAKAxBR-E
Cable types
100 and 200 V:
(For 3,000-r/min motors of 50 to 750 W)
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
R88A-CAKA001-5BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAKA003BR-E
3m
R88A-CAKA005BR-E
5m
R88A-CAKA010BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAKA015BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAKA020BR-E
20 m
6.0 dia.
(50)
(6.0)
Specifications
Servo Drive side

R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-1
Black-2
0.5
0.5
Cable
0.5 mm2 2C
or
AWG20 2C
Motor side
Number Symbol
1
Brake
2
Brake
Connector model
JN4FT02SJ1-R (Japan Aviation Electronics)
Contact model
ST-TMH-S-C1B (Japan Aviation Electronics)
3-106
Motor side
R88A-CAGExBR-E
Cable types
400 V:
(For 1,500-r/min motors of 7.5 kW to 15 kW, 1,000-r/min motors of 6 kW)
Model
Length (L)
R88A-CAGE001-5BR-E
1.5 m
R88A-CAGE003BR-E
3m
R88A-CAGE005BR-E
5m
R88A-CAGE010BR-E
10 m
R88A-CAGE015BR-E
15 m
R88A-CAGE020BR-E
20 m
Servo Drive side

Motor side
R88D-Kx
R88M-Kx
Wiring
Servo Drive side

Black-1
Black-2
0.5
0.5
Cable
0.5 mm2 2C
or
AWG20 2C
Motor side
Number Symbol
1
Brake
2
Brake
Connector model
Cable clamp model
3-107
Specifications
(50)
Connector Specifications
Control I/O Connector (R88A-CNU11C)
This is the connector to be connected to the driver's control I/O connector (CN1).
Use this connector when preparing a control cable by yourself.
Dimensions
39
Specifications
52.4
3
Connector plug model
10150-3000PE (Sumitomo 3M)
Connector case model
10350-52A0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)
t = 18
Encoder Connectors
These connectors are used for encoder cables.
Use them when preparing an encoder cable by yourself.
Dimensions
R88A-CNW01R (driver's CN2 side)
This connector is a soldering type.
Use the following cable.
Applicable wire: AWG16 max.
Insulating cover outer diameter: 2.1 mm dia. max.
Outer diameter of sheath: 6.7 0.5 mm dia.
18.8
43.5

t = 12
3-108
R88A-CNK02R (motor side) ABS

Insulating cover outer diameter: 1.3 mm dia. max.
Outer diameter of sheath: 5 0.5 mm dia.
Adaptive motors
100-V, 3,000-r/min motors of 50 to 400 W
200-V, 3,000-r/min motors of 50 to 750 W
12.5
8
(4)
11
13
2.2
13
21
16.6
11
21.5
R88A-CNK04R (motor side) ABS

Outer diameter of sheath: 6.5 to 8.0 dia.
JAE
19.5
10
15.6
20
3
7
Adaptive motors
200-V, 3,000-r/min motors of 1.0 to 5.0 kW
200-V, 2,000-r/min motors of all capacities
MAX
52
Straight plug model JN2DS10SL2-R
(Japan Aviation Electronics)
Contact model JN1-22-22S-R-PKG100
3-109
Specifications
Angle clamp model JN6FR07SM1

Connector pin model LY10-C1-A1-10000
Power Cable Connector (R88A-CNK11A)

This connector is used for power cables.
Use it when preparing a power cable by yourself.
R5.5
17.6
12
11
11
13.5
3
13
32
27.6
22
14.7
28.8
3
Specifications
Angle plug model JN8FT04SJ1

Socket contact model ST-TMH-S-C1B-3500-(A534G)
Brake Cable Connector (R88A-CNK11B)

This connector is used for brake cables.
Use it when preparing a brake cable by yourself.
29.6
17
12.3
12.7
2.5
Angle plug model JN4FT02SJ1-R
Socket contact model ST-TMH-S-C1B-3500-(A534G)
3-110
(8.8)
R4
11.6
11.8
19
14.3
12.5
R6
Analog Monitor Cable Specifications

Analog Monitor Cable (R88A-CMK001S)
Symbol
SP
IM
GND
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Red
Black
White
Cable: AWG24 3C UL1007
Connector housing: 51004-0600 (Molex Japan)

Connector terminal: 50011-8100 (Molex Japan)
Specifications
1,000 mm (1 m)
3-111
External Scale Connector (R88A-CNK41L)

Use this connector to connect to an external scale in full closing control.
(42.5)
13.6
10.4
7.1
11.9
18.5
6.8 MAX
(10.5)
7.2
MUF-PK10K-X (J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.)
Pin Arrangement
View from Soldered Housing Surface
Specifications
View from Inserted Portion
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5
4
7
6
9
8
10
Safety I/O Signal Connector (R88A-CNK81S)

Use this connector to connect to safety devices.
11
11
7.3
10.7
11
6.7
1.5
33
3-112
8
7
5.2
Pin arrangement
Control Cable Specifications

Specified Cables for Motion Control Unit (R88A-CPGxMx)
Use this cable to connect to the Motion Control Units for OMRON Programmable Controllers
(SYSMAC). Cables are available for either 1 axis or 2 axes.
The following Motion Control Units can be used.
CS1W-MC221/421(-V1)
Cable types
Cables for 1 axis
Model
Length (L)
1m
R88A-CPG002M1
2m
Weight
Approx. 0.2 kg
Specifications
R88A-CPG001M1
Outer diameter of
sheath
Approx. 0.3 kg
8.3 dia.
R88A-CPG003M1
3m
Approx. 0.4 kg
R88A-CPG005M1
5m
Approx. 0.6 kg
Cables for 2 axes

Model
Length (L)
R88A-CPG001M2
1m
R88A-CPG002M2
2m
Outer diameter of
sheath
Weight
Approx. 0.3 kg
Approx. 0.5 kg
8.3 dia.
R88A-CPG003M2
3m
Approx. 0.7 kg
R88A-CPG005M2
5m
Approx. 1.0 kg

Cables for 1 axis
39
39
Motion Control Unit side

52.4
43.5
CS1W-MC221/421(-V1)
Driver side
R88D-Kx
t = 18
t = 18
Cables for 2 axes

39
CS1W-MC221/421(-V1)
43.5
Motion Control Unit side
52.4
Driver side
R88D-Kx
52.4
39
Driver side
R88D-Kx
t = 18
t = 18
t = 18
3-113
Wiring
Cables for 1 axis
Motion Control
Unit side
Symbol Number
+24V
1
DCGND
2
3
XALM
4
XRUN
XALMRS
5
XSGND
8
XSOUT
9
XGND
10
11
XA
12
XA
13
XB
14
XB
15
XZ
16
XZ
17
XOUT
18
XAGND
Specifications
+F24V
FDC GND
YALM
YRUN
YALMRS
YSGND
YSOUT
YGND
YA
YA
YB
YB
YZ
YZ
YOUT
YAGND
19
20
21
22
23
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
AWG20 Red
AWG20 Black
White/Black (1)
Pink/Black (1)
Yellow/Black (1)
Gray/Black (1)
Gray/Red (1)
Orange/Black (2)
White/Red (1)
White/Black (1)
Yellow/Red (1)
Yellow/Black (1)
Pink/Red (1)
Pink/Black (1)
Orange/Red (1)
Orange/Black (1)
Orange/Black (1)
Gray/Black (1)
Cable: AWG26 5P + AWG26 6C
Driver side
Number Symbol
37
/ALM
RUN
29
31
RESET
SENGND *
13
SEN
20
*
25
ZCOM
+A
21
A
22
+B
49
B
48
+Z
23
Z
24
14 REF/TREF1/VLIM Connector plug model
15
AGND
10150-3000PE
FG
Shell
(Sumitomo 3M)
+24VIN Connector case model
7
36 ALMCOM
10350-52A0-008
(Sumitomo 3M)

10336-52A0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)
The symbols on the controller side are the DRVX and DRVY connector symbols. For the DRVZ
and DRVU connectors, X and Y are indicated as Z and U, respectively.
Terminals marked with asterisks are for absolute encoders.
Connect 24 VDC to the 2 lines (red and black) extending from the connector on the controller side.
(red: 24 V, black: -)
3-114
Cables for 2 axes

Motion Control
Unit side
Symbol Number
1
+24V
2
DCGND
3
XALM
4
XRUN
5
XALMRS
8
XSGND
9
XSOUT
10
XGND
11
XA
12
XA
13
XB
14
XB
15
XZ
16
XZ
17
XOUT
18
XAGND
19
20
White/Black (1)
Pink/Black (1)
Yellow/Black (1)
Gray/Black (1)
Gray/Red (1)
Orange/Black (2)
White/Red (1)
White/Black (1)
Yellow/Red (1)
Yellow/Black (1)
Pink/Red (1)
Pink/Black (1)
Orange/Red (1)
Orange/Black (1)
Orange/Black (1)
Gray/Black (1)
37
/ALM
29
RUN
31
RESET
13 SENGND *
20
SEN
*
25
ZCOM
21
+A
22
A
49
+B
48
B
23
+Z
24
Z
14 REF/TREF1/VLIM 10150-3000PE
15
AGND
(Sumitomo 3M)
FG
Shell
+24VIN
7
10350-52A0-008
36 ALMCOM
(Sumitomo 3M)
Cable
AWG26 5P + AWG26 6C
White/Black (1)
21
YALM
Pink/Black (1)
22
YRUN
Yellow/Black (1)
23
YALMRS
Gray/Black (1)
26
YSGND
Gray/Red (1)
27
YSOUT
Orange/Black (2)
28
YGND
White/Red (1)
29
YA
White/Black (1)
30
YA
Yellow/Red (1)
31
YB
Yellow/Black (1)
32
YB
Pink/Red (1)
33
YZ
Pink/Black (1)
34
YZ
Orange/Red (1)
35
YOUT
Orange/Black (1)
36
YAGND
Cable
10136-3000PE (Sumitomo 3M) AWG26 5P + AWG26 6C
10336-52A0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)
Number Symbol
7
+24VIN
36 ALMCOM
37
/ALM
29
RUN
31
RESET
13
SENGND
20
SEN
25
ZCOM
21
+A
22
A
49
+B
48
B
23
+Z
24
Z
14 REF/TREF1/VLIM
15
AGND
FG
Shell
*
*

10150-3000PE
(Sumitomo 3M)
10350-52A0-008
(Sumitomo 3M)
The symbols on the controller side are the DRVX and DRVY connector symbols. For the DRVZ
and DRVU connectors, X and Y are indicated as Z and U, respectively.
Terminals marked with asterisks are for absolute encoders.
Connect 24 VDC to the 2 lines (red and black) extending from the connector on the controller side.
(red: 24 V, black: -)
3-115
3
Specifications
+F24V
FDC GND
Driver side
Number Symbol
AWG20 Red
AWG20 Black
Specified Cables for Position Control Unit (for CJ1W-NCxx4 - high-speed type -)
This cable is for connecting Position Control Units (CJ1W-NCxx4) for OMRON Programmable
Controller SYSMAC CJ Series. Cables are available for either 1 axis or 2 axes.
The following types of Position Control Units are supported.
CJ1W-NC214/-NC414/-NC234/-NC434
Cable types
Cable for line-driver output for 1 axis
Model
Length
XW2Z-100J-G9
1m
XW2Z-500J-G9
5m
XW2Z-10MJ-G9
10 m
Cable for open collector output for 1 axis
Specifications
Model
Length
XW2Z-100J-G3
1m
XW2Z-300J-G3
3m
Cable for line-driver output for 2 axes

Model
Length
XW2Z-100J-G1
1m
XW2Z-500J-G1
5m
XW2Z-10MJ-G1
10 m
Cable for open collector output for 2 axes

Model
Length
XW2Z-100J-G5
1m
XW2Z-300J-G5
3m

Cables for 1 axis
52.4
39
Driver side
R88D-Kx
52.4
Position Control
Unit side
CJ1W-NCxx4
Driver side
R88D-Kx
52.4
16.1
Driver side
R88D-Kx
t = 18
t = 6.1
Cables for 2 axes

16.1
Position Control
Unit side
CJ1W-NCxx4
39
t=18
t = 6.1
t = 18
3-116
Wiring
Cable for line-driver output for 1 axis
AWG18 twisted pair 1 m
Red: 24 VDC
Black: 24 VDC GND
PCU side
XG4M-5030-T (OMRON)
24-V power supply for output 1
24-V GND for output
3
Input common
5
Forward direction pulse output (+) 17
Forward direction pulse output (-) 16
Reverse direction pulse output (+) 19
Reverse direction pulse output (-) 18
Encoder phase A+
21
Encoder phase A
20
Encoder phase B+
23
Encoder phase B
22
25
Encoder phase Z+
24
Encoder phase Z
15
11
10
12
13
7
General-purpose input
Alarm input
SEN output
Signal ground
26
27
24-V power supply for output

24-V GND for output
Input common
Forward direction pulse output (+)
Forward direction pulse output ()
Reverse direction pulse output (+)
Reverse direction pulse output ()
Encoder phase A+
Encoder phase A
Encoder phase B+
Encoder phase B
Encoder phase Z+
Encoder phase Z
2
4
50
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
Error counter reset output

RUN output
General-purpose output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output
Positioning completed input
41
45
44
42
43
49
*1 Since the PCU handles forward direction commands as

CW-direction/phase-A advance pulses (selectable by the
output pulse direction selection parameter), connect the wires
as shown here.
General-purpose input 48
Alarm input
47
SEN output
Signal ground
29
28
3-117
3
Specifications

RUN output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output

Blue: BKIRCOM
Black: BKIR
Servo Drive side (for axis 1 or 3)
BKIR
11
BKIRCOM
10
Reverse pulse (*1)
+CWLD
44
(input for line driver only)
45
CWLD
46
+CCWLD
Forward pulse (*1)
47
CCWLD
21
+A
Encoder phase A+output
22
A
Encoder phase Aoutput
49
+B
Encoder phase B+output
48
B
Encoder phase Boutput
23
+Z
Encoder phase Z+output
24
Z
Encoder phase Zoutput
7
+24VIN
+24-V power supply for controls
30
ECRST
Error counter reset input
29
RUN
Operation command input
26
DFSEL
31
RESET
Alarm reset
27
TLSEL
39
INP
38
output 1
INPCOM
35
READY
Servo ready completed
output
34
REDYCOM
37
/ALM
Alarm output
36
ALMCOM
20
SEN
Sensor ON input
13
SENGND
Frame ground
Shell
FG
Cable for open collector output for 1 axis

Red: 24 VDC
Black: 24 VDC GND
PCU side
XG4M-5030-T (OMRON)
24-V GND for output 3
Input common
5
Forward direction pulse output
16
(with 1.6 k Resistor)
Reverse direction pulse output
18
Encoder phase A+
21
Encoder phase A
20
Encoder phase B+
23
Encoder phase B
22
Encoder phase Z+
25
Encoder phase Z
24
Specifications

RUN output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output
15
11
10
12
13
7
Alarm input
SEN output
Signal ground
26
27

50
Input common
Forward direction pulse output 38
Encoder phase A+
Encoder phase A
Encoder phase B+
Encoder phase B
Encoder phase Z+
Encoder phase Z
36

RUN output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output
41
45
44
42
43
49

Blue: BKIRCOM
Black: BKIR
11
BKIR
10
BKIRCOM
3
+CW/+PULS/+FA
Reverse pulses,
feed pulses, or phase A (*1)
4 CW/PULS/FA
5 +CCW/+SIGN/+FB
Forward pulse,
6 CCW/SIGN/FB direction signal, or phase B (*1)
21
+A
22
A
49
+B
48
B
23
+Z
24
Z
7
+24VIN
30
ECRST
29
RUN
26
DFSEL
Alarm reset
31
RESET
27
TLSEL
39
INP
output 1
38
INPCOM
35
READY
output
34
REDYCOM
37
/ALM
Alarm output
36
ALMCOM
20
SEN
Sensor ON input
13
SENGND
Shell
FG
Frame ground
*1 Since the PCU handles forward direction commands as

CW-direction/phase-A advance pulses (selectable by the
output pulse direction selection parameter), connect the wires
as shown here.
35
34
33
32
31
30
3-118
Alarm input
47
SEN output
Signal ground
29
28
Cable for line-driver output for 2 axes

Red: 24 VDC
Black: 24 VDC GND
PCU side
XG4M-5030-T (OMRON)
24-V GND for output
3
Input common
5
Forward direction pulse output (+) 17
Forward direction pulse output () 16
Reverse direction pulse output (+) 19
Reverse direction pulse output () 18
Encoder phase A+
21
Encoder phase A
20
Encoder phase B+
23
Encoder phase B
22
Encoder phase Z+
25
Encoder phase Z
24
15
11
10
12
13
7
Alarm input
SEN output
Signal ground
26
27

24-V GND for output
Input common
Forward direction pulse output (+)
Forward direction pulse output ()
Reverse direction pulse output (+)
Reverse direction pulse output ()
Encoder phase A+
Encoder phase A
Encoder phase B+
Encoder phase B
Encoder phase Z+
Encoder phase Z
2
4
50
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30

RUN output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output
41
45
44
42
43
49
Alarm input
47
SEN output
Signal ground
29
28

Blue: BKIRCOM
Black: BKIR
BKIR
11
BKIRCOM
10
+CWLD
44
Reverse pulse (*1)
CWLD
45
+CCWLD
46
Forward pulse (*1)
CCWLD
47
+A
21
A
22
+B
49
B
48
+Z
23
Z
24
+24VIN
7
ECRST
30
RUN
29
DFSEL
26
RESET
31
Alarm reset
TLSEL
27
INP
39
INPCOM
38
output 1
READY
35
output
REDYCOM
34
/ALM
37
Alarm output
ALMCOM
36
SEN
20
Sensor ON input
SENGND
13
Frame ground
FG
Shell
*1 Since the PCU handles forward direction commands as CW-direction/phase-A advance pulses (selectable by the
output pulse direction selection parameter), connect the wires as shown here.
3-119
3
Specifications

RUN output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output

Blue: BKIRCOM
Black: BKIR
BKIR
11
BKIRCOM
10
+CWLD
44
Reverse pulse (*1)
45
CWLD
46
+CCWLD
Forward pulse (*1)
47
CCWLD
21
+A
22
A
49
+B
48
B
23
+Z
24
Z
7
+24VIN
30
ECRST
29
RUN
26
DFSEL
31
Alarm reset
RESET
27
TLSEL
39
INP
38
output 1
INPCOM
35
READY
output
34
REDYCOM
37
/ALM
Alarm output
36
ALMCOM
20
SEN
Sensor ON input
13
SENGND
Frame ground
Shell
FG
Cable for open collector output for 2 axes
Specifications

Red: 24 VDC
Black: 24 VDC GND
PCU side
XG4M-5030-T (OMRON)
Input common
5
16
18
Encoder phase A+
21
Encoder phase A
20
Encoder phase B+
23
Encoder phase B
22
Encoder phase Z+
25
Encoder phase Z
24
RUN output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output
15
11
10
12
13
7
Alarm input
SEN output
Signal ground
26
27

24-V GND for output
Input common
Encoder phase A+
Encoder phase A
Encoder phase B+
Encoder phase B
Encoder phase Z+
Encoder phase Z
2
4
50

RUN output
Alarm reset output
Torque limit output
41
45
44
42
43
49
38
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
Alarm input
47
SEN output
Signal ground
29
28

Blue: BKIRCOM
Black: BKIR
11
BKIR
10
BKIRCOM
3
+CW/+PULS/+FA
Reverse pulses, feed pulses,
or phase A (*1)
4 CW/PULS/FA
5 +CCW/+SIGN/+FB Forward pulse, direction signal,
or phase B (*1)
6 CCW/SIGN/FB
21
+A
22
A
49
+B
48
B
Encoder
phase Boutput
+
23
+Z
24
Z
7
+24VIN
30
ECRST
29
RUN
26
DFSEL
Alarm reset
31
RESET
27
TLSEL
39
INP
output 1
38
INPCOM
35
READY
output
34
REDYCOM
37
/ALM
Alarm output
36
ALMCOM
20
SEN
Sensor ON input
13
SENGND
Frame ground
Shell
FG
Blue: BKIRCOM
Black: BKIR
BKIR
11
BKIRCOM
10
+CW/+PULS/+FA
Reverse pulses, feed
3
pulses, or phase A (*1)
4 CW/PULS/FA
+CCW/+SIGN/+FB Forward pulse, direction
5
signal, or phase B (*1)
6 CCW/SIGN/FB
+A
Encoder
phase A+output
21
A
22
+B
49
B
48
+Z
23
Z
24
+24VIN
7
ECRST
30
RUN
29
DFSEL
26
RESET
Alarm reset
31
TLSEL
27
INP
39
output 1
INPCOM
38
READY
35
output
REDYCOM
34
/ALM
37
Alarm output
ALMCOM
36
SEN
20
Sensor ON input
13
SENGND
Shell
FG
Frame ground
*1 Since the PCU handles forward direction commands as CW-direction/phase-A advance pulses (selectable by the
output pulse direction selection parameter), connect the wires as shown here.
3-120
General-purpose Control Cables (R88A-CPGxS)

This is a cable to connect the Servo drive I/O signals (CN1 connector) to a general purpose
controller. All servo drive I/O signals are wired. The connector for the controller is not provided.
Cable types
Model
R88A-CPG001S
Length (L)
Outer diameter of
sheath
Weight
1m
Approx. 0.3 kg
12.8 dia.
R88A-CPG002S
2m
Approx. 0.6 kg
39
Driver side
Specifications
52.4
Controller side
R88D-Kx
t = 18
3-121
Wiring
Number
Specifications
Wire/Mark color
Symbol
Number
Wire/Mark color
Symbol
Orange/Red (1)
24VCW
27
Pink/Black (3)
SI4
Orange/Black (1)
24VCCW
28
White/Black (3)
SI5
Gray/Red (1)
CW/PULS/FA
29
Yellow/Red (3)
SI6
Gray/Black (1)
CW/PULS/FA
30
Pink/Red (3)
SI7
White/Red (1)
CCW/SIGN/FB
31
Yellow/Black (3)
SI8
White/Black (1)
CCW/SIGN/FB
32
Gray/Black (4)
SI9
Yellow/Red (1)
24VIN
33
Orange/Red (4)
SI10
Pink/Red (1)
SI1
34
White/Red (4)
S02
Pink/Black (1)
SI2
35
White/Black (4)
S02
10
Orange/Red (2)
SO1
36
Yellow/Red (4)
ALMCOM
11
Orange/Black (2)
SO1
37
Yellow/Black (4)
/ALM
12
Yellow/Black (1)
38
Pink/Red (4)
S03
13
Gray/Black (2)
SENGND
39
Pink/Black (4)
S03
14
White/Red (2)
REF/TREF1/VLIM
40
Gray/Red (4)
15
White/Black (2)
AGND1
41
Orange/Black (4)
16
Yellow/Red (2)
PCL/TREF2
42
Gray/Red (5)
BAT
17
Yellow/Black (2),
Pink/Black (2)
AGND2
43
18
Pink/Red (2)
NCL
44
White/Red (5)
CWLD
19
Orange/Red (5)
45
White/Black (5)
CWLD
20
Gray/Red (2)
SEN
46
Yellow/Red (5)
CCWLD
21
Orange/Red (3)
47
Yellow/Black (5)
CCWLD
22
Orange/Black (3)
48
Pink/Black (5)
23
Gray/Red (3)
49
Pink/Red (5)
24
Gray/Black (3)
50
25
Orange/Black (5)
ZCOM
Shell
FG
26
White/Red (3)
SI3
Gray/Black (5)
BATGND
Connector plug model: 10150-3000PE (Sumitomo 3M)

Connector case model: 10350-52A0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)
Cable: AWG24 25P UL20276
Wires with the same wire color and the same number of marks form a twisted pair.
Example: Wires with respective wire and mark colors of orange/red (1) and orange/black (1) form a twisted pair.
3-122
Terminal Block Cables (XW2Z-xJ-B24)

This is a cable to connect the Servo drive I/O signals (CN1 connector) to a terminal block for
general-purpose. All servo drive I/O signals are wired.
Cable types
Model
Length (L)
XW2Z-100J-B24
Outer diameter of
sheath
1m
Weight
Approx. 0.2 kg
11.2 dia.
XW2Z-200J-B24
2m
Approx. 0.4 kg

16.1
39
52.4
Servo Drive side

68.1
XW2B-50G4
XW2B-50G5
XW2D-50G6
t = 6.1
(CN1 connector)
R88D-Kx
t = 18
3-123
Specifications
Connector-terminal block side
Specifications
3-124
Terminal block Connector
Driver side
Number
Number
Number Wire and mark color
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
20
14
15
16
17
18
12
19
25
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
20
14
15
16
17
18
12
19
25
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
20
14
15
16
17
18
12
19
25
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Shell
Blue/Red (1)
Blue/Black (1)
Pink/Red (1)
Pink/Black (1)
Green/Red (1)
Green/Black (1)
Orange/Red (1)
Gray/Red (1)
Gray/Black (1)
Blue/Red (2)
Blue/Black (2)
Pink/Red (2)
Pink/Black (2)
Green/Red (2)
Green/Black (2)
Orange/Red(2)
Orange/Black (2)
Gray/Red (1)
Gray/Black(2)
Blue/Red (3)
Blue/Black (3)
Pink/Red (3)
Pink/Black(3)
Green/Red (3)
Green/Black (3)
Orange/Red(3)
Orange/Black(3)
Gray/Red (3)
Gray/Black(3)
Blue/Red (4)
Blue/Black (4)
Pink/Red (4)
Pink/Black (4)
Green/Red (4)
Green/Black (4)
Orange/Red(4)
Orange/Black (4)
Gray/Red(4)
Gray/Black(4)
Blue/Red (5)
Blue/Black (5)
Pink/Red (5)
Pink/Black (5)
Green/Red (5)
Green/Black (5)
Orange/Red (5)
Orange/Black (5)
Gray/Red (5)
Gray/Black(5)
Orange/Red(1)
Symbol
+24VCW
+24VCCW
+CW/+PULS/+FA
CW/PULS/FA
+CCW/+SIGN/+FB
CCW/SIGN/FB
+24VIN
SI1
SI2
SO1
SO1+
SENGND
SEN
REF/TREF1/VLIM
AGND1
PCL/TREF2
AGND2
NCL
Z
ZCOM
+A
A
+Z
Z
SI3
SI4
SI5
SI6
SI7
SI8
SI9
SI10
SO2
SO2+
ALMCOM
/ALM
SO3
SO3+
BAT
BATGND
+CWLD
CWLD
+CCWLD
CCWLD
B
+B
FG
1 Wires with the same wire color

and the same number of marks
form a twisted pair
Example: Wires with respective
wire and mark colors
of Yellow/Black (1) and
Pink/Black (1) form a
twisted pair
Driver side connector:

10350-52A0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)
Connector-terminal Block Connector:
Connector socket model
XG4M-5030 (OMRON)
Strain relief model XG4T-5004 (OMRON)
Cable: AWG28 25P UL2464
Terminal Block Unit

The Terminal Block Unit connects the servo drive I/O signals (CN1 connector ) for general
purpose. Use the cable (XW2Z-xJ-B24) to connect the Terminal Block Unit to the CN1
connector.
XW2B-50G4 (M3 Screw Terminal Block)
Dimensions
Flat cable connector (MIL type plug)
3.5
157.5
3.5
Specifications
15.5
29.5
45
2-3.5
5.08
Terminal block
(45.3)
38.1
20.5
Use 0.3 to 1.25 mm2 wire (AWG22 to 16).

The wire inlet is 1.8 mm (height) 2.5 mm (width).
Strip the insulation from the end of the wire for 6 mm as shown below.
6 mm
3-125
XW2B-50G5 (M3.5 Screw Terminal Block)
Dimensions
Flat cable connector (MIL type plug)
3.5
3.5
247.5
15.5
29.5
45
2-3.5
Specifications
8.5
7.3
Terminal
block
43.5 (45.3)
20.5
When using crimp terminals, use crimp terminals with the following dimensions.
When connecting wires and crimp terminals to a terminal block, tighten them with a tightening
torque of 0.59 Nm.
Round terminal
Fork terminal
3.2mm
6.8 mm max.
3.7mm
Applicable crimp terminals
6.8 mm max.
Applicable wires
1.253
AWG22-16
(0.3 to 1.25 mm2)
23.5
AWG16-14
(1.25 to 2.0 mm2)
1.25Y3
AWG22-16
(0.3 to 1.25 mm2)
23.5
AWG16-14
(1.25 to 2.0 mm2)
Round terminals
Fork terminals
3-126
XW2D-50G6 (M3 Screw Terminal Block)
A1 A
2 A3
A4
A5 A
6 A7
B1 B
2 B3
A8 A
9 A10
B4 B
5 B6
A11 A
12 A13
B7 B
A14
8 B9
A15 A
B10 B
16 A17
11 B12
A18 A
B13 B
19 A20
14 B15
B16 B
17 B18
B19 B
20
Dimensions
MIL type connector XG4A
2-4.5
184
144
(39.1)
17.6
6 40
39
(4.5)
Specifications
7
DIN rail lock
5.8
1.2
M3
When using crimp terminals, use crimp terminals with the following dimensions.
When connecting wires and crimp terminals to a terminal block, tighten them with a tightening
torque of 0.7 Nm.
Round terminal
Fork terminal
3.2mm
5.8 mm max.
3.2mm 5.8 mm max.
Applicable crimp terminals
Applicable wires
Round terminals
1.253
AWG22-16
(0.3 to 1.25 mm2)
Fork terminals
1.25Y3
AWG22-16
(0.3 to 1.25 mm2)
3-127
3-5 Servo Relay Units and Cable Specifications
3-5 Servo Relay Units and Cable

Specifications
This section provides the specifications for the Servo Relay Unit and cables used for
connecting to Position Control Units for OMRON Programmable Controllers (SYSMAC).
Select the models that match the Position Control Unit to be used.
Servo Relay Units Specifications

XW2B-20J6-1B
CJ1W-NC113/-NC133
CS1W-NC113/-NC133
C200HW-NC113
13
14
16
17
19
9
18
15
12
11
10
Specifications
This Servo Relay Unit connects to the following OMRON Position Control Units.
Dimensions
Position Control Unit side
Driver side
135
3.5
7
10
19
45
29.5
15.5
3.5
7
(46)
44.3
2
20.5
2-3.5
Terminal block pitch: 7.62 mm
3-128
Wiring
Emergency
Origin
CW limit CCW limit proximity RUN
10 +24 V stop
ALM
BKIR 19
Common Common Common External

interrupt Common Common RESET ALMCOM
0 0V
X1
X1
FG
XB
(*1)
24 VDC
24 VDC
3
Specifications
*1. The XB contacts are used to turn ON/OFF the electromagnetic brake.
Note 1.Do not connect unused terminals.
Note 2.The 0 V terminal is internally connected to the common terminals.
Note 3.The applicable crimp terminal is R1.25-3 (round with open end).
XW2B-40J6-2B
This Servo Relay Unit connects to the following OMRON Position Control Units.
26
27
19
18
39
17
38
16
37
15
36
14
35
13
34
12
33
11
32
10
31
30
29
28
25
24
23
22
21
20
CJ1W-NC213/-NC233/-NC413/-NC433
CS1W-NC213/-NC233/-NC413/-NC433
C200HW-NC213/-NC413
Dimensions
Y-axis driver side
180
3.5
7
20
39
19
45
15.5
29.5
3.5
7
X-axis driver side
(46)
44.3
2
20.5
2-3.5

3-129
Wiring
X/Y-axis
X-axis X-axis X-axis
20 +24 V emergency X-axis
CW limit CCW limit Origin
stop
proximity RUN
0 0V
Y-axis Y-axis
Y-axis Y-axis
CW limit CCW limit Origin
proximity RUN
X-axis X-axis
ALM BKIR
Y-axis
X-axis
Common Common Common External Common Common X-axis X-axis
RESET ALMCOM
interrupt
X1
X1
Common Common External

interrupt
XB
Y-axis Y-axis
ALM BKIR
Common Common Y-axis
Y-axis
ALMCOM
RESET
Y1
Y1
(*1)
FG
YB
(*1)
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
*1. The XB and YB contacts are used to turn ON/OFF the electromagnetic brake.
Specifications
XW2B-20J6-3B
This Servo Relay Unit connects to the following OMRON Programmable Controllers.
11
10
CQM1-CPU43-V1
CQM1-PLB21
13
14
16
17
19
18
9
15
12
Dimensions
CQM1 side
135
3.5
7
10
19
45
29.5
15.5
3.5
7
Driver side
(46)
20.5
44.3
2-3.5
39
3-130
19
Wiring
CW
0V
CCW
CW
RUN
INP
CCW Common Common
X1
(*1)
ECRST
(*1)
ALM
Z
CQM1
Input Unit
10 +24V
(*2)
BKIR 19
RESET ALMCOM
X1
FG
XB
(*3)
24 VDC
24 VDC
3-131
Specifications
*1. If this signal is input, the output pulse from the CQM1 will be input to the high-speed counter.
*2. Input this output signal to a CQM1 Input Unit.
Note 1.The phase Z is an open collector.
XW2B-20J6-8A
13
14
16
17
19
18
9
15
12
11
10
CJ1M-CPU21/-CPU22/-CPU23 (for 1
axis)
Dimensions
Driver side
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 side
3.5
7
10
19
45
15.5
135
29.5
Specifications
3.5
7
(46)
42.8
20.5
2-3.5
3-132
Wiring
The Servo Drive phase Z output signal is wired to the origin signal in this terminal block.
(*3)
10 +24 V
IN6
0 0V
IN7
IN8
Origin
proximity RUN
Common Common Common
IN9
MING ALM
BKIR 19
Common Common RESET ALMCOM
X1
X1
FG
XB
(*2)
CW limit (*1)
CCW limit (*1)
(Contact 2960.06) (Contact 2960.07)
24 VDC
24 VDC
Example)
2960.06
A540.08
*3. Connection to the MING input terminal is disabled.
3-133
Specifications
*1. CW and CCW limit input signals can also be input through Input Units. The signal for the CW/CCW
limit inputs in the CJ1M are as follows: CW: A540.08, CCW: A540.09 for pulse output 0 and CW:
A541.08, CCW: A541.09 for pulse output 1. Accordingly, the actual inputs can be used as the CW/
CCW limit by outputting the flags below in the ladder program.
XW2B-40J6-9A
26
27
19
18
39
17
38
16
37
15
36
14
35
13
34
12
33
11
32
10
31
30
29
28
25
24
23
22
21
20
CJ1M-CPU21/-CPU22/-CPU23 (for 2
axes)
Dimensions
Specifications
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 side
180
3.5
7
15.5
29.5
3.5
7
X-axis driver sideY-axis driver side
20
39
19
45
2
20.5
42.8
2-3.5
(46)
3-134
Wiring
The Servo Drive phase Z output signal is wired to the origin signal in this terminal block.
(*3)
(*3)
20
+ 24 V
IN6
0V
IN7
X-axis X-axis
Origin
proximity RUN
X-axis X-axis X-axis

MING ALM BKIR
Common Common Common Common Common Common
X-axis
RESET
X-axis
ALMCOM
X1
X1
IN8
IN9
Y-axis Y-axis
Origin
proximity RUN
Y-axis Y-axis Y-axis

MING ALM BKIR
Common Common Common Common Common
XB
Y1
Y-axis Y-axis
RESET ALMCOM
Y1
(*2)
X-axis
CW limit
(Contact
2960.06)
(*1)
X-axis
CCW limit
(Contact
2960.07)
(*1)
24 VDC
39
FG
19
YB
(*2)
Y-axis
CW limit
(Contact
2960.08)
(*1)
Y-axis
CCW limit
(Contact
2960.09)
(*1)
24 VDC
24 VDC
Example)
2960.06
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
*6.
A540.08
The XB and YB contacts are used to turn ON/OFF the electromagnetic brake.
Connection to the MING input terminal is disabled.
Do not connect unused terminals.
The 0 V terminal is internally connected to the common terminals.
The applicable crimp terminal is R1.25-3 (round with open end).
3-135
Specifications
*1. CW and CCW limit input signals can also be input through Input Units. The signal for the CW/CCW
limit inputs in the CJ1M are as follows: CW: A540.08, CCW: A540.09 for pulse output 0 and CW:
A541.08, CCW: A541.09 for pulse output 1. Accordingly, the actual inputs can be used as the CW/
CCW limit by outputting the flags below in the ladder program.
Servo Drive Cable (XW2Z-xJ-B31)

This cable connects the driver to a Servo Relay Unit (XW2B-20J6-8A, XW2B-40J6-9A).
Cable types
Model
XW2Z-100J-B31
Length (L)
Outer diameter of
sheath
Weight
1m
Approx. 0.1 kg
8.1 dia.
XW2Z-200J-B31
2m
Approx. 0.2 kg

L
52.4
XW2B-20J6-8A
XW2B-40J6-9A
Specifications
Driver side
Servo Relay Unit side
30
Wiring
Wire and mark color Number
1
Blue/Red (1)
2
Blue/Black (1)
3
Pink/Red (1)
Pink/Black (1)
4
5
Green/Red (1)
6
Green/Black (1)
7
Orange/Red (1)
8
10
Gray/Red (1)
Gray/Black (1)
11
12
Blue/Red (2)
13
Blue/Black (2)
Orange/Black (1)
14
Pink/Red (2)
15
16
Pink/Black (2)
17
Orange/Red (2)
18
Green/Black (2)
Orange/Red (2)
19
20
Any
Driver side
Number
7
38
5
6
3
4
30
10
23
24
39
29
27
31
11
37
36
Shell
[Servo Relay Unit connector]

Connector socket model: XG4M-2030
Strain relief model: XG4T-2004
[Cable]
AWG28 10P UL2464
[Driver connector]
Connector plug model: 10150-3000PE (Sumitomo 3M)
Connector case model: 10350-52A0-008 (Sumitomo 3M)
3-136
R88D-KTx
Position Control Unit-Servo Relay Unit Cable Specifications

Position Control Unit Cable (XW2Z-xJ-A3)
This cable connects a Programmable Controller (CQM1H-PLB21) to a Servo Relay Unit
(XW2B-20J6-3B).
Cable types
Model
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A3
Outer diameter of
sheath
Weight
50 cm
Approx. 0.1 kg
7.5 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A3
1m
Approx. 0.1 kg

L
CQM1 side
25
32.2
CQM1H-PLB21

XW2B-20J6-3B
t=15
Wiring
CQM1 side
Number
15
12
13
14
1
3
4
5
6
Hood cover

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3-137
Specifications
39

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CS1W-NC113 and C200HW-NC113) to a Servo
Relay Unit (XW2B-20J6-1B).
Cable types
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A6
Weight
50 cm
Approx. 0.1 kg
8.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A6
1m
Approx. 0.1 kg
47
38
83
Specifications

CS1W-NC113
C200HW-NC113
XW2B-20J6-1B
t = 11
Wiring
Number
A1
A2
A8
A6
A10
A16
A14
A24
A12
A21
A23
A22
A19
A20
Crimp
terminal
3-138

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CS1W-NC213/NC413 and C200HW-NC213/
NC413) to a Servo Relay Unit (XW2B-40J6-2B).
Cable types
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A7
50 cm
Weight
Approx. 0.1 kg
10.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A7
1m
Approx. 0.2 kg

47

48
XW2B-40J6-2B
t = 11
Wiring
Number
A1/B1
A2/B2
A8
A6
A10
A16
A14
A24/B24
A19
A21
A12
A23
A22
A20/B20
B8
B6
B10
B16
B14
B23
B22
B21
B19
B12
Crimp
terminal

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
3-139
Specifications
83

CS1W-NC213
CS1W-NC413
C200HW-NC213
C200HW-NC413

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CS1W-NC133) to a Servo Relay Unit (XW2B20J6-1B).
Cable types
Model
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A10
Outer diameter of
sheath
Weight
50 cm
Approx. 0.1 kg
10.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A10
1m
Approx. 0.2 kg
47
CS1W-NC133
48
83
Specifications
t = 11
XW2B-20J6-1B
1000
Wiring
Number
A3
A4
A1
A2
A7
A8
A5
A6
AWG 20Black
AWG 20Red
A10
A16
A14
A24
A12
A21
A23
A22
A19
A20
Crimp
terminal
3-140

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CS1W-NC233/433) to a Servo Relay Unit (XW2B40J6-1B).
Cable types
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A11
50 cm
Weight
Approx. 0.1 kg
10.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A11
1m
Approx. 0.2 kg

47
48
83
t =11
XW2B-40J6-1B
1000
Wiring
Number
A3/B3
A4/B4
A1/B1
A2/B2
A7
A8
A5
A6
AWG20 Black
AWG20 Red
A10
A16
A14
A24/B24
A19
A21
A12
A23
A22
A20/B20
B7
B8
B5
B6
B10
B16
B14
B23
B22
B21
B19
B12
Crimp
terminal

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
3-141
Specifications

CS1W-NC233
CS1W-NC433

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CJ1W-NC113) to a Servo Relay Unit (XW2B20J6-1B).
Cable types
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A14
Weight
50 cm
Approx. 0.1 kg
10.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A14
1m
Approx. 0.2 kg
50
CJ1W-NC113
38
20J6-1B
Specifications
XW2B-20J6-1B
C11
W- N
CJ1
t = 11
L
Wiring
Number
A1
A2
A8
A6
A9
A14
A12
A20
A11
A17
A19
A18
A15
A16
Crimp
terminal
3-142

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CJ1W-NC213/NC413) to a Servo Relay Unit
(XW2B-40J6-2B).
Cable types
Model
XW2Z-050J-A15
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
50 cm
Weight
Approx. 0.1 kg
10.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A15
1m
Approx. 0.2 kg
50
48

40J6 -2B
XW2B-40J6-2B
CJ1
W- N
C21
3/NC
413
CJ1W-NC213
CJ1W-NC413
t = 11
L
Wiring
Number
A1/B1
A2/B2
A8
A6
A9
A14
A12
A20/B20
A15
A17
A11
A19
A18
A16/B16
B8
B6
B9
B14
B12
B19
B18
B17
B15
B11
Crimp terminal

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
3-143
Specifications

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CJ1W-NC133) to a Servo Relay Unit (XW2B20J6-1B).
Cable types
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A18
50 cm
Weight
Approx. 0.1 kg
10.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A18
1m
Approx. 0.2 kg
50
CJ1W-NC133
38

20J6-1B
Specifications
CJ1
W- N
C13
3
1000
t = 11
L
Wiring
Number
A3
A4
A1
A2
A7
A8
A5
A6
AWG20 Black
AWG20 Red
A9
A14
A12
A20
A11
A17
A19
A18
A15
A16
Crimp
terminal
3-144

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
XW2B-20J6-1B

This cable connects a Position Control Unit (CJ1W-NC233/433) to a Servo Relay Unit (XW2B40J6-2B).
Cable types
Model
Outer diameter of
sheath
Length (L)
XW2Z-050J-A19
50 cm
Weight
Approx. 0.1 kg
10.0 dia.
XW2Z-100J-A19
1m
Approx. 0.2 kg
50

XW2B-40J6-2B
CJ1
W- N
C23
3/NC
4
33
1000
t = 11
L
Wiring
Number
A3/B3
A4/B4
A1/B1
A2/B2
A7
A8
A5
A6
AWG20 Black
AWG20 Red

Number
A9
A14
A12
A20/B20
A15
A17
A11
A19
A18
A16/B16
B7
B8
B5
B6
B9
B14
B12
B19
B18
B17
B15
B11
Crimp
terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
3-145
Specifications
40J6-2B
48

CJ1W-NC233
CJ1W-NC433
3-6 External Regeneration Resistor Specifications
3-6 External Regeneration Resistor

Specifications
External Regeneration Resistor Specifications
R88A-RR08050S
Regeneration
Resistance Nominal
Heat radiation
absorption for 120C
value
capacity
condition
temperature rise
Model
3
Specifications
R88ARR08050S
50
80 W
20 W
Aluminum
250 250,
Thickness: 3.0
Thermal switch
output specifications
Operating temperature
150C 5% NC contact
Rated output: 30 VDC, 50
mA max.
R88A-RR080100S
Regeneration
Resistance Nominal
Heat radiation
absorption for 120C
value
capacity
condition
temperature rise
Model
R88ARR080100S
100
80 W
20 W
Aluminum
250 250,
Thickness: 3.0
Thermal switch
150C 5% NC contact
Rated output: 30 VDC, 50
mA max.
R88A-RR22047S
Model
R88ARR22047S
3-146
Regeneration
Resistance Nominal
Heat radiation
absorption for 120C
value
capacity
condition
temperature rise
Thermal switch
Aluminum
350 350,
Thickness: 3.0
Operating temperature:
170C 7C
NC contact
Rated output: 250 VAC,
0.2 A max.
47
220 W
70 W
3-6 External Regeneration Resistor Specifications
R88A-RR50020S
Model
R88ARR50020S
Regeneration
Resistance Nominal
Heat radiation
absorption for 120C
value
capacity
condition
temperature rise
Thermal switch
Aluminum
600 600,
Thickness: 3.0
200C 7C
NC contact
0.2 A max.
24 VDC, 0.2 A max.
20
500 W
180 W
3
Specifications
3-147
3-7 EMC Filter Specifications
3-7 EMC Filter Specifications

Specifications
Applicable
servodrive
R88D-KT01H
Filter model
Rated current
Leakage
current
Rated voltage
R88A-FIK102-RE
2.4 A
R88D-KT02H
R88D-KT04H
R88A-FIK104-RE
4.1 A
R88D-KT08H
R88A-FIK107-RE
6.6 A
R88D-KT10H
R88A-FIK114-RE
250 VAC single-phase
14.2 A
R88D-KT15H
3.5 mA
R88D-KT06F
R88A-FIK304-RE
Specifications
R88D-KT10F
4A
R88D-KT15F
400 VAC single-phase
R88D-KT20F
R88A-FIK306-RE
R88D-KT30F
R88A-FIK312-RE
6A
12 A
R88D-KT50F
3-148
System Design
This chapter explains the installation conditions, wiring methods including wiring
conforming to EMC directives and regenerative energy calculation methods
regarding the Servo Drive, Servomotor, as well as the performance of External
Regeneration Resistors, and so on.
4-1 Installation Conditions .................................................4-2

Servo Drive Installation Conditions ................................................. 4-2
Servomotor Installation Conditions ................................................. 4-4
Gearbox Installation Conditions ...................................................... 4-7
4-2 Wiring.............................................................................4-8
Peripheral Equipment Connection Examples ................................. 4-8
Main Circuit and Motor Connections............................................. 4-18
4-3 Wiring Conforming to EMC Directives......................4-32

Wiring Method............................................................................... 4-32
Selecting Connection Component ................................................ 4-36
4-4 Regenerative Energy Absorption..............................4-46

Calculating the Regenerative Energy ........................................... 4-46
Driver Regeneration Absorption Capacity..................................... 4-48
Regenerative Energy Absorption with an External Regeneration Resistor.......4-49
Connecting an External Regeneration Resistor............................ 4-50
4-1 Installation Conditions

Servo Drive Installation Conditions
Dimension Conditions around Equipment
Install drivers according to the dimensions shown in the following illustration to ensure proper heat
dispersion inside the driver and convection inside the panel. If the drivers are installed side by
side, install a fan for air circulation to prevent uneven temperatures inside the panel.
Fan
Fan
100 mm or more
4
System Design
Driver
A
Driver
B
Side
Driver
C
40 mm or more
Air
100 mm or more
Air
For side-by-side installation you have to apply next derating for models of 800W or less: Installed
in position A, maximum ambient temperature 50C, installed in position B, maximum ambient
temperature 40C and installed in position C, maximum ambient temperature 45C.
Mounting Direction
Mount the drivers in a direction (perpendicular) so that the model number can be seen properly.
Environment Operating Conditions

The environment in which drivers are operated must meet the following conditions. Drivers may
malfunction if operated under any other conditions.
Operating ambient temperature: 0 to 55C (Take into account temperature rises in the
following individual drivers themselves.)
Operating humidity: 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
Operating atmosphere: No corrosive gases.
Altitude: 1,000 m max.
Derating must be applied for higher altitudes.
Ambient Temperature Control

To operate in environments in which there is minimal temperature rise is recommended to
maintain a high level of reliability.
When the driver is installed in a closed space, such as a box, ambient temperature will rise due
to temperature rise in each unit. Use a fan or air conditioner to prevent the driver's ambient
temperature from exceeding 55C.
Driver surface temperatures may rise to as much as 30C above the ambient temperature. Use
heat-resistant materials for wiring, and keep its distance from any devices or wiring that are
sensitive to heat.
The limit of a driver is largely determined by the ambient temperature around the internal
electrolytic capacitors. When an electrolytic capacitor reaches its limit, electrostatic capacity drops
4-2
If a driver is always operated at the ambient temperature of 55C and with 100% output of the rated
torque and rated rotation speed, its limit is expected to be approx. 28,000 hours (excluding the
axial-flow fan). A drop of 10C in the ambient temperature will double the expected limit for driver.
Lifetime 25C = Lifetim 55C 2
5525
= 224000 hour
10
Keeping Foreign Objects Out of Units

Place a cover over the driver or take other preventative measures to prevent foreign objects, such
as drill filings, from getting into the driver during installation. Be sure to remove the cover after
installation is complete. If the cover is left on during operation, driver's heat dissipation is blocked,
which may result in malfunction.
Take measures during installation and operation to prevent foreign objects such as metal
particles, oil, machining oil, dust, or water from getting inside of drivers.
4
System Design
4-3
Servomotor Installation Conditions

Environment Operating Conditions
The environment in which the motor is operated must meet the following conditions. Operating the
motor out of the following ranges may result in malfunction of the motor.
Operating ambient temperature: 0 to 40C*1

Operating humidity: 85% RH max. (with no condensation)
Operating atmosphere: No corrosive gases.
*1. The operating ambient temperature is the temperature at a point 5 cm from the motor.
Impact and Load

The motor is resistant to impacts of up to 98 m/
s2. Do not apply heavy impacts or loads during
transport, installation, or removal of the motor.
4
System Design
When transporting, hold the motor body

itself. And do not hold the encoder, cable, or
connector areas. Failure to follow this
guideline may result in damaging the motor.
Always use a pulley remover to remove pulleys,
couplings, or other objects from the shaft.
After assembly, secure cables so that there
is no impact or load placed on the cable
outlet.
Connecting to Mechanical Systems

For the allowable axial loads for motors,
refer to "Characteristics"(P.3-3). If an axial
load greater than that specified is applied to
a motor, it will reduce the limit of the motor
bearings and may break the motor shaft.
When connecting to a load, use couplings
that can sufficiently absorb mechanical
eccentricity and declination.
Ball screw center line
Motor center line
Axial offset
For spur gears, an extremely large radial load

may be applied depending on the gear precision.
Use spur gears with a high degree of precision
(for example, JIS class 2: normal line pitch error
of 6 m max. for a pitch circle diameter of 50 mm).
If the gear precision is not adequate, allow
backlash to ensure that no radial load is
placed on the motor shaft.
Backlash
Set a structure in which
the distance between
axes can be adjusted.
When using bevel gears, a load will be applied in

the thrust direction depending on the structural
precision, the gear precision, and temperature
changes. Provide appropriate backlash or take
other measures to ensure that a thrust load
larger than the specified level is not applied.
Do not put rubber packing on the flange
surface. If the flange is mounted with rubber
packing, the motor flange may crack under
the tightening force.
4-4
Bevel gear
Set a movable structure.
When connecting to a V-belt or timing belt, consult the manufacturer for belt selection and tension.
A radial load twice the belt tension will be placed on the motor shaft. Do not allow the allowable
radial load or more to be placed on the motor shaft. If an excessive radial load is applied, the motor
shaft and bearings may be damaged.
Set up a movable pulley in the middle of the motor shaft and the load shaft so that the belt tension
can be adjusted.
Pulley
Tension adjustment (Set a movable structure.)
Belt
Tension
Water and Drip Resistance
The protective structure for the motors is as follows.

IP67 or equivalent (except for through-shaft parts)
Use the Servomotor with oil seal if you are using it in an environment where oil drops can attach
to the through-shaft part.The operating conditions of the Servomotor with oil seal are as
follows.
Place the oil level below the lip of the oil seal.
Prepare a good lubricated condition under which oil droplets splash on the oil seal.
If you are using the Servomotor in the axial direction, make sure that no oil accumulates on the lip
of the oil seal.
Radiator Plate Installation Conditions

Be sure to install a radiator plate on the Servomotor.If a radiator plate is not installed, the
Servomotor may be damaged due to temperature rise.Refer to 3-2, "Motor Specifications" for the
specifications of the radiator plate.
When the Servomotor is to be attached to the equipment, the Servomotor temperature may rise
if not enough radiation area is provided.Because a rise in temperature can vary depending on the
material of the mounting part or the environment, check the temperature on the actual
Servomotor.
Depending on the environment, such as when the Servomotor is installed near a heating element,
the Servomotor temperature may rise significantly.In this case, take any of the following
measures.
Lower the load ratio.
Review the heat radiation conditions of the Servomotor.
Install a cooling fan and apply forced air cooling to the Servomotor.
4-5
System Design
Oil-water Measures
Other Precautions
Take measures to protect the motor shaft from corrosion. The motor shafts are coated with anticorrosion oil when shipped, but anti-corrosion oil or grease should also be applied when
connecting the components which apply load to the shaft.
Caution
Do not apply the commercial power supply
directly to the motor. Failure to follow this
guideline may result in fire occurring.
Never repair the product by disassembling
it. Failure to follow this guideline may result
in electric shock or injury.
System Design
4-6
Gearbox Installation Conditions

Using Another Company's Gearbox (Reference)
If the system configuration requires another company's Gearbox to be used in combination
with an Accurax G5 motor, select the Gearbox so that the load on the motor shaft (i.e., both
the radial and thrust loads) is within the allowable range. (Refer to "Characteristics"(P.3-3) for
details on the allowable loads for the motors.)
Also, select the Gearbox so that the allowable input rotation speed and allowable input torque
of the Gearbox are not exceeded.
4
System Design
4-7
4-2 Wiring
4-2 Wiring
Peripheral Equipment Connection Examples
R88D-KT01H/-KT02H/-KT04H/-KT08H/-KT10H/-KT15H (Single-phase Input)
R
T Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz: R88D-KTxxL

Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz: R88D-KTxxH
NFB
Main circuit contactor (*1)

2MC

OFF
ON 1MC 2MC
1MC
Surge suppressor (*1)
System Design
2MC
1MC
X
PL
Servo error display
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servo Drive
CNA
L1C
L2C
XB
Power cables
(*3)
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servomotor
1MC
2MC
Noise filter (*1)
1
2
E NF
3
4
Ground to 100
or less
CNB
24 VDC
U
V
CNA
L1
M
W
L3
CNB
B1
(*4)
Regeneration Resistor
(*5)
CN2
Ground to 100 or less
B3
Encoder cables
B2
CN1
37 /ALM
24 VDC
36 ALMCOM
X
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
control
device
Control cables
4-8
CN1
BKIRCOM 10
XB
(*2)
*1. A recommended product is listed in 4-3, Wiring

Confirming to EMC Directives.
*2. Recommended relay: MY relay by OMRON (24-V type) For example, MY2
relay by OMRON can be used with all G5-series motors with brakes
24 VDC because its rated induction load is 2 A (24 VDC).
*3. There is no polarity on the brakes.
*4. The Regeneration Resistor built-in type (KT04L, KT08H, KT10H and
KT15H) shorts B2 and B3. When the amount of regeneration is large,
remove the connection between B2 and B3 and connect the
Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2.
*5. There is no Internal Regeneration Resistor for KTA5L to KT02L, and
KT01H to KT04H. When the amount of regeneration is large, connect
the necessary Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2.
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT01H/-KT02H/-KT04H/-KT08H/-KT10H/-KT15H (3-phase Input)
R S
T
3-phase 100 to 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz: R88D-KTxxL
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz: R88D-KTxxH
NFB

2MC

OFF
ON 1MC
2MC
1MC

X
1MC
2MC
PL
Servo error display
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servo Drive
CNA
L2C
XB
1MC
Power cables
(*3)
System Design
L1C
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servomotor
B
CNB
2MC
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4
24 VDC
U
V
6
CNA
Ground to 100
or less
L1
L2
L3
CNB
CN2
B1
(*4)
Regeneration
Resistor
Encoder cables
B2
CN1
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
CN1
XB
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
control
device
B3
BKIRCOM 10
(*2)
Control cables
*1. A recommended product is listed in 4-3,

Wiring Confirming to EMC Directives.
*2. Recommended relay: MY relay by OMRON
(24-V type) For example, MY2 relay by
OMRON can be used with all G5-series
motors with brakes because its rated
induction load is 2 A (24 VDC).
24 VDC
*4. The Regeneration Resistor built-in type (KT20H)
shorts B2 and B3. When the amount of regeneration
is large, remove the connection between B2 and B3
and connect the Regeneration Resistor between B1
and B2.
4-9
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT20H
R S
T
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz: R88D-KTxxH
NFB

2MC

OFF
ON 1MC
2MC
1MC

X
1MC
2MC
X
PL
Servo error display
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servo Drive
System Design
CNA
L1C
L2C
XB
1MC
Power cables
(*3)
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servomotor
B
CNB
2MC
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4
24 VDC
U
V
6
CNA
Ground to 100
or less
L1
L2
L3
CNC
CN2
B1
(*4)
Regeneration
Resistor
Encoder cables
B2
CN1
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
CN1
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
control
device
Control cables
4-10
B3
BKIRCOM 10
XB
(*2)

24 VDC *3. There is no polarity on the brakes.
*4. The Regeneration Resistor built-in type
(KT30H and KT50H) shorts B2 and B3. When
the amount of regeneration is large, remove
the connection between B2 and B3 and
connect the Regeneration Resistor between
B1 and B2.
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT30H/-KT50H
R S
T
3-phase 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NFB

2MC

OFF
ON 1MC
2MC
1MC

X
1MC
2MC
PL
Servo error display
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servo Drive
TB1
L2C
XB
Power cables
(*3)
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servomotor
1MC
TB1
2MC
Noise filter (*1)
1
24 VDC
U
2
NF
E
4
TB1
Ground to 100
or less
L1
L2
L3
CN2
B1
(*4)
Regeneration
Resistor
Encoder cables
B3
B2
CN1
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
CN1
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
control
device
Control cables
BKIRCOM 10

(24-V type) For example, MY2 relay by OMRON
can be used with all G5-series motors with
brakes because its rated induction load is 2 A
(24 VDC).
24 VDC *3. There is no polarity on the brakes.
XB
*4. The Regeneration Resistor built-in type
(*2)
(KT06F to KT15F) connects B2 and B3. When
the amount of regeneration is large, remove
the connection between B2 and B3 and
connect the Regeneration Resistor between
B1 and B2.
4-11
System Design
L1C
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT75H
S T
3-phase 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NFB
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4

2MC

OFF
ON
1MC 2MC
1MC
Ground to 100
or less.
1MC
2MC
X
PL
Servo alarm display
Accurax G5-series
AC Servo Drive
XB
(*6)
Accurax G5-series
AC Servomotor
Power cables
TB1
System Design
(*5)
(*3)
L1C
B
TB1
L2C
24 VDC
1MC
M
2MC
W
TB1
Reactor
L1
L2
CN2
L3
B1
Regeneration
Resistor
Encoder cables
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
CN1
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
control
device
Control cables
BKIRCOM 10
DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4
Surge suppressor
(*4)
1MC
2MC
4-12
B2
CN1
(*7)
Ground to 100 or less.
*1. Recommended products are listed in 4-3,

Wiring Conforming to EMC Directives.
*2. Recommended relay: MY relay by OMRON (24-V)
For example, MY2 relay by OMRON can be used
with all G5-series motors with brakes because its
rated induction load is 2 A (24 VDC).
XB 24 VDC *4. When using an externally connected
Dynamic Brake Resistor, short DB3 and
(*2)
DB4.
*5. Provide auxiliary contacts to protect the
system with an external sequence so that a
Servo ON state will not occur due to
deposition in the Dynamic Brake Resistor.
*6. A Dynamic Brake Resistor of 2 , 180 W is
built in. If the capacity is insufficient, use an
external Dynamic Brake Resistor of 1.2 ,
400 W.
Do not use the built-in resistor and an
external resistor at the same time.
*7. Install an external protective device, such as
a temperature fuse. Monitor the temperature
of the external Dynamic Brake Resistor.
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT150H
S T
3-phase 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NFB
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4

OFF
ON
1MC 2MC
2MC
1MC
1MC
2MC
PL
Servo alarm display
Accurax G5-series
AC Servo Drive
(*4)
XB
Accurax G5-series
AC Servomotor
Power cables
TB1
(*5)
(*3)
System Design
L1C
B
TB1
L2C
24 VDC
1MC
M
2MC
W
TB1
Reactor
L1
L2
CN2
L3
B1
Regeneration
Resistor
Encoder cables
B2
CN1
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
CN1
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
control
device
BKIRCOM 10
DB1 DB2
Surge suppressor
1MC

(24-V) For example, MY2 relay by OMRON can
be used with all G5-series motors with brakes
because its rated induction load is 2 A (24
VDC).
24 VDC
XB
(*2)
system with an external sequence so that
a Servo ON state will not occur due to
*5. Use an external Dynamic Brake Resistor
of 1.2 , 400 W.
*6. Install an external protective device, such
as a temperature fuse. Monitor the
temperature of the external Dynamic Brake
Resistor.
2MC
(*6)
4-13
4-2 Wiring
R S
T
3-phase 380 to 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NFB

2MC

OFF
ON 1MC
2MC
1MC

X
1MC
2MC
X
PL
Servo error display
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servo Drive
System Design
CNC
24 V
0V
XB
24 VDC
1MC
Power cables
(*3)
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servomotor
B
CNB
2MC
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4
24 VDC
U
V
6
CNA
Ground to 100
or less
L1
L2
L3
CND
CN2
B1
(*4)
Regeneration
Resistor
Encoder cables
B2
CN1
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
CN1
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
control
device
Control cables
4-14
B3
BKIRCOM 10
XB
(*2)

24 VDC
*4. There is no Internal Regeneration Resistor
with KT30F and KT50F. When the amount of
regeneration is large, connect the necessary
Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2.
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT30F/-KT50F
R S
T
3-phase 380 to 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NFB

2MC

OFF
ON 1MC
2MC
1MC

X
1MC
2MC
PL
Servo error display
TB2
XB
Power cables
(*3)
24 V
1MC
0V
24 VDC
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servomotor
B
TB1
24 VDC
2MC
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4
6
TB1
Ground to 100
or less
L1
L2
CN2
L3
Encoder cables
B1
Regeneration
Resistor
B2
CN1
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
CN1
XB
BKIR 11
CN1
User-side
contro
device
BKIRCOM 10

(24-V type)
For example, MY2 relay by OMRON can be
used with all G5-Series motors with brakes
VDC).
24 VDC
(*2)
Control cables
4-15
System Design
Accurax G5-Series
AC Servo Drive
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT75F
S T
3-phase 380 to 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NFB
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4

2MC

OFF
ON
1MC 2MC
1MC
1MC
2MC
X
PL
Servo alarm display
(*6)
Accurax G5-series
AC Servomotor
Accurax G5-series
AC Servo Drive
TB2
System Design
(*5)
Power cables
(*3)
XB
24 V
B
TB1
0V
24 VDC
24 VDC
1MC
(*5)
(*6)
M
W
2MC
TB1
Reactor
L1
L2
CN2
Power supply
(neutral point)
L3
Encoder cables
B1
Regeneration
Resistor
B2
CN1
37 /ALM
24 VDC
36 ALMCOM
User-side
control
device
CN1
BKIR 11
CN1
Control cables
BKIRCOM
10
DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4
Surge suppressor
(*4)
1MC
2MC
(*7)
4-16
XB
(*2)

(24-V) For example, MY2 relay by OMRON can
be used with all G5-Series motors with brakes
VDC).
24 VDC *4. When using an externally connected Dynamic
Brake Resistor, short DB3 and DB4.
*5. Provide auxiliary contacts to protect the system
with an external sequence so that a Servo ON
state will not occur due to deposition in the
Dynamic Brake Resistor.
*6. A Dynamic Brake Resistor of 8 , 180 W is built
in. If the capacity is insufficient, use an external
Dynamic Brake Resistor of 4.8 , 400 W.
Do not use a built-in resistor and an external
resistor at the same time.
*7. Wire the circuit so that the voltage between DB1
and DB2 is 400 VAC or less.
Install an external protective device, such as a
temperature fuse. Monitor the temperature of
the external Dynamic Brake Resistor.
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT150F
R S T
3-phase 380 to 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
NFB
Noise filter (*1)
NF
E
4

OFF
ON 1MC 2MC
2MC
1MC

*1
1MC
2MC
X
PL
Servo alarm display
(*4)
(*5)
Accurax G5-series
AC Servomotor
Accurax G5-series
AC Servo Drive
Power cables
(*3)
XB
24V
System Design
TB2
B
TB1
0V
24 VDC
24 VDC
1MC
(*5)
(*6)
M
W
2MC
TB1
Reactor
L1
L2
CN2
Power supply
(neutral point)
L3
Encoder cables
B1
Regeneration
Resistor
B2
CN1
24 VDC
37 /ALM
36 ALMCOM
User-side
control
device
CN1
BKIR 11
CN1
Control cables
BKIRCOM 10
XB
(*2)
DB1 DB2
Surge suppressor
24 VDC

*2. Recommended relay: MY relay by
OMRON (24-V) For example, MY2 relay
by OMRON can be used with all
G5-Series motors with brakes because
its rated induction load is 2 A (24 VDC).
system with an external sequence so that
a Servo ON state will not occur due to
*5. Use an external Dynamic Brake Resistor
of 4.8 , 400 W.
*6. Wire the circuit so that the voltage between
DB1 and DB2 is 400 VAC or less.
Install an external protective device, such as
a temperature fuse. Monitor the temperature
of the external Dynamic Brake Resistor.
1MC
2MC
(*6)
4-17
4-2 Wiring
Main Circuit and Motor Connections

When wiring the main circuit, use proper wire sizes, grounding systems, and noise resistance.
R88D-KT01H/-KT02H/-KT04H/-KT08H/-KT10H/-KT15H
Symbol
Name
Function

input
R88D-KTxL
(50 to 400 W) : Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60 Hz
(200 to 400 W): 3-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60 Hz
R88D-KTxH
(100 W to 1.5 kW) : Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V)
50/60 Hz
(100 W to 1.5 kW): 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60
Hz

supply input
R88D-KTxL : Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60Hz

Hz
L1
L2
L3
System Design
L1C
L2C

Symbol
Name
B1
B2
B3
Resistor connection
terminals
U
V
W
50 to 400 W: These terminals normally do not need to be

connected. If there is high regenerative energy, connect an
External Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2.
750 W to 1.5 kW: Normally B2 and B3 are shorted. If there is high
regenerative energy, remove the short-circuit bar between B2 and
B3 and connect an External Regeneration Resistor between B1
and B2.
Motor connection
terminals
Frame ground
4-18
Function
This is the ground terminal. Ground to 100 or less.
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT20H
Symbol
L1
L2
Name
Function

input
R88D-KTxH (2 kW) :
3-phase: 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/60 Hz

supply input

Hz
L3
L1C
L2C

Symbol
U
V
Name
Motor connection
terminals
Red
White

System Design
Function
Blue
Green/
Yellow
Frame ground
External Regeneration Resistor Connector Specifications (CNC)

Symbol
B1
B2
B3
N
Name
Resistor connection
terminals
Function
When using N terminal, make sure not to exceed the fuse's rated
voltage (360 VDC, 60 A).
4-19
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT30H/-KT50H
Symbol
Name
Function
L1
L2

input
R88D-KTxH (3 to 5 kW): 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V)

50/60 Hz

supply input
R88D-KTxH: Single-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/60 Hz
L3
L1C
L2C
B1
B2
B3
Resistor connection
terminals
System Design

Motor connection
terminals
Frame ground
4-20
Normally B2 and B3 are short-circuited. If there is high regenerative

energy, remove the short-circuit bar between B2 and B3 and
connect an External Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2.
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT75H
Symbol
Name
Function

input
R88D-KTxH (7.5 kW): 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/
60 Hz

supply input
L1
L2
L3
L1C
L2C
B1
B2
B3
Resistor connection
terminals
DB1
DB2
DB3
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals
DB4
V
W
Do not connect.
These terminals are used to control the MC for externally connected
dynamic brake resistance. Connect them if required.
connected Dynamic Brake Unit, remove the short bar from between
DB3 and DB4.
Motor connection
terminals
Frame ground
4-21
4
System Design
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT150H
Symbol
Name
Function

input
R88D-KTxH (15 kW): 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/
60 Hz

supply input
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals

Resistor connection
terminals
L1
L2
L3
L1C
L2C
DB1
DB2
B1
B2
B3
Do not connect.

System Design
V
W
Motor connection
terminals
Frame ground
Symbol
L1
L2
Name
Function

input
R88D-KTxF
(600 W to 2 kW) : 3-phase: 380 to 480 VAC (323 to 528 V) 50/60
Hz
L3

Symbol
U
V
Name
Motor connection
terminals
Function
Red
White

Blue
Green/
Yellow
Frame ground
4-22
4-2 Wiring
Control Circuit Connector Specifications (CNC)

Symbol
24 V
0V
Name
supply input
Function
24 VDC (21.6 to 26.4 V)
External Regeneration Resistor Connector Specifications (CND)

Symbol
B1
B2
Name
Resistor connection
terminals
B3
N
Function
When using N terminal, make sure not to exceed the fuse's rated
voltage (660 VDC, 20 A).
4
R88D-KT30F/-KT50F
Symbol
Name
Function
L1
L2

input
R88D-KTxF (3 to 5 kW): 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC (323 to 528 V)

50/60 Hz
Resistor connection
terminals
A Regeneration Resistor is not built in.

Connect an External Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2, if
necessary.
L3
B1
B2
U
Red
V
W
White
Motor connection
terminals

Blue
Green/
Yellow
Frame ground
Do not connect.
24 V

supply input
R88D-KTxF: 24 VDC (21.6 to 26.4 V)
Frame ground
Do not connect.
0V
NC
4-23
System Design
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT75F
Symbol
24 V
0V
Name
supply input
Function
24 VDC

Symbol
Name
Function

input
R88D-KTxF (7.5 kW): 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC (323 to 528 V) 50/
60 Hz
L1
L2
L3
B1
B2
NC
Resistor connection
terminals
System Design
DB1
DB2
DB3
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals
Do not connect.
DB4

connected Dynamic Brake Unit, remove the short bar from between
DB3 and DB4.
Red
V
W
White
Motor connection
terminals

Blue
Green/
Yellow
Frame ground
4-24
4-2 Wiring
R88D-KT150F
Symbol
24 V
0V
Name
supply input
Function
24 VDC

Symbol
DB1
DB2
Name
Function
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals


input
R88D-KTxF (15 kW): 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC (323 to 528 V) 50/
60 Hz
L1
L2
L3
B1
NC
Do not connect.
Red
U
V
W
White
Motor connection
terminals
System Design
B2
Resistor connection
terminals

Blue
Green/
Yellow
Frame ground
4-25
4-2 Wiring
Terminal Block Wire Sizes

100-VAC Input Type Wire Sizes: R88D-KTxxL
Model (R88D-)
Unit
Item
System Design
4-26
KTA5L
KT01L
KT04L
kVA
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.9
1.4
2.6
4.3
7.6
AWG14 to 18
AWG18
2.5
4.6
Main circuit power

supply input (L1
and L3, or L1, L2
and L3) *1
Rated current
Control circuit
power supply input
(L1C and L2C)
Wire size
Motor connection
terminals (U, V, W,
and FG) *2
Rated current
1.2
Wire size
AWG14 to 18
Frame ground (FG) Wire size
AWG14
Screw size
M4
Tightening torque
Nm
1.2
Wire size
KT02L
1.7
4-2 Wiring
200 VAC Input Type Wire Sizes: R88D-KTxxH

Model (R88D-)
KT01H
KT02H
KT04H
kVA
0.5
0.5
0.9
1.3
1.8
1.3
2.4/1.3
4.1/2.4
6.6/3.6
9.1/5.9
*1
*1
*1
*1
Wire size
AWG14 to 18
Screw size
Tightening torque
Nm
Wire size
AWG18
Screw size
Tightening torque
Nm
Rated current
1.2
1.6
2.6
4.1
5.9
Wire size
AWG14 to 18
Screw size
Tightening torque
Nm
Wire size
AWG14
Screw size
M4
Tightening torque
Nm
1.2
Unit
Item
Main circuit power
supply input (L1
and L3, or L1, L2
and L3) *1
Control circuit
power supply input
(L1C and L2C)
Motor connection
terminals (U, V, W,
and FG) *2
KT10H
AWG14
AWG14
System Design
Frame ground
(FG)
Rated current
KT08H
4-27
4-2 Wiring
Model (R88D-)
Unit
Item
Main circuit power
supply input (L1
and L3, or L1, L2
and L3)
kVA
2.3
3.3
4.5
7.5
11.0
22.0
14.2/
8.1*1
11.8
15.1
21.6
32.0
58.0
Wire size
AWG14
AWG
10
AWG6
Screw size
M5
Nm
2.0
Wire size
AWG18
Screw size
M5
Nm
2.0
Rated current
9.4
13.4
18.6
Wire size
AWG14
Screw size
M5
Nm
2.0
AWG14
AWG12
M4
M5
Nm
1.2
2.0
Rated current
Tightening torque
Control circuit
power supply input
(L1C and L2C)
Tightening torque
4
System Design
Motor connection
terminals (U, V, W,
and FG) *1
Tightening torque
Frame ground (FG) Wire size
Screw size
Tightening torque
Dynamic brake
resistance control
terminals
KT15H KT20H KT30H KT50H KT75H KT150H
Screw size
AWG12
M6
2.0 to
2.4
M4
1.3 to
1.5
33.0
AWG12
Nm
66.7
AWG6
AWG4
M6
2.0 to
2.4
2.2 to
2.5
AWG6
AWG4
M6
1.4 to
1.6
1.3 to
1.5
*1. Use the same wire sizes for B1 and B2.

Note 1. The left value is for single-phase input and the right value is for 3-phase input.
Note 2. Connect an OMRON power cable to the motor connection terminals.
4-28
0.7 to
0.8
44.0
M5
Tightening torque
2.2 to
2.5
2.4 to
2.8
M4
0.7 to
0.8
4-2 Wiring
400 VAC Input Type Wire Sizes: R88D-KTxxF

Model (R88D-)
Unit
Item
Main
circuit
power
supply
input (L1
and L3, or
L1, L2 and
L3)
KT06F KT10F KT15F KT20F KT30F KT50F KT75F KT150F
Rated
current
2.8
Wire size
AWG14
Screw
size
M5
2.0
Tightening
Nm
torque
2.8
3.9
5.9
7.6
12.1
AWG12
16.0
29.0
AWG
10
AWG6
M6
2.0 to
2.4
2.2 to
2.5
Control
circuit
power
supply
input (L1C
and L2C)
Wire size
AWG20 to 24
Screw
size
M5
Tightening
Nm
torque
2.0
Motor
connection
terminals
(U, V, W,
and FG) *1
Rated
current
2.9
2.9
4.7
6.7
9.4
Wire size
AWG14
Screw
size
M5
2.0
2.0 to
2.4
2.2 to
2.5
AWG6
AWG4
Frame
ground
(FG)
Wire size
AWG14
AWG12
Screw
size
M4
M5
1.2
2.0
Tightening
Nm
torque
Dynamic
brake
resistance
control
terminals
AWG12
Screw
size
Tightening
Nm
torque
M4
16.5
1.3 to
1.5
0.7 to
0.8
22.0
33.4
AWG6
AWG4
M6
M6
1.4 to
1.6
2.4 to
2.8
M5
M4
1.3 to
1.5
0.7 to
0.8
*1. Use the same wire sizes for B1 and B2.

Note 1. The left value is for single-phase input and the right value is for 3-phase input.
Note 2. Connect an OMRON power cable to the motor connection terminals.
4-29
4
System Design
Tightening
Nm
torque
AWG18
4-2 Wiring
Wire Sizes and Allowable Current (Reference)

The following table shows the allowable current when there are 3 power supply wires. Use a
current below these specified values.
600-V Heat-resistant Vinyl Wire (HIV)

Conductive
resistance
(/km)
20
0.5
19/0.18
39.5
6.6
5.6
4.5
0.75
30/0.18
26.0
8.8
7.0
5.5
18
0.9
37/0.18
24.4
9.0
7.7
6.0
16
1.25
50/0.18
15.6
12.0
11.0
8.5
14
2.0
7/0.6
9.53
23
20
16
12
3.5
7/0.8
5.41
33
29
24
10
5.5
7/1.0
3.47
43
38
31
8.0
7/1.2
2.41
55
49
40
14.0
7/1.6
1.35
79
70
57
AWG size
System Design
4-30
Allowable current (A) for ambient

temperature
Nominal crossConfiguration
sectional area
(wires/mm2)
(mm2)
30C
40C
50C
4-2 Wiring
Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

On a driver with 2.0 kW or less, a connector-type terminal block is used.
The procedure for wiring these terminal blocks is explained below.
Connector-type
terminal block
(Example of R88D-KT01H)
1. Remove the terminal block from the driver before wiring.

The driver will be damaged if the wiring is done with the terminal block in place.
Refer to "Terminal Block Wire Sizes"(P.4-26) for applicable wire sizes.
8 to 9 mm
3. Open the wire insertion slots in the terminal block using a tool.
There are 2 ways to open the wire insertion slots, as follows.
Pry the slot open using the lever that comes with the Servo Drive. (Figure A)
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (end width: 3.0 to 3.5 mm) into the opening for the driver of the
terminal block, and press down firmly to open the slot. (Figure B)
Figure A
Figure B
4. With the wire insertion slot held open, insert the end of the wire.
After inserting the wire, let the slot close by releasing the pressure from the lever or the
screwdriver.
5. Mount the terminal block to the driver.

After all of the terminals have been wired, return the terminal block to its original position on
the Servo Drive.
4-31
System Design
2. Strip off 8 to 9 mm of the covering from the end of each wire.
4-3 Wiring Conforming to EMC Directives

Conformance to the EMC directives (EN55011 Class A Group 1 (EMI) and EN61000-6-2
(EMS)) can be ensured by wiring under the conditions described in this section.
These conditions are for conformance of Accurax G5 products to the EMC directives. EMCrelated performance of these products, however, may be influenced by the configuration,
wiring, and other conditions of the equipment in which the products are installed. The EMC
conformance of the system as a whole must be confirmed by the customer.
The following are the requirements for EMC directive conformance.
The driver must be installed in a metal case (control panel). (The motor does not, however, have
to be covered with a metal plate.)
Noise filters and lightening surge absorptive elements (surge absorbers) must be installed on power supply lines.
Braided shielded cables must be used for all I/O signal cables and encoder cables. (Use tinplated, mild steel wires for the shielding.)
All cables, I/O wiring, and power lines connected to the driver may have clamp filters installed to
improve the noise immunity.
The shields of all cables must be directly connected to a ground plate.
System Design
Wiring Method
R88D-KTA5L/-KT01L/-KT02L/-KT04L/-KT01H/-KT02H/-KT04H/-KT08H/-KT10H/KT15H/-KT20H/-KT30H/-KT50H/-KT75H/-KT150H
(2)
Single-phase: 100 VAC

2/3-phase: 200 VAC
(1)
FC
SD
L1
NF
CNA
L2
CNB
L3
(3)
U
V
W
L1C
(4)
L2C
(6)
SG
CN2
FC
CN1
FC
(5)
(7)
Single-phase :
100-240 VAC
(8)
TB Controller
*1. For models with a single-phase power supply input (R88D-KTA5L/-KT01L/-KT02L/-KT04L/-KT01H/KT02H/-KT04H/-KT08H/-KT10H/-KT15H), the main circuit power supply input terminals are L1 and L3.
Ground the motor's frame to the machine ground when the motor is on a movable shaft.
Use a ground plate for the frame ground for each unit, as shown in the above diagrams, and ground to a single point.
Use ground lines with a minimum thickness of 3.5 mm2, and arrange the wiring so that the ground
lines are as short as possible.
No-fuse breaker, surge absorber, and noise filter should be positioned near the input terminal
block (ground plate), and I/O lines should be separated and wired at the shortest distance.
4-32
R88D-KT06F/-KT10F/-KT15F/-KT20F/-KT30F/-KT50F/-KT75F/-KT150F
(2)
3-phase: 400 VAC
(1)
L1
NF
CNA
L2
CNB
L3
24V
24 Vdc
(3)
FC
SD
U
V
W
(4)
CND
0V
(6)
CN2
FC
SG
FC
CN1
(5)
(7)
(8)
System Design
Single-phase :
240 VAC
TB Controller
Unit Details
Symbol
SG
Name
Surge absorber
(Optional)
Manufacturer
Okaya Electric
Industries Co., Ltd.
Okaya Electric
NF
Noise filter
Rasmi
Model
Comment
RAV781BWZ-4
Single-phase 100 VAC
RAV781BXZ-4
3-phase 200 VAC
SUP-EK5-ER-6
Single-phase 100/200
VAC (5 A)
3SUP-HQ10-ER-6
3-phase 200 VAC (10 A)
3SUP-HU30-ER-6
3SUP-HL50-ER-6B
See chapter 3
1-phase 200 VAC

3-phase 400 VAC
SD
Servo Drive
OMRON
*1
SM
Servomotor
OMRON
*1
FC
Clamp core
TDK
ZACT305-1330
TB
Controller
Switch box
*1. A specified combination of Servo Drive and Servomotor must be used.
4-33
Cable Details
Symbol
Supplies from
Connects to
Cable name
Length
Comment
Shielded
Ferrite
(1)
AC power supply Noise filter
Power supply
line
2m
3-phase or single
phase
No
No
(2)
Noise filter
Servo Drive
Power supply
line
2m
No
Optional
(3)
Servo Drive
Servomotor
Power cable
20 m
Yes
Optional
(4)
Servo Drive
Servomotor
Encoder
cable
20 m
Yes
Optional
(5)
Switch box
Servo Drive
I/O cable
2m
Optional
Optional
(6)
Frame ground
Noise filter
FG line
1.5
m
No
No
(7)
Frame ground
Noise filter
FG line
1.5
m
No
No
(8)
AC power supply Switch box
Power supply
line
1.5
m
No
No
System Design
For operations, if no-fuse breakers are installed at the top and the power supply line is wired from
the lower duct, use metal tubes for wiring or make sure that there is adequate distance between
the input lines and the internal wiring. If input and output lines are wired together, noise resistance
will decrease.
The noise filter must be installed as close as possible to the entrance of the control panel. Wire
as shown at the left in the following illustration.
Separate the input and output.

AC input
1
2
3
NF
E
AC output
4
5
6
The effect of the noise filter is small.

AC input
1
2
3
NF
E
4
5
6
Ground
Ground
AC output
Use twisted-pair cables for the power supply cables, or bind the cables.
Twisted-pair process
Servo Drive
Bound cables
L1
L1C
L2
L2C
L3
Binding
Separate power supply lines and signal lines when wiring.
4-34
Servo Drive
Control Panel Structure

Openings in the control panel, such as holes for cables, operating panel mounting holes, and
gaps around the door, may allow electromagnetic waves into the panel. To prevent this,
observe the recommendations described below when designing or selecting a control panel.
Case Structure
Use a metal control panel with welded joints at the top, bottom, and sides so that the surfaces will
be electrically conductive.
If assembly is required, strip the paint off the joint areas (or mask them during painting), to make
them electrically conductive.
The panel may warp and gaps may appear when screws are tightened. Be sure that no gaps
appear when tightening screws.
Do not leave any conductive part unconnected.
Ground all units within the case to the case itself.
Door Structure
Case
Door
A
B
Door
Oil-resistant gasket
[Control panel]
Conductive gasket
[A-B cross-section diagram]
Oil-resistant gasket
Conductive gasket
[Door (interior side)]
4-35
4
System Design
Use a metal door.

Use a water-draining structure where the door and case fit together, and leave no gaps. (Refer to
the diagrams.)
Use a conductive gasket between the door and the case. (Refer to the diagrams.)
Strip the paint off the sections of the door and case that will be in contact with the conductive
gasket (or mask them during painting), so that they will be electrically conductive.
The panel may warp and gaps may appear when screws are tightened. Be sure that no gaps
appear when tightening screws.
Selecting Connection Component

This section explains the criteria for selecting the connection components required to improve noise resistance.
Understand each component's characteristics, such as its capacity, performance, and applicable range when
selecting the connection components.
For more details, contact the manufacturers directly.
No-fuse Breaker (NFB)

When selecting a no-fuse breaker, consider the maximum input current and the inrush current.
Maximum Input Current

The driver's momentary maximum output is approx. 3 times the rated output, and can be output
for up to 3 seconds.
Therefore, select no-fuse breakers with an operation time of at least 5 seconds at 300% of the
rated current ratio. General and low-speed no-fuse breakers are generally suitable.
Select a no-fuse breaker with a rated current greater than the total effective load current of all the
motors (when multiple drivers are used). (The rated current of the power supply input for each
motor is provided in "Main Circuit and Motor Connections"(P.4-18).)
Add the current consumption of other controllers, and any other components when selecting.
System Design
Inrush Current
The following table lists the driver inrush currents.
With low-speed no-fuse breakers, an inrush current 10 times the rated current can flow for 0.02
second.
When multiple drivers are turned ON simultaneously, select a no-fuse breaker with a 20-ms
allowable current that is greater than the total inrush current, shown in the following table.
Inrush current (Ao-p)
Driver model
4-36
Main circuit
power supply
Control circuit
power supply
R88D-KTA5L
14
R88D-KT01L
14
R88D-KT02L
14
R88D-KT04L
15
14
R88D-KT01H
14
28
R88D-KT02H
14
28
R88D-KT04H
14
28
R88D-KT08H
29
28
R88D-KT10H
29
28
R88D-KT15H
29
28
R88D-KT20H
29
14
R88D-KT30H
22
14
R88D-KT50H
22
14
R88D-KT75H
66
15
R88D-KT150H
66
15
Inrush current (Ao-p)

Driver model
Main circuit
power supply
Control circuit
power supply
R88D-KT06F
28
48
R88D-KT10F
28
48
R88D-KT15F
28
48
R88D-KT20F
32
48
R88D-KT30F
32
48
R88D-KT50F
32
48
R88D-KT75F
32
48
R88D-KT150F
32
48
Leakage Breaker
4-37
4
System Design
Select leakage breakers designed for protection against ground faults.

Because switching takes place inside the drivers, high-frequency current leaks from the SW
elements of the driver, the armature of the motor, and the cables.
High-frequency, surge-resistant leakage breakers, because they do not detect high-frequency
current, can prevent operation with high-frequency leakage current.
When using a general leakage breaker, use 3 times the total of the leakage current given in the
following table as a reference value.
When selecting leakage breakers, remember to add the leakage current from devices other than
the motor, such as machines using a switching power supply, noise filters, inverters, and so on.
To prevent malfunction due to inrush current, we recommend using a leakage breaker of 10 times
the total of all current values.
The leakage breaker is activated at 50% of the rated current. Allow leeway when selecting a
leakage breaker.
For details on leakage breakers selection method, refer to the manufacturer's catalog.
Surge Absorber
Use surge absorbers to absorb lightning surge voltage and abnormal voltage from power supply
input lines.
When selecting surge absorbers, take into account the varistor voltage, the surge immunity and
the energy tolerated dose.
For 200-VAC systems, use surge absorbers with a varistor voltage of 620 V.
The surge absorbers shown in the following table are recommended.
Manufacturer
Model
Okaya Electric
Industries Co.,
Ltd.
RAV-781BWZ-4
Okaya Electric
Industries Co.,
Ltd.
RAV-781BXZ-4
Surge immunity
700 V 20%
Type
Comment
Single-phase
100/200 VAC
2500 A
Block
3-phase 200 VAC

700 V 20%
2500 A
System Design
Note 1. Refer to the manufacturers' catalog for operating details.

Note 2. The surge immunity is for a standard impulse current of 8/20 s. If pulses are wide, either
decrease the current or change to a larger-capacity surge absorber.
External Dimensions
For single-phase (BWZ series)
200
200
28.5
28.5
5.5
11
4.2
5.5
11
4.2
For 3-phase (BXZ series)
41
41
Equalizing Circuits
For single-phase (BWZ series)
(1)
4-38
(2)
For 3-phase (BXZ series)
(1)
(2) (3)
4.5
4.5
28
1 2 3
28
1 2
Noise Filter for the Brake Power Supply

Use the following noise filter for the brake power supply.
Model
SUP-EK5-ER-6
Rated
current
5A
Rated
voltage
250 V
Leakage current
Manufacturer
1.0 mA (at 250 Vrms, 60 Hz)
Okaya Electric
Note. Noise can also be reduced by 1.5 turns with the ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK) Radio Noise Filter.
Radio Noise Filter and Emission Noise Prevention Clamp Core

Use one of the following filters to prevent switching noise of PWM of the Servo Drive and to
prevent noise emitted from the internal clock circuit.
Model
Manufacturer
Application
OMRON
Driver output and power cable
3G3AX-ZCL2 *2
OMRON
ESD-R-47B *3
NEC TOKIN
ZCAT3035-1330 *4
TDK
Encoder cable and I/O cable
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
Generally used for 1.5 kW or higher.

Generally used for 1.5 kW or lower. The maximum number of windings is 3 turns.
Generally used for 50/100 W. The maximum number of windings is 2 turns.
Also used on the driver output power lines to comply with the EMC directives. Only a clamp is used.
This clamp can also be used to reduce noise current on a FG line.
4-39
System Design
3G3AX-ZCL1 *1
External Dimensions
3G3AX-ZCL1
3G3AX-ZCL2
130
85
39.5
7
35
80
832
78
72
3M4
50
95
80
26
2M5
31.5
12.5
1802
1602
714 Long hole
4
ZCAT3035-1330
17.5
5.1
39
34
51.5
25.5
34.0
3.0
6.5
System Design
ESD-R-47B
4-40
30
13
Impedance Characteristics
3G3AX-ZCL1
3G3AX-ZCL2
1000
4T
100
Impedance ()
Impedance ()
20
15T
40
60
10
80
100
0.1
0.1
1
10
100
10
Frequency (kHz)
100
1000
10000
Frequency (kHz)
ZCAT3035-1330
System Design
ESD-R-47B
1000
10000
Impedance ()
Impedance ()
1000
100
100
10
10
100
1000
10
10
Frequency (MHz)
100
1000
Frequency (MHz)
4-41
Surge Suppressor
Install surge suppressors for loads that have induction coils, such as relays, solenoids, brakes,
clutches, etc.
The following table shows the types of surge suppressors and recommended products.
Type
Feature
Diodes
Diodes are used for relatively small loads

when the reset time is not an issue, such
as relays.
At power shutoff the surge voltage is the
lowest, but the rest time takes longer.
Used for 24/48-VDC systems.
Use a fast-recovery diode with a short

reverse recovery time
(e.g. RU2 of Sanken Electric Co., Ltd.).
Thyristors
and varistors
Thyristors and varistors are used for loads

when induction coils are large, as in
electromagnetic brakes, solenoids, etc.,
and when reset time is an issue.
The surge voltage at power shutoff is
approx. 1.5 times the varistor voltage.
Select the varistor voltage as follows.

For 24-VDC systems, varistor voltage 39
V For 100-VDC systems, varistor voltage
200 V For 100-VAC systems, varistor
voltage 270 V For 200-VAC systems,
varistor voltage 470 V
Capacitor
resistor
The capacitor plus resistor combination is

used to absorb vibration in the surge at
power supply shutoff.
The reset time can be shortened by
selecting the appropriate capacitance and
resistance.
Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.

XEB12002 0.2 F-120 XEB12003 0.3
F-120
4
System Design
Recommended product
Thyristors and varistors are made by the following manufacturers. Refer to manufacturer's
documentation for details on these components.
Thyristors: Ishizuka Electronics Co.

Varistor: Ishizuka Electronics Co., Panasonic Corporation
Contactor
Select contactors based on the circuit's inrush current and the maximum momentary phase
current.
The driver inrush current is covered in the preceding explanation of no-fuse breaker selection.
And the maximum momentary phase current is approx. twice the rated current.
The following table shows the recommended contactors.
Manufacturer
Model
Rated current
Coil voltage
J7L-09-22200
11 A
200 VAC
J7L-12-22200
13 A
200 VAC
J7L-18-22200
18 A
200 VAC
J7L-32-22200
26 A
200 VAC
J7L-40-22200
35 A
200 VAC
J7L-50-22200
50 A
200 VAC
J7L-65-22200
65 A
200 VAC
J7L-75-22200
75 A
200 VAC
OMRON
4-42
Improving Encoder Cable Noise Resistance

Take the following steps during wiring and installation to improve the encoder's noise
resistance.
Always use the specified encoder cables.
If cables are joined midway, be sure to use connectors. And do not remove more than 50 mm of
the cable insulation. In addition, always use shielded cables.
Do not coil cables. If cables are long and are coiled, mutual induction and inductance will increase
and cause malfunctions. Always use cables fully extended.
When installing noise filters for encoder cables, use clamp filters.
The following table shows the recommended clamp filters.
Manufacturer
Product name
Model
Specifications
NEC TOKIN
Clamp filters
ESD-SR-250
For cable dia. up to 13 mm
TDK
Clamp filters
ZCAT3035-1330
For cable dia. up to 13 mm
Do not place the encoder cable with the following cables in the same duct.
Control cables for brakes, solenoids, clutches, and valves.
External Dimensions
31.6
System Design
ESD-SR-250
to 13
31.5
38.0
Impedance Characteristics
ESD-SR-250
10000
Impedance ()
1000
100
10
10
100
1000
Frequency (MHz)
4-43
Improving Control I/O Signal Noise Resistance

Positioning can be affected and I/O signal errors can occur if control I/O is influenced by noise.
Use completely separate power supplies for the control power supply (especially 24 VDC) and the
external operation power supply. In particular, do not connect the 2 power supply ground wires.
Install a noise filter on the primary side of the control power supply.
If motors with brakes are being used, do not use the same 24-VDC power supply for both the
brakes and the control I/O. Additionally, do not connect the ground wires. Connecting the ground
wires may cause I/O signal errors.
Keep the power supply for pulse commands and error counter reset input lines separated from the
control power supply as far as possible. In particular, do not connect the 2 power supply ground
wires.
We recommend using line drivers for the pulse command and error counter reset outputs.
Always use twisted-pair shielded cable for the pulse command and error counter reset signal lines,
and connect both ends of the shield cable to frame grounds.
If the control power supply wiring is long, noise resistance can be improved by adding 1-F
laminated ceramic capacitors between the control power supply and ground at the driver input
section or the controller output section.
For open collector specifications, keep the length of wires to within 2 m.
System Design
4-44
Reactor to Reduce Harmonic Current

Harmonic Current Measures
The Reactor is used for suppressing harmonic currents. The Reactor functions to suppress
sudden and quick changes in electric currents.
The Guidelines for Suppressing Harmonic Currents in Home Appliances and General Purpose
Components require that manufacturers take appropriate remedies to suppress harmonic current
emissions onto power supply lines.
Select the proper Reactor model according to the Servo Drive to be used.
Reactor
Driver model
Model
Rated
current
Inductance
3G3AX-DL2002
1.6 A
21.4 mH
R88D-KT01L
R88D-KT02H
3G3AX-DL2004
3.2 A
10.7 mH
R88D-KT02L
R88D-KT04H
3G3AX-DL2007
6.1 A
6.75 mH
R88D-KT04L
R88D-KT08H
R88D-KT10H
3G3AX-DL2015
9.3 A
3.51 mH
R88D-KT15H
3G3AX-DL2022
13.8 A
2.51 mH
R88D-KT08H
R88D-KT10H
R88D-KT15H
3G3AX-AL2025
10.0 A
2.8 mH
R88D-KT20H
R88D-KT30H
3G3AX-AL2055
20.0 A
0.88 mH
R88D-KT50H
3G3AX-AL2110
34.0 A
0.35 mH
R88D-KT75H
R88D-KT150H
3G3AX-AL2220
67.0 A
0.18 mH
R88D-KT06F
R88D-KT10F
R88D-KT15F
3G3AX-AL4025
5.0 A
7.7 mH
R88D-KT20F
R88D-KT30F
3G3AX-AL4055
10.0 A
3.5 mH
R88D-KT50F
3G3AX-AL4110
17.0 A
1.3 mH
R88D-KT75F
R88D-KT150F
3G3AX-AL4220
34.0 A
0.74 mH
4
System Design
R88D-KTA5L
R88D-KT01H
4-45
4-4 Regenerative Energy Absorption

The Servo Drives have internal regeneration process circuitry, which absorbs the regenerative
energy produced during motor deceleration and prevents the DC voltage from increasing. An
overvoltage error occurs, however, if the amount of regenerative energy from the motor is too
large. If this occurs, remedies must be taken to reduce the regenerative energy by changing
operating patterns, or to increase the regeneration process capacity by connecting an External
Regeneration Unit.
Calculating the Regenerative Energy

Horizontal Axis
+N1
4
System Design
Motor operation
N2
TD2
Eg2
Motor output torque
TD1
Eg1
t1
t2
T
In the output torque graph, acceleration in the forward direction is shown as positive, and
acceleration in the reverse direction is shown as negative.
The regenerative energy values in each region can be derived from the following equations.
N1 , N2
: Rotation speed at start of deceleration [r/min]
TD1 , TD2 : Deceleration torque
[Nm]
t1, t2
[s]
: Deceleration time
Note. Due to the loss of motor winding resistance and PWM, the actual regenerative energy will be
approx. 90% of the values derived from these equations.
For driver models with internal capacitors used for absorbing regenerative energy (i.e., models of
400 W or less), the values for both Eg1 or Eg2 (unit: J) must be lower than the driver's regeneration
absorption capacity. (The capacity depends on the model.For details, refer to the next section.)
For driver models with an Internal Regeneration Resistor used for absorbing regenerative energy (i.e., models of 500
W or more), the average amount of regeneration Pr (unit: W) must be calculated, and this value must be lower than the
driver's regeneration absorption capacity. (The capacity depends on the model.For details, refer to the next section.)
The average regeneration power (Pr) is the regeneration power produced in 1 cycle of operation [W].
P r = ( E g1 + E g2 ) / T[W]
T: Operation cycle [s]
4-46
Vertical Axis
+N1
Downward movement
Motor operation
Upward movement
N2
TD2
Eg2
TL2
Eg3
Motor output torque

TD1
Eg1
In the output torque graph, acceleration in the forward direction (rising) is shown as positive, and
acceleration in the reverse direction (falling) is shown as negative.
N1 , N2
: Rotation speed at start of deceleration [r/min]
TD1 , TD2 : Deceleration torque
[Nm]
TL2
: Torque during downward movement
[Nm]
t1, t3
: Deceleration time
[s]
t2
: Constant-speed driving time during downward movement [s]
Note. Due to the loss of winding resistance, the actual regenerative energy will be approx. 90% of the
values derived from these equations.
For driver models with internal capacitors used for absorbing regenerative energy (i.e., models of
400 W or less), the values for both Eg1 or Eg2 Eg3 (unit: J) must be lower than the driver's
regeneration absorption capacity. (The capacity depends on the model.For details, refer to the
next section.)
For driver models with an Internal Regeneration Resistor used for absorbing regenerative energy
(i.e., models of 500 W or more), the average amount of regeneration Pr (unit: W) must be
calculated, and this value must be lower than the driver's regeneration absorption capacity. (The
capacity depends on the model.For details, refer to the next section.)
The average regeneration power (Pr) is the regeneration power produced in 1 cycle of operation [W].
P r = ( E g1 + E g2 + E g3 ) / T [W]
T: Operation cycle [s]
4-47
System Design
The regenerative energy values in each region can be derived from the following equations.
Driver Regeneration Absorption Capacity

Amount of Internal Regeneration Absorption in Drivers
This driver absorbs regenerative energy internally with built-in capacitors.
If the regenerative energy is too large to be processed internally, an overvoltage error occurs
and operation cannot continue.
The following table shows the regenerative energy (and amount of regeneration) that each
driver can absorb. If these values are exceeded, take the following processes.
Connect an External Regeneration Unit. (Regeneration process capacity improves.)
Reduce the operating rotation speed. (The amount of regeneration is proportional to the square of the rotation speed.)
Lengthen the deceleration time. (Regenerative energy per unit time decreases.)
Lengthen the operation cycle, i.e., the cycle time. (Average regenerative power decreases.)
4
System Design
Servo Drive model
4-48
Internal regeneration
resistance
Regenerative
energy (J) that can
be absorbed by
internal capacitor
Minimum value
of regeneration
resistance ()
Average amount of
regeneration that can
be absorbed (W)
R88D-KTA5L
16
17
R88D-KT01L
16
17
R88D-KT02L
22
17
R88D-KT04L
32
17
13
R88D-KT01H
25
34
R88D-KT02H
25
34
R88D-KT04H
36
34
R88D-KT08H
62
12
25
R88D-KT10H
99
18
25
R88D-KT15H
99
18
25
R88D-KT20H
99
72
10
R88D-KT30H
150
60
R88D-KT50H
150
60
R88D-KT75H
282
R88D-KT150H
254
R88D-KT06F
128
21
100
R88D-KT10F
128
21
100
R88D-KT15F
128
21
100
R88D-KT20F
128
29
40
R88D-KT30F
285
60
40
R88D-KT50F
285
60
29
R88D-KT75F
273
14
R88D-KT150F
492
14
Regenerative Energy Absorption with an External Regeneration Resistor

If the regenerative energy exceeds the regeneration absorption capacity of the driver, connect
an External Regeneration Resistor.
Connect the External Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2 terminals on the driver.
Double-check the terminal names when connecting the resistor because the driver may be
damaged if connected to the wrong terminals.
The External Regeneration Resistor will heat up to approx. 120C. Do not place it near
equipment and wiring that is easily affected by heat. Attach radiator plates suitable for the heat
radiation conditions.

Characteristics
Model
R88ARR080100S
R88ARR22047S
R88ARR50020S
50
100
47
20
80 W
80 W
220 W
500 W
Heat
radiation
condition

specifications
20 W
Aluminum
150C 5% NC contact
250 250,
Rated output: 30 VDC,
Thickness: 3.0
50 mA max.
20 W
Aluminum
150C 5% NC contact
250 250,
Rated output: 30 VDC,
Thickness: 3.0
50 mA max.
70 W
Operating temperature:
Aluminum
170 7C
350 350,
NC contact
Thickness: 3.0 Rated output: 250 VAC,
0.2 A max.
180 W
200 7C
Aluminum
NC contact
600 600,
Thickness: 3.0
0.2 A max.
24 VDC, 0.2 A max.
4-49
4
System Design
R88ARR08050S
The amount of
Resistance Nominal
regeneration
value
capacity absorption for 120C
temperature rise
Connecting an External Regeneration Resistor

R88D-KTA5L/-KT01L/-KT02L/-KT01H/-KT02H/-KT04H
Normally B2 and B3 are open.
If an External Regeneration Resistor is necessary, remove the short-circuit bar between B2
and B3, and then connect the External Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2 as shown
in the diagram below.
Servo Drive
>
B1
B3
B2
4
System Design
Connect the thermal switch output so that the main circuit power supply is shut OFF when the
contacts open.
When using multiple External Regeneration Resistors, connect each thermal switch in series.
The resistor may be damaged by burning, or cause fire if it is used without setting up a power
supply shutoff sequence using the output from the thermal switch.
R88D-KT04L/-KT08H/-KT10H/-KT15H/-KT20H/-KT30H/-KT50H/-KT06F/
-KT10F/-KT15F/-KT20F/-KT30F/-KT50F
If an External Regeneration Resistor is necessary, remove the short-circuit bar between B2
and B3, and then connect the External Regeneration Resistor between B1 and B2 as shown
in the diagram below.
Servo Drive
>
B1

B3
B2
Remove the short-circuit bar between B2 and B3.

contacts open.
4-50
R88D-KT75H/-KT150H/-KT75F/-KT150F
If an External Regeneration Resistor is necessary, connect the External Regeneration Resistor
between B1 and B2 as shown in the diagram below.
Servo Drive
>
B1
B2

contacts open.
4
System Design
4-51
Combining External Regeneration Resistors
Regeneration
absorption
capacity *1
20 W
40 W
R88A-RR08050S
R88A-RR080100S
Model
140 W
R88A-RR08050S
R88A-RR080100S
R88A-RR22047S
R88A-RR22047S
25 /50
47
94
Resistance
50 /100
value *2
Connectio
n method
70 W
Regeneration
absorption capacity *1
Model
140 W
280 W
560 W
R88A-RR22047S
R88A-RR22047S
R88A-RR22047S
47
23.5
System Design
Resistance value *2 23.5
Connection
method
Regeneration
absorption capacity *1
Model
180 W
360 W
R88A-RR50020S
R88A-RR50020S
R88A-RR50020S
10
10
Resistance value *2 20
1440 W
R
Connection
method
*1. Select a combination that has an absorption capacity greater than the average regeneration power (Pr).
*2. Do not use a combination with resistance values lower than the minimum external regeneration resistance of each driver. For
information on the minimum external regeneration resistance, refer to "Driver Regeneration Absorption Capacity"(P.4-48).
Safty Points
Surface temperatures on regeneration resistance can reach 200C.
Do not place objects that tend to catch fire nearby. To prevent people from touching them, install
a type of cover that enables heat dissipation.
4-52
BASIC CONTROL Mode

This chapter explains an outline of operations available in various CONTROL
modes and explains the contents of setting.
5-1 Position Control............................................................5-2

Outline of Operation........................................................................ 5-2
Parameters Requiring Settings ....................................................... 5-3
Related Functions ........................................................................... 5-6
Parameter Block Diagram for POSITION CONTROL mode........... 5-7
5-2 Speed Control ...............................................................5-8

Related Functions ......................................................................... 5-12
Parameter Block Diagram for SPEED CONTROL mode.............. 5-13
5-3 Torque Control............................................................5-14

Outline of Operation...................................................................... 5-14
Parameters Requiring Settings ..................................................... 5-14
Parameter Block Diagram for TORQUE CONTROL mode........... 5-18
5-4 Internally Set Speed Control......................................5-19

5-5 Switching Control .......................................................5-22

5-6 Full Closing Control ...................................................5-25

Parameter Block Diagram for FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode 5-33
5-1 Position Control

Outline of Operation
Position control is performed based on the pulse train input received from the controller.
The motor rotates using the value of the pulse train input multiplied by the Electronic Gear (Pn008
to Pn010).
Controller
(pulse train output type)
BASIC CONTROL Mode

CJ1W-NC113/133
CJ1W-NC213/233
CJ1W-NC214/414
CJ1W-NC234/434
CJ1W-NC413/433
CS1W-NC113/133
CS1W-NC213/233
CS1W-NC413/433
CPU Unit with built-in
pulse I/O
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
CP1H-X/XA/Y
CP1L-M/L
5-2
Driver
Accurax G5
Pulse train
44
+CWLD
45
CWLD
46
+CCWLD
47
CCWLD
+CW
CW
+CCW
CCW
POSITION CONTROL mode
Electronic Gear
(Pn008 to Pn010)
Numerator
Denominator
Motor
Accurax G5
Parameters Requiring Settings

Parameter
number
Pn000
Pn001
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Reference direction
Select the relation between the reference command and the

rotation direction in the motor.
P.8-2
CONTROL mode Selection
Select the CONTROL mode.
P.8-2
Pn005
Command Pulse Input Selection Select the command pulse input terminal.
P.8-4
Set the count direction for the command pulse input.
Pn006
Command Pulse Rotation

Direction Switching
Selection
P.8-4
Pn007
COMMAND PULSE
mode Selection
Set the count method for the command pulse input.
Pn008
COMMAND PULSE
resolution
Define the number of command pulses per motor revolution.

If this is zero, Pn009 and Pn010 become active.
P.8-6
Pn009
Electronic Gear Ratio

Numerator 1
Set the numerator of the electronic gear ratio for the

command pulse input.
P.8-6
Pn010

Denominator
Set the denominator of the electronic gear ratio for the

P.8-6
P.8-4
Select the position control (Set values: 0=Position control, 3=Switch between position control
and speed control or 4=Switch between position control and torque control).
Command Pulse Input Process (Pn005, Pn006, Pn007)

Position command input terminals are classified into the input 1 system (+CW, -CW, +CCW, CCW) and input 2 system (+CWLD, -CWLD, +CCWLD, -CCWLD).
If the position command output is a line-driver output, set input 1. If it is an open collector
output, set input 2. Although input 2 can also be used for a line-driver output, the allowable
maximum input frequency will become lower than when input 1 is selected.
5-3
BASIC CONTROL Mode
CONTROL Mode Selection (Pn001)
Parameter
number
Setting
range
Explanation
Pn005
Command Pulse
Input Selection
Pn006
Command Pulse
Rotation Direction
Switching
Selection
Set the count direction for the

0: Command pulse, forward
direction
1: Command pulse, reverse
direction
0 to 1
COMMAND
PULSE mode
Selection
Set the count method for the

0: 90 phase difference (A/B) signal
input)
1: Forward/reverse pulse
input)
3: Feed pulse/direction signal
0 to 3
0 to 1
BASIC CONTROL Mode

5-4
Unit
Select the command pulse input

terminal.
0: Photocoupler input (+CW, -CW,
+CCW, -CCW)
1: Input for line driver only (+CWLD,
-CWLD, +CCWLD, -CCWLD)
Pn007
Parameter name
The settings for command pulse rotation direction and COMMAND PULSE mode are as follows.
Pn006
Pn007
0 or 2
Command
pulse pattern
90 phase
difference,
2-phase pulse
(phase A
+ phase B)
Signal
name
CW
Forward direction
command
t1
t1
Phase A
Reverse direction
command
t1
t1
Phase B
CCW
t2
CCW
t2
t5
t5
t4
t4
CCW
CW
t6
t1
Phase A
t6
t1
CW
+CW, -CW,
+CCW, -CCW
Phase B is 90 ahead of phase A.
t2
t2
t3
t2
CCW
t2
t5
t5
t4
t4
CCW
+CWLD, -CWLD, +CCWLD,

-CCWLD
t1
t1
CCW
Pulse train
+ Sign
Symbol
t1
Phase B
CW
3
t6
t1
Phase B is 90 behind phase A.

Forward
direction pulse
train + Reverse
direction pulse
train
t6
t1
t1
t6
Allowable
input
maximum
frequency
t6
t6
t6
Minimum required duration [s]

t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
4 Mpps
0.25
0.125
0.125
0.125
0.125
0.125
Line driver
500 kpps
Open collector
200 kpps
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5-5
BASIC CONTROL Mode
0 or 2
t2
t2
Pulse train
+ Sign
90 phase
difference, 2phase pulse
(phase A
+ phase B)
Phase B is 90 behind phase A.
t3
CW
CW
3
t1
t1
Phase B is 90 ahead of phase A.

Forward
direction pulse
train + Reverse
direction pulse
train
t1
t1
Electronic Gear Function (Pn008, Pn009, Pn010)

This function allows to adjust the units of the command pulses by setting a ratio between the
encoder pulses and the command pulses.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Pn008
Electronic Gear
Integer Setting
Pn009
Pn010
Setting
range
Explanation
Set the number of command pulses
corresponding to 1 motor rotation.
Unit
0 to 220
Pulse
Electronic Gear
Set the numerator of the electronic
Ratio Numerator 1 gear ratio for the command pulse
input.
0 to 230
Electronic Gear
Ratio
Denominator
0 to 230
Set the denominator of the electronic

gear ratio for the command pulse
input.
For details on the electronic gear function, refer to "6-4 Electronic Gear Function"(P.6-12).
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Related Functions
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn011
Encoder Dividing
Numerator
Set the pulse output resolution using the numbers of output

pulses per rotation for OA and OB, respectively.
Pn012
Encoder Output Direction

Switching Selection
Set the phase-B logic and output source for pulse output.
Pn222
Position Command Filter

Time Constant
Set the time constant of the first-order lag filter for the
position command.
P.8-24
Pn223
Smoothing Filter Time

Constant
Set the time constant of the FIR filter for the position
command.
P.8-25
Pn431
Positioning Completion
Range 1
Set the threshold of position error for output of the positioning

completion signal.
P.8-41
Pn432
Condition Selection
Select the condition under which the positioning completion

signal is output.
P.8-42
Pn433
Hold Time
Set the INP signal output time.
Encoder Dividing
Denominator
You can set a dividing ratio by using Encoder Dividing

Numerator (Pn011) as the dividing numerator and Encoder
Dividing Denominator (Pn503) as the dividing denominator.
P.8-46
Pn517
Error Counter Reset

Condition Selection
Set the reset condition under which the error counter reset
input signal.
P.8-53
Pn518
Command Pulse
Prohibition Input Setting
Set whether to enable or disable the command pulse

prohibition input.
P.8-53
Pn503
5-6
P.8-7
P.8-7
P.8-41
Encoder
pulse output
OA
OB
OZ
Pn011 : 1 Rotation
Pn012 : Reverse
Numerator/Denominator
Pn503 : Denominator
Pulse regeneration
Electronic gear
reverse conversion
Encoder
Motor speed
Motor
Speed detection
Pn103 : Filter 1
Pn108 : Filter 2
Pn610 : Instantaneous Speed
Main
power
supply
+
+
Pn607 : Added Value

Pn608 : Forward Direction
Pn609 : Reverse Direction
Friction compensation
Torque command
Pn623 : Gain
Pn624 : Filter
Disturbance observer
Current control
Pn611 : Response Setting
Speed control
Pn101 : Speed Gain 1
Pn102 : Integration Time 1
Pn107 : Integration Time 2
Pn004 : Inertia Ratio
Pn612 : Switching Selection
Pn613 : Inertia Ratio 2
Pn112 : Gain
Pn113 : Filter
Torque feed
forward
Speed detection filter
Speed control command
Feedback pulse accumulation
Encoder position error
Position control
Pn100 : Loop Gain 1
Pn105 : Loop Gain 2
Pn110 : Gain
Pn111 : Filter
Speed
feed-forward
Command position error
Pn222 : FIR
Pn223 : First-order Lag
Pn008 : 1 Rotation
Pn500 : Numerator 2
Pn009 : Numerator
Pn501 : Numerator 3
Pn010 : Denominator Pn502 : Numerator 4
Pn213 : Switching Selection 1

Pn214 : Frequency 1
Pn215 : Frequency 2
Pn216 : Frequency 3
Pn217 : Frequency 4
Pn218 : Filter 1
Pn219 : Filter 2
Pn220 : Filter 3
Pn221 : Filter 4
Anti-vibration control
Smoothing filter
Internal position command speed
Electronic gear setting
Position command speed
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Pulse Input condition setting

Pn005 : Input Setting
train
Pn006 : Rotation Direction
Pn007 : Mode
Command pulse accumulation
Gain switching
Torque limit
Pn521 : Torque Limit Selection
Pn013 : No. 1 Torque Limit
Torque filter
Pn104 : Torque Filter 1
Pn200 : ADAPTIVE mode Setting

Pn201 : Frequency 1
Pn204 : Frequency 2
Pn207 : Frequency 3
Pn210 : Frequency 4
Pn202 : Notch 1 Width
Pn203 : Notch 1 Depth
Notch filter
Pn114 : Setting 2
Pn115 : Mode
Pn116 : Delay Time
Pn117 : Level
Pn118 : Hysteresis
Pn119 : Switching Time
Pn605 : Setting 3
Pn606 : Ratio
Parameter Block Diagram for POSITION CONTROL mode
5-7
5-2 Speed Control
5-2 Speed Control

Motor speed control is performed based on the analog voltage input from the controller.
You can also perform position control by combining with a controller that has a position control
function.
You can change the relation between the speed command and the rotation speed by setting the
Speed Command Scale (Pn302).
Driver
Accurax G5
Controller
(analog voltage output type)
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Motion Control Unit

CS1W-MC221/421(V1)
SPEED CONTROL mode
Analog voltage
(speed command)
Speed Command Scale

(Pn302)
Motor
Accurax G5
r/min
14
REF
15
AGND

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Select the relation between the reference command and the
rotation direction in the motor.
Reference
Pn000
Reference direction
Pn001
CONTROL mode
Selection
Pn300
Command Speed
Selection
Select the speed command input method.
Pn301
Speed Command
Direction Selection
Set the method for designating the forward or reverse

direction for the speed command.
P.8-26
Pn302
Speed Command Scale
Set the input gain for the analog speed command input.
P.8-27
Analog Speed Command

Rotation Direction
Switching
Inverts the polarity of the analogue speed command.
Pn303
Pn312
Soft Start Acceleration

Time
Set the acceleration time for internally set speed control. Set
the time until 1,000 r/min is reached.
P.8-28
Pn313
Soft Start Deceleration

Time
Set the deceleration time for internally set speed control. Set
the time until 1,000 r/min is reached.
P.8-29
Pn314
S-curve Acceleration/
Set the S-curve time in the time width centered on the
Deceleration Time Setting inflection points for acceleration and deceleration.
5-8
P.8-2
P.8-2
P.8-26
P.8-27
P.8-29
5-2 Speed Control
CONTROL mode Selection (Pn001)

Select the speed control (Set values: 1=Speed control, 3=Switching between position and
speed control or 5=Switching between speed control and torque control).
Analog Speed Command Input Process (Pn300, Pn301, Pn302, Pn303)

Convert the voltage input by an analog input to a speed command to control the motor.
Parameter
number
Setting
range
Parameter name
Explanation
Pn300
Command Speed
Selection

0: Analog torque command
1: No. 1 to 4 internally set speed
2: No. 1 to 3 internally set speed,
analog torque command
3: No. 1 to 8 internally set speed
0 to 3
Pn301
Speed Command
Direction
Selection
Select the method for designating

the direction for the speed
command.
0: By analogue command polarity
1: By digital input (VSIGN)
0 to 1
Speed Command
Scale
Set the input gain for the analog

speed command input.
0 to 2000
(r/min)/V
Analog Speed
Command
Rotation Direction
Switching
Set to reverse the polarity of the

speed command input.
0: The +command indicates the
forward direction as viewed from
the shaft end (CW).
1: The +command indicates the
reverse direction as viewed from
the shaft end (CCW).
0 to 1
Pn302
The conversion of analog speed command is explained below.

Speed
Command
Analog Speed
Command
Speed
Command Rotation
Direction
Selection
Direction
Selection
(Pn300)
Switching (Pn303)
(Pn301)
Analog
speed
command
(REF)
Speed
command
sign
selection
(VSIGN)
Motor
rotation
direction
+Voltage
(0 to 10 V)
Not affected
-Voltage
(-10 to 0 V)
Reverse
Not affected
direction
+Voltage
(0 to 10 V)
Not affected
-Voltage
(-10 to 0 V)
Forward
Not affected
direction
Conversion
graph
Forward
direction
Figure A
0
Reverse
direction
Figure B
0
Not affected
+Voltage
(0 to 10 V)
Not affected
-Voltage
(-10 to 0 V)
Not affected
+Voltage
(0 to 10 V)
Not affected
-Voltage
(-10 to 0 V)
OFF
Forward
direction
Figure C
ON
Reverse
direction
5-9
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Pn303
Unit
5-2 Speed Control
Example) When Speed Command Scale (Pn302) = 500

Speed command value = Speed Command Scale (Pn302) input voltage
Speed command
10
Figure A
5000
5000
3000
3000
6
6
10
10
Input voltage
10
Input voltage
3000
3000
5000
5000
Speed command
5000
Figure B
Speed command
Figure C
Speed command
BASIC CONTROL Mode
3000
10
10
Input voltage
10
6
3000
5000
VSIGN
5-10
OFF
VSIGN
ON
10
Input voltage
5-2 Speed Control
Speed Command Acceleration/Deceleration Setting Function (Pn312, Pn313, Pn314)

With a step speed command, you can change the speed command based on this setting to
reduce the shock caused by change in acceleration.
Parameter
number
Parameter
name
Explanation
Setting
range
Pn312
Soft Start
Acceleration Time
Set the acceleration time for acceleration process

with respect to the speed command input.
0 to 10000
ms/(1,000 r/
min)
Pn313
Soft Start
Deceleration Time
Set the deceleration processing deceleration

time for speed command inputs.
0 to 10000
ms/(1,000 r/
min)
Pn314
S-curve Acceleration/
Set the S-curve acceleration/
Deceleration Time Setting deceleration time.
0 to 1000
ms
Unit
Soft Start Acceleration Time (Pn312), Soft Start Deceleration Time (Pn313)
If a step speed command is input, set in Soft Start Acceleration Time (Pn312) the time needed
for the speed command to reach 1,000 r/min. Also set in Soft Start Deceleration Time (Pn313)
the time needed for the speed command to reach 0 r/min from 1,000 r/min.
Soft start acceleration time [ms] = Vc/1,000 Pn312 1 ms
Soft start deceleration time [ms] = Vc/1,000 Pn313 1 ms
A speed command that is input in steps
1000 r/min
Time
Pn3131 ms
Pn3121 ms
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting (Pn314)

Set the S-curve time in the time width centered on the inflection points in acceleration/deceleration relative to the
acceleration or deceleration time set in Soft Start Acceleration Time (Pn312) or Soft Start Deceleration Time (Pn313).
ta = Vc/1,000 Pn312 1 ms
td = Vc/1,000 Pn313 1 ms
ts = Pn314 1 ms
Set an appropriate time so that ta ts and td ts are satisfied.
ts
Speed [r/min]
Target speed
(Vc)
ts
A speed command after the
acceleration/deceleration processing
ts
ts
Time
ta
td
5-11
BASIC CONTROL Mode
A speed command after the

acceleration/deceleration processing
Speed [r/min]
5-2 Speed Control
Related Functions
Parameter
number
Explanation
Zero Speed Designation

Selection
Pn316
Speed Lock Level Setting
Set the threshold for transition to the servo lock state under
position control.
P.8-31
Pn435
Speed Conformity
Detection Range
Set the detection threshold for speed conformity output. If

the difference between the speed command and motor
speed is within the set threshold, a speed conformity output
is output.
This setting has a hysteresis of 10 r/min for detection.
P.8-43
Pn436
Rotation Speed for Motor

Rotation Detection
Set the detection threshold for speed reached output. A

speed reached output is output when the motor speed
exceeds the set value.
P.8-43
Pn422
Analog Input 1 Offset
Set the analog input 1 offset.
P.8-39
Pn423
Analog Input 1 Filter Time

Constant
Set the filter for analog input 1.
5-12
Set the zero speed designation.
Reference
Pn315
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Parameter name
P.8-29
P.8-40
Encoder
pulse output
OA
OB
OZ
Pn011 : 1 Rotation
Pn012 : Reverse
Pn503 : Denominator
Pulse regeneration

Pn201 : Speed 1
Pn202 : Speed 2
Pn204 : Speed 3
Pn205 : Speed 4
Pn207 : Speed 5
Pn208 : Speed 6
Pn210 : Speed 7
Pn211 : Speed 8
Acceleration/deceleration
Pn312 : Acceleration time
Pn313 : Deceleration time
Pn314 : S-curve time
Scaling
Pn302 : Gain
Pn303 : Reverse
Encoder
Motor speed
Speed command selection

Pn300 : Command type
Pn301 : Direction source
Analog input compensation

Pn422 : Offset
Pn423 : Filter
Motor
Speed detection
Pn103 : Filter 1
Pn108 : Filter 2
Main
power
supply
Pn607 : Added Value

Torque command
Pn623 : Gain
Pn624 : Filter
Current control
Speed control
Pn102 : Integration Time Constant 1
Pn107 : Integration Time Constant 2 +
+
Pn112 : Gain
Pn113 : Filter
Torque feed
forward
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Analog input
16-bit A/D
AI1 input voltage
Gain switching
Torque limit
Torque filter

Pn201 : Frequency 1
Pn204 : Frequency 2
Pn207 : Frequency 3
Pn210 : Frequency 4
Notch filter
Pn114 : Setting 2
Pn120 : Mode
Pn121 : Delay Time
Pn122 : Level
Pn123 : Hysteresis
5-2 Speed Control
Parameter Block Diagram for SPEED CONTROL mode
5-13
5-3 Torque Control
5-3 Torque Control

Torque control is performed based on the torque command specified by the analog voltage. In
addition to the torque command, torque control also requires a speed limit input to prevent the
motor rotation speed from becoming excessively high.
Controller
Analog voltage
(analog voltage output type) (torque command)
Driver
Accurax G5
TORQUE CONTROL mode
Torque Command Scale
(Pn319)
*None of OMRON
5
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Torque
15
TREF1
/VLIM
AGND
16
TREF2
17
AGND
14
controllers is a torque
command voltage
output type.
Motor
Accurax G5

If the motor speed is limited by the speed limit, the motor speed will be limited and will not reach
the speed corresponding to the analog torque command.

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Pn001
CONTROL mode
Selection
Pn317
Torque Command/Speed
Limit Selection
Select the input location for the torque command and speed
limit.
Pn318
Torque Command
Direction Selection
Select the rotation direction of the torque command.
Pn319
Set the input gain for analog torque command input.
Analog Torque Command

Rotation Direction
Switching
Reverse the polarity of the torque command input.
Pn320
5-14
Reference
P.8-2
P.8-31
P.8-31
P.8-32
P.8-33
5-3 Torque Control

Select the torque control (Set values: 2=Torque control, 4=Switching between Position control
and Torque control or 5=Switching between Speed control and torquecontrol).
Analog Torque Command Input Process (Pn317, Pn318, Pn319, Pn320)

Convert the voltage input by an analog input to a torque command to control the motor.
Parameter
number
Setting
range
Parameter name
Explanation
Torque
Command/Speed
Limit Selection
Select the input location for the torque

command and speed limit value.
0: Torque command: Analog input 1
speed limit: Pn321
speed limit: Analog input 1
speed limit: Pn321, Pn322
Pn318
Torque Command
Direction
Selection
Select the method for selecting the

direction for the torque command.
0: The direction depends on the
polarity of the analogue torque
command).
1: The direction depends on the state
of a digital input (TSIGN).
0 to 1
Pn319
Torque Command
Scale
Set the input gain for analog torque

command input.
10 to 100
0.1 V/100%
Pn320
Analog Torque
Command
Rotation Direction
Switching
Reverse the polarity of the torque

command input.
0: Forward operation
1: Reverse operation
0 to 1
Pn317
0 to 2
Unit
Torque
Comman
d/Speed
Limit
Selection
(Pn317)
Torque
Command
Direction
Selection
(Pn318)
Analog Torque
Command
Rotation
Direction
Switching
(Pn320)
Analog torque
command
(TREF)
Torque
command
sign input
(TSIGN)
+Voltage (0 to 10 V)
Not
affected
Forward
direction
-Voltage (-10 to 0 V)
Not
affected
Reverse
direction
Not
affected
Reverse
direction
Not
affected
Forward
direction
OFF
Forward
direction
ON
Reverse
direction
Motor
rotation
direction
Conversion
graph
Figure A
0
1
Figure B
Not affected
Not affected
Not affected
Not affected
Figure C
5-15
BASIC CONTROL Mode
The conversion of analog torque command is explained below.
5-3 Torque Control
Example) When the torque command scale is 30

Torque command = 100 Input voltage / (Torque Command Scale (Pn302) 0.1)
Figure A
Torque command
10
Torque command
333
333
200
200
10
10
Input voltage
10
Input voltage
200
200
Torque command
Figure B
Figure C
Torque command
333
BASIC CONTROL Mode
200
10
10
Input voltage
10
6
200
333
TSIGN OFF
5-16
TSIGN ON
10
Input voltage
5-3 Torque Control
Related Functions
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Pn315
Zero Speed
Designation
Selection
Pn321
Speed Limit Value

Setting
Pn322
Reverse Direction
Speed Limit Value
Setting
Set this if you want to change the speed limit value

depending on whether the direction is forward or reverse.
Pn422
Analog Input 1
Offset
Set the offset for analog input 1.
Analog Input 1
Filter Time
Constant
Pn423
Pn425
Analog Input 2
Offset
Set the offset for analog input 2.
Analog Input 2
Filter Time
Constant
Pn426
Reference
Set the zero speed designation function.

P.8-29
Set the speed limit value applicable during torque control.
During torque control, the speed is controlled so as not to
exceed the level set by the speed limit value.
P.8-33
P.8-33
P.8-39
P.8-40
BASIC CONTROL Mode
P.8-40
P.8-40
5-17
5-18
Encoder
pulse output
OA
OB
OZ
Encoder
Motor speed
Motor
Speed detection
Pn103 : Filter 1
Pn108 : Filter 2
Main
power
supply
Current control
Speed control
Absolute
Pn011 : 1 Rotation
Pn012 : Reverse
Pn503 : Denominator
Pulse regeneration
Sign
Speed Torque Limit Selection

Pn317 : Command speed
Scaling
(Speed command)
Pn302 : Gain
Pn303 : Reverse
Scaling
(Torque command)
Pn319 : Gain
Pn320 : Reverse
Torque command selection

Pn317 : Command Selection
Pn318 : Direction Designation
Scaling
Pn302 : Gain
Pn303 : Reverse
Internal speed limit

Pn321 : Limit Value 1
Pn322 : Limit Value 2
AI1 input voltage
Analog input 1
16-bit A/D
Pn422 : Offset
Pn423 : Filter
Analog input 2
12-bit A/D
Pn425 : Offset
Pn426 : Filter
AI2 input voltage
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Torque command
Torque limit
Torque filter

Pn201 : Frequency 1
Pn204 : Frequency 2
Pn207 : Frequency 3
Pn210 : Frequency 4
Notch filter
Pn114 : Setting 2
Pn124 : Mode
Pn125 : Delay Time
Pn126 : Level
Pn127 : Hysteresis
Gain switching
5-3 Torque Control
Parameter Block Diagram for TORQUE CONTROL mode
5-4 Internally Set Speed Control

Performs motor speed control using the speeds set in the No. 1 to 8 Internally Speed Settings.
Select the internally set speed using Internally Set Speed Selections 1 to 3 of the control input
terminals (VSEL1: CN-1 to 33 pins, VSEL2: CN-1 to 30 pins, VSEL3: CN-1 to 28 pins).
Driver
Accurax G5
Controller
Internally set speed control

* Internally set
speed control can Speed selection command
be executed using
only the digital I/O
VSEL1
VSEL2
No. 1 to 8 Internally
Set Speed
(Pn304 to 311)
Motor
Accurax G5
VSEL3
signals.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Pn001
CONTROL mode
Selection
Select the CONTROL mode for internally set speed

control. (Set values: 1, 3 and 5)
Pn300
Command Speed
Selection
Pn304
Pn306
No. 1 Internally Set Speed Set the internally set speeds (r/min).
The settings can be made from -20,000 to 20,000 r/min. Be
No. 2 Internally Set Speed
sure to set the speeds within the allowable range of
No. 3 Internally Set Speed rotation speed of the motor.
Pn307
Pn308
Pn309
Pn310
Pn311
Pn305
Reference
P.8-2
P.8-26
P.8-27
5-19
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Selecting the Internally Set Speeds

The following tables show the internally set speeds that are set with VSEL1, VSEL2 and
VSEL3 (internally set speed selection 1, 2 and 3).
Pn300 = 1
Number
VSEL1
VSEL2
VSEL3
Set speed
OFF
OFF
Disabled
Pn304
ON
OFF
Disabled
Pn305
OFF
ON
Disabled
Pn306
ON
ON
Disabled
Pn307
Pn300 = 2
Number
BASIC CONTROL Mode
VSEL1
VSEL2
VSEL3
Set speed
OFF
OFF
Disabled
Pn304
ON
OFF
Disabled
Pn305
OFF
ON
Disabled
Pn306
ON
ON
Disabled
*1
*1. The mode will be analog speed control.

Input the proper current to REF.
Pn300 = 3
Number
5-20
VSEL1
VSEL2
VSEL3
Set speed
OFF
OFF
OFF
Pn304
ON
OFF
OFF
Pn305
OFF
ON
OFF
Pn306
ON
ON
OFF
Pn307
OFF
OFF
ON
Pn308
ON
OFF
ON
Pn309
OFF
ON
ON
Pn310
ON
ON
ON
Pn311
Operation Example
Internally set speed control with 4 speed changes when Pn300 = 1
Servo ON
Zero speed designation (VZERO)
Stop
Internally set speed selection 1 (VSEL1)
Drive
Close
Open
Internally set speed selection 2 (VSEL2)
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Speed 2
Speed
Speed 3
Speed 1
Speed 4
Time
(*1)
*1. The acceleration time, deceleration time, and S-curve acceleration/deceleration time can be set using
parameters (Pn312, Pn313, and Pn314).
Internal Speed Command (Pn304 to 311)
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Setting
range
Unit
Pn304
No. 1 Internally Set

Speed
Set the speed 1 internally set speed.
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
Pn305

Speed
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
Pn306

Speed
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
Pn307

Speed
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
Pn308

Speed
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
Pn309

Speed
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
Pn310

Speed
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
Pn311

Speed
Set the No. 8 internally set speed.
-20,000 to
20,000
r/min
5-21
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Control the motor speed according to the internal speed command value set by a parameter.
The internally set speed becomes valid when the setting of Speed Setting Internal/External
Switching is 1 to 3.
Up to 8 internally set speeds can be set.
5-5 Switching Control

This function controls the motor by switching between 2 CONTROL modes via external inputs.
The CONTROL mode switching is performed by the CONTROL mode switching input (TVSEL:
CN-1 pin 32).
Driver
Accurax G5
Controller
Analog voltage (speed command)
Pulse train
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Switching control (Example of switching

between position control and speed control)
14
REF
16
AGND
+CW
CW
+CCW
CCW
32
TVSEL
Motor
Accurax G5
Speed control
Position control

Parameter
number
Pn001
Parameter name
CONTROL mode
Selection
Explanation
Select CONTROL mode for switching control.
(Set values: 3, 4 and 5)
Reference
P.8-2
CONTROL mode Selected by TVSEL (CONTROL mode Switching Input)

The following table shows the relation between TVSEL (CONTROL mode switching input) and the
CONTROL mode selected.
CONTROL mode
Selection (Pn001)
setting
TVSEL
OFF
ON
Position control
Speed control
Position control
Torque control
Speed control
Torque control
Note. Use caution when switching CONTROL mode. Operation may change suddenly depending on the
CONTROL mode settings.
5-22
Operation Example
Position and Speed Control Switching Example (Pn001 = 3)
10 ms or more
ON
OFF
CONTROL mode
switching input (TVSEL)
+V
Speed command input (REF)
V
10 ms or more
ON
OFF
Pulse command
Positioning completion output (INP) ON

Motor rotation speed detection
OFF
output (TGON)
+r/min
Motor operation
r/min
Position and Torque Control Switching Example (Pn001 = 4)

10 ms or more
ON
CONTROL mode
switching input (TVSEL)
OFF
+V
Torque command input (TREF)

V
Pulse command
output (INP)
ON
(Forward)
10 ms or more
(Reverse)
OFF
ON
OFF
+r/min
Motor operation
r/min
Crash
This time chart shows an example of torque thrust.

There is a maximum delay of 10 ms in reading the input signal.
When switching from torque control to position control, turn OFF the CONTROL mode switching
input (TVSEL) and wait at least 10 ms after the positioning completion output (INP) turns ON
before inputting the pulse command. The pulses input before INP turns ON will be ignored.
5-23
BASIC CONTROL Mode

When switching from speed control to position control, turn OFF the CONTROL mode switching
input (TVSEL) and wait at least 10 ms after the positioning completion output (INP) turns ON
before inputting the pulse command. The pulses input before INP turns ON will be ignored.
The shaded areas for the positioning completion output (INP) in the time chart show that the signal
is turned ON as the motor rotation speed detection output (TGON). (The meaning of the signal
depends on the CONTROL mode.)
Speed and Torque Control Switching Example (Pn001 = 5)

CONTROL mode switching ON
input (TVSEL)
OFF
+V
Speed command input (REF)
V
+V
Torque command input (TREF)
V
+r/min
*1
*2
Motor operation
TORQUE CONTROL mode

r/min
*1. Deceleration for the torque command.

*2. Deceleration due to load inertia energy and load friction torque.
BASIC CONTROL Mode

Motor operation in torque control changes according to the motor load conditions (e.g., friction,
external power, inertia). Take safety measures on the machine side to prevent motor runaway.
Adjust the torque command using Analog Input 2 Offset (Pn425) and Analog Input 2 Filter Time
Constant (Pn426) because the torque command input is analog input 2.
Related Functions
Refer to the related functions for each CONTROL mode.
5-24
5-6 Full Closing Control
An externally provided scale is used to directly detect the position of the machine and use it as
position feedback. In this way the positioning is not affected by ball screw error, temperature shift,
etc. You can achieve highly accurate positioning by configuring a full closing control system.
Controller
(pulse train output type)
Pulse train
CN1 FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode

+CWLD
44
Electronic gear
(Pn008
to Pn010)
CWLD
45
46
+CCWLD
47
CCWLD
+CW
CW
+CCW
CCW
Motor
Accurax G5
Numerator
Denominator
5
CN5
+EXS
External Scale Dividing Ratio

(Pn324 to Pn325)
EXS
+EXA
EXA
Numerator
Denominator
+EXB
Position
detection
External scale
EXB
+EXZ
EXZ

If the electronic gear ratio is 1 : 1, 1 command pulse from the encoder constitutes 1 external scale
pulse. Since the electronic gear ratio is set differently than in the POSITION CONTROL mode, set
the external scale dividing ratio correctly.
To prevent machine damage due to an external scale setting error, set the following parameters
to appropriate values.
- Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Overflow Level (Pn328)
- Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Reset (Pn329)
For the setting of external scale ratio, it is recommended that 1/40 External scale ratio 160 be
satisfied.
If the external scale ratio is set excessively small, control to the unit of 1 external scale pulse may
be disabled.
If the external scale ratio is increased, on the other hand, operating noise may increase.
5-25
BASIC CONTROL Mode

CJ1W-NC113/133
CJ1W-NC213/233
CJ1W-NC214/414
CJ1W-NC234/434
CJ1W-NC413/433
CS1W-NC113/133
CS1W-NC213/233
CS1W-NC413/433
CPU Unit with built-in
pulse I/O
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
CP1H-X/XA/Y
CP1L-M/L
Driver
Accurax G5

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Pn000
Rotation Direction
Switching
Set the relation between the command direction and the motor
rotation direction.
Pn001
CONTROL mode
Selection
Pn005
Command Pulse
Input Selection
Select the command pulse input.
Command Pulse
Rotation Direction
Switching Selection
Set the count direction for the command pulse input.
Pn006
COMMAND
PULSE mode
Selection
Pn007
Pn008
Electronic Gear
Integer Setting
Set the number of command pulses corresponding to 1 motor

rotation.
P.8-6
Pn009
Electronic Gear
Ratio Numerator 1
Set the numerator of the electronic gear ratio for the command
pulse input.
P.8-6
Pn010
Electronic Gear
Ratio Denominator
Use this parameter to set the denominator of the electronic

gear ratio for the command pulse input.
P.8-6
Pn011
Encoder Dividing
Numerator
Set the number of phase A and phase B output pulses,

respectively per motor rotation.
P.8-7
Pn012
Encoder Output
Direction Switching
Selection
Select the phase B logic for pulse regeneration output and the
output source.
Pn323
External Feedback
Select the external scale type.
Pulse Type Selection
P.8-33
External Feedback
Pulse Dividing
Numerator
Set the numerator of the external scale divider setting.
Pn324
P.8-34
External Feedback
Pulse Dividing
Denominator
Set the denominator of the external scale divider setting.
Pn325
External Feedback
Pulse Direction
Switching
Set the polarity of the external scale feedback pulse.
Pn326
Pn327
External Feedback
Pulse Phase-Z
Setting
Set whether to enable or disable the disconnection detection

function of phase Z when a 90 phase difference output type
external scale is used.
Pn328
Internal/External
Feedback Pulse Error
Counter Overflow Level
Set the threshold of A250 "internal/external feedback pulse

error counter overflow" in the command unit.
P.8-35
Pn329
Internal/External
Feedback Pulse
Error Counter Reset
The hybrid error becomes 0 every time the motor rotates by the
set value.
P.8-35
Pn503
Encoder Dividing
Denominator
Set the denominator when the number of pulses per motor

rotation in pulse regeneration is not an integer.
BASIC CONTROL Mode
5-26
Reference
P.8-2
P.8-2
P.8-4
P.8-4
P.8-4
P.8-7
P.8-34
P.8-34
P.8-35
P.8-46
Rotation Direction Switching (Pn000)

Set the relation between the command direction and the motor rotation direction.
0: The +command indicates the forward direction as viewed from the shaft end (CCW)
1: The +command indicates the reverse direction as viewed from the shaft end (CW).
Take note that if Pn000 = 1, the scale count direction becomes opposite to the count direction
used for monitoring the total external scale feedback pulses, etc.

Select the full closing control (set value: 6).
Command Pulse Input Process (Pn005, Pn006, Pn007)

Position command input terminals are classified into the input 1 system (+CW, -CW, +CCW, CCW) and input 2 system (+CWLD, -CWLD, +CCWLD, -CCWLD).
If the position command output is a line-driver output, set input 1. If it is an open collector
output, set input 2. Although input 2 can also be used for a line-driver output, the allowable
maximum input frequency will become lower than when input 1 is selected.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Setting
range
Unit
Command Pulse
Input Selection
Pn006
Command Pulse
Rotation Direction
Switching
Selection
Set the count direction for the

0: Command pulse, forward
direction
1: Command pulse, reverse
direction
0 to 1
COMMAND
PULSE mode
Selection
Set the count method for the

input)
1: Forward/reverse pulse
input)
3: Feed pulse/direction signal
0 to 3
0 to 1
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Pn005
Select the command pulse input

terminal.
0: Photocoupler input
(+CW, -CW, +CCW, -CCW)
1: Input for line driver only
(+CWLD, -CWLD, +CCWLD,
-CCWLD)
Pn007
For information on the settings for command pulse rotation direction and COMMAND PULSE
mode, refer to "5-1 Position Control"(P.5-2).
5-27
Electronic Gear Function (Pn008, Pn009, Pn010)

This function uses as the position command for the position control part a value calculated by
multiplying the pulse command input from the Host Controller with the set electronic gear ratio.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Pn008
Electronic Gear
Integer Setting
Pn009
Pn010
Setting
range
Explanation
Set the number of command pulses
corresponding to 1 motor rotation.
Unit
0 to 220
Pulse
Electronic Gear
Set the numerator of the electronic
Ratio Numerator 1 gear ratio for the command pulse
input.
0 to 230
Electronic Gear
Ratio
Denominator
0 to 230
Set the denominator of the electronic

gear ratio for the command pulse
input.
For details on the electronic gear function, refer to "6-4 Electronic Gear Function"(P.6-12).
Encoder Dividing Function (Pn011, Pn012, Pn503)
The number of pulses can be set for the encoder signals output from the driver.
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Parameter
number
Pn011
Explanation
Setting
range
Encoder Dividing
Numerator
Set the number of phase A and

phase B output pulses, respectively
per motor rotation.
1 to 262144
Pulse/r
Encoder Output
Direction
Switching
Selection
Select the phase B logic for pulse

regeneration output and the output
source.
0 to 3
0 and
1 to 262144
Parameter name
Set
value
Pn012
0
1
2
3
Encoder Dividing
Denominator
Pn503
Output
source
Encoder
External scale
Phase B
logic
Non-reverse
Unit
Reverse
Non-reverse
Reverse
When the number of output pulse per

rotation is not an integer, you can set
a dividing ratio by setting the set
value here to a number other than 0,
and using Pn011 as the dividing
numerator and Pn503 as the dividing
denominator.
For details on encoder dividing function, refer to "6-5 Encoder Dividing Function"(P.6-15).
5-28
External Feedback Pulse Type Selection (Pn323, Pn326)

Set the external scale output type and direction.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
External
Feedback Pulse
Type Selection
Explanation
Pn326
External
Feedback Pulse
Direction
Switching
Unit
Select the type of the external scale

to be used.
Set
value
Pn323
Setting
range
External scale type
90 phase difference output type
Serial communications (Incremental

encoder specifications)
Serial communications (Absolute

If the count directions of the external

scale feedback pulse and the
encoder total feedback pulses do not
match, set the reversal of the
external scale feedback pulse
direction.
0: Not reversed, 1: Reversed
0 to 3
0 to 1
5
BASIC CONTROL Mode
<
5-29
The corresponding scale for each output type is as follows.

Pn323
set
value
External scale type

Phase-AB output type *1
Maximum input
frequency *2
Corresponding scale examples

External scale of phase-AB output type
0 to 4 Mpps
(After quadruple
multiplier)
Serial communication type Sony Manufacturing Systems Corporation

(Incremental encoder
SR75, SR85
0 to 400 Mpps
specifications)
Serial communication type Mitutoyo Corporation

(Absolute encoder
AT573, ST771A, ST773A
0 to 400 Mpps
specifications)
Sony Manufacturing Systems Corporation
SR77, SR87
*1. The driver count direction relative to the external encoder of phase-AB output type is explained below.
Count-down direction
Count-up direction
t1
t1
5
BASIC CONTROL Mode
EXA
EXA
EXB
t2
EXB is 90 ahead of EXA.
t1>0.25 s
t2>1.0 s
EXB
t2
EXB is 90 behind EXA.
t1>0.25 s
t2>1.0 s
*2. These are the feedback speeds from the external scale at which Servo Drive can respond.
Check the external scale operation manual for its maximum output frequency.
For example, the maximum speed when an external scale with a resolution of 0.01 m is used for the
serial communication type is 0.01 m (400 106) pps = 4.00 m/s.
An overspeed error protection is generated, however, if the motor shaft rotation speed exceeds the
maximum speed.

For the external scale connection direction, set the rotation direction so that count-up occurs when
the motor shaft is rotating in the CCW direction, and count-down occurs when the motor shaft is
rotating in the CW direction. If the connection direction cannot be selected due to installation
conditions, etc., the count direction can be reversed using External Feedback Pulse Direction
Switching (Pn326).
Take note that if Pn000 = 1, the scale count direction becomes opposite to the count direction
used for monitoring the total external scale feedback pulses, etc.
If Pn000 = 0, the count direction matches the count direction for monitoring.
Even when the driver speed is within the specified range, an acceleration error will occur if the
motor shaft rotation speed exceeds the maximum speed.
To check the installation direction, use the front panel monitor or the monitoring function of CXDrive and check the count directions of the external scale total feedback pulses and the encoder
total feedback pulses. If they match, the connection is set up correctly.
5-30
External Feedback Pulse Dividing Ratio Setting (Pn324, Pn325)

Set the dividing ratio for the encoder resolution and external scale resolution.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Setting
range
Explanation
Unit
Pn324
External Feedback
Pulse Dividing
Numerator
Set the numerator of the external scale

divider setting. Normally, set the number
of encoder output pulses per motor
rotation. If the set value is 0, the encoder
resolution is set automatically.
0 to 220
Pn325
External Feedback
Pulse Dividing
Denominator
Set the denominator of the external scale

divider setting. Normally, set the number
of external scale output pulses per motor
rotation.
1 to 220
Check the number of encoder feedback pulses and the number of external scale output pulses
per motor rotation, and set External Feedback Pulse Dividing Numerator (Pn324) and External
Feedback Pulse Dividing Denominator (Pn325) so that the following formula works out.
Pn324
Number of encoder output pulses per motor rotation
=
Pn325
Number of external scale output pulses per motor rotation
Setting Examples
Ball screw pitch 10 mm
External scale resolution 0.1 m
Encoder resolution 20 bits
Servomotor
encoder resolution: 20 bits/rotation
10 mm
1 Rotation
Ball screw
Ball screw pitch 10 mm
External scale
resolution: 0.1 m
Encoder Output Pulses per Motor Rotation (Pn324)

20 bits = 1,048,576
External Scale Output Pulse Per Motor Rotation (Pn325)

10 [mm] / 0.1 [m/pulse] = 100,000 [pulse]
Pn324
=
Pn325
Number of encoder output pulses per motor rotation

=
Number of external scale output pulses per motor rotation
1,048,576
100,000
5-31
BASIC CONTROL Mode
If this divider setting is wrong, there will be deviations between the position calculated from
encoder pulses and the position calculated from external scale. If the movement distance is
long, these deviations accumulate and cause an internal/external feedback pulse error counter
overflow level error.
External Feedback Pulse Error Setting (Pn328, Pn329)

The difference between the encoder position and external scale position is detected, and if the
difference exceeds the value of Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Overflow
Level (Pn328), an error will occur.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Setting
range
Unit
Pn328
Internal/External
Feedback Pulse
Error Counter
Overflow Level
Set the allowable difference (hybrid error)

between the encoder-detected position
and external scale-detected position in
the command unit.
1 to 227
Command
unit
Pn329
Internal/External
Feedback Pulse
Error Counter
Reset
The hybrid error becomes 0 every time

the motor rotates by the set value. If the
set value is 0, the hybrid error is not
cleared.
0 to 100
Rotation
Pn329: Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Reset

Every time the motor rotates for the amount set by Pn329, the internal/external feedback pulse
error is cleared.
This function can be used when there is deviation between the position calculated from
encoder pulses and the position calculated from external scale due to slipping, etc, and
internal/external feedback pulse errors accumulate.
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Amount of internal/external feedback pulse error

[command unit]
Error detection
Pn328 Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Overflow Level

0 clear
Pn329
Internal/External Feedback
Pulse Error Counter Reset
Pn329
0 clear
Pn329
Number of motor
rotations [rotation]

An internal/external feedback pulse error counter overflow level error occurs when the external
scale is abnormal, connection is wrong, or connection point between the motor and load is loose,
among others. Accordingly, check these items when an error occurs.
Be sure to set an appropriate value for Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Reset
(Pn329). If an extremely small value is set, this function may not operate.
Use with extra caution on safety by installing limit sensors, etc.
5-32
5-33
Encoder pulse
output
OA
OB
OZ
Pn011 : 1 Rotation
Pn012 : Reverse
Pn503 : Denominator
Pulse regeneration
External scale
External scale
Pulse Output
Pulse regeneration
EXA
Pn011 : Numerator
EXB
Pn503 : Denominator
EXZ
Pn012 : Reverse
Pn620 : Phase-Z Width
Pn621 : Phase-Z Setting
Pn622 : Output Method
Electronic gear
reverse conversion
Hybrid error
Encoder
Motor
Speed detection
External scale
External scale reverse dividing

Pn325 : Denominator
Pn324 : Numerator
Motor speed
Pn103 : Filter 1
Pn108 : Filter 2
Main
power
supply
+
+
Pn607 : Added Value

Torque command
Pn623 : Gain
Pn624 : Filter
Current control
Speed control
Pn107 : Integration Time Constant 2 +
+
Pn112 : Gain
Pn113 : Filter
Torque feed
forward
Full closing error
Position control
Pn100 : Loop Gain 1
Pn105 : Loop Gain 2
Pn110 : Gain
Pn111 : Filter
Speed
feed-forward
Pn607 : Added Value

External scale dividing
Input Setting
Pn323 : Type
Pn326 : Reverse
Pn327 : Phase Z disabled
Pn213 : Switching Selection 1

Pn214 : Frequency 1
Pn215 : Frequency 2
Pn216 : Frequency 3
Pn217 : Frequency 4
Pn218 : Filter 1
Pn219 : Filter 2
Pn220 : Filter 3
Pn221 : Filter 4
Anti-vibration control
Pn222 : FIR
Pn223 : First-order Lag
Pn008 : 1 Rotation
Pn500 : Numerator 2
Pn009 : Numerator 1 Pn501 : Numerator 3
Pn010 : Denominator Pn502 : Numerator 4
Pn005 : Input Setting

Pn006 : Rotation Direction
Pn007 : Mode
+
Smoothing filter
Electronic gear setting
Input condition setting
BASIC CONTROL Mode
Pulse
train
Command pulse accumulation

Gain switching
Torque limit
Torque filter

Pn201 : Frequency 1
Pn204 : Frequency 2
Pn207 : Frequency 3
Pn210 : Frequency 4
Notch filter
Pn114 : Setting 2
Pn115 : Mode
Pn116 : Delay Time
Pn117 : Level
Pn118 : Hysteresis
Pn119 : Switching Time
Pn605 : Setting 3
Pn606 : Ratio
Parameter Block Diagram for FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode
Applied Functions
This chapter gives outline of applied functions such as anti-vibration control,
electronic gears, gain switching and disturbance observer, and explains the
contents of setting.
6-1 Anti-vibration Control...................................................6-3

6-2 Adaptive Filter...............................................................6-7

6-3 Notch Filter....................................................................6-9

6-4 Electronic Gear Function ...........................................6-12

Operation Example ....................................................................... 6-14
6-5 Encoder Dividing Function ........................................6-15

6-6 Brake Interlock............................................................6-20

Precautions for Correct Use of Holding Brake .............................. 6-20
Operation ...................................................................................... 6-21
6-7 Gain Switching Function............................................6-25

6-8 Gain Switching 3 Function.........................................6-33

Operation ...................................................................................... 6-33
6-9 Torque Limit ................................................................6-34

6-10 Sequence I/O Signal .................................................. 6-37

Outline of Operation ...................................................................... 6-37
Input Signals ................................................................................. 6-37
Output Signals .............................................................................. 6-40
6-11 Forward and Reverse Drive Prohibition Functions 6-43

6-12 Disturbance Observer Function ............................... 6-46

Operating Procedure..................................................................... 6-47
6-13 Friction Torque Compensation Function ................ 6-48

Operation Example ....................................................................... 6-49
6-14 Inertia Ratio Switching Function .............................. 6-50

6-15 Hybrid Vibration Suppression Function .................. 6-52

6-16 Feed-forward Function .............................................. 6-53
Applied Functions

6-17 Instantaneous Speed Observer Function................ 6-57

6-2
6-1 Anti-vibration Control

If the tip of the mechanical unit vibrates, you can use the anti-vibration control function to
reduce vibration.
This is effective on vibration generated by a machine of low rigidity. The applicable frequencies
are from 1 to 200 Hz.
Since anti-vibration control is performed using position commands, it cannot be used with
speed or torque control.
The front end

vibrates.
Position Controller
Servo Drive
The vibration
frequency changes
based on the position.
6
Movement
Applied Functions
6-3

Parameter
number
Applied Functions
Explanation
Reference
CONTROL mode
Selection
Set to the POSITION or FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode.

0: Position control
3: FIRST CONTROL mode for position/speed control
P.8-2
4: FIRST CONTROL mode for position/torque control
6: Full closing control
Pn213
Vibration Filter
Selection
Select the VIBRATION FILTER SWITCHING mode

according to the condition of the unit.
0: Vibration filter 1 or 2 enabled
1: Switching by external input (DFSEL1)
2: Switching by external input (DFSEL1, DFSEL2)
3: Switching with command direction
P.8-22
Pn214
Vibration
Frequency 1
Set vibration frequency 1 to suppress vibration at the end of

the load in anti-vibration control.
If the anti-vibration control function is not used, set 0.
P.8-23
Pn215
Vibration Filter 1
Setting
When the Vibration Frequency 1 (Pn214) is set, reduce the

setting if torque saturation occurs or increase the setting to
increase operation speed. Normally 0 is set.
If the vibration filter 1 is disabled, this parameter is also
disabled.
P.8-23
Pn216
Vibration
Frequency 2
The function is the same with Pn214.
Pn217
Vibration Filter 2
Setting
Pn218
Vibration
Frequency 3
Pn219
Vibration Filter 3
Setting
Pn220
Vibration
Frequency 4
Pn221
Vibration Filter 4
Setting
Pn001
Parameter name
P.8-23
P.8-23
P.8-24
P.8-24
P.8-24
P.8-24

Stop operation before changing the parameters or switching with DFSEL.
It may not function properly or the effect may not be apparent under the following conditions.
Item
6-4
Conditions under which the effect of anti-vibration control is inhibited
CONTROL
mode
- SPEED or TORQUE CONTROL mode
Load condition
- If forces other than position commands, such as external forces, cause vibration.
- If the vibration frequency is outside the range of 1 to 200 Hz.
- If the ratio of the resonance frequency to anti-resonance frequency is large.
Operating Procedure
1. Adjust the position loop gain and speed loop gain.
Adjust Position Loop Gain (Pn100), Speed Loop Gain (Pn101), Speed Loop Integral Time
Constant (Pn102) and Torque Command Filter Time Constant (Pn104).
If no problem occurs in realtime autotuning, you can continue to use the settings.
2. Measure the vibration frequency at the tip of the mechanical unit.

Measure the vibration frequency using a laser displacement sensor, servo acceleration meter,
acceleration pick-up, etc.
Set the vibration frequency in one of Vibration Frequency 1 to Vibration Frequency 4 (1: Pn214,
2: Pn216, 3: Pn218, 4: Pn220) according to the operation.
Also set the SWITCHING mode using Vibration Filter Selection (Pn213).
If the measurement device cannot be used, use CX-Drive tracing function, and read the
residual vibration frequency (Hz) from the position error waveform as shown in the following
figure.
The following gives the vibration frequency in the figure.
Command
speed
Position error
Calculate the
vibration frequency.
Vibration cycle T
f (Hz) =
1
T (s)
Since the parameter unit is 0.1 Hz:

(Pn214, Pn216, Pn218, Pn220) = 10 f
Application example
If the vibration cycle is 100 ms or 20 ms, set 100 or 500
in the parameter so that the vibration frequency
becomes 10 Hz or 50 Hz.
3. Set vibration filter setting.

Set vibration filter setting (1: Pn215, 2: Pn217, 3: Pn219, 4: Pn221).
First, set to 0.
The stabilization time can be reduced by setting a large value; however, torque ripple will
increase at the command change point as shown in the following figure. Set a range that will
not cause torque saturation under actual operation conditions. The effects of vibration
suppression will be lost if torque saturation occurs.
Vibration filter
setting is appropriate.
Vibration filter setting is too large.

Torque saturation
Torque command
When the Vibration Frequency 1 (Pn214) is set, reduce the setting if torque saturation occurs
or increase the setting to increase operation speed. Normally 0 is set.
If the vibration filter 1 is enabled, use the following setting range.
Setting range: 100 Pn214 + Pn215 Pn214 2 or 2,000
Note: If the vibration filter 1 is disabled under Vibration Filter Selection (Pn213), this parameter is also
disabled.
6-5
Applied Functions
If vibration persists after setting the frequency, increase or decrease the filter frequency to find
the frequency at which vibration decreases.
4. Set the Vibration Filter Selection (Pn213).

Vibration filters 1 to 4 can be switched according to the conditions of the machine vibration.
Set value
SWITCHING mode
Vibration filter 1 and 2 enabled
Switching by external input (DFSEL1)

Open: Vibration filter 1 or 3 enabled
Shorted: Vibration filter 2 or 4 enabled
Switching by external input (DFSEL1, DFSEL2)

When DFSEL1 and DFSEL2 are both open: Vibration filter 1 enabled
When DFSEL1 is shorted and DFSEL2 is open: Vibration filter 2
enabled
When DFSEL1 is open and DFSEL2 is shorted: Vibration filter 3
enabled
When DFSEL1 and DFSEL2 are both shorted: Vibration filter 4
enabled
Switching with command direction

Forward direction: Vibration filter 1 or 3 enabled
Reverse direction: Vibration filter 2 or 4 enabled
Vibration Filter Selection (Pn213) is a parameter that becomes effective when the power is
turned on. After setting this parameter, turn OFF the control power supply and then turn it ON
again.
Applied Functions
6-6
6-2 Adaptive Filter
6-2 Adaptive Filter

The adaptive filter reduces resonance point vibration by estimating the resonance frequency
from the vibration component that appears in the motor speed during actual operation and
automatically sets the frequency of the notch filter, which removes the resonance component
from the torque command.
The automatically set notch filter frequency is set in Notch 3 (Pn207 to Pn209) or Notch 4
(Pn210 to Pn212).
Refer to "6-3 Notch Filter" (P.6-9) for information on notch filter.
After vibration
suppression
Motor speed
6
Adaptive filter effect
Position and
speed command
Applied Functions
Adaptive filter disabled
Filter frequency setting completed
Position and
speed control
Adaptive
filter
Torque command Current loop

control
SM
Resonance frequency
estimation
Load inertia estimation
Speed feedback
RE
Realtime autotuning
6-7
6-2 Adaptive Filter

Parameter
number
Pn200
Parameter name
Adaptive Filter
Selection
Explanation
Reference
Set the number of resonance frequencies to be estimated by the

adaptive filter and the operation to be performed after estimation.
0: Adaptive filter disabled
1: 1 adaptive filters enabled
2: 2 adaptive filters enabled
3: RESONANCE FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT mode
P.8-21
The servodrive measures the resonant frequency
automatically but the result is applied by the user by using
the software tool (CX-Drive).
4: Adaptive result clear
The notch filter 3 and notch filter 4 parameters are
disabled, and adaptive result is cleared.

Adaptive filter may not operate correctly under the following conditions.
6
Applied Functions
Item
Conditions under which the adaptive filter not operates properly
CONTROL mode
TORQUE CONTROL mode
Resonance
points
If the resonance frequency is 300 Hz or lower.

If the resonance peak or control gain is low, and the motor speed is not affected by it.
If there are three or more resonance points.
Load
If the motor speed with high-frequency components changes due to backlash or

other non-linear elements.
Command pattern
The acceleration/deceleration is sudden.
If the adaptive filter does not operate properly, use Notch 1 (Pn201 to Pn203) or Notch 2 (Pn204
to Pn206) to implement resonance measures according to the manual adjustment procedure.
Refer to "6-3 Notch Filter" (P.6-9) for information on notch filter.
An unusual noise or vibration may occur until the adaptive filter stabilizes after startup, immediately after
the first servo ON, or when the Realtime Autotuning Machine Rigidity Selection (Pn003) is increased,
but this is not a problem if it disappears right away. If the vibration or unusual noise, however, continues
for three or more reciprocating operations, take the following measures in the possible order.
Write the parameters used during normal operation to the EEPROM.
Lower the Realtime Autotuning Machine Rigidity Selection (Pn003).
Disable the adaptive filter by setting the Adaptive Filter Selection (Pn200) to 0.
(Resetting of inertial estimation and adaptive operation)
Manually set the notch filter.
If unusual noise or vibration occurred, the setting of Notch 3 (Pn207 to Pn209) or Notch 4 (Pn210
to Pn212) may have changed to an extreme value. In this case, set Adaptive Filter Selection
(Pn200) to 0 to disable the parameter and then set Notch 3 Frequency Setting (Pn207) and Notch
4 Frequency Setting (Pn210) to 5,000 (disabled). Next, enable Adaptive Filter Selection again.
Notch 3 Frequency Setting (Pn207) and Notch 4 Frequency Setting (Pn210) are written to the
EEPROM every 30 minutes. When the power supply is turned OFF and then turned ON again,
this data will be used as the default settings to perform adaptive operation.
The adaptive filter is disabled when torque control is performed, but the adaptive filter frequency
used in the CONTROL mode before switching will be held if torque control has been selected by
setting the CONTROL mode Selection (Pn001) to 5 or 6.
6-8
6-3 Notch Filter
6-3 Notch Filter

You can set up to 4 notch filters for the torque command.
If the ball screw, etc. cause resonation at the specific location, you can set the resonance
frequency using a notch filter to eliminate resonance.
A notch filter is used to eliminate a specified frequency component.
fw
Width fw
0db
3db
Depth=Fc/fw
6
Frequency Hz
Applied Functions
Cut-off frequency Fc
If machine resonance occurs, use this notch filter to eliminate resonance.
Machine resonance
Notch filter
Notch filter 1
Characteristics
after filtering
Notch filter 2
6-9
6-3 Notch Filter

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Pn201
Notch 1 Frequency
Setting
Set the center frequency of the notch filter 1.

The notch filter is enabled at 50 to 4,999 Hz, and disabled
at 5,000 Hz.
P.8-21
Pn202
Notch 1 Width
Setting
Select the width of the notch filter 1 frequency.

Increasing the value will widen the notch.
(Setting range: 0 to 20)
P.8-21
Pn203
Notch 1 Depth
Setting
Select the depth of the notch filter 1 center frequency.

Increasing the value will decrease the notch depth and
thereby reduce the phase delay. The notch filter is disabled
if 100 is set.
(Setting range: 0 to 99)
P.8-21
Pn204
Notch 2 Frequency
Setting

The details are the same with the notch filter 1 frequency.
P.8-21
Pn205
Notch 2 Width
Setting

The details are the same with the notch filter 1 width.
P.8-21
Pn206
Notch 2 Depth
Setting

The details are the same with the notch filter 1 depth.
P.8-22
Pn207
Notch 3 Frequency
Setting *1

P.8-22
Pn208
Notch 3 Width
Setting *1

P.8-22
Pn209
Notch 3 Depth
Setting *1

P.8-22
Pn210
Notch 4 Frequency
Setting *1

P.8-22
Pn211
Notch 4 Width
Setting *1

P.8-22
Pn212
Notch 4 Depth
Setting *1

P.8-22
Applied Functions
Reference
*1 If an adaptive filter is used, these are set automatically.

Identify the resonance frequency using the frequency characteristics measurement function,
resonance frequency monitor or operation waveform of the waveform graphics function of CXDrive and set the identified frequency as the notch filter frequency.
6-10
6-3 Notch Filter
Notch Filter Width and Depth

Width Setting
Ratio of the frequency bandwidth at a damping factor of -3 [dB] relative to the center frequency
when the depth is 0. This value should conform to the left column in the table below.
Depth Setting
I/O ratio at which the center frequency input is completely cut off at a set value of 0 and completely passed at
a set value of 100. If the indication unit is [dB], this value should conform to the right column in the table below.
Width
Set value
Depth
Bandwidth/center frequency
Set value
I/O ratio (%)
Damping factor (dB)
0.50
0 (Cut off)
0.59
40.0
0.71
34.0
0.84
30.5
1.00
28.0
1.19
26.0
1.41
10
10
20.0
1.68
15
15
16.5
2.00
20
20
14.0
2.38
25
25
12.0
10
2.83
30
30
10.5
11
3.36
35
35
9.1
12
4.00
40
40
8.0
13
4.76
45
45
6.9
14
5.66
50
50
6.0
15
6.73
60
60
4.4
16
8.00
70
70
3.1
17
9.51
80
80
1.9
18
11.31
90
90
0.9
19
13.45
100
100 (Passed)
0.0
20
16.00
6
Applied Functions
Notch filter frequency characteristics

10
5
Gain [dB]
3[dB]
Depth 0, width 4
Depth 50, width 4
Depth 0, width 8
10
15
20
25
30
10
100
Frequency [Hz]
1000
6-11
6-4 Electronic Gear Function

The motor can be rotated for the number of pulses obtained by multiplying the position command
values by the electronic gear ratio.
This function supports position and full closing control.

Parameter
number
Applied Functions
Explanation
Electronic Gear Integer

Setting
Set the number of command pulses corresponding to 1

motor rotation.
Pn009

Numerator 1
Set the numerator of the electronic gear ratio.

If the set value is 0, the encoder resolution is automatically
set as the numerator.
131,072 for a 17-bit absolute encoder
1,048,576 for a 20-bit incremental encoder
Pn010

Denominator
Set the denominator of the electronic gear ratio.
Pn500

Numerator 2 *1
Set the numerator of the electronic gear ratio 2.
Pn501

Numerator 3 *1
Pn502

Numerator 4 *1
Pn008
Parameter name
Reference
P.8-6
*1. Switching among Electronic Gear Ratio Numerators 2 to 4 (Pn500 to Pn502) is performed using the electronic gear
switching input (GESEL1/GESEL2).
The settings of GESEL1 and GESEL2 are as follows.
GESEL1
GESEL2
Applicable parameters
OFF
OFF
Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1

(Pn009)
ON
OFF

(Pn500)
OFF
ON

(Pn501)
ON
ON

(Pn502)
6-12
Electronic Gear Ratio Setting (Pn008, Pn009, Pn010)

Electronic
Gear
Integer
Setting
(Pn008)
Electronic
Gear Ratio
Numerator 1
(Pn009)
Electronic
Gear Ratio
Denominator
(Pn010)
Explanation
When the Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) 0

The processing will be based on the set value of
Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) regardless of the
set values of Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1 (Pn009)
and Electronic Gear Ratio Denominator (Pn010).
1 to
1058576
Command pulse input
Encoder resolution *
Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008)
Position
command
Position command pulse = Encoder resolution /

Switching among electronic gear ratio numerators 1 to 4
is disabled when the Electronic Gear Integer Setting
(Pn008) 0.
When the Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) = 0, or
Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1 (Pn009) = 0
The processing will be based on the set value of
Electronic Gear Ratio Denominator (Pn010).
0
Command pulse input
Position
command
Position command pulse = Encode resolution / Electronic

Gear Ratio Denominator (Pn010)
1 to
1073741824
1 to
1073741824
When the Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) = 0, or

Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1 (Pn009) 0
The processing will be based on the set values of
Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1 (Pn009) and
Electronic Gear Ratio Denominator (Pn010).
Command pulse input
Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1 (Pn009)

Electronic Gear Ratio Denominator (Pn010)
Position
command
Position command pulse = Electronic Gear Ratio

Numerator 1 (Pn009) / Electronic Gear Ratio
Denominator (Pn010)
*
The encoder resolution is set as the numerator for full closing control. The command pulse is the
external scale reference for full closing control. Accordingly, please be cautious that the Pn008 set
value will not be the number of command pulses per motor rotation.
6-13
Applied Functions
Encoder resolution *
Operation Example
Example of a motor with a 20-bit encoder (1,048,576 pulses/rotation)
When the Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) 0

If you set Pn008 = 2,000, it will operate the same as the 2,000 (pulses/rotation) Servomotor.
Servo Drive
Servomotor
encoder resolution: 20 bits
2,000 pulses
Encoder resolution
1,048,576 pulses

1,048,576
2000
1-rotation (1,048,576 pulses)
When the Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) = 0 and the Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator = 0
Applied Functions
If you set Pn010 = 2,000, it will operate the same as the 2,000 (pulses/rotation) Servomotor.
Servo Drive
Servomotor
2,000 pulses
Encoder resolution
1,048,576 pulses
Electronic gear ratio denominator (Pn010)

1,048,576
2000
When the Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) = 0 and the Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 0
If you set Pn009 and Pn010 = 1,048,576 and 2,048, respectively, it will operate the same as the
2,048 (pulses/rotation) Servomotor.
Servo Drive
Servomotor
2,048 pulses
Electronic gear ratio numerator 1 (Pn009)
1,048,576 pulses

=
1,048,576
2000
512
1
6-14
6-5 Encoder Dividing Function

The number of output pulses from the driver can be adjusted.
You can set the number of pulses per motor rotation in the range of 1 to (the number of encoder
resolution pulses).
This function is used in the following cases:
- When you use a controller with a low response frequency
- When you want to set the pulse rate corresponding to a certain value
Example: Set the encoder dividing ratio to 2,000 (pulses/rotation) for when the
resolution is set to 5 m/pulse on mechanical systems that travel 10 mm per
motor rotation.

Parameter
number
6
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Encoder Dividing
Numerator
Set the number of phase-A and phase-B output

pulses, respectively per motor rotation.
Pn012
Encoder Output
Direction Switching
Selection
Select the phase B logic for pulse regeneration

output and the output source.
Pn503
Encoder Dividing
Denominator
Set the denominator when the number of pulses

per motor rotation in pulse regeneration is not an
integer.
P.8-46
Pn533
Pulse Regeneration
Output Limit Setting
Set whether to enable or disable the detection of

Err28.0 "pulse regeneration error."
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
P.8-58
External Scale PhaseZ Setting
Set the external scale phase-Z output width.
Serial Absolute External

Scale Phase-Z Setting
Set the phase-Z regeneration position when the

serial absolute external scale is used.
0: Phase-Z output only at a position where the
absolute position is 0
P.8-61
1 to 228: After a phase-Z output at the position
where the absolute position is 0, phase Z
is output every the set value pulse cycle.
No phase-Z is output until passing absolute
position 0
Phase AB External
Scale Pulse Output
Method Selection
Select the regeneration method of pulse outputs

OA and OB when an external scale of phase ABoutput type is used.
0: Without signal regeneration. Z-out is directly Zin in the scale
1: With signal regeneration
Pn620
Pn621
Pn622
P.8-7
P.8-7
P.8-61
P.8-62
6-15
Applied Functions
Pn011
Encoder Dividing Ratio Setting (Pn011, Pn503)

Encoder
Dividing
Numerator
(Pn011)
Encoder
Dividing
Denominator
(Pn503)
Explanation
When the output source is the encoder

When Encoder Dividing Denominator (Pn503) = 0
This is set by Encoder Dividing Numerator (Pn011), and the output pulse is
the number of pulses set by Encoder Dividing Numerator (Pn011) as follows.
Encoder pulse
1 to
262144
Output pulse from

the driver
Pn011 set value 4

Encoder resolution
Number of pulse output per rotation = Encoder Dividing Numerator (Pn011)

4
When the output source is the external scale

When Encoder Dividing Denominator (Pn503) = 0
The dividing ratio is 1:1.
Output pulse from

the driver
External scale pulse
Applied Functions
When Encoder Dividing Denominator (Pn503) 0

The output pulse will be as follows based on Encoder Dividing Numerator
(Pn011) and Encoder Dividing Denominator (Pn503).
1 to
262144
1 to
262144
Encoder pulse or
external scale pulse
Number of pulse output per rotation =
Pn011 set value

Pn503 set value
Encoder Dividing Denominator

(Pn011)
Output pulse from

the driver
encoder resolution
1 phase-Z signal is output by 1 pulse per motor rotation.When the Encoder Dividing
Denominator (Pn503) 0, and if the pulse output resolution per rotation is not a multiple of 4,
phase-Z and phase-A outputs are not synchronized.The output will be made as an encoder
resolution, resulting in narrower width.
Phase Z Signal Output

If Pn011 and Pn503 are integers
If Pn011 and Pn503 are not integers
Z
Synchronous
6-16
Asynchronous
Encoder Output Direction Switching Selection (Pn012)

The corresponding scale for each output type is as follows.
Encoder
Output
Direction
Switching
Selection
(Pn012)
0
Output
source
Phase B
logic
Encoder
External
scale
Encoder
Nonreverse
Reverse
3
External
scale
For forward direction

operation
For reverse direction

operation
Phase
A
Phase
A
Phase
B
Phase
B
Phase
A
Phase
A
Phase
B
Phase
B
External Scale Pulse Regeneration Function

Serial Absolute External Scale
Serial Incremental External Scale

Phase Z is output without dividing the phase Z of the serial incremental external scale.In
addition, take note that there are differences as illustrated in the figure below depending on the
direction passing phase Z.
Phase A
Phase B
Phase-Z position of external scale*1
Operating direction
*2
Phase Z
Operating direction
*2
*1. Phase-Z position and its relationship with phases A and B vary depending on the scale.
*2. Phase Z is regenerated for 1 pulse.If the width is narrow, the output time can be extended by the External Scale
Phase Z Setting (Pn620).
6-17
Applied Functions
Phase Z is output only after the control power supply for amplifier is turned ON and when it
crosses the zero absolute position of the external scale.Based on this position, phase Z is
output at the intervals of phase-A pulse that is set to Pn621.However, if Pn621 = 0, phase Z is
output only at the zero absolute position.
ABZ Parallel External Scale

Phase Z is output without dividing the Z signal that is input from the ABZ parallel external scale.
When the Phase-AB External Scale Pulse Output Method Selection (Pn622) = 1, the phase-AB
signal can be loaded to the amplifier and regenerated.Note, in this case, that the phase-AB
regeneration will be delayed compared to when Pn622 is set to 0.
External Scale Common Items

When detection cannot be made because the phase-Z signal width is narrow due to the external
scale travel distance, if you set the phase-Z signal output time in the External Scale-Z Setting
(Pn620), phase Z can be output at least for that period of time.
In addition, take note that the output is made from when the phase-Z signal starts and, therefore,
it will be different from the actual phase-Z signal width.Take note, also, that the direction of the
time extension varies depending on the direction of the operation.
Phase-Z output for pulse regeneration
(before time extension)
Operating direction
Phase-Z output for pulse regeneration
(after time extension)
Pn620 External Scale Phase-Z Setting
Operating direction
Applied Functions
Pn620 External Scale Phase-Z Setting

The maximum output frequency of the pulse regeneration output will be 4 Mpps (after quadruple
multiplier).If operated at a speed that exceeds this, the regeneration function may not operate
properly and position misalignment may result.
Phase A
Phase B
0.25 s or more
- You can generate Err28.0 "pulse regeneration error" when the pulse regeneration limit is
reached based on the Pulse Regeneration Output Limit Setting (Pn533).Note that this error is
generated when the pulse regeneration output limit is detected. Therefore, the error does not
occur due to the maximum output frequency.Depending on the motor rotation status (uneven
rotations), the error may occur when the detection is made at the frequency that goes up
momentarily.
- Take not that if the encoder is used as the output source and the pulse output resolution per
rotation is not a multiple of 4, phase Z and phase A are not synchronized, and the width may
be narrow.
6-18
Phase A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase B
Phase Z
Phase Z
When the dividing ratio is multiple of 4
*Will not be synchronized

with phase A.
When the dividing ratio is not multiple of 4
Note: When Pn503 = 0 and the output resolution is set to Pn011, the dividing ratio is always a multiple of 4.
When en encoder with the incremental specifications is used, the first phase Z output after the
power supply is turned ON may not always be within the above pulse width.When you are using
the phase-Z signal, rotate the motor more than once after turning ON the power supply, and
confirm that phase-Z regeneration has been performed once before using the second and
subsequent phase Z outputs.
6
Applied Functions
6-19
6-6 Brake Interlock
6-6 Brake Interlock

This function lets you set the output timing for the brake interlock (BKIR) signal that activates the
holding brake when the servo is turned ON, an alarm generates, or the servo is turned OFF.

Parameter
number
Pn437
Pn438
Applied Functions
Pn439
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Brake Timing when

Stopped
Set the time after a servo OFF command is issued upon

servo lock stop, until the brake interlock (BKIR) signal turns
OFF and power supply stops.
Brake Timing
during Operation
Set the time after a servo OFF command is issued while the
motor is rotating, until the brake interlock (BKIR) signal
P.8-44
turns OFF and power supply stops. If the speed drops to 30
r/min or below before the time set here, BKIR will turn OFF.
Brake clear speed

setting
To set the speed threshold for run time mechanical brake

output determination
P.8-44
P.8-44
Precautions for Correct Use of Holding Brake

The brake on a Servomotor with brake is a normally closed brake designed only to hold when
stopped.
Accordingly, set an appropriate time so that the brake will actuate after the motor stops.
If the brake is applied while the Servomotor is rotating, the brake disc will wear abnormally or
sustain damage, resulting in a bearing or encoder failure in the Servomotor.
6-20
6-6 Brake Interlock
Operation
Servo ON/OFF Operation Timings when Motor Is Stopped
ON
Servo OFF
*1
Servo ON
Servo OFF
OFF
Approx. 2 ms
ON
Dynamic brake relay
DB engaged
DB Released
DB engaged*2
OFF
Approx. 60 ms
Pn437
ON
Motor power supply
No power supply
Power supply
No power supply
OFF
Approx. 4 ms
Brake release request
from servo control *3
Brake interlock
output (BKIR) *3
Release request
OFF
ON
Release request
OFF
Attraction time
Release time
Released
Brake released
Held
*1. The servo will not turn ON until the motor rotation speed drops to approx. 30 r/min or below.
*2. The dynamic brake operation when the servo is OFF depends on Stop Selection with Servo OFF (Pn506).
*3. The brake interlock (BKIR) signal is output upon a release request from servo control. The BKIR signal is allocated
to a CN1 general-purpose output to be used.
Note:The brake attraction time and release time vary depending on the Servomotor brake. For details, refer to "3-3
Motor Specifications" (P.3-59).
6-21
Applied Functions
Holding brake operation
1 to 6 ms
ON
6-6 Brake Interlock
Servo ON/OFF Operation Timings When Motor Is Rotating

Based on these operation timings, regenerative energy is produced if the motor rotation stops
abnormally.
Accordingly, repeated operations cannot be performed. Provide a wait time of at least 10
minutes for the motor to cool down.
ON
Servo OFF
*1
Servo ON
Servo OFF
OFF
Approx. 2 ms
1 to 5 ms
ON
Dynamic brake relay
DB Released
DB engaged
DB Released*2
OFF
Approx. 60 ms
ON
Motor power supply
No power supply
Power supply
No power supply
OFF
Approx. 4 ms
t1*4
Pn438
ON
Brake release request

from servo control *3
OFF
Brake held
Release request
Rotation speed A
Approx. +30 r/min
BKIR

Servo ON enabled
Applied Functions
Approx. 30 r/min
Approx. 30 r/min
Release request
Rotation speed B
Brake held
Approx. 30 r/min
*2. The dynamic brake operation when the servo is OFF depends on Stop Selection with Servo OFF (Pn506).
In the above example, no release request is received from the network.
*4. t1 is the set value of Brake Timing during Operation (Pn438), or the time needed for the motor rotation speed to
drop to 30 r/min or below, whichever occurs first.
Note:Even when the servo ON input is turned ON again while the motor is decelerating, the system will not enter the
servo ON state until the motor stops.
6-22
6-6 Brake Interlock
Operation Timings when Alarm Generates (Servo ON)
OFF
Alarm generation
Normal
Alarm output
ON
0.5 to 5 ms
ON
Motor power supply
Power supply
No power supply
OFF
Dynamic brake relay
ON
DB Released
DB engaged*1
OFF
Servo ready
output (READY)
Alarm output (ALM)
ON
READY
OFF
ON
Alarm
OFF
t1
Brake interlock
output (BKIR) *2
Pn438
ON
Release request
Brake held
OFF
6
Rotation speed A
BKIR
Brake interlock
output (BKIR)
Release request
Rotation speed B
Brake held
When the timing of
reaching 30 r/min is early
Approx. 30 r/min
*1. The dynamic brake operation when an alarm generates depends on Stop Selection with Servo OFF (Pn506).
*2. t1 is the set value of Brake Timing during Operation (Pn438), or the time needed for the motor rotation speed to
drop to 30 r/min or below, whichever occurs first.
Note 1.Even when the servo ON input is turned ON again while the motor is decelerating, the system will not enter the
servo ON state until the motor stops. The brake interlock (BKIR) signal is allocated to a CN1 general-purpose
output to be used.
Note 2.If the main circuit power supply turns OFF while the motor is operating, a phase loss alarm or main circuit voltage
low alarm will occur, in which case this operation timing will be applied.
6-23
Applied Functions
When the Pn438

setting is early
Approx. 30 r/min
6-6 Brake Interlock
Operation Timings at Alarm Reset

Reset alarms by turning OFF the power supply and then turning it ON again.
The alarm reset input recognition time can be changed using Alarm Reset Condition Selection
(Pn516). The default setting is 120 ms.
ON
Alarm reset
Reset
OFF
120 ms
Servo ready
output (READY)
ON
READY
OFF
ON
Alarm output (ALM)
Alarm
Alarm Released
OFF
0 ms or more
ON
*1
Servo OFF
Servo ON
OFF
2 ms or more
Dynamic brake relay
ON
DB engaged
DBR eleased
OFF
Approx. 60 ms
Motor power supply
ON
No power supply
Power supply
Applied Functions
OFF
4 ms
Brake interlock
output (BKIR) *2
ON
Release request
Brake held
OFF
100 ms or more
ON
Input prohibited
Input allowed
OFF
Note:After the alarm has been reset, the system enters the servo OFF state (motor not excited). To turn the servo ON,
issue a servo ON command again after resetting the alarm, according to the above timings.
6-24
6-7 Gain Switching Function

This function switches the position loop and speed loop gain.
Select enable or disable using GAIN SWITCHING INPUT OPERATING mode Selection (Pn114).
Set the switching condition using gain switching setting.
If the load inertia changes or you want to change the responsiveness depending on whether the
motor is stopping and operating, you can perform an optimal control by gain switching.
Use gain switching when the realtime autotuning does not operate effectively, etc. (see below.)
- When the load inertia fluctuates in 200 ms or less.
- When the motor rotation speed does not exceed 500 r/min, or load torque does not exceed
50% of the rated torque.
- When external force is constantly applied, as with a vertical axis.
Note. When the gain 2 has been selected, realtime autotuning will not operate normally. If using the gain
switching, set the Realtime Autotuning to "not use" (Pn002 = 0).
6
Applied Functions
6-25

Parameter
number
Pn114
Parameter name
GAIN SWITCHING
ENABLE
Explanation
Set whether to enable or disable gain switching function.
Reference
P.8-13
Applied Functions
Pn115
SWITCHING mode in
Position Control
Set the condition for switching between gain 1 and gain 2.
Pn116
Gain Switching Delay

Time in Position Control
Set the delay time for switching from gain 1 to gain 2.

(Unit: 0.1 ms)
P.8-16
Pn117
Gain Switching Level in

Position Control
Set the judgment level for switching between the gain 1 and
gain 2.
P.8-16
Pn118
Gain Switching Hysteresis

in Position Control
Set the hysteresis width to be provided in the judgment level

set in Gain Switching Level (Pn117).
P.8-16
Pn119
Position Gain Switching

Time
Set the time to change from one position gain to the other
one. (Unit: 0.1 ms)
P.8-16
P.8-14
SPEED CONTROL mode

Pn120
SWITCHING mode in
Speed Control
Pn121

Time in Speed Control
Set the delay to return from the gain 2 to gain 1. (Unit: 0.1
ms)
P.8-18
Pn122

Speed Control
gain 2.
P.8-18
Pn123

in Speed Control

P.8-18
P.8-16
TORQUE CONTROL mode

Pn124
SWITCHING mode in
Torque Control
Pn125

Time in Torque Control
Set the time to return from the gain 2 to gain 1.

(Unit: 0.1 ms)
P.8-20
Pn126

Torque Control
gain 2.
P.8-20
Pn127

in Torque Control

P.8-20
6-26
P.8-19
Diagrams of Gain Switching Setting

Switching between Gain 1 (Pn100 to Pn104) and Gain 2 (Pn105 to Pn109) occurs at the
following timings. Take note that, in the case of position loop gains, switching occurs based on
the setting of Pn119.
For the details of each gain, refer to "Chapter 8, Parameters Details".
The details of gain switching setting vary depending on the CONTROL mode used. For the
details of settings available in each mode, refer to "Gain Switching Setting for Each CONTROL
mode" (P.6-31).
GAIN SWITCHING mode = 2: Gain Switching (GSEL)

Instant switching occurs when a gain switching command is issued from the network.
Position command
GSEL
Gain 1
Gain switching instruction
Gain 2
Gain 1
Applied Functions
6-27
GAIN SWITCHING mode = 3: Switching by Torque Command Change Amount

Torque command change amount (angular acceleration and deceleration speed command) is
set in units of 0.05%/166 s.
If the amount of change fluctuates and the switching time is not met, the switching will be
cancelled.
In the case of switching due to a change amount of 4% over 2 ms, a value of approx. 6 will
apply. (Change of 0.33% per 166 s.)
Speed command
Torque command
Pn127
Pn126
6
Applied Functions
Torque change
amount
Pn127
Pn127
Pn126
Pn127
Pn125
Gain 1
Pn125
Pn125
Gain 1
Pn125
Gain 1
GAIN SWITCHING mode = 5, 9: Switching by Speed Command or Actual Motor Speed

Speed command or actual motor speed
Pn118, Pn123
Pn118, Pn123
Pn117, Pn122
Pn116, Pn121
Gain 1
6-28
Gain 2
Gain 1
GAIN SWITCHING mode (Pn031) = 6: Switching by Amount of Position Error

Gain switching occurs based on the accumulated count in the error counter.
Amount of position error
Pn118
Pn118
Pn117
Pn116
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
GAIN SWITCHING mode = 7: Switching by Position Command Received

Gain switching occurs when a position command corresponding to 1 command unit or more is
received.
Position command
Applied Functions
Pn116
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
6-29
GAIN SWITCHING mode = 8: Switching by Positioning Completion Signal OFF

Switching to the gain 2 occurs when the error counter accumulated pulse exceeds the
Positioning Completion Range 1 (Pn431).
Amount of error counter accumulated pulse
INP1 ON
INP1 ON
INP1 OFF
Pn116
Cancelled because the time conditions are not met
Gain 1
Gain 1
Gain 2
GAIN SWITCHING mode = 10: Switching by Combination of Position Command Received and Speed
Switching to the gain 2 occurs when a position command is received.
If no position command is issued for the period of Gain Switching Delay Time in Speed Control
(Pn121) and the speed also becomes the same as or less than the result of Gain Switching
Level (Pn122) - Gain Switching Hysteresis (Pn123) [r/min], switching to the gain 1 will occur.
6
Applied Functions
Position command
Pn123
Pn122
Actual motor speed
Pn116
Gain 1
Pn121
Gain 1
Gain 2
Timings by Position Gain Switching Time (Pn119)

At the time of gain switching, the speed loop gain, speed loop integral time constant, torque
command filter time constant and speed detection filter switch simultaneously as the switching
command. Under this function, however, switching occurs at the set timings so as to reduce
mechanical vibration and resonance resulting from switching from low to high gain.
The switching time is set in units of 166 s according to the internal cycle. Set 20 in Pn119. If
the position loop gain is to be raised from 30 to 50 [1/s], increment the gain by 166 s at a time.
(3.32 ms) If the position loop gain is to be lowered from 50 to 30 [1/s], lower the gain instantly.
N
Every 166 s
High gain
3
2
1
Low gain
6-30
Low gain
Gain Switching Setting for Each CONTROL mode

The settable switching conditions vary depending on the CONTROL mode used. Set the
parameters for each CONTROL mode.

In the POSITION CONTROL mode, it varies as follows according to GAIN SWITCHING mode
in Position Control (Pn115).
(: Enabled, : Disabled)
Pn115 set
value
Switching conditions
Gain
Switching
Delay Time
(Pn116)
Gain
Switching
Level
(Pn117)
Gain
Switching
Hysteresis
(Pn118)
Position
Gain
Switching
Time (Pn119)
Always gain 1
Always gain 2
Switching from gain

switching (GSEL)
Torque command change

amount
[0.05%]
[0.05%]
Always gain 1
Command speed
[r/min]
[r/min]
[pulse]
[pulse]
5
6
7
Position command received
signal (INP1) OFF
Actual motor speed
[r/min]
[r/min]
Combination of position
command received and speed
9
10
6
Applied Functions
SPEED CONTROL mode

In the SPEED CONTROL mode, it varies as follows according to GAIN SWITCHING mode in
Speed Control (Pn120).
Pn120 set
value
Gain Switching
Delay Time
(Pn121)
Gain Switching
Level (Pn122)
Gain Switching
Hysteresis
(Pn123)
Always gain 1
Always gain 2
Switching from gain

switching (GSEL)

amount
[0.05%]
[0.05%]
Amount of change in speed

command
Speed command
[r/min]
[r/min]
6-31
TORQUE CONTROL mode

In the TORQUE CONTROL mode, it varies as follows according to GAIN SWITCHING mode
in Torque Control (Pn124).
Pn124 set
value
Gain Switching
Delay Time
(Pn125)
Gain Switching
Level (Pn126)
Always gain 1
Always gain 2
Switching from gain

switching (GSEL)

amount
[ 0.05%]
[ 0.05%]
Applied Functions
6-32
Gain Switching
Hysteresis
(Pn127)
6-8 Gain Switching 3 Function
6-8 Gain Switching 3 Function

You can newly set gain 3 right before stopping to the gain switching function of GAIN
SWITCHING INPUT OPERATING mode Selection (Pn114).
You can use the gain 3 switching function in the following situations for position control or full
closing control.
When servo is ON
When there is no trouble with the motor's normal rotation

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn605
Gain 3 Effective Time
Set effective time of gain 3.
P.8-59
Pn606
Gain 3 Ratio Setting
Set gain 3 as a multiple of gain 1.
P.8-59
Operation
Example: When the SWITCHING mode in position control = 7 and the switching condition is
set to position command received
Position command speed [r/min]
Pn6050.1ms
Gain 2
Gain 3
Pn105 to Pn109
Gain 1
Pn100 to Pn104
Gain 3 region
Position loop gain=Pn100Pn606/100
Speed loop gain=Pn101Pn606/100
Continue to use gain 1 value for the speed loop integral time constant,
speed feedback filter time constant, and torque command filter time constant.

If gain 3 is not used, set the Gain 3 Effective Time (Pn605) to 0 and Gain 3 Ratio Setting (Pn606) to 0.
Only the position loop gain and the speed loop gain are treated as gain 3 in the gain 3 region, and
the gain 1 setting is applied to all other gains.
If the gain 2 switching condition is established in the gain 3 region, this switches to gain 2.
If gain 2 is switching to gain 3, Position Gain Switching Time (Pn119) is enabled.
Take note that there will be a gain 3 region even when gain 2 is switched to gain 1 due to a
parameter change and so forth.
6-33
Applied Functions
Gains 1, 2 and 3 Operation Timings
6-9 Torque Limit
6-9 Torque Limit

The output torque by the Servomotor can be limited.
This function is used in the following conditions.
- When push-motion operation, such as pressing, is performed.
- When the torque at startup and during deceleration should be suppressed to protect the
mechanical system, etc.
Various methods are available according to Torque Control Selection (Pn521).

Parameter
number
Applied Functions
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn521
Torque Limit Selection
Select the torque limit based on the various

parameters and input signals.
P.8-55
Pn013
No. 1 Torque Limit
Set the No. 1 motor output torque limit value.
P.8-7
Pn522
No. 2 Torque Limit
Set the No. 2 motor output torque limit value.
P.8-55
Pn523
Torque Limit Switching

Rate 1
Set the rate of change (fluctuate) when switching

from the No. 1 torque limit to No. 2 torque limit.
P.8-56
Pn524

Rate 2
Set the rate of change (fluctuate) when switching

from the No. 2 torque limit to No. 1 torque limit.
P.8-56
Pn525
Forward External Torque

Limit
Set the forward torque limit using a digital signal.
P.8-56
Pn526
Reverse External Torque

Limit
Set the reverse torque limit using a digital signal.
P.8-56
Pn527
Analog Torque Limit Scale
Gain for the analogue torque input.
P.8-56
Pn425
Set the offset adjustment value for the voltage

applied to analog input 2.
P.8-40
Pn426

Constant
Set the time constant of the first-order lag filter for

the voltage applied to analog input 2.
P.8-40
Pn428
Set the offset adjustment value for the voltage

applied to analog input 3.
P.8-41
Pn429

Constant
Set the time constant of the first-order lag filter for

the voltage applied to analog input 3.
P.8-41
6-34
6-9 Torque Limit
Torque Limit in Position, Speed and Full Closing Controls

Pn521 set
value
Explanation
Forward operation: Set by PCL (0 to 10 V)

Reverse operation: Set by NCL (10 to 0 V)
Limit in both forward and reverse operation: Set by Pn013
Forward operation: Set by Pn013

Reverse operation: Set by Pn522
Switch the limit value using torque limit switching (TLSEL).

When TLSEL is OFF
Limit in both forward and reverse operation: Pn013
When TLSEL is ON
Limit in both forward and reverse operation: Pn522
Forward operation: Set by PCL (0 to 10 V)

Reverse operation: Set by NCL (0 to 10 V)
Limit in both forward and reverse operation: Set by PCL (0 to 10 V)
Switch the limit value using torque limit switching (TLSEL).

When TLSEL is OFF
Forward operation: Pn013
Reverse operation: Pn522
When TLSEL is ON
Forward operation: Pn525
Reverse operation: Pn526
6-35
Applied Functions
For the torque limit in torque control, always select No. 1 Torque Limit (Pn013).
The torque limit under torque feed-forward selection is enable only during speed control when the
set value is 1 to 3.
PCL signal is asigned to the terminal 16 in CN1. See chapter 3 for details about the conection.
NCL signal is asigned to the terminal 18 in CN1. See chapter 3 for details about the conection.
6-9 Torque Limit
Rate of Change Setting at Switching (Pn521 = 3)

If 3 is set in Torque Limit Selection (Pn521), you can add fluctuate the change at the time of
switching. This function is disabled in any other setting.
How to Set Rate of Change (Fluctuate)

Set the parameter according to the switching type.
From No. 1 torque limit to No. 2 torque limit: Pn523
From No. 2 torque limit to No. 1 torque limit: Pn524
The sign of the rate of change switches automatically inside the driver based on the magnitude
correlation of the No. 1 torque limit and No. 2 torque limit.

input (TLSEL)

Setting 1 (Pn523)
No. 1 Torque
Limit (Pn013)
No. 2 Torque
Limit (Pn522)
Setting 2 (Pn524)
Applied Functions
If the setting of No. 1 Torque Limit (Pn013) or No. 2 Torque Limit (Pn522) is changed from the
front panel or CX-Drive, the rate of change setting will be ignored and the new torque limit value
will be applied immediately.
Torque Limit Set Value for Each Servomotor

The setting range for the torque limit selection is 0% to 300% and the standard default setting is
300% except for the following combinations of drivers and motors.
Driver
Applicable motor
Maximum torque limit [%]
R88D-KT15x
R88M-K90010x
225
R88D-KT30x
R88M-K2K010x
250
R88M-K3K010x
250
R88M-K4K510x
263
R88D-KT75x
R88M-K6K010x
272
R88D-KT75H
R88M-K7K515T
265
R88D-KT75F
R88M-K7K515C
267
R88M-K11K015x
265
R88M-K15K015x
253
R88D-KT50x
R88D-KT150x
6-36
6-10 Sequence I/O Signal

You can set a sequence in various operating conditions.
For the connection of I/O signals and processing of external signals, refer to "Control I/O
Connector Specifications (CN1)" (P.3-18).
Input Signals
You can allocate any function of input signals to the input pins for the control I/O connector
(CN1). In addition, you can change logics. However, refer to "Input Signal Allocation Method"
(P.6-38) for more information because some signals have allocation limitations.
If the G Series is being replaced, set the unit to the default setting before using it.
Input Signal Default Setting

The allocation of the default input signals is as follows. Refer to "Input Signal Allocation
Method" when you change the allocation to use.
Default setting state

Input
signals
Default set
value
Position control or
full closing control
Signal
name
Logic
Speed control
Signal
name
Logic
Torque control
Signal
name
Logic
Pn400
SI1 input
00828282h
(8553090)
NOT
NC
NOT
NC
NOT
NC
Pn401
SI2 input
00818181h
(8487297)
POT
NC
POT
NC
POT
NC
Pn402
SI3 input
0091910Ah
(9539850)
DFSEL1
NO
VZERO
NC
VZERO
NC
Pn403
SI4 input
00060606h
(394758)
GSEL
NO
GSEL
NO
GSEL
NO
Pn404
SI5 input
0000100Ch
(4108)
GESEL1
NO
VSEL3
NO
Pn405
SI6 input
00030303h
(1979379)
RUN
NO
RUN
NO
RUN
NO
Pn406
SI7 input
00000f07h
(3847)
ECRST
NO
VSEL2
NO
Pn407
SI8 input
00040404h
(263172)
RESET
NO
RESET
NO
RESET
NO
Pn408
SI9 input
00050505h
(328965)
TVSEL
NO
TVSEL
NO
TVSEL
NO
Pn409
SI10 input
00000E88h
(3720)
IPG
NC
VSEL1
NO
Contacts NO and NC in the logic fields indicate the following statuses.
6-37
Applied Functions
Applicable
parameters
Contact NO: Disabled (OFF) when signal input is open with COM
Enabled (ON) when signal input is shorted with COM
Contact NC: Disabled (OFF) when signal input is shorted with COM
Enabled (ON) when signal input is open with COM
"" indicates the status where no function is allocated.
Parameters that Can Be Allocated

Use the following parameters when changing the input signal allocation to use.
For the setting method, refer to "Input Signal Allocation Method".
Parameter
number
Applied Functions
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn400
Set the SI1 input function allocation. This

parameter is based on the hex display
Input Signal Selection 1
standard.(Take note that the display on the
front panel is based on the decimal display.)
P.8-36
Pn401
Input Signal Selection 2 Set the SI2 input function allocation.
P.8-36
Pn402
P.8-36
Pn403
P.8-36
Pn404
P.8-36
Pn405
P.8-36
Pn406
P.8-36
Pn407
P.8-36
Pn408
P.8-36
Pn409
Input Signal Selection

10
P.8-36
Set the SI10 input function allocation.
Input Signal Allocation Method

Input the setting for each CONTROL mode in any of the parameters of Pn400 to Pn409 to
allocate signals.
Set the parameters based on the hex display standard.
Set the set value of the function for each CONTROL mode in "**" below.
Refer to the function number table provided below for the set value of each function. Logic
setting is included in the function numbers.
00******h
Position control/full closing control
Speed control
Torque control
Example:
Position control or full closing control: Electronic gear switching input 1 for contact NO (0Ch)
Speed control:
Internally set speed selection 1 for contact NC (8Eh)
Torque control:
Disabled (00h)
00008E0Ch
Speed control
Torque control
6-38
This will be 36364 since the front panel display is in decimal numbers.
Function Number Table

The set values to be used for allocations are as follows.
Set value
Signal name
Symbol
Contact NO
Contact NC
00h
Setting not available
Forward drive prohibition input
POT
01h
81h
Reverse drive prohibition input
NOT
02h
82h
Operation command *1
RUN
03h
83h
Alarm reset input
RESET
04h
CONTROL mode switching input
TVSEL
05h
85h
Gain switching
GSEL
06h
86h
Error counter reset input *2
ECRST
07h
Pulse prohibition input *3
IPG
08h
88h
TLSEL
09h
89h
Vibration filter switching 1
DFSEL1
0Ah
8Ah
Vibration filter switching 2
DFSEL2
0Bh
8Bh
Electronic gear switching input 1 DIV1
0Ch
8Ch
Electronic gear switching input 2 DIV2
0Dh
8Dh
Internally set speed selection 1
VSEL1
0Eh
8Eh
VSEL2
0Fh
8Fh
VSEL3
10h
90h
Zero speed designation input
VZERO
11h
91h
Speed command sign input
VSIGN
12h
92h
Torque command sign input
TSIGN
13h
93h
Forced alarm input
E-STOP
14h
94h
Inertia ratio switching input
J-SEL
15h
95h
6
Applied Functions
Disabled
*1 The operation command (RUN) always needs to be allocated. Servo cannot be turned ON if it is not allocated.
*2 Allocate this to Input Signal Selection 7 (Pn406). An error will occur if it is allocated to anything other than that.
*3 Allocate this to Input Signal Selection 10 (Pn409). An error will occur if it is allocated to anything other than that.

Do not use any values other than the settings listed.
If you allocate the same function to multiple input signals, interface input duplicate allocation error
1 (Err33.0) or interface input duplicate allocation error 2 (Err33.1) will occur.
You can allocate error counter reset input (ECRST) to Input Signal Selection 7 (Pn406) only. If
you allocate it to anything other than that, a counter reset allocation error (Err33.6) will occur.
You can allocate pulse prohibition input (IPG) to Input Signal Selection 10 (Pn409) only. If you allocate
it to anything other than that, a command pulse prohibition input allocation error (Err33.7) will occur.
If you are using the CONTROL mode switching input (TVSEL), you must set it for all CONTROL
modes. If you do not set it for all CONTROL modes, interface input function number error 1
(Err33.2) or interface input function number error 2 (Err33.3) will occur.
If you set Zero Speed Designation Selection (Pn315) to 2 or 3, you must always allocate zero
speed designation input (VZERO) in speed control for the same pin where zero speed designation
6-39
input (VZERO) is allocated for speed control. In addition, specify the same settings for the logic.
Be sure to allocate the functions that are used by multiple CONTROL modes (such as operation command
and alarm reset input) to the same pin, and do the same for the logic. If this is not set correctly, interface
input duplicate allocation error 1 (Err33.0) or interface input duplicate allocation error 2 (Err33.1) will occur.
You must always allocate the operation command (RUN). Servo cannot be turned ON if it is not
allocated.
Output Signals
You can allocate any function of output signals to the output pins for the control I/O connector
(CN1).
If the G Series is being replaced, set the unit to the default setting before using it.
Output Signal Default Setting

The allocation of the default input signals is as follows. Refer to "Output Signal Allocation
Method" when you change the allocation to use.
Default setting state
Applicable
parameters
Applied Functions
Output
Signals
Default set
value
Position control
or full closing
control
Speed control
Torque control
Signal name
Signal name
Signal name
Pn410
SO1
output
00030303h
(197379)
BKIR
BKIR
BKIR
Pn411
SO2
output
00020202h
(131586)
READY
READY
READY
Pn412
SO3
output
*1
ALM
ALM
ALM
Pn413
SO4
output
00050504h
(328964)
INP
TGON
TGON
*1 Alarm output signal allocations cannot be changed.
Parameters that Can Be Allocated

Use the following parameters when changing the output signal allocation to use.
For the setting method, refer to "Output Signal Allocation Method".
Parameter
number
6-40
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn410
Set the SO1 input function allocation. This

parameter is based on the hex display
Output Signal Selection 1
standard. Refer to the output signal function
number table for details.
P.8-36
Pn411
Output Signal Selection 2 Set the SO2 input function allocation.
P.8-36
Pn412
Set the SO3 input function allocation. This

Output Signal Selection 3 parameter is always fixed to the alarm output
signals.
P.8-36
Pn413
Output Signal Selection 4 Set the SO4 input function allocation.
P.8-36
Output Signal Allocation Method

Input the setting for each CONTROL mode in any of the parameters of Pn410 to Pn413 to
allocate signals.
Set up the parameters based on the hex display standard in the same manner as the input
signal allocation method.
Set the set value of the function for each CONTROL mode in "**" below.
Refer to the function number table provided below for the set value of each function. Logic
setting is included in the function numbers.
00******h
Speed control
Torque control
Example:
Position control or full closing control: Speed conformity output (08h)
Speed control:
Motor rotation speed detection output (05h)
Torque control:
Zero speed detection signal (07h)
00070508h
Speed control
Torque control
This will be 460040 since the front panel display is in decimal numbers.
Applied Functions
Function Number Table

The set values to be used for allocations are as follows.
Signal name
Symbol
Set value
Disabled
00h
Servo ready completed output
READY
02h
BKIR
03h
Positioning completion output
INP
04h
Motor rotation speed detection output
TGON
05h
Torque limiting signal
TLC
06h
Zero speed detection signal
ZSP
07h
Speed conformity output
TGON
08h
Warning output 1
WARN1
09h
Warning output 2
WARN2
0Ah
Position command status output
P-CMD
0Bh
Positioning completion 2
INP2
0Ch
Output during speed limit
V-LIMIT
0Dh
Alarm attribute output
ALM-ATB
0Eh
Speed command status output
V-CMD
0Fh
6-41

Do not use any values other than the settings listed.
You can allocate the same function to multiple output signals.
You cannot change the output signal logic. When the function is disabled (OFF), signal input is
open with COM, and when the function is enabled (ON), signal input is shorted with COM.
Applied Functions
6-42
6-11 Forward and Reverse Drive Prohibition Functions

When the forward drive prohibition input (POT) and the reverse drive prohibition input (NOT) are
turned OFF, the motor will stop rotating.
You can stop the motor from rotating beyond the device's operating range by connecting limit
inputs.

Parameter
number
Pn400 to
Pn409
Parameter name
to 10
Explanation
Reference
Set the input signal allocation and logic.

In the default setting, the allocations are as
follows.
Pn400 (CN1 - pin 8): NOT (Logic contact NC)
Pn401 (CN1 - pin 9): POT (Logic contact NC)
Drive Prohibition Input

Selection
Set the operation to be performed upon forward

and reverse drive prohibition input.
Pn505
Stop Selection for Drive

Prohibition Input
Set the deceleration and stop methods upon

forward and reverse drive prohibition input.
Applied Functions
Pn504
Input Signal Selection Function (Default setting: Pn400, Pn401)

In the default setting, the allocations are as follows.
Default setting
Parameter
number
Parameter
name
Set value
Position Control
or full closing
control
Speed control
Torque
control
Pn400
Input Signal
Selection 1
00828282
NOT (contact NC)
NOT (contact
NC)
NOT (contact
NC)
Pn401
Input Signal
Selection 2
00818181
POT (contact NC)
POT (contact
NC)
POT (contact
NC)
Refer to "6-10 Sequence I/O Signal" (P.6-37) for details on input signal selections 1 to 10.
6-43
Drive Prohibition Input Selection (Pn504)

Install limit switches at both ends of the axis to prohibit the Servomotor from driving in the direction specified
by the switch. This can be used to prevent the workpiece from driving too far and thus prevent damage to
the machine. Set the operation to be performed upon forward and reverse drive prohibition input.
Drive
Prohibition
Input Selection
(Pn504)
Explanation
Forward drive prohibition input and reverse drive prohibition input enabled.
The operation when a signal is input will be as follows.
Forward drive prohibition input closed: Forward limit switch not operating and status normal.
Forward drive prohibition input open: Forward direction prohibited and reverse direction permitted.
Reverse drive prohibition input closed: Reverse limit switch not operating and status normal.
Reverse drive prohibition input open: Reverse direction prohibited and forward direction permitted.
The Servomotor will decelerate and stop according to the sequence set in Stop Selection
for Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505). For details, refer to explanation for Stop Selection for
Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505).
If the forward and the reverse prohibition inputs are both open, an error will be detected in
the driver, and a drive prohibition input error (Err380) will occur.
Forward and reverse drive prohibition input disabled.
Forward and reverse drive prohibition input enabled.

If either the forward or the reverse prohibition input is open, a drive prohibition input error
(Err380) will occur.
Applied Functions
Stop Selection for Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505)

Set the deceleration and stop methods upon a forward or reverse drive prohibition is input.
Stop Selection for
Drive Prohibition
Input (Pn505)
0
Deceleration method
After stopping
Error counter
Dynamic brake
Torque command = 0 for drive

prohibition direction
Held
Free-run
(Torque command = 0 for drive
prohibition direction)
Torque command = 0 for drive

prohibition direction
Held
Immediate stop
Servo lock
Clear before and

after deceleration.
Stop Selection for Drive

Prohibition Input (Pn505)
Deceleration method
Decelerate with dynamic brake
Stop status
Servo unlocked
0
POT (NOT) is turned OFF.
1
2
Decelerate in the free-run status

Decelerate with Emergency
Stop Torque (Pn511)
Servo locked
While the Forward Drive Prohibition Input (POT) is OFF, the Servomotor cannot be driven in
the forward direction, but it can be driven in the reverse direction. Conversely, while the reverse
drive prohibition input (NOT) is OFF, the Servomotor cannot be driven in the reverse direction,
but it can be driven in the forward direction.
If immediate stop torque is set for deceleration and servo lock is set for stop (set value: 2),
torque limit during deceleration will be limited with the set value of the Immediate Stop Torque
(Pn511).
6-44

A load on the vertical axis and so forth may fall due to its own weight in the drive prohibition input
state. To prevent the load from falling, set immediate stop torque for deceleration and servo lock
for stop (set value: 2) in Stop Selection for Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505), or limit the operation
using the Host Controller rather than using this function.
Because an immediate stop will force the motor to decelerate quickly, the position error will
momentarily be a large value during position control, and Err24.0 "error counter overflow" or
Err34.0 "overrun limit error" may occur.In such a case, set the Position Counter Overflow Level
(Pn014) and the Overrun Limit Setting (Pn514) to appropriate values.
6
Applied Functions
6-45
6-12 Disturbance Observer Function

You can lower the effect of the disturbance torque and reduce the vibration using the estimated
disturbance torque value.
You can use the disturbance observer in the following situations for position control or speed
control.
When servo is ON
When realtime autotuning function is disabled
When instantaneous speed observer function is disabled
Disturbance torque
Torque command +
Add to the
direction that
cancels the
disturbance
Motor+load
+
Torque command
+
Motor speed
Applied Functions
Load model
Gain
Setting with
Pn623
Filter
Setting with Pn623
Disturbance torque
Estimation value

If there is a resonance point below the cut-off frequency estimated by the disturbance observer,
or if a large amount of high-frequency elements are found in the disturbance torque, the
disturbance observer may not be enabled.
6-46

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn610
Enable of several function
Set the bits related to the disturbance observer.
P.8-59
Pn623
Disturbance Torque
Compensation Gain
Set the compensation gain for disturbance

torque.
P.8-62
Pn624
Disturbance Observer Filter

Setting
Set the filter time constant for disturbance torque

compensation.
P.8-62
Operating Procedure
1. Set the Setting of Each Function (Pn610).
Set whether to enable or disable the disturbance observer in bit 1.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set the operating conditions to be enabled in bit 2.
0: Enabled at all time
1: Enabled only when gain 1 is selected
2. Set the Disturbance Observer Filter Setting (Pn624).
3. Set the Disturbance Torque Compensation Gain (Pn623).

Change the value of Disturbance Torque Compensation Gain (Pn623) from a small value to a
large value. And set to the set value in which the effectiveness of suppressing the impact of
disturbance and the operating noise level are balanced0.
6-47
Applied Functions
Set Disturbance Torque Compensation Gain (Pn623) to a small value, and then change the
value of Disturbance Observer Filter Setting (Pn624) from a large value to a small value. And
set to the set value in which the effectiveness of suppressing the impact of disturbance and the
operating noise level are balanced.
6-13 Friction Torque Compensation Function

As a function to reduce the effect of friction, you can set the unbalanced load compensation
that always compensates the constantly working offset torque, and the dynamic friction
compensation that changes its direction depending on the operating direction.
You can use the torque compensation in the following situations for position control or speed
control.
When servo is ON

Parameter
number
Applied Functions
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn607
Torque Command Value

Offset
Set the unbalanced load compensation value that

is always added to the torque command in the
CONTROL mode other than torque control.
P.8-59
Pn608
Forward Direction Torque

Offset
Set the dynamic friction compensation value that is

added to the torque command when a forward
direction position command is input for position
control or full closing control.
P.8-59
Pn609
Reverse Direction Torque

Offset
Set the dynamic friction compensation value that is

added to the torque command when a reverse
direction position command is input for position
control or full closing control.
P.8-59
6-48
Operation Example
Torque Command Value Offset (Pn607) reduces the variations of positioning operations due
to the movement directions when a certain amount of unbalanced load torque is always applied
to the motor at the vertical axis and so forth if that torque command value is set.
Forward Direction Torque Offset (Pn608) and Reverse Direction Torque Offset (Pn609) are
used with loads that require a large amount of dynamic friction torque due to the radial load,
such as the belt drive axis. By setting the friction torque for each rotation direction for all
parameters, you can reduce the deterioration and inconsistencies of positioning stabilization
time due to dynamic friction.
Command speed
Pn607
(Torque command
value offset)
Forward direction
Pn608
(Forward direction torque offset)
Pn609
(Reverse direction
torque offset)
Time
6
Reverse direction
Motor power supply
Motor
de-energized

You can use the unbalanced load compensation and the dynamic friction compensation together or
separately. Take note that the following use limit is applied upon CONTROL mode switching or
servo ON.
The unbalanced load compensation and the dynamic friction compensation will be 0 regardless
of the parameter setting.
During speed control
The load compensation is enabled based on Pn607 when the servo is turned OFF.The dynamic
friction compensation will be 0 regardless of the parameter setting.
When the servo is turned ON during position control or full closing control
The unbalanced load compensation and the dynamic friction compensation values will be held
until the first position command is input.When the position command is input, the unbalanced
load compensation will be updated based on Pn607.Also, based on the command direction, the
dynamic friction compensation value will be updated according to parameters Pn608 or Pn609.
6-49
Applied Functions
Motor
de-energized
6-14 Inertia Ratio Switching Function

You can switch the inertia ratio from 1 or 2 using inertia ratio switching input (JSEL). This
functions effectively if used when the load inertia changes in 2 levels.
You can use inertia ratio switching in the following situations.
When servo is ON
When realtime autotuning is disabled
When adaptive filter function is disabled
When instantaneous speed observer function is disabled
When disturbance observer function is disabled
Applied Functions
Parameter number
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn610
Enable of several
function
Set the bits related to inertia ratio switching.
P.8-59
Pn004
Inertia Ratio
Set the inertia ratio 1.
P.8-3
Pn613
Inertia Ratio 2
P.8-60
Operating Procedure
Set whether to enable or disable inertia ratio switching in bit 3.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2. Set the Inertia Ratio 1 (Pn004).

3. Set the Inertia Ratio 2 (Pn613).
4. Set the inertia ratio switching input (JSEL).
Setting of Each Function
(Pn610)
Inertia ratio switching

input (JSEL)
When bit 3 = 0: Inertia ratio

switching is disabled
OFF
When bit 3 = 1: Inertia ratio

switching is enabled
OFF
ON
ON
Applicable inertia ratio
Inertia Ratio 1 (Pn004)
Inertia Ratio 2 (Pn613)

Be sure that the motor is stopped when using the inertia ratio switching function.
If the difference between inertia ratio 1 and inertia ratio 2 is large, a vibration may occur even if the
6-50
motor is stopped. Use it upon confirming that there is no problem with vibration on the actual machine.
6
Applied Functions
6-51
6-15 Hybrid Vibration Suppression Function
6-15 Hybrid Vibration Suppression Function

This function suppresses the vibrations that are caused by the amount of the torsion between
the motor and the load in the FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode.You can use this function to
raise the gain setting.
The hybrid vibration suppression function can be used in the following situations.
FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode
When servo is ON

Parameter
number
6
Applied Functions
Pn634
Pn635
Parameter name
Explanation
Hybrid Vibration
Suppression Gain
Set the hybrid vibration suppression gain.

In general, set it to the same value as the position
loop gain, and finely adjust it based on the
situation.
Hybrid Vibration
Suppression Filter
Set the hybrid vibration suppression filter.
Reference
P.8-63
P.8-63
Operating Procedure
1. Set the Hybrid Vibration Suppression Gain (Pn634) to the same value as the position
loop gain.
2. Gradually increase the set value of the Hybrid Vibration Suppression Filter (Pn635)
while driving with full closing control and check the changes in the response.
If the response improves, find the combination of Pn634 and Pn635 that result in the optimal
response by adjusting them.
This function is effective when the amount of torsion between the motor shaft and the load is
large.This may be less effective when the amount of torsion is small.
6-52
6-16 Feed-forward Function

The feed-forward function come in 2 types, speed feed forward and torque feed forward.
The speed feed forward can minimize the position error and increase the responsiveness by
calculating the speed control command that is required for the operation based on the internal
positioning command during position or full closing control, and adding it to the speed
command that is calculated based on the comparison with the position feedback.
The torque feed forward can increase the responsiveness during speed control by calculating
the torque command that is required for the operation based on the speed control command,
and adding it to the torque command that is calculated based on the comparison with the
speed feedback.

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Speed Feed-forward
Amount
Pn111
Speed Feed-forward
Command Filter
Set the time constant for the first-order lag filter that
is applied to speed feed-forward inputs.
P.8-13
Pn112
Torque Feed-forward
Amount
Use this parameter to add the torque command

calculated from the speed control command that is
multiplied by this parameter's ratio to the torque
command from the speed control process.
P.8-13
Pn113
Torque Feed-forward
Command Filter
Set the time constant for the first-order lag filter that
is applied to torque feed-forward inputs.
P.8-13
Pn600
Analog Torque Feedforward Gain Setting
Set the input gain for analog torque feed forward.

0 to 9 will be disabled.
P.8-59
Pn610
Enable of several function
Set the bits related to inertia ratio switching.
P.8-59
P.8-13
Applied Functions
Pn110
Use this parameter to add the speed control

command calculated from the internal positioning
command that is multiplied by this parameter's ratio
to the speed command from the position control
process.
6-53
Operating Procedure
Speed Feed-forward Operating Method
1. Set the Speed Feed-forward Command Filter (Pn111).
Set it to 50 (0.5 ms) or so.
2. Adjust the Speed Feed-forward Amount (Pn110).

Gradually increase the value of Speed Feed-forward Amount (Pn110) and finely adjust it to
avoid overshooting during acceleration/deceleration.
If the speed feed-forward amount is set to 100%, the position error will be 0 during constant
speed operation. However, a large overshooting will occur during acceleration/deceleration.
The position error during an operation at a certain speed can be smaller based on the following
formula according to the speed feed-forward gain value.
Position error [command unit] = command speed [command unit/s] / position loop gain [1/s]
(100 - speed feed-forward amount [%]) / 100
Position error
Speed FF gain
Motor speed
Applied Functions
Command
speed
0 [%]
50 [%]
80 [%]
Time
The position error in the range of constant speed becomes smaller as the speed feed-forward
gain increases.
The operating noise may increase when the speed feed forward is enabled if the update cycle of
the position command input is longer than the amplifier control cycle, or if the pulse frequency is
not uniform. In such cases, apply the position command filter (first-order lag or FIR smoothing) or
raise the speed feed-forward filter setting.
6-54
Torque Feed-forward Operating Method

1. Set the Inertia Ratio (Pn004).
Set the inertia ratio as correctly as possible.
If the inertia ratio is calculated for the selected motor, input the calculated value.
If the inertia ratio is not known, perform autotuning and set the inertia ratio.
2. Set the Torque Feed-forward Command Filter (Pn112).

Set it to 50 (0.5 ms) or so.
3. Adjust the Torque Feed-forward Amount (Pn113).

Gradually increase the value of Torque Feed-forward Amount (Pn113).
Since the position error during acceleration/deceleration at a certain speed can be brought
close to 0, it can be brought almost to 0 throughout the entire operation range during a
trapezoidal speed pattern drive under ideal conditions where no disturbance torque is working.
In reality, disturbance torque is always present and, therefore, the position error cannot be
completely 0.
Motor speed
Speed feed-forward amount = fixed to 100 [%]
Position error
Command
speed
Torque
feed-forward amount
0 [%]
50 [%]
Time
Torque feed forward can reduce the position error in a range of acceleration/deceleration
specified.
When operating in position control, this function normally is used together with the velocity
feedforward.

If you raise the torque feed-forward filter time constant, the operation noise will become smaller.
However, the position error at the point of change in acceleration will become larger.
6-55
Applied Functions
100 [%]
Application Example of Analog Torque Feed Forward

The analog torque feed forward is enabled when bit 5 of the Setting of Each Function (Pn610)
is set to 1. In addition, if analog input 3 is used by another function (for example, analog torque
limit), this function is disabled.
It is converted to torque from the voltage [V] that is applied to analog input 3 based on the
Analog Torque Feed-forward Gain Setting (Pn600) and is added to the torque command [%].
The conversion from the input voltage [V] to analog input 3 to a torque command [%] to the
motor is performed as illustrated in the graph below.The slope of the graph is when Pn600 =
30.The slope changes based on the Pn600 set value.
Torque command [%] = 100 Input voltage [V] / (Pn600 set value 0.1)
Torque command [%]

333
200
10 6
10 Input voltage [V]
200
6
Applied Functions
333
6-56
6-17 Instantaneous Speed Observer Function

Estimating the motor speed using a load inertia increases responsiveness and reduces
vibration at stopping and improves the speed detection accuracy. This function can be used
for position control.
The instantaneous speed observer function can be used in the following situations.
When servo is ON
When realtime autotuning is disabled
Torque
command
Speed command
Speed control
Speed estimation
value
Current
control
Motor
current
Motor
Load
Instantaneous
speed observer
Load model
Motor
position
To position control
(Total inertia)
Encoder

Parameter
number
Parameter name
Explanation
Reference
Pn610
Setting of Several
Function
Set whether to enable or disable the instantaneous

observer function.
P.8-59
Pn004
Inertia Ratio
P.8-3
Pn100
Position Loop Gain
Set the position loop gain.
P.8-10
Pn101
Speed Loop Gain
Set the speed loop gain.
P.8-11
Pn103
Velocity detection
filter 1
To select the velocity detection filter 1 setting out of 6 preset

values.
P.8-11
Pn108
Velocity detection
filter 1
To select the velocity detection filter 2 setting out of 6 preset

values.
P.8-11
6-57
Applied Functions
Servo amplifier
Operating Procedure
1. Set the Inertia Ratio (Pn004).
Set the inertia ratio as correctly as possible.
If the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) is requested in a realtime auto gain tuning, use the set value.
If the inertia ratio is calculated for the selected motor, input the calculated value.
If the inertia ratio is not known, perform autotuning and set the inertia ratio.
2. Adjust the position loop gain and speed loop gain.

Adjust Position Loop Gain (Pn100), Speed Loop Gain (Pn101), Speed Loop Integral Time
Constant (Pn102) and Torque Command Filter Time Constant (Pn104).
If no problem occurs in realtime autotuning, you can continue to use the settings.

Set whether to enable or disable the instantaneous speed observer function in bit 0.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If you set this to 1 (enabled), the speed detection method will switch to instantaneous speed
observer.
If the machine operation noise or vibration, or a change in the torque monitor waveform is
significant enough to cause any problem, return the setting to 0 and make sure that the inertia ratio
or the adjustment parameters are correct.
If the machine operation noise or vibration, or a change in the torque monitor waveform is small,
make small adjustments to the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) to find the setting that makes the smallest
change while monitoring the position error waveform and the actual speed waveform.
If Position Loop Gain (Pn100), Speed Loop Gain (Pn101) or Speed Loop Integral Time Constant
(Pn102) is changed, the optimal value for the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) may have changed, so make
small adjustments on the value for the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) again to set a value that makes the
smallest change.
Applied Functions

It may not function properly or the effect may not be apparent under the following conditions.
If the margin of error with the actual device is large for the inertia load
If there are multiple resonance points
If there is a large resonance point at the frequency of 300 Hz or lower
If there is a non-linear element (play), such as a large backlash
If the load inertia changes
If a large disturbance torque with high-frequency elements is applied
If the setting range for positioning is small
6-58
Safety Function
This function stops the motor based on a signal from a Safety Controller or safety
sensor.
An outline of the function is explained together with operation and connection
example.
7-1 Safe Torque OFF (STO) Function................................7-2

I/O Signal Specifications ................................................................. 7-3
7-2 Operation Example .......................................................7-5

7-3 Connection Example ....................................................7-7
7-1 Safe Torque OFF (STO) Function

The safe torque OFF (hereinafter referred to as STO according to IEC61800-5-2) function is
used to cut off the motor current and stop the motor through the input signals from a safety
equipment, such as a Safety Controller or safety sensor, that is connected to the safety
connector (CN8).
When the STO function is operating, the driver turns OFF the servo ready completed output
(READY) to go into the safety status.
Safety Points
When using the STO function, be sure to execute a risk assessment of the equipment to confirm
that the system safety requirements are met.
There are following risks even when the STO function is operating. Be sure to take safety into
account as part of the risk assessment.
The motor runs if external force is present (e.g., force of gravity on the vertical axis, etc.). If
holding is required, implement appropriate measures, such as providing external brakes. Take
note that the brakes for the driver with brakes are used for the holding purpose only, and
cannot be used for control.
Even if there is no external force, when Stop Selection for Alarm Generation (Pn510) is set to
free-run (with the dynamic brake disabled), the motor operates as free-run and the stop
distance is long.
The motor may operate in the range of up to 180 degrees of electrical angle due to a power
transistor trouble and so forth.
The power supply to the motor is cut off by the STO function, but the power supply to the driver
will not be cut off nor electrically insulated. For driver maintenance, cut off the power supply to
the driver through another means.
The EDM output signal is not a safety output. Do not use it for purposes other than the failure
monitoring function.
The dynamic brake and external brake release signal output are not safety-related parts.Make
sure that the equipment does not become dangerous during system design even if the external
brake release fails during the STO status.
When using the STO function, connect an equipment that meets the safety standards.
The PFH value is 2.30 108.
Following certifications are fulfilled:
CAT-3 (EN 954-1)
Performance level d (EN/ISO 13849-1)
SIL 2 (IEC/EN 62061)
See the Appendix in chapter 12 for servo drive satefy certification
Safety Function
7-2
I/O Signal Specifications

Safety Input Signal
There are 2 types of safety input circuits to operate the STO function.
CONTROL mode
Signal name
Symbol
Safety input 1
Safety input 2
Pin
number
SF
CN8-4
SF
CN8-3
SF2
CN8-6
SF2
CN8-5
Description
The upper arm drive signal of the
power transistor inside the driver
is cut off.
The lower arm drive signal of the
power transistor inside the driver
is cut off.
Full
closing
When the safety input is either 1 or 2, the STO function will start operating within 5 ms of the input,
and the motor output torque will be turned OFF.
Connect the equipment so that the safety input circuit is turned OFF when you operate the STO
function.
Use Stop Selection for Alarm Generation (Pn510) to set the operation when the safety input is
turned OFF.
When you are connecting a safety equipment, such as a Safety Controller or a safety sensor, the
safety output signal of the equipment may include L pulse for self-diagnosis. To avoid malfunction
due to this L-pulse for self-diagnosis, a filter that can remove the L pulse for self-diagnosis is built in
with the safety input circuit. If the OFF time of the safety input signal is 1 ms or less, the safety input
circuit does not recognize it as OFF. To make sure that OFF is recognized, maintain the OFF status
of safety input signal for at least 5 ms.
For self-diagnosis
L pulse
5 ms or more
Safety input signal
Within 1 ms
Servo amplifier operation
Within 5 ms
Normal operation
STO status
7-3
Safety Function
L-pulse for self-diagnosis of safety equipment
External Device Monitor (EDM) Output Signal

This is a monitor output signal that is used to monitor the status of safety input signals using
an external device.
Connect a safety equipment, such as a Safety Controller or a safety sensor, to the external
device monitoring terminal.
CONTROL mode
Signal name
Symbol
Pin
number
EDM output
EDM
CN8-8
EDM
CN8-7
Description
Monitor signal is output to detect
malfunctioning of the safety
function.
* This output signal is not a safety
output.
Full
closing
Relationship Between Safety Input Signal and EDM Output Signal

When safety inputs 1 and 2 are both OFF (where the STO function is operating for safety inputs
for the 2 circuits), the EDM output circuit is turned ON.
You can detect a failure of the safety input circuit and the EDM output circuit by monitoring all
of the following 4 signal statuses using an external device.
7
Safety Function
Signal name
Symbol
Signal status
Safety input 1
SF1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Safety input 2
SF2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
EDM output
EDM
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
The maximum delay time is 6 ms after the safety input signal is input and until the EDM output
signal is output.
7-4
7-2 Operation Example

Operation Timings to a Safety Status
Operation command (RUN) Servo ON
Safety input 1
Safety input 2 *3
Servo OFF
STO status
Normal status
max 5 ms
Motor power is supplied.
Power supply
No power supply
max 6 ms
EDM output
ON
OFF
0.5 to 5 ms
Dynamic brake relay *2
DB released
DB engaged
Servo ready completed output (READY) READY
Alarm output (ALM)
Normal
Alarm
Pn438 set value
Brake interlock output (BKIR) Brake released

t1
Safety Function
Brake held
*1
Pn439
set value
When the Pn438

set value is early
Pn438
set value
Brake held
Brake released
t1*1
Pn439
set value
When the timing of reaching the

Pn439 set value or lower is early
*1. t1 is the set value of the Brake Timing during Operation (Pn438), or the time needed for the motor
rotation speed to drop to or below the Brake Release Speed Setting (Pn439), whichever occurs first.
*2. The dynamic brake is based on the Stop Selection for Alarm Generation (Pn510) setting.
*3. Safety inputs 1 and 2 transition to the STO status when either one of them is turned OFF.
7-5
Timings of Return from the Safety Status

Operation command
(RUN) *1
Safety input 1
Safety input 2
Servo OFF command
STO status
Servo ON
Normal status
No power supply
Motor power
is supplied.
max 6 ms
EDM output
ON
OFF
Dynamic
brake relay
DB released/engaged *2
Alarm generation status
Safety Function
Normal
Alarm
Brake interlock
output (BKIR)
Servo OFF
Reset
Alarm reset
input (RESET) *1
Alarm output
(ALM)
DB released/engaged *3
READY

output (READY)
Follow the normal

servo ON/OFF
operation timing
diagram upon input
of the operation
command (RUN).
For details, refer to
"6-6 Brake
Interlock."
Brake held
*1. Make sure that servo ON input is turned OFF when you return the input signals of safety inputs 1 and
2 to ON. Alarm clear must be performed because alarms will occur. Be sure to execute the alarm clear
when both safety inputs 1 and 2 are returned to the ON status. An alarm will occur immediately if the
alarm reset is executed when even one of these is still in the OFF status.
*2. Since this is a status where alarms will occur, the dynamic brake is based on the Stop Selection for
Alarm Generation (Pn510).
*3. Since this is a normal servo OFF status, the dynamic brake is based on the Stop Selection with Servo
OFF (Pn506) setting.
7-6
7-3 Connection Example
7-3 Connection Example

Connection with a Safety Controller (2 safety input and EDM output)
EDM input
Safety
Controller
Servo Drive connector(CN8)

T31 T33
SF1+
Safety input
SF1
G9SX-AD
PWR
FB
T1
T2
EI
ED
SF2+
ERR
SF2
A2
EDM+
S14
S24
EDM
EDM output
Safety output
(source)
0V
7
Safety Function
7-7
Parameters Details
This chapter explains the set value and contents of setting of each parameter.
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
Basic Parameters..........................................................8-2
Gain Parameters .........................................................8-10
Vibration Suppression Parameters...........................8-21
Analog Control Parameters .......................................8-26
Interface Monitor Setting Parameters.......................8-36
Extended Parameters .................................................8-46
Special Parameters.....................................................8-59
8-1 Basic Parameters

Pn000
Setting
range
Rotation Direction Switching

0 to 1
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Explanation of Set Values

Set
value
Explanation
Forward direction command sets the motor rotation direction to CW.
Forward direction command sets the motor rotation direction to CCW.
CW
CCW
Regarding the motor rotation direction, when seen from load-side axis, clockwise is referred to as
CW and counterclockwise as CCW.
Pn001
Setting
range
CONTROL mode Selection

0 to 6
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Parameters Details

Set
value
0
Explanation
Position control (pulse train command)
Speed control (analog command)
Torque control (analog command)
Mode 1: Position control, Mode 2: Speed control
Mode 1: Position control, Mode 2: Torque control
Mode 1: Speed control, Mode 2: Torque control
Full closing control
Set the CONTROL mode to be used.

If COMPOSITE modes are set (set values: 3 to 5), mode 1 or mode 2 can be selected using the
CONTROL mode switching input (TVSEL).
When the CONTROL mode switching input is open: Select mode 1.
When the CONTROL mode switching input is short-circuited: Select mode 2.
Do not input a command within 10 ms before or after switching.
CONTROL mode
switching input
Open
Close
Open
10 ms or more
8-2
10 ms or more
Pn002
REALTIME AUTOTUNING mode Selection
Setting
range
0 to 6
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
Disabled
This mode focuses on stability.
This mode focuses on positioning.
Used when unbalanced load is present as in vertical axes
Used when friction is large (unbalanced load also calculated).
Used in combination with the software tool. The drive calculates the correction and the user
decides whether to apply them or not.
Used when freely combining REALTIME AUTOTUNING mode and APPLICABLE FILTER
mode.
See Chapter 10 for details.

Pn003
Realtime Autotuning Machine Rigidity Setting
Setting
range
0 to 31
Unit
All
Default
setting
See
Note
below
Power OFF
and ON
Default settings:
(1) Pn003 = 11 - For 200V drives of 1Kw or upper and 400V drives
(2) Pn003 = 13 - For 200V drives of less than 1 Kw
Low Machine rigidity High

Pn003
Low Servo gain High

0.1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31
Low Responsiveness High
If the set value is changed suddenly by a large amount, the gain will change rapidly, subjecting
the machine to shock. Always start with the small setting, and gradually increase the setting while
monitoring machine operation.
Pn004
Inertia Ratio
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
All
Unit
Default
setting
250
Power OFF
and ON
Set the load inertia as a percentage of the motor rotor inertia.

Pn004 = (Load inertia / Rotor inertia) 100%
When realtime autotuning is enabled, the inertia ratio is continuously estimated and saved in
EEPROM every 30 minutes.
If the inertia ratio is set correctly, the setting unit for the Speed Loop Gain (Pn101) and Speed Loop
Gain 2 (Pn106) is Hz.
If the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) is set larger than the actual value, the setting for speed loop gain will
increase. If the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) is set smaller than the actual value, the setting for speed loop
gain will decrease.
8-3
Parameters Details
Set the machine rigidity to one of 32 levels when realtime autotuning is enabled.
Pn005
Command Pulse Input Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Position Full closing

Default
setting
Unit
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
Photocoupler input (+PULS: CN1 pin 3, -PULS: CN1 pin 4, +SIGN: CN1 pin 5, -SIGN: CN1
pin 6)
Input for line driver only (+CWLD: CN1 pin 44, -CWLD: CN1 pin 45, +CCWLD: CN1 pin 46,
-CCWLD: CN1 pin 47)
Selects whether to use photocoupler or input for line driver only for the command pulse input.
Pn006
Command Pulse Rotation Direction Switching Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
The motor rotates in the direction specified by the command

pulse.
The motor rotates in the opposite direction from the direction

specified by the command pulse.
Parameters Details
Set the motor rotation direction for the command pulse input.
Pn007
COMMAND PULSE mode Selection
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit
Default
setting
8-4
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Command
Pulse
Rotation
Direction
Switching
Selection
(Pn006)
COMMAND
PULSE
mode
Setting
(Pn007)
0 or 2
COMMAND
PULSE mode
90 phase
difference
(phases A and
B) signal
inputs
Motor forward
command
Phase
A
Motor reverse
command
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
Phase
B
Line driver: t1 2 s Open collector: t1 5 s

t2
t3
t2
Reverse pulse/
forward pulse
t2
t2
Line driver: t2 1 s Open collector: t2 2.5 s
t5
t5
t4
t4
Feed pulse/
direction signal
H
t6
t6
t6
t6

Phase
A
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
Parameters Details
0 or 2
90 phase
difference
(phases A and
B) signal
inputs
t1
t1
Phase
B
Line driver: t1 2 s Open collector: t1 5 s

t2
t2
Reverse pulse/
forward pulse
t3
t2
t2

t5
t5
t4
t4
Feed pulse/
direction signal
t6
t6
t6
t6
Set the form of the pulse inputs sent as command to the driver from a Position Controller.
Modes 0 and 2 are exactly the same.
8-5
Pn008
Electronic Gear Integer Setting
Setting
range
0 to 220
Unit

Default
setting
pulse
10000
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set the number of command pulses corresponding to 1 motor rotation.

If the set value is 0, Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1 (Pn009) and Electronic Gear Ratio
Denominator (Pn010) become valid.
Pn009
Position
Setting
range
0 to 230
Pn010
Electronic Gear Ratio Denominator
Setting
range
1 to 230
Unit
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Position
Default
setting
10000
Power OFF
and ON
Set the electronic gear function.

It is enabled when Pn008 is 0.
The electronic gear can be used for the following:
To set the amount of motor rotation or travel distance per input command pulse.
To increase the nominal command pulse frequency by using a multiplier when the desired
motor speed cannot be achieved due to the limited pulse generation capability of the host
device (possible maximum output frequency).
Electronic Gear Block Diagram:
Command
counts
f
Numerator 1 (Pn009)
*1 Numerator 2 (Pn500)
Internal
+
command
To error
counter
Parameters Details
Denominator (Pn010)
Feedback
counts
(resolution)
220 count/rev
or
217 count/rev
*1. Numerator 2 to 4 is selected using the electronic gear switching (GESEL1 and GESEL2).
GESEL1
GESEL2
Selected numerator
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
The electronic gear ratio is set using the following equations.

If Numerator = 0: Numerator is automatically set to encoder resolution, and the number of
command pulses per rotation can be set in Pn010.
Electronic gear ratio=
Encoder resolution
If Numerator 0:
8-6
Electronic gear ratio=
Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator (Pn009, Pn500, Pn501 and Pn502)

Pn011
Encoder Dividing Numerator
Setting
range
1 to 262,144
All
Unit
Default
setting
P/r
Power OFF
and ON
2500
Yes
If Encoder Dividing Denominator (Pn503) = 0, the encoder resolution becomes the pulse output dividing denominator.
Note that 1 pulse corresponds to 4 counts. Encoder resolution corresponds with counts.
Encoder pulse
Pn0114 (When the host side uses a 4 multiplier process)
Output pulse
Encoder resolution
Pn012
Encoder Output Direction Switching Selection
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Setting 2 & 3 are available only in full-closed control

Set value
Phase B logic
Output source
Nonreverse
Encoder
Motor forward command Motor reverse command
Phase A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase B
8
1
Encoder
Nonreverse
External scale
Reverse
External scale
Pn013
No. 1 Torque Limit
Setting
range
0 to 500
Phase A
Phase B
Phase B
Phase A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase B
Phase A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase B
Parameters Details
Reverse
Phase A
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
500
Set the No. 1 limit value for the output torque of the motor.
Pn014
Error Counter Overflow Level
Setting
range
0 to 227
Unit

Command unit
Default
setting
100000
Power OFF
and ON
Set the range of the error counter overflow level.
8-7
Pn015
Operation Switching when Using Absolute Encoder
Setting
range
0 to 2
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
Use as absolute encoder.
Use as incremental encoder.
Use as absolute encoder but ignore multi-rotation counter overflow.
Set the operating method for the 17-bit absolute encoder.

Pn016
Regeneration Resistor Selection
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit
All
Default
setting
See
Note
below0
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Default settings:
(1) Pn016 = 0 - For 200V drives of 750 W or upper and 400V drives
(2) Pn016 = 3 - For 200V drives of less than 750 W

Set
value
Parameters Details
Explanation
Regeneration Resistor used: Built-in Resistor

The regeneration processing circuit will operate and the regeneration overload (alarm display
No. 18) will be enabled according to the Built-in Resistor (with approx. 1% duty).
Regeneration Resistor used: External Resistor

The regeneration processing circuit will operate, and regeneration overload (alarm display
No. 18) will cause a trip when the operating rate of the Regeneration Resistor exceeds 10%.
Regeneration Resistor used: External Resistor

The regeneration processing circuit will operate, but regeneration overload (alarm display
No. 18) will not occur.
Regeneration Resistor used: None

The regeneration processing circuit and regeneration overload (alarm display No. 18) will not
operate, and all regenerative energy will be processed by the built-in capacitor.
Do not touch the External Regeneration Resistor. A burn injury may result.
Always provide a temperature fuse or other protective measure when using an External
Regeneration Resistor. Regardless of whether the regeneration overload is enabled or disabled,
the Regeneration Resistor can generate heat and may cause burning.
Set this parameter depending on whether the Built-in Regeneration Resistor is used, or the Builtin Regeneration Resistor is disconnected and an External Regeneration Resistor is connected.
(The External Regeneration Resistor connection terminal is connected.)
To use the Built-in Regeneration Resistor, always set this parameter to 0.
Pn017
External Regeneration Resistor Setting
Setting
range
0 to 4
Unit
All
Default
setting
8-8
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set
value
Explanation
Regeneration load ratio is 100% when operating rate of the External Regeneration Resistor
is 10%.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
8
Parameters Details
8-9
8-2 Gain Parameters
8-2 Gain Parameters

Pn100
Position Loop Gain
Setting
range
0 to 30,000

Unit
Default
setting
0.1/s
See
Note
below
Power OFF
and ON
Default settings:
Adjust the position loop response to suit the machine rigidity.
The responsiveness of the servo system is determined by the position loop gain. Servo systems
with a high position loop gain have a high responsiveness and fast positioning. To increase the
position loop gain, you must improve machine rigidity and increase the specific vibration
frequency. This should be 500 to 700 (0.1/s) for ordinary machine tools, 300 to 500 (0.1/s) for
general-use and assembly machines, and 100 to 300 (0.1/s) for industrial robots. The default
position loop gain is 400 (0.1/s), so be sure to lower the set value for machines with low machine
rigidity.
Increasing the position loop gain in systems with low machine rigidity or systems with low specific
vibration frequencies may cause machine resonance, resulting in an overload alarm.
If the position loop gain is low, you can shorten the positioning time using feed forward.
This parameter is automatically changed by executing realtime autotuning function. To set it
manually, set the REALTIME AUTOTUNING mode Selection (Pn002) to 0.
Position loop gain is generally expressed as follows:
Position loop gain (Kp) =
Command pulse frequency (pulse/s)

Error counter accumulated pulse (pulse)
(0.1/s)
Response when the position loop gain is operated
Parameters Details
Position loop gain is high.

Motor speed
Position loop gain is low.
Time
If the speed loop gain and position loop gain are optimally set, the motor operation for the
command will be delayed 2/Kp at acceleration and delayed 3/Kp at deceleration.
Motor speed Position

command
2
Kp
Motor operation
Time
3
Kp
8-10
8-2 Gain Parameters
Pn101
Speed Loop Gain
Setting
range
1 to 32,767
All
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
See
Note
below
Power OFF
and ON
Default settings:
Determine speed loop responsiveness.
The setting for the speed loop gain must be increased to increase the position loop gain and
improve the responsiveness of the entire servo system. Setting too high, however, may result in
vibration.
The setting unit for Pn101 will be Hz if the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) is set correctly.
When the speed loop gain is changed, the response is as shown in the following diagram.
Overshooting occurs if the speed loop gain is high.
(Vibration occurs if the gain is too high.)
Motor speed
Speed loop gain is low.
Time
8
Speed Loop Integral Time Constant
Setting
range
1 to 10,000
Unit
All
0.1 ms
Default
setting
See
Note
below
Power OFF
and ON
Default settings:
Set the speed loop integration time constant.
The smaller the set value, the faster the error will come close to 0 when stopping. Set to 9,999 to
maintain integration. Set to 10,000 to invalidate the effect of integration.
When the speed loop integral time constant is changed, the response is as shown in the
following diagram.
Overshooting occurs if the speed loop integral
Motor speed
time constant is small.
Speed loop integral

time constant is large.
Time
8-11
Parameters Details
Pn102
8-2 Gain Parameters
Pn103
Speed Feedback Filter Time Constant
Setting
range
0 to 5
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the time constant for the low pass filter (LPF) after speed detection to one of 6 levels (0 to 5).
Increasing the set value increases the time constant and decreases the noise generated by the
motor. Responsiveness, however, also decreases.
Normally, use the default set value.
Pn104
Torque Command Filter Time Constant
Setting
range
0 to 2,500
Unit
0.01 ms
All
Default
setting
See
Note
below
Power OFF
and ON
Default settings:
Set the time constant for the first-order lag filter inserted into the torque command.
This parameter may be effective in suppressing vibration due to torsion resonance.
Pn105
Position Loop Gain 2
Setting
range
1 to 30,000

Unit
0.1/s
Default
setting
See
Note
below
Power OFF
and ON
Default settings:
Parameters Details
Set the responsiveness of the position control system for the second position loop.
Pn106
Speed Loop Gain 2
Setting
range
1 to 32,767
All
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
See
Note
below
Power OFF
and ON
Default settings:
Set the responsiveness of the second speed loop.
Pn107
Speed Loop Integration Time Constant 2
Setting
range
1 to 10,000
Unit
0.1 ms
All
Default
setting
10000
Power OFF
and ON
Set the second speed loop integration time constant.

Pn108
Speed Feedback Filter Time Constant 2
Setting
range
0 to 5
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the second speed feedback filter.

Pn109
Torque Command Filter Time Constant 2
Setting
range
0 to 2,500
Unit
0.01 ms
All
Default
setting
See
Note
below
Default settings:
8-12
Power OFF
and ON
8-2 Gain Parameters
Set the second torque filter time constant.
The parameters from Pn105 to Pn109 are the gain and time constants to be selected when the
GAIN SWITCHING INPUT OPERATING mode Selection (Pn114) is enabled.
The gains are switched according to the condition set in the GAIN SWITCHING mode (Pn115, Pn120 and Pn124).
If the mechanical system inertia changes greatly or if you want to change the responsiveness depending on
whether the motor is rotating or being stopped, you can achieve the appropriate control by setting the gains
and time constants beforehand for each of these conditions, and switching them according to the condition.
This parameter is automatically changed by executing realtime autotuning function. To set it
manually, set the REALTIME AUTOTUNING mode Selection (Pn002) to 0.
Pn110
Speed Feed-forward Amount
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Unit

Default
setting
0.1%
300
Power OFF
and ON
Set the feed-forward amount. Increasing the set value decreases the position error and increases
the responsiveness. Overshooting, however, will occur more easily.
Pn111
Speed Feed-forward Command Filter
Setting
range
0 to 6,400
Unit

Default
setting
0.01 ms
50
Power OFF
and ON
Set the time constant for the first-order lag filter inserted into the feed forward.
Setting the filter may improve operation if speed overshooting occurs or the noise during operation
is large when the feed forward is set high.
Pn112
Torque Feed-forward Amount
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Unit
Position Speed Full closing

Default
setting
0.1%
Power OFF
and ON
Pn113
Torque Feed-forward Command Filter
Setting
range
0 to 6,400
Unit

Default
setting
0.01 ms
Power OFF
and ON
Set the time constant for the first-order lag filter inserted into the feed forward.
Setting the filter may improve operation if the noise during operation is large when the feedforward
is set high.
Pn114
GAIN SWITCHING INPUT OPERATING mode Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
Gain 1 (PI/P switching enabled)
Gain 1/gain 2 switching available
Select either PI/P operation switching or gain 1/gain 2 switching.

PI/P operation switching is performed using gain switching (GSEL: CN1 pin 27). PI is not changed,
however, if the Torque Limit Selection (Pn521) is set to 3.
8-13
Parameters Details
Set the feed-forward amount to the torque loop. Increasing the set value decreases the position
error during acceleration and increases the responsiveness but the system may become more
noisy.
8-2 Gain Parameters
Gain input
Speed loop operation
GSEL OFF
PI operation
GSEL ON
P operation
For information on switching conditions between gain 1 and gain 2, refer to "6-7 Gain Switching
Function" (P.6-25).
If autotunning is enabled, feedforward gain and filter are set at a fixed value.
Pn115
SWITCHING mode in Position Control
Setting
range
0 to 10
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Explanation of Settings
Explanation
Set
value
Parameters Details
Gain switching conditions
Gain Switching
Delay Time in
Position
Control
(Pn116) *1
Gain Switching
Level in Position
Control (Pn117)
Gain Switching
1 Hysteresis in
Position
Control
(Pn118) *2
Always Gain 1 (Pn100 to Pn104)
Switching using gain switching

input (GSEL) for CN1 pin 27
Torque command change amount

(Refer to Figure A)
*3
(0.05%)
*3
(0.05%)
Command speed (Refer to Figure

B)
(r/min)
(r/min)
Amount of position error (Refer to

Figure C)
*4 (pulse)
*4 (pulse)
Command pulses received (Refer

to Figure D)
Positioning completion signal (INP)

OFF (Refer to Figure E)
Actual motor speed (Refer to

Figure B)
(r/min)
(r/min)
10
Combination of command pulse
input and speed (Refer to Figure F)
*5 (r/min)
*5 (r/min)
Select the conditions for switching between gain 1 and gain 2 when the GAIN SWITCHING INPUT
OPERATING mode Selection (Pn114) is set to 1.
The gain is always gain 1 regardless of the gain input if the Gain Switch input is not assigned to
any input if this setting is 2.
*1. The Gain Switching Delay Time in Position Control (Pn116) is enabled when returning from gain 2 to
gain 1.
8-14
8-2 Gain Parameters
*2. The Gain Switching Hysteresis in Position Control (Pn118) is defined as shown in the following figure.
Pn117
Pn118
0
Gain 2
Gain 1
Gain 1
Pn116
*3. The change amount is the value within ms.

[Example] When the condition is a 10% change in torque in 1 ms, the set value is 200.
*4. This is the encoder resolution.
*5. The meanings of the gain switching delay time in position control, gain switching level in position
control, and gain switching hysteresis in position control are different from normal if this is set to 10.
(Refer to Figure F)
Figure A
Figure C
Speed V
Speed V
Accumulated pulse error
H
L
Level
Torque T
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
T
H
L
Level
L
H
Figure D
Command
speed S
Time
1
Gain 1
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
H
L
Level
Parameters Details
Figure B
Speed V
Figure E
Actual
speed N
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
INP
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
Figure F
Command speed S
Actual speed N
H
L
Level
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
Gain 2 only for the speed loop integral time constant

Gain 1 for all others
8-15
8-2 Gain Parameters
Pn116
Gain Switching Delay Time in Position Control
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Unit
0.1 ms

Default
setting
50
Power OFF
and ON
Set the delay time when returning from gain 2 to gain 1 if the SWITCHING mode in Position Control
(Pn115) is set to 3 or 5 to 10.
Pn117
Gain Switching Level in Position Control
Setting
range
0 to 20,000

Default
setting
Unit
50
Power OFF
and ON
This is enabled when the SWITCHING mode in Position Control (Pn115) is set to 3, 5, 6, 9 or 10.
It sets the judgment level for switching between gain 1 and gain 2. The unit depends on the
SWITCHING mode in Position Control (Pn115).
Pn118
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Position Control
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Default
setting
Unit

33
Power OFF
and ON
Set the hysteresis width above and below the judgment level set in the Gain Switching Level in
Position Control (Pn117). The unit depends on the setting of the SWITCHING mode in Position
Control (Pn115).
The following shows the definitions for the Gain Switching Delay Time in Position Control (Pn116),
Gain Switching Level in Position Control (Pn117), and Gain Switching Hysteresis in Position
Control (Pn118).
Pn117
Pn118
Parameters Details
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
Pn116
The settings for the Gain Switching Level in Position Control (Pn117) and the Gain Switching
Hysteresis in Position Control (Pn118) are enabled as absolute values (positive/negative).
Pn119
Position Gain Switching Time
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Unit
0.1 ms
Default
setting
33
Power OFF
and ON
When switching between gain 1 and gain 2 is enabled, set the rate of change for position loop gain
when gain switching is ececuted.
(Example)
Kp1 (Pn100)
Pn119= 0
0.1 ms 0.1
0.1
0.1
Kp1 (Pn100)>Kp2 (Pn105)

0 Thick solid line
1
2
3 Thin solid line
3
2
1
Kp2 (Pn105)
Gain 1
Gain 2
Pn120
SWITCHING mode in Speed Control
Setting
range
0 to 5
8-16
Unit
Gain 1
Speed
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
8-2 Gain Parameters
Explanation
Set
value
Gain
Switching
Delay Time in
Speed Control
(Pn121) *1
Gain
Switching
Level in Speed
Control
(Pn122)
Gain Switching
Hysteresis in
Speed Control
(Pn123) *2
Switching using gain switching input

(GSEL) for CN1 pin 27

(Refer to Figure A)
*3
(0.05%)
*3
(0.05%)
Speed command change amount

(Refer to Figure B)
*4
(10 r/min/s)
*4
(10 r/min/s)
Speed command (Refer to Figure C)
(r/min)
(r/min)
Select the conditions for switching between gain 1 and gain 2 when the GAIN SWITCHING INPUT
OPERATING mode Selection (Pn114) is set to 1.
The gain is always gain 1 regardless of the gain input if the SWITCHING input is not assigned when
Pn120 = 2.
*1. The Gain Switching Delay Time in Speed Control (Pn121) is enabled when returning from gain 2 to
gain 1.
*2. The Gain Switching Hysteresis in Speed Control (Pn123) is defined as shown in the following figure.
Pn122
Pn123
0
Gain 2
Gain 1
Pn121
*3. The change amount is the value within 1 ms.

*4. The meanings of the Gain Switching Delay Time in Speed Control (Pn121), Gain Switching Level in
Speed Control (Pn122), and Gain Switching Hysteresis in Speed Control (Pn123) are different from
normal if this is set to 10. (Refer to Figure D)
8-17
Parameters Details
Gain 1
8-2 Gain Parameters
Figure A
Figure B
Speed V
H
L
Level
Speed V
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
Torque T
Figure C
Speed V
T
H
L
Level
Accumulated pulse
L
H
H
L
Level
Time
1
Gain 1
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
Figure D
Command speed S
Actual speed N
H
L
Level
Time
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
Parameters Details
Gain 2 only for the speed loop integral time constant

Gain 1 for all others
Pn121
Gain Switching Delay Time in Speed Control
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Unit
0.1 ms
Speed
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the delay time when returning from gain 2 to gain 1 if the SWITCHING mode in Speed Control
(Pn120) is set to 3 to 5.
Pn122
Gain Switching Level in Speed Control
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Unit
Speed
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
In SPEED CONTROL mode, this is enabled when the SWITCHING mode in Speed Control
(Pn120) is set to 3 to 5. Set the judgment level for switching between gain 1 and gain 2. The unit
depends on the SWITCHING mode in Speed Control (Pn120).
Pn123
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Speed Control
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Unit
Speed
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the hysteresis width above and below the judgment level set in the Gain Switching Level in Speed
Control (Pn122). The unit depends on the setting of the SWITCHING mode in Speed Control (Pn120).
The following shows the definitions for the Gain Switching Delay Time in Speed Control (Pn121), Gain
Switching Level in Speed Control (Pn122), and Gain Switching Hysteresis in Speed Control (Pn123).
8-18
8-2 Gain Parameters
Pn122
Pn123
0
Gain 2
Gain 1
Gain 1
Pn121
The settings for the Gain Switching Level in Speed Control (Pn122) and the Gain Switching
Hysteresis in Speed Control (Pn123) are enabled absolute values (positive/negative).
Pn124
SWITCHING mode in Torque Control
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit
Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Explanation
Set
value
Gain
Gain
Switching
Switching
Delay Time in
Level in
Torque Control Torque Control
(Pn125) *1
(Pn126)
Gain Switching
Hysteresis in
Torque Control
(Pn127) *2

(GSEL) for CN1 pin 27

(Refer to Figure A)
*3
(0.05%)
*3
(0.05%)
*1. The Gain Switching Delay Time in Torque Control (Pn125) is enabled when returning from gain 2 to
gain 1.
*2. The Gain Switching Hysteresis in Torque Control (Pn127) is defined as shown in the following figure.
Pn126
Pn127
0
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
Pn125
*3. The change amount is the value within 1 ms.

8-19
Parameters Details
Select the switching condition between gain 1 and gain 2 when the Gain 2 Setting (Pn114) is set
to 1.
The gain is always gain 1 regardless of the gain input if the switching input is not assigned when
Pn124=2.
8-2 Gain Parameters
Figure A
Speed V
Torque T
T
H
L
Level
L
H
Time
1
Gain 1
Pn125
Gain Switching Delay Time in Torque Control
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Unit
0.1 ms
Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the delay time when returning from gain 2 to gain 1 if the SWITCHING mode in Torque Control
(Pn124) is set to 3.
Parameters Details
Pn126
Gain Switching Level in Torque Control
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Unit
Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
This is enabled when the SWITCHING mode in Torque Control (Pn124) is set to 3. It sets the
judgment level for switching between gain 1 and gain 2. The unit depends on the setting of
SWITCHING mode in Torque Control (Pn124).
Pn127
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Torque Control
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Unit
Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the hysteresis width above and below the judgment level set in the Gain Switching Level in
Torque Control (Pn126). The unit depends on the setting of SWITCHING mode in Torque Control
(Pn124).
The following shows the definitions for the Gain Switching Delay Time in Torque Control (Pn125),
Gain Switching Level in Torque Control (Pn126), and Gain Switching Hysteresis in Torque Control
(Pn127).
Pn126
Pn127
0
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 1
Pn125
The settings for the Gain Switching Level in Torque Control (Pn126) and the Gain Switching
Hysteresis in Torque Control (Pn127) are enabled as absolute values (positive/negative).
8-20
8-3 Vibration Suppression Parameters

Pn200
Setting
range
Adaptive Filter Selection

0 to 4
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
Disabled. The current values are held for the parameters related to notch filters 3 and 4.
1 enabled.The parameter related to notch filter 3 is updated based on the applicable result.
2 enabled.The parameters related to notch filters 3 and 4 are updated based on the applicable result.
The resonance frequency is measured.The measurement result can be checked using CXDrive.The current values are held for the parameters related to notch filters 3 and 4.
Adaptive result is cleared.Parameters related to notch filters 3 and 4 are disabled and the adaptive result is cleared.
Set the operation of the adaptive filter.

The adaptive filter is normally disabled in the TORQUE CONTROL mode.
Pn201
Notch 1 Frequency Setting
Setting
range
50 to 5,000
All
Unit
Hz
Default
setting
5000
Power OFF
and ON
Set the frequency of resonance suppression notch filter 1.

The notch filter function will be disabled if this parameter is set to 5,000.
Pn202
Notch 1 Width Setting
Setting
range
0 to 20
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn203
Notch 1 Depth Setting
Setting
range
0 to 99
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the notch depth of resonance suppression notch filter 1.

Increasing the setting will shorten the notch depth and the phase lag.
Pn204
Setting
range
50 to 5,000
All
Unit
Hz
Default
setting
5000
Power OFF
and ON
Set the notch frequency of resonance suppression notch filter 2.

Pn205
Setting
range
0 to 20
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Select the notch width of resonance suppression notch filter 2.

Increasing the setting widens the notch width. Normally, use the default set value.
8-21
Parameters Details
Set the width of resonance suppression notch filter 1 to one of 20 levels.

Pn206
Setting
range
0 to 99
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Pn207
Setting
range
50 to 5,000
All
Unit
Hz
Default
setting
5000
Power OFF
and ON

Pn208
Setting
range
0 to 20
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Pn209
Setting
range
0 to 99
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Parameters Details
Pn210
Setting
range
50 to 5,000
All
Unit
Hz
Default
setting
5000
Power OFF
and ON

Pn211
Setting
range
0 to 20
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Pn212
Setting
range
0 to 99
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Pn213
Setting
range
8-22
Position
Vibration Filter Selection

0 to 3
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
With external input (DFSEL1), either 1 and 3 or 2 and 4 can be selected.

Open: Vibration filters 1 and 3 enabled
Shorted: Vibration filters 2 and 4 enabled
With external input (DFSEL1 and DFSEL2), one of the filters 1 to 4 can be selected.
When DFSEL1 and DFSEL2 are both open: Vibration filter 1 enabled
When DFSEL1 is shorted and DFSEL2 is open: Vibration filter 2 enabled
When DFSEL1 is open and DFSEL2 is shorted: Vibration filter 3 enabled
When DFSEL1 and DFSEL2 are both shorted: Vibration filter 4 enabled
It is switched with position command direction.

Forward direction: Vibration filters 1 and 3 enabled
Reverse direction: Vibration filters 2 and 4 enabled
Pn214
Vibration Frequency 1
Setting
range
0 to 2,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set vibration frequency 1 to suppress vibration at the end of the load in anti-vibration control.
Measure the frequency of vibration at the end of the load and make the setting in units of 0.1 Hz.
Setting frequency is 1.0 to 200.0 Hz. The function will be disabled if the setting is 0 to 0.9 Hz.
Refer to "6-1 Anti-vibration Control" (P.6-3) for more information on settings.
Pn215
Vibration Filter 1 Setting
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn216
Setting
range
0 to 2,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set vibration frequency 2 to suppress vibration at the end of the load in damping control.
Pn217
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
First set the Vibration Frequency 2 (Pn216). Then reduce the setting if torque saturation occurs or
increase the setting to increase operation speed. Normally, use a setting of 0.
Set value is restricted in the following manner.
Upper limit: Corresponding vibration frequency
Lower limit: Vibration frequency + vibration filter setting 100
8-23
Parameters Details
Pn218
Setting
range
0 to 2,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn219
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn220
Setting
range
0 to 2,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Parameters Details
Pn221
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Position
Unit
0.1 Hz
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn222
Position Command Filter Time Constant
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Unit
0.1 ms

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
The position command filter time constant is the first-order lag filter inserted after the electronic
gear ratio for the command pulse input.
The position command filter time constant can be used for the following:
If the command pulses change abruptly, the filter can be used to reduce the stepping
movement of the motor.
The following are examples of when the command pulses can change abruptly:
The electronic gear ratio setting is high (10 times or higher).
The command pulse frequency is low.
8-24
Position command after

the smoothing filter process
Input position command
Speed
Target speed Vc
Vc0.632*1
Vc0.368*1
Time
tf
tf
tf = (Pn2220.1 ms)
Filter switching
dwell time *2
*1 The actual process is subject to calculation error.

*2 If accumulated pulses remain within the filter after the filter set value has
been changed, etc., the motor may operate at a speed higher than the
command speed immediately after switching the filter.
Pn223
Smoothing Filter Time Constant
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Unit

Default
setting
0.1 ms
Power OFF
and ON
Set the FIR filter time constant used for command pulse input. (FIR: Finite impulse response)
The higher the set value, the smoother the command pulses.
Input position command
Position command after the FIR filter process
Parameters Details
Speed
tf
tf
tf = (Pn2230.1 ms)
8-25
8-4 Analog Control Parameters

Pn300
Setting
range
Speed
Command Speed Selection

0 to 3
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
Analog speed command
No. 1 Internally Set Speed to No. 4 Internally Set Speed (Pn304 to Pn307)
No. 1 Internally Set Speed to No. 3 Internally Set Speed (Pn304 to Pn306), analog speed command
No. 1 Internally Set Speed to No. 8 Internally Set Speed (Pn304 to Pn311)
Select the speed command when using speed control. The driver has internally set speed function
that can be used to easily achieve speed control by using contact inputs.
For details on internally set speed function, refer to "5-4 Internally Set Speed Control" (P.5-19).
Pn301
Speed Command Direction Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
Speed
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
Method for designating the direction for the speed command: By analogue command polarity
Method for designating the direction for the speed command: By digital input VSIGN
Parameters Details
Set to reverse the polarity of the speed command input (REF: CN1 pin 14). This is used to change
the motor rotation direction without changing the polarity of host device command signals.
The default setting for this parameter is 0. By rotating to the reverse direction with the +command
keeps the compatibility with all Accurax W-Series Servo Drives.
The operation of the Servomotor may be abnormal if the polarity of the speed command signal from the Position
Control Unit does not agree with the setting of this parameter when the Servo Drive system is comprised of the
combination of the Servo Drive set to the SPEED CONTROL mode and an external Position Control Unit.
Command
Speed
Selection
(Pn300)
Speed
Command
Direction
Selection
(Pn301)
Analog Speed
Command
Rotation
Direction
Switching
(Pn303)
Analog speed
command (REF)
0
0
1
Not
affected
8-26
Speed
command
sign
selection
(VSIGN)
Motor
rotation
direction
Not affected
Forward
direction
Not affected
Reverse
direction
Not affected
Reverse
direction
Not affected
Forward
direction
OFF
Forward
direction
ON
Reverse
direction
Conversion
graph
Refer to
Figure A
Refer to
Figure B
Refer to
Figure C
Speed command
10
Figure A
Speed command
10
10
Input voltage
Speed command
10
VSIGN
10
Input voltage
Speed command
10
10
Input voltage
OFF
Figure B
Figure C
10
Input voltage
VSIGN
ON
8
Speed Command Scale
Setting
range
0 to 2,000
Speed Torque
Unit
Default
setting
(r/min)/V
500
Power OFF
and ON
Set the relation between the voltage applied to the speed command input (REF: CN1 pin 14) and the motor speed.
For details on speed control, refer to "5-2 Speed Control" (P.5-8).
Pn303
Analog Speed Command Rotation Direction Switching
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
Speed
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
Rotation direction is changed by analog speed command (REF) voltage.

+Voltage: Forward direction
-Voltage: Reverse direction
Rotation direction is changed by analog speed command voltage.

+Voltage: Reverse direction
-Voltage: Forward direction
Pn304
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
8-27
Parameters Details
Pn302
Pn305
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Pn306
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Pn307
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
This is also the speed limit in torque control. The Torque Command/Speed Limit Selection (Pn317)
can be used to switch to an external analog limit.
Parameters Details
Pn308
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Pn309
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Pn310
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Pn311
Setting
range
20,000 to 20,000
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Speed
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
If internal speed settings are enabled in the Command Speed Selection (Pn300), set the No. 1 to
4 internally set speed in Pn304 to Pn307 and the No. 5 to 8 internally set speed in Pn308 to Pn311.
Set the speed in r/min.
The polarity of the set values indicates the polarity of the internally set speed.
+
The forward direction as

viewed from the shaft end
The reverse direction as

viewed from the shaft end
The absolute value of the parameter setting is limited by the Overspeed Level Setting (Pn513).
Pn312
Soft Start Acceleration Time
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
8-28
Speed
Unit
ms/(1,000 r/min)
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn313
Soft Start Deceleration Time
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Speed
Unit
ms/(1,000 r/min)
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Control the speed by setting acceleration/deceleration to the speed command inside the driver.
A soft start can be set when inputting speed commands of stepping movement or when using
internal speed setting.
Do not set acceleration/deceleration time settings when using the driver in combination with an
external position loop. (Set both Pn312 and Pn313 to 0.)
Internally set
speed
1,000 r/min
Speed
Acceleration Time
Pn314
Setting
range
Deceleration time
Speed
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting

0 to 1,000
Unit
Default
setting
ms
Power OFF
and ON
Set the pseudo-S-curve acceleration/deceleration value to add to the speed command to enable
smooth operation. This is useful for applications where impact may occur due to a large change
in acceleration or deceleration when starting or stopping with linear acceleration or deceleration.
Speed
1. Basic linear acceleration time and

deceleration time are set by Pn312
and Pn313, respectively.
2. The S-curve time is set by Pn314
(unit: 2 ms) based on the time width
around the point of inflection during
linear acceleration and deceleration.
ts
ta
ts
ts
td
ta: Pn312
td: Pn313
ts: Pn314
Pn315
Zero Speed Designation Selection
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit
ta
td
> ts, and
> ts
2
2
as settings.
Use
Speed Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
Zero speed designation function is disabled.
Speed command becomes 0 upon zero speed designation input. (Refer to Figure A)
Speed command becomes 0 upon zero speed designation input, and servo locks with
position control when actual speed reaches below Zero Speed Designation Level (Pn316).
(Refer to Figure B)
Servo locks with position control upon zero speed designation input and when speed
command reaches below Zero Destination Level (Pn316). (Refer to Figure C)
8-29
Parameters Details
ts
Figure A
Speed command
Speed Command Acceleration/
Deceleration Setting
(Pn312, Pn313, Pn314)
ON
OFF
Position control
ON
Speed control
Position control
When the zero speed designation input is turned ON, the speed command is forcibly set to 0.
Set the acceleration/deceleration setting of the speed command using Soft Start Acceleration Time
(Pn312), Soft Start Deceleration Time (Pn313) or S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting (Pn314).
Actual motor speed
Figure B
Pn316
Speed command
Speed Command Acceleration/
Deceleration Setting
(Pn312, Pn313, Pn314)
ON
OFF
Position control
ON
Speed control
Position control
Parameters Details
When the zero speed designation input is tuned ON, the speed command is forcibly set to 0. When
the actual motor speed is less than the Position Lock Level Setting (Pn316), the operation switches
to position control and servo locks. In addition, when the zero speed designation input is turned
OFF, the operation switches to speed control.
Since the position command for position control is forced to be 0, properly set the position loop
gain, various error detection functions and other settings.
Use this parameter when the CONTROL mode Selection (Pn001) is set to 1 (speed control).
This may not operate correctly if the CONTROL mode Setting (Pn001) is set to 3 (position or speed
control) or 4 (position or torque control).
Figure C
Pn316
Speed command
ON
Position control
Speed control
Position control
When the zero speed designation input is turned ON and the speed command is less than the
Position Lock Level Setting (Pn316), the operation switches to position control and servo locks.
When the zero speed designation input is turned ON, the speed command will never be 0. You
need to change the speed command.
Since the operation is executed as a normal position control during position control, properly set
the position loop gain, various error detection functions and other settings.
Use this parameter when the CONTROL mode Selection (Pn001) is set to 1 (speed control).
8-30
This may not operate correctly if the CONTROL mode Setting (Pn001) is set to 3 (position or speed
control) or 4 (position or torque control).
Pn316
Position Lock Level Setting
Setting
range
10 to 20,000
Speed Torque
Unit
Default
setting
r/min
30
Power OFF
and ON
Servo locks with position control when the speed of the motor is lower than the setting of this
parameter.
The setting of this parameter is valid for both forward and reverse direction regardless of the motor
rotation direction.
Forward operation
Speed
(Pn316)r/min
(Pn316)r/min
Reverse operation
Speed
control
Speed
control
Servo lock
Pn317
Torque Command/Speed Limit Selection
Setting
range
0 to 2
Unit
Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Torque command
Speed limit
Analog input 1 (TREF1)
Pn321
Pn321, Pn322
It depends on the CONTROL mode.

When the CONTROL mode is set to speed control/torque control, the torque command input is set
to analog input 2.
Pn318
Torque Command Direction Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
Method for designating the direction for the torque command: By analogue torque command polarity
Method for designating the direction for the torque command: By digital input TSIGN
The default setting for this parameter is 0. By rotating to the reverse direction with the +command
keeps the compatibility with all Accurax W-Series Servo Drives.
8-31
Parameters Details
Set
value
Torque
Command
/Speed
Limit
Selection
(Pn317)
Torque
Command
Direction
Selection
(Pn318)
Analog
Torque
Command
Rotation
Direction
Switching
(Pn320)
Torque
command
sign
selection
(TSIGN)
Analog torque
command (TREF)
Not affected
Motor
rotation
direction
Forward
direction
0
Reverse
Not affected
direction
Conversion
graph
Refer to
Figure A
0
Not affected
Reverse
direction
Forward
Not affected
direction
Forward
direction
OFF
Not
affected
Reverse
direction
ON
Torque command
Figure A
Torque command
Refer to
Figure B
Refer to
Figure C
Figure B
8
10
10
Parameters Details
10
Input voltage
Torque command
10
10
Input voltage
Torque command
10
Input voltage
10
10
Input voltage
TSIGN OFF
Pn319
Setting
range
TSIGN ON
Torque

10 to 100
Figure C
Unit
0.1 V/100%
Default
setting
30
Power OFF
and ON
Set the relation between the voltage applied to the speed limit input (VLIM: CN1 pin 14) and the
8-32
motor speed.
Refer to "5-3 Torque Control" (P.5-14) for more information on torque command scale.
Pn320
Analog Torque Command Rotation Direction Switching
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
Torque
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
Direction of motor torque: The +command indicates the forward direction as viewed from the shaft end.
Direction of motor torque: The +command indicates the reverse direction as viewed from the shaft end.
Reverse the polarity of the torque command input (REF/TREF1: CN1 pin 14 or PCL/TREF2: CN1
pin 16).
Pn321
Speed Limit Value Setting
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Pn322
Reverse Direction Speed Limit Value Setting
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Torque
Unit
Unit
Default
setting
r/min
Power OFF
and ON
Torque
Default
setting
r/min
Power OFF
and ON
Corresponding speed limit values during torque control is shown in the table below.
Speed
Limit
Value
Setting
(Pn321)
Reverse
Direction
Speed Limit
Value Setting
(Pn322)
0 to 20,000 Not affected
Zero Speed
Designation
Selection
(Pn315)
Zero speed
clamp
Not affected
1 to 3
OFF
Not affected
Not affected
0 to 20,000 1 to 20,000
1 to 3
OFF
0 to 20,000 1 to 20,000
1 to 3
ON
Setting
range
0 to 2
Unit
Pn321 set value

0
External Feedback Pulse Type Selection
Speed limit
value
Pn321 set value
ON
0 to 20,000 0 to 20,000
Pn323
Analog torque
command
direction
Forward direction Pn321 set value

Reverse direction
Pn322 set value
Forward direction Pn321 set value

Reverse direction
Pn322 set value
Not affected
Full closing
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
8-33
Parameters Details
Torque
Command/
Speed Limit
Selection
(Pn327)

Set value
Explanation
1
Phase-AB output type *
Serial communications type (Incremental encoder specifications)
Serial communications type (Absolute encoder specifications)
*1. The driver internal process count direction relative to the external scale of phase-AB output type is
explained below.
Count-down direction
t1
Count-up direction
t1
EXA
EXA
EXB
EXB
t2
EXB is 90 behind EXA.

t1 > 0.25 s
t2 > 1.0 s
EXB is 90 ahead of EXA.

t1 > 0.25 s
t2 > 1.0 s
For the external scale connection direction, set the direction so that count-up occurs when the motor
shaft is rotating in the CCW direction, and count-down occurs when the motor shaft is rotating in the
CW direction If the connection direction cannot be selected due to installation conditions, etc., the count
direction can be reversed using External Feedback Pulse Direction Switching (Pn326).
Take note that if Pn000 = 1, the scale count direction becomes opposite to the count direction used
for monitoring the total external scale feedback pulses, etc.
If Pn000 = 0, the count direction matches the count direction for monitoring.
Even when the driver speed is within the specified range, an acceleration error will occur if the
motor shaft rotation speed exceeds the maximum speed.
8
Parameters Details
t2
Pn324
External Feedback Pulse Dividing Numerator
Setting
range
0 to 220
Pn325
External Feedback Pulse Dividing Denominator
Setting
range
1 to 220
Unit
Unit
Full closing
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Full closing
Default
setting
10000
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Check the number of encoder pulses per motor rotation and number of external scale pulses per
motor rotation, and set External Feedback Pulse Dividing Numerator (Pn324) and External
Feedback Pulse Dividing Denominator (Pn325).
Pn324
Pn325
Encoder resolution per motor rotation [pulse]

External scale resolution per motor rotation [pulse]
If this ratio is incorrect, the deviation between the position calculated from encoder pulses and
position calculated from external scale pulses will increase. Particularly when the moving distance
is long, an excessive deviation error will occur.
Set Pn324 to 0 to have encoder resolution automatically set as numerator.
Pn326
External Feedback Pulse Direction Switching
Setting
range
0 to 1
8-34
Unit
Full closing
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
External scale feedback pulse count direction non-reverse
External scale feedback pulse count direction reverse
Pn327
External Feedback Pulse Phase-Z Setting
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
Full closing
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
Phase-Z disconnection detection enabled
Phase-Z disconnection detection disabled
Pn328
Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Overflow Level
Setting
range
1 to 227
Unit
Command unit
Default
setting
Full closing
16000
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set the allowable difference (feedback pulse error) between the motor (encoder) position and load
(external scale) position in command units.
Pn329
Setting
range
Full closing
Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Reset

0 to 100
Unit
Default
setting
Rotation
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Occurrence of excessive
feedback pulse
deviation error
Excessive
feedback pulse
error setting
Feedback pulse error reset setting
Motor rotation
speed [rotation]
When using feedback pulse error reset, make sure the feedback pulse error reset setting is set to
a proper value. In the case of an extremely small value, it may not function as a protection against
error operations caused by erroneous connection of external scale.
Take sufficient care to ensure safety.
8-35
Parameters Details
The feedback pulse error is reset every time the motor rotates for the amount set by the Internal/
External Feedback Pulse Error Counter Reset (Pn329). This can be used for purposes where
feedback pulse error accumulates due to slippage.
Feedback pulse
error value [command unit]
(absolute value)
8-5 Interface Monitor Setting Parameters

Pn400
Setting range 0 to 00FFFFFFh

Pn401
8
Parameters Details
Unit
Default setting 394758
Power OFF and ON Yes
Unit
All
All
Unit
Unit
All
All
Unit
Unit
All
All
Unit
Unit
All
All
Unit
Not used
Unit
Default setting -
Power OFF and ON
All
Unit
Refer to "6-10 Sequence I/O Signal" (P.6-37)for more information on settings.
8-36
All
Setting range
Pn413
All
Pn412
All

Pn411
Default setting 9539850 Power OFF and ON Yes

Pn410

Pn409
Unit

Pn408

Pn407

Pn406
Unit

Pn405
All

Pn404

Pn403

Pn402
All
Unit
Pn416
Analog Monitor 1 Selection
Setting range 0 to 21
All
Unit
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 0

Explanation
Set
value
Monitor type
Output gain when

Pn417 = 0
Unit
Motor speed
r/min
500
Position command speed * 3
r/min
500
Internal position command speed * 3 r/min
500
r/min
500
Torque command
33
Command position error * 4
pulse (command unit)
3,000
Encoder position error * 4
pulse (encoder unit)
3,000
Full closing error * 4
pulse (external scale unit)
3,000
Hybrid Error
pulse (command unit)
3,000
P-N voltage
80
10
Regeneration load ratio
33
11
Overload load ratio
33
12
Forward direction torque limit
33
13
Reverse direction torque limit
33
14
Speed limit value
r/min
500
15
Inertia ratio
500
16
Analog input 1 * 2
17
Analog input 2 * 2
18
Analog input 3 * 2
19
Reserved
20
Driver temperature
10
21
Encoder 1-rotation data * 1
pulse (encoder unit)
110,000
8
Parameters Details
*1. Forward and reverse directions of monitor data are the direction set in Pn000. However, CCW will be
the forward direction for the absolute encoder 1-rotation data. A normal value is output from the
incremental encoder after the first phase Z is input.
*2. Analog inputs 1 to 3 will output terminal voltage even when terminal is not used.
*3. Corresponding to command pulse input, command pulse speed is before command filter (position
command filter time constant and smoothing filter time constant), and internal command speed is after
command filter.
*4. The position command error is an error from the command pulse input, while the encoder position
error or full closing position error is the error at the input of the position loop.
8-37
Command pulse speed

[r/min]
Command
dividing multiplier
process
Command
pulse input
Internal command speed

[r/min]
+
Command
filter
Position control
Encoder feedback
/external scale feedback
*4. Position error and feedback pulse error come in 2 types, encoder unit/external scale unit and
command unit. Encoder unit/external scale unit will be an error of position control input section and
command unit will be an error of command pulse input.
Encoder position error (encoder unit)

/feedback pulse error (external scale unit)
Command
pulse input
Command
filter
Position control
Encoder feedback
/external scale feedback
Command dividing
multiplier reverse
conversion
Position command error (command unit)

/command feedback pulse error (command unit)
8
Parameters Details
Command
dividing
multiplier
Pn417
Analog Monitor 1 Scale Setting
Setting
range
0 to 214,748,364
Unit
All
Pn416 monitor unit/V
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set output gain for analog monitor 1.

Pn418
Analog Monitor 2 Selection
Setting
range
0 to 21
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Select the type of analog monitor 2.

The set value for this parameter is same as Analog Monitor 1 Type (Pn416).
Pn419
Analog Monitor 2 Scale Setting
Setting
range
0 to 214,748,364
Unit
All
Pn418 monitor unit/V
Default
setting
Set output gain for analog monitor 2.
8-38
Power OFF
and ON
Pn421
Setting
range
Analog Monitor Output Selection

0 to 2
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Select the analog monitor output voltage direction.

Set
value
Output range
Data output
Output voltage [V]

10 V
0
-10 to 10 V
0V
5,000
Motor
speed
5,000 [r/min]
10 V
Output voltage [V]
10 V
Motor
speed
0 to 10 V
5,000 0 V
5,000 [r/min]
10 V
Output voltage [V]

10 V
Motor
speed
0V
0 2,500 [r/min]
2,500
0 to 10 V
10 V
When monitor type is motor speed and gain of conversion is 500 (1 V = 500 r/min)
Pn422
Setting
range

5,578 to 5,578
All
Unit
0.359 mV
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Adjust the offset of the speed command input (REF: CN1 pin 14).
The offset amount is approx. the set value times 0.359 mV.
There are 2 ways to adjust the offset.
Manual adjustment
Automatic adjustment
The manual adjustment is as follows:
To adjust the offset for individual drivers, accurately input 0 V to the speed command input/torque command input
(REF/TREF1) (or connect to the signal ground), and then set this parameter so that the motor does not rotate.
If you use a position loop in the host device, set this parameter so that there are no
accumulated pulses at servo lock stop status.
The automatic adjustment is as follows:
This parameter will be automatically set when automatic offset adjustment is executed. Refer to
"Analog Input Automatic Offset Adjustment" (P.9-27) for the automatic offset adjustment method.
8-39
Parameters Details
5V
2
Pn423
Analog Input 1 Filter Time Constant
Setting
range
0 to 6,400
Unit
All
0.01 ms
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the first-order lag filter time constant in the speed command input (REF: CN1 pin 14).
Pn424
Excessive Analog Input 1
Setting
range
0 to 100
All
Unit
0.1 V
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the overflow level for speed command input (REF: CN1 pin 14) or torque command input
(TREF1: CN1 pin 14) using voltage after offset compensation.
Excessive analog input (alarm display No. 39) will be disabled if this parameter is set to 0.
Pn425
Setting
range

342 to 342
All
Unit
5.86 mV
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
The offset amount is approx. the set value times 5.86 mV.
Manual adjustment
To adjust the offset for individual drivers, accurately input 0 V to the speed command input/
torque command input (REF/TREF1) (or connect to the signal ground), and then set this
parameter so that the motor does not rotate.
Parameters Details

Pn426
Setting
range
0 to 6,400
Unit
All
0.01 ms
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn427
Setting
range
0 to 100
All
Unit
0.1 V
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
8-40
Pn428
Setting
range

342 to 342
All
Unit
5.86 mV
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
The offset amount is approx. the set value times 5 mV.
Manual adjustment
To adjust the offset for individual drivers, accurately input 0 V to the speed command input/
torque command input (REF/TREF1) (or connect to the signal ground), and then set this
parameter so that the motor does not rotate.
Pn429
Setting
range
0 to 6,400
Unit
All
0.01 ms
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Pn430
Setting
range
0 to 100
All
Unit
Default
setting
0.1 V
Power OFF
and ON
Pn431
Setting
range
0 to 262,144
Unit

Command unit
Default
setting
10
Power OFF
and ON
Use this in combination with the Positioning Completion Condition Selection (Pn432) to set the timing
to output the positioning completion output. The positioning completion output (INP) will output when
the Servomotor (workpiece) movement stops and the number of the accumulated pulses in the error
counter is within the set value of this parameter, after command pulse input is completed.
Unit for setting is command unit, but it can be changed to encoder unit with Position Setting Unit
Selection (Pn520). However, note that unit for error counter overflow level will be changed as well.
If this parameter is set to a very small value, the time required for the INP signal to be output will
increase and the chattering may occur during output. The setting of the positioning completion
range does not affect the precision of the final positioning.
Accumulated
pulse
Pn431
INP
ON
Pn431
8-41
Parameters Details
Pn432
Positioning Completion Condition Selection
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
Positioning completion output turns ON when the position error is within the Positioning
Completion Range 1 (Pn431).
Completion Range 1 (Pn431) and there is no position command.
Positioning completion output turns ON when the zero speed detection signal is ON, the
position error is within the Positioning Completion Range 1 (Pn431), and there is no position
command.
Completion Range 1 (Pn431) and there is no position command. The ON status will then be
held until the Positioning Completion Hold Time (Pn433) elapses. After that, an ON/OFF
decision will be made based on the position error at the time.
Use this in combination with the Positioning Completion Range 1 (Pn431) to set the operation for
positioning completion output (INP: CN1 pin 39).
Pn433
Positioning Completion Hold Time
Setting
range
0 to 30,000
Parameters Details
Unit

1 ms
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
When Positioning Completion Hold Time (Pn433) is set to 0, hold time becomes infinite and ON
status is held until the next position command comes in.
Pn434
Zero Speed Detection
Setting
range
10 to 20,000
All
Unit
r/min
Default
setting
50
Power OFF
and ON
General-purpose output timing is set by rotation speed r/min.

General-purpose output 1 (ZSP) will be turned ON when the speed of the motor is lower than the
setting of this parameter.
The setting of this parameter is valid for both forward and reverse direction regardless of the motor
rotation direction. This setting has a hysteresis of 10 r/min.
Forward operation
Speed
(Pn434+10)r/min
(Pn43410)r/min
Reverse operation
OUTM1
8-42
ON
Pn435
Speed Conformity Detection Width
Setting
range
10 to 20,000
Unit
Speed
Default
setting
r/min
50
Power OFF
and ON
When speed command and motor speed are identical, speed conformity output signal is output.
Speed command
Pn435
Speed Conformity Detection Range
A speed command after the acceleration

/deceleration processing
Speed [r/min]
Pn435
Speed Conformity
Detection Range
Motor speed
Time
Pn435
Speed Conformity Detection Range
Speed conformity
output
ON
OFF
ON
Pn436
Rotation Speed for Motor Rotation Detection
Setting
range
10 to 20,000
Unit
OFF
Speed
Default
setting
r/min
1000
Power OFF
and ON
Speed reached output signal is output when the motor speed reaches the speed set as the
achieved speed.
Parameters Details
Speed [r/min]
Motor speed
Pn436+10
Pn43610
Time
(Pn43610)
(Pn436+10)
Speed reached
OFF
output
ON
OFF
ON
8-43
Pn437
Setting
range
Brake Timing when Stopped

0 to 10,000
All
Unit
Default
setting
1 ms
Power OFF
and ON
Set the time required for the Servomotor to be de-energized (servo free) after the brake interlock
output (BKIR: CN1pin 10) turns ON (i.e., brake held), when servo OFF status is entered while the
Servomotor is stopped.
When the Servomotor is stopped and the operation command (RUN) is turned OFF, the brake
interlock signal (BKIR) will turn ON, and the servo will turn OFF after waiting for the setting time
(set value ms).
Brake interlock
(BKIR)
Released
Actual brake
Released
Motor power
is supplied.
Held
tb
Power
supply
Held
No power
supply
Pn437
Make the setting as follows to prevent the machine (workpiece) from moving or falling due to the
delay time in the brake operation (tb).
Brake timing when stopped (set value 1 ms) tb
Parameters Details
For details, refer to "6-6 Brake Interlock" (P.6-20).

Pn438
Brake Timing during Operation
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
Unit
All
Default
setting
1 ms
Power OFF
and ON
Set the required time for the brake interlock output (BKIR: CN1 pin 10) to turn OFF after the
operation command (RUN: CN1 pin 29) is detected to be OFF, when servo OFF status is entered
while the Servomotor is operating. While the motor is operating and the operation command
(RUN) is turned OFF, the motor will decelerate to reduce rotation speed, and the brake interlock
signal (BKIR) will turn ON after the setting time (set value 1 ms) has elapsed.
Brake interlock
(BKIR)
Motor power
is supplied.
Released
Held
TB
Power
supply
No power
supply
Motor speed
30 r/min
TB in the above figure is the brake timing during operation (set value 1 ms) or the time until the
motor rotation speed falls to 30 r/min or lower, whichever is shorter.
8-44
Pn439
Brake Release Speed Setting
Setting
range
30 to 3,000
Unit
All
Default
setting
r/min
30
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Pn438 set value
Engaged (OFF)
Released (ON)
t1*1
Pn439 set value
When the motor

takes longer than
Pn438 ms to reach
Pn439 rpm
Pn438 set value
Released (ON)
Engaged (OFF)
*1
t1
Pn439 set value
Pn440
Warning Output Selection 1
Setting
range
0 to 10
When the motor takes

less than Pn438 ms to
reach Pn439 rpm
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
No
Overload warning
Excessive regeneration warning
Battery warning
Fan warning
Encoder communications warning
Encoder overheating warning
External scale error warning
10
External scale communications error warning
8
Parameters Details
Do not set it to a value other than a number 0 to 5, and 8 to 10.

Refer to "11-2 Warning List" (P.11-5) for more information on settings.
Pn441
Warning Output Selection 2
Setting
range
0 to 7
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
The set values for this parameter are same as Warning Output Selection 1 (Pn440).
Pn442
Setting
range
0 to 262,144
Unit

Command unit
Default
setting
10
Power OFF
and ON
Set the positioning completion range.

The set values for this parameter are same as Positioning Completion Range 1 (Pn431).
8-45
8-6 Extended Parameters

Pn500
Setting
range
0 to 230
Pn501
Setting
range
0 to 230
Pn502
Setting
range
0 to 230
Pn503
Encoder Dividing Denominator
Setting
range
0 to 262,144
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Position
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Position
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Position
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
If encoder dividing denominator 0, division is performed at the rate according to the formula
below.
Encoder FB pulse
Pn011
Output pulse
Therefore, the formula will be as follows when the host side counts pulses through processing with
quadruple multiplier.
Number of pulse output resolution per rotation =

Encoder resolution
P
Parameters Details
Pn503
The pulse output resolution per rotation will never exceed the encoder resolution. (If the above
settings are used, the pulse output resolution per rotation will be equal to the encoder resolution.)
1 phase-Z signal is output for each rotation of the motor.
If the pulse output resolution per rotation from the above equation is a multiple of 4, phases Z and
A are output in synchronization. In all other cases, the output width of phase Z will be output as
the encoder resolution, resulting to be narrower than phase A. Accordingly, phases A and Z will
not be synchronized.
The output source is the encoder and
The output source is the encoder and
the pulse dividing ratio is a multiple of 4. the pulse dividing ratio is not a multiple of 4.
A
Z
Synchronous
8-46
Asynchronous
Pn504
Drive Prohibition Input Selection
Setting
range
0 to 2
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set value
Explanation
Forward drive prohibition input and reverse drive prohibition input disabled.
Install limit switches at both ends of the axis to prohibit the motor from traveling in the direction specified by the
switch. This can be used to prevent the workpiece from traveling too far and thus prevent damage to the machine.
Operation will be as follows if 0 is set.
Forward drive prohibition input (POT: CN1 pin 9) and COM connected: Normal status when
the forward limit switch does not operate
Forward drive prohibition input (POT: CN1 pin 9) and COM open: Forward direction prohibited
and reverse direction permitted
Reverse drive prohibition input (NOT: CN1 pin 8) and COM connected: Normal status when
the reverse limit switch does not operate
Reverse drive prohibition input (NOT: CN1 pin 8) and COM open: Reverse direction prohibited
and forward direction permitted.
Pn505
Stop Selection for Drive Prohibition Input
Setting
range
0 to 2
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set value
Explanation
During deceleration: Dynamic brake operation

After stop: Torque command is 0 for drive prohibition direction
Error counter: Held
During deceleration: Torque command is 0 for drive prohibition direction

Error counter: Held
During deceleration: Immediate stop

Error counter: Clear before and after deceleration
Set the drive conditions during deceleration or after stopping after the drive prohibition input (POT:
CN1 pin 9 or NOT: CN1 pin 8) is enabled.
If this is set to 2, the Immediate Stop Torque (Pn511) will be used to torque limit during
deceleration.
8-47
8
Parameters Details
If this is set to 0, the Servomotor will decelerate and stop according to the sequence set in the Stop Selection for Drive
Prohibition Input (Pn505) For details, refer to explanation for Stop Selection for Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505).
If this parameter is set to 0 and the forward and reverse prohibition inputs are both open, an error
will be detected in the driver, and a drive prohibition input error (alarm display No. 38) will occur.
If this parameter is set to 2, a drive prohibition input error (alarm display No. 38) will occur when
the connection between either the forward or reverse prohibition input and COM is open.
If a limit switch above the workpiece is turned OFF when using a vertical axis, the upward torque
will be eliminated, and there may be repeated vertical movement of the workpiece. If this occurs,
set the Stop Selection for Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505) to 2 or perform limit using the Host
Controller rather than using this function.
Pn506
Stop Selection with Servo OFF
Setting
range
0 to 9
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
During deceleration * 3
After stopping
Error counter
Dynamic brake operation
Clear * 4
Free-run
Clear * 4
Servo unlocked
Clear * 4
Free-run
Servo unlocked
Clear * 4
Hold * 2
Free-run
Hold * 2
Servo unlocked
Hold * 2
Free-run
Servo unlocked
Hold * 2
Immediate stop * 1
Clear * 4
Immediate stop * 1
Servo unlocked
Clear * 4
If an error occurs when servo is turned OFF, the operation will be based on the Stop Selection for
Alarm Generation (Pn510). Additionally, if the main power supply is turned OFF when servo is
OFF, it will be based on the Stop Selection with Main Power Supply OFF (Pn507).
*1. Immediate stop refers to applying control while servo is still ON and stopping the operation
immediately.
At that time, the torque command value is restricted by the Immediate Stop Torque (Pn511).
*2. If the position command is given or the motor runs continuously when servo is turned OFF, the
position error accumulates and Err24.0, "error counter overflow," may occur. In addition, if servo is
turned ON when the position error or external scale error is a large value, the motor may operate
abruptly to perform a control operation to bring the error to 0. Take sufficient care when using while
holding the position error or external scale error.
*3. Decelerating refers to a period between when the motor is running and when the motor speed reaches
30 r/min or less. Once the motor reaches a speed of 30 r/min or less and moves to the after stop
status, follow the subsequent operation based on the after stop status regardless of the motor speed.
*4. The position error or external scale error will always be cleared to 0.
Parameters Details
8-48
Pn507
Stop Selection with Main Power Supply OFF
Setting
range
0 to 9
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Explanation
Set
value
During deceleration *
After stopping
Error counter
Clear * 4
Free-run
Clear * 4
Servo unlocked
Clear * 4
Free-run
Servo unlocked
Clear * 4
Hold * 2
Free-run
Hold * 2
Servo unlocked
Hold * 2
Free-run
Servo unlocked
Hold * 2
Immediate stop * 1
Clear * 4
Servo unlocked
Clear * 4
Immediate stop *
If an error occurs when the main power supply is turned OFF, the operation will be based on the Stop
Selection for Alarm Generation (Pn510). If the main power supply is turned OFF when Servo is ON,
and if the Undervoltage Alarm Selection (Pn508) is set to 1, Err13.1, "main power supply undervoltage
(AC cut-off detection)," will occur. Follow the Stop Selection for Alarm Generation (Pn510).
*1. Immediate stop refers to applying control while servo is still ON and stopping the operation immediately.
At that time, the torque command value is restricted by the Immediate Stop Torque (Pn511).
*2. If the position command is given or the motor runs continuously when the main power supply is turned OFF, the
position error accumulates and Err24.0, "error counter overflow," may occur. In addition, if servo is turned ON when
the position error or external scale error is a large value, the motor may operate abruptly to perform a control operation
to bring the error to 0. Take sufficient care when using while holding the position error or external scale error.
Pn508
Undervoltage Alarm Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
Turn the servo OFF based on the setting of the Stop Selection with Main Power Supply OFF
(Pn507) and turn it back to servo ON by turning ON the main power supply.
Err13.1 "main power supply undervoltage" will occur and a trip will be caused.
Pn509
Momentary Hold Time
Setting
range
70 to 2,000
All
Unit
1 ms
Default
setting
70
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set main power supply alarm detection time.

The main power supply OFF detection will be disabled if this is set to 2,000.
8-49
Parameters Details
*4. The position error or external scale error will always be cleared to 0.
Pn510
Stop Selection for Alarm Generation
Setting
range
0 to 7
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
During deceleration * 3
After stopping
Error counter
Clear * 1
Free-run
Clear * 1
Servo unlocked
Clear * 1
Free-run
Servo unlocked
Clear * 1
Operation A: Immediate stop * 2

Operation B: Dynamic brake
operation
Clear * 1

Operation B: Free-run
Clear * 1

Operation B: Dynamic brake
operation
Servo unlocked
Clear * 1

Operation B: Free-run
Servo unlocked
Clear * 1
Set the operation to be performed after stopping or during deceleration when any protective
function of the driver operates and an error occurs.
8
Parameters Details
*1. The error counter is cleared when an alarm is reset.

*2. Operations A and B indicate whether immediate stop takes place upon error generation. If an
immediate stop alarm is generated, immediate stop in operation A is executed.
If an alarm that does not support immediate stop is generated, immediate stop in operation B will take
place.
8-50
Immediate Stop Operation when an Alarm that Supports Immediate Stop is Generated
Speed
[r/mn]
Motor speed
Speed command
Stop
judgment
speed
(30 r/min)
Time
Alarm
No alarm generation
Torque limit
Normal torque limit
An alarm that supports

immediate stop is generated.
Normal torque limit
Pn511 immediate Stop Torque
(Measure to lessen the impact at an immediate stop)
Overspeed protection
threshold
For normal operation
For normal operation

Pn615 Overspeed Detection Level Setting at Immediate Stop
(Protection from runaway at an immediate stop)
Set the Overspeed Detection Level Setting
at Immediate Stop (Pn615) to the Overspeed
Detection Level Setting (Pn513) or higher.
Normal operation (command from the host)
Immediate stop
undefined
Immediate stop time
Alarm status (Operation after the stop:

Dynamic brake/free-run)
Set the allowable overspeed level to Pn615, "Overspeed Detection Level Setting at Immediate
Stop," as a protective measure against runaway at an immediate stop. Err26.1, "overspeed 2," if
it occurs, will cause an immediate error trip because it is an error that does not support immediate
stop. However, if the setting is below Pn513, "Overspeed Detection Level Setting," an immediate
stop will not take place because Err26.1, "overspeed 2," will occur before Err26.0, "overspeed."
In addition, if Err26.0 and Err26.1 are detected at the same time, Err26.0 will be displayed.
However, an immediate stop will not take place because Err26.1 has also occurred internally.
Pn511
Immediate Stop Torque
Setting
range
0 to 500
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the torque limit for the following cases.

Drive prohibition deceleration with the Stop Selection for Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505) set to 2.
Deceleration with the Stop Selection with Main Power Supply OFF (Pn507) set to 8 or 9.
Deceleration with the Stop Selection with Servo OFF (Pn506) set to 8 or 9.
The normal torque limit will be used if this parameter is set to 0.
Pn512
Overload Detection Level Setting
Setting
range
0 to 500
Unit
All
%
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the overload detection level.
8-51
Parameters Details
If the actual speed is not 30 r/min or less after the time set by the Alarm Generation Allowable Time Setting
(Pn614) elapses, an immediate alarm status will occur. In addition, if an alarm that does not support
immediate stop occurs inside the driver at immediate stop, an immediate alarm status will occur.

If this setting is 0, the level is set to 115% of nominal torque
Internally ther is a limit of 115%, so higher values are limited to 115%
Pn513
Overspeed Detection Level Setting
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
All
Unit
Default
setting
r/min
Power OFF
and ON
Set the overspeed detection level.

The overspeed detection level setting will be 1.2 times the maximum motor rotation speed if this
parameter is set to 0.
This parameter should normally be set to 0. The setting should be changed only when it is
necessary to reduce the overspeed detection level.
The set value of this parameter is limited to 1.2 times the maximum motor rotation speed.
The detection margin of error for the set value is 3 r/min for 17 bit absolute encoder and 36 r/
min for a 20 bit incremental encoder
Pn514
Overrun Limit Setting
Setting
range
0 to 1,000

Unit
Default
setting
0.1 rotation
10
Power OFF
and ON
Set the allowable operating range for the position command input range.
If the set value is exceeded, motor operation range setting protection is generated.
When position command is not input
Load
Motor
Pn514 Pn514
Parameters Details
Motor allowable
Error generation range operating range Error generation range
When position command is input
Load
Motor
Pn514
Error generation range
Position command
input range
Pn514
Motor allowable operating range
Pn515
Control Input Signal Read Setting
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit
Error generation range
All
Default
setting

Set
value
8-52
Explanation
0.166ms
0.333ms
1 ms
1.666 ms
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Select the signal read cycle for control signal (digital input).
Pn516
Setting
range
Alarm Reset Condition Selection

0 to 1
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
120 ms
Follow the Control Input Signal Read Setting (Pn515).
Select the signal confirmation time for alarm reset input signal (RESET).
Pn517
Error Counter Reset Condition Selection
Setting
range
0 to 4
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
Disabled
Clears the error counter at level when the signal is shorted for 500 s or longer.
Clears the error counter at level when the signal is shorted for 1 ms or longer.
Clears the error counter at edge when the signal changes from open to shorted for 100 s or longer.
Clears the error counter at edge when the signal changes from open to shorted for 1 ms or longer.
When set to 1 or 2, the minimum time width will be as follows.
Error counter
reset input signal
Parameters Details
Set value 1: 500 s or more

Set value 2: 1 ms or more
Error reset keeps repeating.
When set to 3 or 4, the minimum time width will be as follows.

Error counter
reset input signal
Set value 3: 100 s or more
Set value 4: 1 ms or more
Error is reset once.
Pn518
Command Pulse Prohibition Input Setting
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set value
Explanation
Enabled
Disabled
Enable or disable the pulse prohibition input signal (IPG).

8-53
When command pulse prohibition input is enabled, command pulse input count process is force stopped.
Pn519
Command Pulse Prohibition Input Read Setting
Setting
range
0 to 3
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Set
value
Explanation
0.166 ms
0.333 ms
1 ms
1.666 ms
0.166 ms (No judgment of multiple matches)
Select the signal read cycle for the pulse prohibition input signal (IPG).
The signal status is updated when the signal status in each signal read cycle that has been set
matches multiple times.
You can lower the possibility of incorrect operation caused by noise by extending the signal read
cycle. However, the responsiveness to signal inputs will be reduced.
Pn520
Position Setting Unit Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Parameters Details
Set
value
Explanation
Command unit
Encoder unit
Select the setting unit of Positioning Completion Range 1 and 2 (Pn431 and Pn442), and Error
Counter Overflow Level (Pn014).
8-54
Pn521
Torque Limit Selection
Setting
range
0 to 6

Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON

Torque
Limit
Selection
(Pn521)
Torque
limit
switching
input
(TLSEL)
Torque Limit
Switching
Setting (Pn523
and 524)
Forward
direction
analog limit
input (PCL)
Reverse
direction
analog
torque limit
input (NCL)
0 to 10 V
-10 to 0 V
Forward
direction
torque
limit
PCL
Pn013
Pn013
OFF
Enabled
Pn013
ON
Enabled
Pn522
Reverse
direction
torque
limit
NCL
Pn522
3
4
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
PCL
NCL
0 to 10 V
Not affected
PCL
NCL
OFF
Pn013
Pn522
ON
Pn525
Pn526
Set the torque limit method for forward and reverse direction.
If this parameter is set to 1, the forward and reverse torque limit input will be limited by the No. 1
Torque Limit (Pn013).
When using torque control, the No. 1 Torque Limit (Pn013) will be the limit value for forward and
reverse operation regardless of the setting of this parameter.
No. 2 Torque Limit
Setting
range
0 to 500

Unit
Default
setting
500
Power OFF
and ON
Set the limit value for the output torque (Pn013: No. 1 Torque Limit, Pn522: No. 2 Torque Limit) of
the motor.
Refer to information on the Torque Limit Selection (Pn521) to select the torque limits.
During torque control, maximum torques for both forward and reverse directions are limited.
Settings in Torque Limit Selection (Pn521) and No. 2 Torque Limit (Pn522) will be ignored.
Make the settings as a percentage of the rated torque. [Example] Maximum torque is limited to 150%
Torque [%] Forward
300 (maximum)
When Pn013 or Pn522 = 150 200
100 (rated)
Speed
100
(rated) (maximum)
200
300
Reverse
Refer to "5-3 Torque Control" (P.5-14) for more information on torque limits and the torque limit selection.
8-55
Parameters Details
Pn522
Pn523
Torque Limit Switching Setting 1
Setting
range
0 to 4,000
Unit

Default
setting
ms/100%
Power OFF
and ON
Set the rate of change from torque limit 1 to torque limit 2

When set to 0, switching takes place immediately.
Torque Limit
undefined
(TLSEL)
No.1
Torque Limit
(Pn013)
Torque Limit
Switching Setting 1 (Pn523)
No.2
Torque Limit
(Pn522)
Torque Limit
Switching Setting 2 (Pn524)
Pn524
Torque Limit Switching Setting 2
Setting
range
0 to 4,000
Unit

Default
setting
ms/100%
Power OFF
and ON
Set values for this parameter are same as those for Torque Limit Switching Setting 1 (Pn523).
Set the rate of change from torque limit 2 to torque limit 1
Parameters Details
8
Pn525
Forward External Torque Limit
Setting
range
0 to 500
Unit

Default
setting
500
Power OFF
and ON
Set the forward external torque limit upon torque limit switching input when Pn521=6.
Pn526
Reverse External Torque Limit
Setting
range
0 to 500
Unit

Default
setting
500
Power OFF
and ON
Set the reverse external torque limit upon torque limit switching input when Pn521=6.
Pn527
Analog Torque Limit Scale
Setting
range
10 to 100

Unit
Default
setting
0.1 V/100%
30
Power OFF
and ON
Set the gain for the analogue torque limit input.

Pn528
Default Display
Setting
range
0 to 35
All
Unit
Default
setting

Set value
8-56
Explanation
Motor speed
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set value
Explanation
Torque command
Total encoder pulses
Total command pulses
Total external scale feedback pulses
CONTROL mode
10
I/O signal status
11
Analog input value
12
Error factor, history
13
Warning number
14
Regeneration resistance load ratio
15
Overload load ratio
16
Inertia ratio
17
Reason for no rotation
18
Display of the number of I/O signal changes
20
Absolute encoder data
21
Absolute external scale position
22
Monitor for the number of encoder communications errors
23
Display of axis numbers for communication
24
Position error (encoder unit)
25
External scale error (external scale unit)
26
Hybrid error
27
P-N voltage
28
Soft version
Driver serial number
30
Motor serial number
31
Accumulative operation time
32
Automatic motor recognition function
33
Driver temperature
35
Safety status monitor
Select the data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED on the front panel after the power supply
is turned ON.
For information on the display, refer to "9-4 Setting the Mode" (P.9-8).
Pn531
Axis Number
Setting
range
0 to 127
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set the axis number for communication.

Pn532
Command Pulse Input Maximum Setting
Setting
range
250 to 4,000
Unit
kpps

Default
setting
4000
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set the maximum command pulse input.

Err27.0 occurs if frecuency exceeds this range
8-57
Parameters Details
29
Pn533
Pulse Regeneration Output Limit Setting
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
Error detection disabled
Error detection enabled
Set the detection of Err28.0 "pulse regeneration error".

Pn535
Front Key Protection Setting
Setting
range
0 to 1
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
Front panel operation not blocked
Front panel operation blocked
Set the operation limitation from the front panel.

The operation limits depend on the mode. The operation limits are as follows.
Mode
MONITOR mode
Operation limits
All monitor data can be checked.
Parameters Details
PARAMETER SETTING mode Parameters cannot be changed. However, parameter set values can
be checked.
8-58
EEPROM WRITE mode
Cannot be executed. (Will not be displayed)
AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode
Operations other than the release of the front key protection setting
cannot be executed. (Will not be displayed)
8-7 Special Parameters

Pn600
Analog Torque Feed-forward Gain Setting
Unit
0.1 V/100%
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 0
Set the input gain for analog torque feed forward.0 to 9 will disable the function.
Pn604
Jog Speed
All
Unit
r/min
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 300
Set the command speed during JOG trial operation (speed control).
Pn605
Setting range 0 to 10,000
Unit
0.1 ms
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 0
Set effective time of gain 3 of 3-step gain switching.

Pn606
Setting range 100 to 1,000
Unit
Default setting 100
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 0
Power OFF and ON

Pn607
Torque Command Value Offset
Unit
All
Set offset torque to add to torque command.

Pn608
Forward Direction Torque Offset
Unit
All
%
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 0
Set the value to add to the torque command in the forward direction operation.
Reverse Direction Torque Offset
Unit
All
%
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 0
Set offset torque to add to torque command for reverse direction operation.
Pn610
Function Expansion Setting
Position
Unit
Power OFF and ON
Default setting 0
Set each function per bit.

Bit
Set value
Function
bit 0
Instantaneous speed observer function Disabled
Enabled
bit 1
Disturbance observer function
Enabled
Disabled
bit 2
Disturbance observer operation setting Enabled at all time
Only when gain 1 is selected
bit 3
Inertia ratio switching function
Disabled
Enabled
bit 4
Electric current response improvement function
Disabled
Enabled
Set the decimal value that has been converted from bit.
[Example]
Instantaneous speed observer function: enabled
Disturbance observer function: enabled
Disturbance observer operation setting: enabled at all time
Inertia ratio switching function: disabled
Electric current response improvement function: enabled.
8-59
Parameters Details
Pn609

If the settings are as described above, the bit will be 10,011, and the decimal value 19. Therefore,
the set value will be 19.
Pn611
Electric Current Response Setting
Setting
range
50 to 100
Unit
All
Default
setting
100
Power OFF
and ON
Make fine adjustment on electric current response with default setting as 100%.
Pn613
Inertia Ratio 2
Setting
range
0 to 10,000
All
Unit
Default
setting
250
Power OFF
and ON
Set the second load inertia as a percentage of the motor rotor inertia.
Pn614
Alarm Generation Allowable Time Setting
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Unit
All
Default
setting
ms
200
Power OFF
and ON
Set the allowable time for the immediate stop to complete when there is one alarm. If TB in the
figure below is exceeded an alarm is forced
The resolution is 2ms. For example if the setting is 11 the real value is 12.
Parameters Details
Brake interlock
(BKIR)
Released
Motor power
is supplied.
Power
supply
Held
TB
No power
supply
Motor speed
30 r/min
TB in the above figure is the brake timing during operation or the time until the motor rotation speed
falls to 30 r/min or lower, whichever is shorter.
Pn615
Overspeed Detection Level Setting at Immediate Stop
Setting
range
0 to 20,000
Unit
r/min
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set overspeed detection level upon generation of immediate stop alarm.

The overspeed detection level setting will be 1.2 times the maximum motor rotation speed if this
parameter is set to 0.
This parameter should normally be set to 0. The setting should be changed only when it is
necessary to reduce the overspeed detection level.
The set value of this parameter is limited to 1.2 times the maximum motor rotation speed.
8-60
Pn616
Absolute Interface Function Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
Disabled
Enabled
Setting this parameter, when SEN input is activated, the driver send a serial transmission with the
absolute encoder data.
Pn617
Front Panel Parameter Write Selection
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set value
Explanation
EEPROM write not performed when a parameter is changed from the front panel
EEPROM write performed at the same time
Set the EEPROM write conditions when the front panel parameter is changed.
Power Supply ON Initialization Time
Setting
range
0 to 100
Unit
All
0.1 s
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set initialization time after power supply ON to the standard 1.5 seconds plus some.
Pn619
Encoder Phase-Z Setting
Setting
range
0 to 32,767
All
Unit
Pulse
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Finely adjust the encoder phase-Z width when the number of output pulses per motor rotation after
the division of pulse output is not an integer.
Pn620
External Scale Phase-Z Setting
Setting
range
0 to 400
Unit
Full closing
s
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Set the external scale phase-Z regeneration width with time.

You can output the phase-Z signal at least for the period of time that has been set if the phase-Z
signal width is too short for detection due to the travel distance from the external scale.
Pn621
Serial Absolute External Scale Phase-Z Setting
Setting
range
0 to 228
Unit
Pulse
Full closing
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
The external scale phase-Z output width can be extended.

When you perform the pulse output using an external scale as the output source under full closing
control that uses the serial absolute external scale, use this to set the intervals of phase-Z output
based on the number of external scale phase-A output pulses (before quadruple multiplier).
8-61
Parameters Details
Pn618

Set
value
Explanation
Phase Z is output only at the position where the external scale value is 0.
0 to 228
After the phase-Z output at the position where the external scale value is 0, phase Z is output
in the set value pulse cycle.Phase Z is not output until the external scale value passes 0.
Pn622
Phase-AB Regeneration Method Selection for External Scale of Phase-AB Output Type
Setting
range
0 to 1
Unit
Default
setting
Full closing
Power OFF
and ON
Yes
Select the regeneration method of pulse outputs OA and OB when an external scale of phase ABoutput type is used.

Set
value
Explanation
Without signal regeneration
With signal regeneration *1,*2
*1. Through outputs are always made for phase Z without signal regeneration.
*2. If the signal regeneration setting is selected, the duties of OA and OB are regenerated on the amplifier side
and disturbance of waveforms can be suppressed.Take note, however, that this causes delays in phase Z.
Parameters Details
Pn623
Disturbance Torque Compensation Gain
Setting
range
100 to 100
Unit

Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set compensation gain for disturbance torque.

Pn624
Disturbance Observer Filter Setting
Setting
range
10 to 2,500
Unit

0.01 ms
Default
setting
53
Power OFF
and ON
Set filter time constant for disturbance torque compensation.

Pn627
Warning Latch Hold Time Selection
Setting
range
0 to 10
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set
value
Explanation
Latch time infinite
1-10
Latch time in seconds
Pn631
Realtime Autotuning Estimated Speed Selection
Setting
range
0 to 3
8-62
Unit
All
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Yes

Set value
Explanation
Estimation result is finalized when load estimation stabilizes.
For load characteristics change, the estimation is made at time constant of approx. 7 minutes.
For load characteristics change, the estimation is made at time constant of approx. 4 seconds.
For load characteristics change, the estimation is made at time constant of approx. 2 seconds.
Pn632
REALTIME AUTOTUNING CUSTOMIZATION mode Setting
Setting
range
32,768 to 32,767
Unit
Default
setting
All
0
Power OFF
and ON
Set the CUSTOMIZATION mode detail for realtime autotuning.

Pn633
Absolute Encoder Initial Pulse Regeneration Speed
Setting
range
1,000 to 3,000
Unit
r/min
All
Default
setting
1000
Power OFF
and ON
Set the pulse regeneration speed when the initial pulse is output.
Connection with OMRON controller
For the Host Controller to correctly receive the position from the absolute encoder, the pulse output
from the driver must be set to be completed before the controller's timeout.
Pulse are outputted to a speed equivalent to a motor rotating at a speed specifiedby this
parameter.
The following values or more are recommended for use.

OMRON controller
Pn633
1000
CS1W-MCxxx
1000
CV500-MCxxx
3000
3F88M-DRT141
1500
*1. You can set the timeout setting time on the controller side.
Pn634
Hybrid Vibration Suppression Gain
Setting
range
0 to 30,000
Unit
Full closing
0.1/s
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the hybrid vibration suppression gain.

In general, set it to the same value as the position loop gain, and finely adjust it based on the
situation.
Pn635
Hybrid Vibration Suppression Filter
Setting
range
0 to 6,400
Unit
Full closing
0.01 ms
Default
setting
10
Power OFF
and ON
Set the hybrid vibration suppression filter.

Pn637
Vibration Detection Threshold
Setting
range
0 to 1,000
Unit
All
0.1%
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the vibration detection threshold.

8-63
Parameters Details
CJ1W-NCxx4

If torque vibration that exceeds this setting is detected, the vibration detection warning will occur.
Pn638
Warning Mask Setting
Setting
range
32,768 to 32,767
All
Unit
Default
setting
Power OFF
and ON
Set the warning detection mask setting. See chapter 11-2 for detail of the bits.
If you set the corresponding bit to 1, the corresponding warning detection will be disabled.
Parameters Details
8-64
Yes
Operation
This chapter explains the operating procedures and how to operate in each mode.
9-1 Operational Procedure .................................................9-2

9-2 Preparing for Operation ...............................................9-3
Items to Check Before Turning ON the Power Supply.................... 9-3
Turning ON Power Supply .............................................................. 9-4
Checking Displays .......................................................................... 9-4
Absolute Encoder Setup ................................................................. 9-5
9-3 Using the Front Display ...............................................9-7

9-4 Setting the Mode...........................................................9-8
Changing the Mode......................................................................... 9-8
MONITOR Mode ............................................................................. 9-9
PARAMETER SETTING Mode ..................................................... 9-23
PARAMETER WRITE Mode ......................................................... 9-25
AUXILIARY FUNCTION Mode...................................................... 9-26
9-5 Trial Operation ............................................................9-34

Preparation for Trial Operation ..................................................... 9-34
Trial Operation in POSITION CONTROL Mode............................ 9-35
Trial Operation in SPEED CONTROL Mode................................. 9-36
Trial Operation in TORQUE CONTROL Mode ............................. 9-37
Trial Operation in FULL CLOSING CONTROL Mode................... 9-38
9-1 Operational Procedure
9-1 Operational Procedure

Turn ON the power supply after the correct installation and wiring to check the operation of the
individual motor and driver.
Then make the function settings as required according to the use of the motor and driver.
If the user parameters are set incorrectly, there is a risk of an unpredictable motor operation,
which is dangerous. Set the parameters securely according to the setting methods in this
manual.
Item
Contents
Mounting and
installation
Install the motor and driver according to the installation

conditions.(Do not connect the motor to the mechanical system
before checking the no-load operation.)
Chapter 4, 4-1
Wiring and
connections
Connect the motor and driver to the power supply and peripheral
equipment.
Specified installation and wiring conditions must be satisfied,
particularly for models conforming to the EC directives.
Chapter 4, 4-2
Preparing for
operation
Check the necessary items and then turn ON the power supply.
Check on the display to see whether there are any internal errors in
the driver.
If using a motor with an absolute encoder, first set up the absolute
encoder.
Chapter 9, 9-2
Function
settings
By means of the user parameters, set the functions according to the

operating conditions.
Chapter 8
Trial operation
First, check the motor operation with no-load condition. Then turn
the power supply OFF and connect the motor to the mechanical
system.
If using a motor with an absolute encoder, set up the absolute
encoder and set the Motion Control Unit's initial parameters.
Turn ON the power supply again, and check to see whether
protective functions, such as the immediate stop and operational
limits, work properly.
Check operation at both low speed and high speed using the
system without a workpiece, or with dummy workpieces.
Chapter 9, 9-5
Adjustment
Manually adjust the gain if necessary.

Further adjust the various functions to improve the control
performance.
Chapter 10
Operation
Operation can now be started.

If any problems should occur, refer to "Chapter 11, Error and
Maintenance".
Chapter 11
Operation
9-2
Reference
9-2 Preparing for Operation

This section explains the procedure to prepare the mechanical system for operation following
installation and wiring of the motor and driver. It explains items to check both before and after
turning ON the power supply.
It also explains the setup procedure required if using a motor with an absolute encoder.
Items to Check Before Turning ON the Power Supply

Checking Power Supply Voltage
Check to be sure that the power supply voltage is within the ranges shown below.
R88D-KTA5L/KT01L/KT02L/KT04L (Single-phase 100-VAC input)
Main circuit power supply: Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127) 50/60 Hz
Control circuit power supply: Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127) 50/60 Hz
R88D-KT01H/KT02H/KT04H/KT08H/KT10H/KT15H (Single-phase or single-phase/3-phase 200VAC input) Main circuit power supply: Single-phase or single-phase/3-phase 200 to 240 V (170
to 264 V) 50/60 Hz Control circuit power supply: Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V)
50/60 Hz
R88D-KT20H/KT30H/KT50H/KT75H/KT150H (3-phase 200-VAC input)
Main circuit power supply: 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V)
50/60 Hz Control circuit power supply: Single-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/60 Hz
R88D-KT06F/KT10F/KT15F/KT20F/KT30F/KT50F/KT75F/KT150F (3-phase 400-VAC input)
Main circuit power supply: 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC (323 to 528 V)
50/60 Hz Control circuit power supply: 24 VDC 15%
Checking Terminal Block Wiring
Checking the Motor

There should be no load on the motor. (Do not connect the mechanical system.)
The motor side power lines and the power cables must be securely connected.
Checking the Encoder Wiring

The encoder cable must be securely connected to the encoder connector (CN2) at the driver side.
The encoder cable must be securely connected to the encoder connector at the motor side.
Checking the Control I/O Connector

The control cable must be securely connected to the control I/O connector (CN1).
The operation command (RUN) must be OFF.
9-3
Operation
The main circuit power supply inputs (L1/L3 or L1/L2/L3) must be properly connected to the
terminal block.
The control circuit power supply inputs (L1C/L2C) must be properly connected to the terminal
block.
The motor's U, V, and W power lines and the green/yellow ( ) must be properly connected to the
terminal block.
Turning ON Power Supply

First carry out the preliminary checks, and then turn ON the control circuit power supply.
It makes no difference whether or not the main circuit power supply is turned ON.
The alarm output (/ALM) will take approx. 2 seconds to turn ON after the power supply has been
turned ON. Do not attempt to detect an alarm using the Host Controller during this time. (If power
supply is turned ON while the Host Controller is connected.)
Checking Displays
Displays on the Driver
The following will appear on the display area on the driver when the power supply is turned ON.
Approx. 2 s
0.6 s
0.6 s
Default display (determined by the Default
Display setting of parameter Pn528.)
Operation
9-4
Absolute Encoder Setup
ABS
You must set up the absolute encoder if using a motor with an absolute encoder. The setup is
required when you turn ON the power supply for the first time, when an absolute encoder
system down error (alarm display No. 40) occurs, or when the encoder cable is disconnected
and then connected again.
When using an absolute encoder, set Pn015 to 0 or 2 and set Pn616 to 1.
Absolute Encoder Setup Procedure

1. Turn ON the power supply and align the origin position.
Turn ON the power supply, perform the origin adjustment operation, and move the machine to
the origin position.
2. Go to AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode.

Press
and
on the driver. AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode will be displayed.
3. Use the Increment and Decrement keys to go to the ABSOLUTE ENCODER CLEAR
mode.
Press
again. ABSOLUTE ENCODER CLEAR mode will be displayed.
(AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode)

Mode selection
Execute
Alarm clear
A1 automatic offset
9
A2 automatic offset
Operation
A3 automatic offset
Motor trial operation
Absolute encoder clear
Parameter initialization
Front panel lock
4. Start clearing the absolute encoder.

Hold down
. Clearing the absolute encoder will be started.
9-5
Pressing and holding

(for approx. 5 s) increases " ."
Start absolute encoder clear.
Clearing is finished in an instant.

Note.
will be displayed if absolute encoder

clear is performed on an incremental encoder.
5. Restart the driver.

Turn OFF the control power supply to the driver and then turn it back ON.
Operation
9-6
9-3 Using the Front Display
9-3 Using the Front Display

LED display (6 digits)
All LEDs will flash when an error occurs and
the window switches to the error display.
Mode key
Switches between the following 4 modes.
MONITOR mode
PARAMETER SETTING mode
AUXIARY FUNCTION mode
PARAMETR WRITE mode
Increment and Decrement key

Increases/decreases the parameter number or data value.
Shift key
Shifts the operating digit to the left.
Data key
Switches between the parameter and data displays,
and writes data.
9
Operation
9-7
9-4 Setting the Mode
Auxiliary
function
Parameter
write
Parameter
setting
Front panel
default display*1
Monitor
Changing the Mode
Operation
*1. The display will be based on the Default Display (Pn528) setting after the power supply is turned ON.
9-8
MONITOR Mode
Command Position Error
I/O signal change count display
Motor speed
Absolute encoder data
Absolute external scale position
Monitor for the count of encoder

communications errors
Communication axis
number display
Torque command
Total encoder
pulses
Position error (encoder unit)

External scale error
(external scale unit)

Total external scale
feedback pulses
Hybrid error
CONTROL mode
P-N voltage
I/O signal status
Soft version
Analog input value
Driver serial number
Reason for error, history
Motor serial number
Operation
Warning number
Accumulative operation time
Regeneration resistance
load ratio
Automatic motor
recognition function
Overload load ratio
Driver temperature
Inertia ratio
Safety status monitor
Reason for no rotation
When
is pressed, the display position will move
in the direction of the arrow.

When
is pressed, it will move in the opposite direction.
The motor rotation speed will be displayed the first time the power supply is turned ON after
purchase. To change the initial display when the power supply is turned ON, change the setting
for the Default Display (Pn528). For details, refer to Pn528 "Default Display" (P.8-56).
9-9
You can locate the monitor in the corresponding block diagrams for Position, Speed, Torque or
full closed loop in Chapter 5, for a better understanding.
Position Command Error
Position command error [command unit]

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
to switch between Lower (L) and Higher (H).
Motor Rotation Speed
Displays the motor rotation speed (unit: r/min).

Rotation speeds in reverse operation are displayed with "-".
Position Command Speed
Operation
Displays the position command speed (unit: r/min).
Speed Control Command
Displays the speed control command, that is, the speed of the pulse command input (unit: r/min).
Torque Command
Displays the percentage of driver torque command.

When the rated torque output for the driver is used, "100%" is displayed.
Torque outputs in reverse operation are displayed with "-".
9-10
Total Encoder Pulses
Total encoder pulses [encoder pulse]

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
Total Command Pulses
Total command pulses [command pulse]

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
9
Operation
Total External Scale Feedback Pulses
Total external scale feedback pulses

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
9-11
CONTROL mode

SPEED CONTROL mode
TORQUE CONTROL mode
FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode
Displays which CONTROL mode is being used: position control, speed control, torque control, or
full closing control.
I/O Signal Status
Input signal (pin 8) ON

Output signal (pin 10) OFF or disabled
...ON
...OFF or disabled
Pin number
...Input
...Output
Displays the status of the control input and output signals connected to CN1.
Operation
Switching between Input Signals and Output Signals

If the decimal point is on the right side of the signal number,
the signal number can be changed.
Use
to move the flashing decimal point.

If the decimal point is on the right side of the I/O switching point,
you can switch between input and output.
Switch between input and output.
Press
9-12
to select the signal you want to monitor.
(Last input signal number)
(Last output signal number)
(First input signal number)
(First output signal number)
Analog Input Value
Input signal Input voltage (V)
Press
to select the signal you want to monitor.
Analog input value 1 (V)

The value after offset compensation is displayed.
Note. Voltages exceeding +/10 V are not displayed accurately.
Error Factor, History
Error code
(
if no alarm is present)
...History 0 (latest history)

...History 13 (oldest history)
Up to the most recent 14 alarms, including the current one, can be viewed in the reason of error.
The display area will flash when an alarm occurs.
If an alarm that is recorded in the history occurs, the alarm code for the current alarm and for
history 0 will be the same.
9-13
Operation
...Present error
Alarm Codes and Meanings

Alarm
codes
Contents
Alarm
codes
Contents
11
Control power supply undervoltage
36
Parameter error
12
Overvoltage
37
13
38
Drive prohibition input error
14
Overcurrent
39
Excessive analog input
Driver overheat
15
Absolute encoder system down

40
Overload
16
18
42
Encoder communications error

21
error
ABS
Absolute encoder overspeed error
Encoder communications data error
error
ABS
Absolute encoder multi-rotation counter

45
error
ABS
24
46
Encoder error 1
26
Overspeed
47
Absolute encoder status error
27
Electronic gear setting error
48
34
Overrun limit error
49
Note. The following alarms are not recorded in the history.

11: Control power supply undervoltage
13: Main power supply undervoltage
36: Parameter error
37: Parameters destruction
38: Drive prohibition input error
95: Motor non-conformity
Operation
9-14
ABS
Absolute encoder 1-rotation counter

44
23
ABS
Absolute encoder counter overflow

41
error
ABS
Warning Number
...Warning status
,
...No warning status
Warning number
Press
to display the occurrence status of each warning.
Regeneration Load Ratio
Displays the regeneration resistance load ratio as a percentage when the detection level for the
regeneration overload is 100%.
Overload Load Ratio
Operation
Displays the position command speed (unit: r/min).

Displays the overload ratio as a percentage when the rated load corresponds to 100%.
Inertia Ratio
The inertia ratio (%) is displayed.
9-15
Reasons for No Rotation

A number is displayed to indicate the reason the motor does not rotate.
...Position control
...Torque control
...Speed control
...Full closing control
CONTROL Reason
mode
number
Number
Flashing
0
RELEVANT
CONTROL
mode
Item
Alarm or warning has
occurred
No reason
All
All
No reason has been detected. The motor operation should be

possible.
Main power supply

interrupted
All
No RUN input
All
The operation command (RUN) is not connected to COM.
All
When Pn504 = 0 (drive prohibition input enabled):

The forward drive prohibition input (POT) is open and the speed
command is in the forward direction.
The reverse drive prohibition input (NOT) is open and the speed
command is in the reverse direction.
All
The currently effective torque limit set value, Pn013 (No. 1 Torque
Limit) or Pn522 (No. 2 Torque Limit), is less than 5% of the rated
torque.
P, S
When Pn527 = 0 (analog torque limit scale):

The forward analog torque limit input is negative and the speed
command is in the forward direction.
The reverse analog torque limit input is positive and the speed
command is in the reverse direction.
Pn518 = 0 (command pulse prohibition input enabled) and the IPG

input is open.
The command pulse is not input correctly.

The input selected in Pn005 is not connected correctly.
The type of input selected in Pn006 or Pn007 is not correct.
The position command per control cycle is 1 pulse or less and the
above are some of the possible causes.
Pn517 = 0 (Error counter reset at the level) and the error counter
reset input (ECRST) is connected to COM.
S, T
Pn315 = 1 (zero speed designation enabled) and the zero speed

designation input (VZERO) is open.
Low torque limit setting

4
Operation
An alarm has occurred. Warning has occurred.
Drive prohibition input is

enabled.
Description
Analog torque limit input is

enabled.
5
IPG input is enabled.

Frequency of command
pulse input is low.
8
9
ECRST input is enabled.

VZERO input is enabled.
The main power supply to the driver is not turned ON.
10
External speed command

is low.
The analog speed command is 0.06 V or lower when the analog

speed command is selected.
11
Internal speed command

is 0.
The internal speed command is 30 r/min or less when the internal

speed command is selected.
The analog torque command input (REF or PCL) is 5% or less of the

rated torque.
Pn317 = 0 (speed limit with No. 4 internally set speed) and the
No. 4 Internally Set Speed (Pn307) is 30 r/min or lower.
Pn317 = 1 (speed limit with REF input) and the analog speed
command input (REF) is 0.06 V or lower.
12
Torque command is low

Speed limit is low
13
9-16
Number
RELEVANT
CONTROL
mode
Item
Other reasons
14
Description
Reasons 1 to 13 do not apply, but the motor is rotating at 20 r/min or
lower. (Low command, heavy, locked, or crashed load, faulty driver
or motor, etc.)
All
Note.The motor may rotate even if a reason number other than 0 is displayed.
Display of the Number of I/O Signal Changes
I/O signal change count

Pin number
...Input signal
...Output signal
If the decimal point is on the right side of the pin number,
the pin number can be changed.
Use
to move the flashing decimal point.

If the decimal point is between the pin numbers,
you can switch between input and output.
Press
to switch between input and output.
9
Display the number of transitions in one input since last power-on
Operation
Absolute Encoder Data
Encoder data
...1-rotation data, lower (L)
...1-rotation data, higher (H)
...Multi-rotation data
Press
to select the data you want to display.
9-17
Absolute External Scale Position
Encoder data
...Absolute external scale position, lower (L)
...Absolute external scale position, higher (H)
Press
Monitor for the Number of Encoder and External Scale Communications

Error
Communications error count
...Encoder
Operation
Press
...External scale
to switch between encoder and external scale.
Display of Axis Numbers for Communication
The value set by the Axis Number (Pn531) is displayed.
9-18
Encoder Position Error
Encoder position error [encoder unit]

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
External Scale Position Error
External scale error [external scale unit]

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
9
Operation
Hybrid Error
Hybrid error [command unit]

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
9-19
P-N Voltage
P-N voltage [V] is displayed.
Soft Version
Displays the soft version of the driver. (Display example: Ver. 1.23)
Driver Serial Number
Amplifier serial number

...Amplifier serial number, lower (L)
Press
...Amplifier serial number, higher (H)
Operation
Display example) When serial number is 09040001
Motor Serial Number
Motor serial number

...Motor serial number, lower (L)
Press
...Motor serial number, higher (H)
Display example) When serial number is 09040001
9-20
Accumulative Operation Time
Accumulative operation time [h] is displayed.

Lower (L)
Higher (H)
Press
Automatic Motor Recognition Function
Automatic recognition enabled

Automatic recognition disabled
Driver Temperature
9
Amplifier temperature [C] is displayed.
Operation
9-21
Safety Status Temperature
SAFEty
SrVoFF
SrVon
ALArM
: Safety status
: Servo OFF
: Servo ON
: Alarm status
+ Dot information
Servo ready
OFF: The dot is not lit.
ON: The dot is lit.
Press
Flash display
Status that allows
normal changes
to switch between monitors you want to display.
...Input photocoupler OFF
...Input photocoupler ON
...Input photocoupler OFF
...Input photocoupler ON
...Output photocoupler OFF
...Output photocoupler ON
Operation
9-22
PARAMETER SETTING Mode

1. Displaying PARAMETER mode
Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
The item set for the Default Display (Pn528) is displayed.
Press the
Press
key to display MONITOR mode.

key to display PARAMETER SETTING mode.
2. Setting the parameter number

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Use
keys to set the parameter number.
Press
to move "." to the left and change the digit to be set.
Press
to increase the value of the digit with ".".
Press
to decrease the value of the digit with ".".
3. Displaying parameter set values

Key
operation
Display example
9
Explanation
key to display the set value.
Operation
Press the
4. Changing the parameter set value

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Use the
keys to change the value.
Press
Press
Press
Press the
key to save the new set value.
To cancel the change, instead of pressing

return to the display in procedure 2.
, press
to
9-23
5. Returning to PARAMETER SETTING mode

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to return to PARAMETER SETTING mode.

Some parameters will be displayed with an "r" before the number when the display returns to the
PARAMETER SETTING mode. To enable the set values that have been changed for these
parameters, you must turn the power supply OFF and ON after saving the parameters to the
EEPROM.
If the Front Panel Parameter Write Selection (Pn617) is set to 1, the parameter set value is
automatically written to EEPROM when changed.
When the set value for a parameter is saved, the new setting will be used for control. Make gradual
changes instead of changing the large numbers at once, when changing values for parameters
that greatly affect motor operation (speed loop gain, position loop gain, etc. in particular).
For details on parameters, refer to "Chapter 8, Parameters Details".
Operation
9-24
PARAMETER WRITE Mode

Set values changed in PARAMETER SETTING mode must be saved to EEPROM. To do so,
the following operation must be performed.
1. Saving changed set values

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to display PARAMETER WRITE mode.
Press the
key to enter PARAMETER WRITE mode.
Press and hold the
key for 5 seconds or longer until
is displayed.
The bar indicator will increase.
Writing will start. (This display will appear only momentarily.)
This indicates a normal completion. In addition to this display,
either
or
may be displayed. If
is
displayed, writing has been completed normally, but some of the
changed parameters will be valid only after the power supply has
been turned OFF and ON again.Turn OFF the driver power
supply and then turn it ON again.
will be displayed if there is a write error.
Write the data again.
2. Returning to PARAMETER WRITE mode

Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to return to PARAMETER WRITE mode.

If a write error occurs, write the data again. If write errors continue to occur, there may be a fault
in the driver.
Do not turn OFF the power supply while writing to EEPROM. Incorrect data may be written if the
power supply is turned OFF. If the power supply is turned OFF, perform the settings again for all
parameters, and write the data again.
9-25
Operation
Key
operation
AUXILIARY FUNCTION Mode

AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode includes the alarm clear, analog input automatic offset
adjustment, absolute encoder reset, jog operation, parameter initialization, and front panel
lock/release.
Displaying AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
The item set for the Default Display (Pn528) is displayed.
Press the
Press the
mode.
key 3 times to display AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Alarm Clear
This releases the alarm generation status.
Some alarms cannot be released. Refer to "11-3 Alarm List" (P.11-6) for details.
1. Execute alarm clear

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to enter ALARM CLEAR mode.
Operation
Press and hold the
is displayed.
Alarm clear will start.
This indicates a normal completion.
will be displayed if the alarm could not be cleared.
Reset the power supply to clear the error.
2. Returning to AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode display

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
9-26
key to return to AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode.
Analog Input Automatic Offset Adjustment

This performs automatic adjustment on the Offset Values (Pn422, Pn425 and Pn428) of
Analog Inputs 1 to 3 (AI1 to AI3).
Do not perform this operation if a position loop has been configured with the host system.
1. Execute automatic offset adjustment

Key
operation
Display example
or
Explanation
Press the
key to display the ANALOG INPUT AUTOMATIC
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT mode from the alarm clear display in
the AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode.
or
or
Press the
key to enter the AUTOMATIC OFFSET
ADJUSTMENT mode of the analog input number to be set.
or
Press and hold the
is displayed.
or
or

Automatic offset adjustment will start.
will be displayed if the automatic offset adjustment

could not be performed. Set a valid CONTROL mode or make
the setting so that the offset value does not exceed the range for
the Speed Command Offset Adjustment (Pn52), and then
execute the procedure again.

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
or
or
9-27
Operation

Automatic offset adjustment function cannot be performed in POSITION CONTROL mode.
Data is not written to the EEPROM simply by performing automatic offset adjustment. The data
must be written to the EEPROM for the results to be saved.
Jog Operation
You can perform a trial operation of the motor with no load without wiring the control I/O
connector (CN1).
1. Prepare for a jog operation

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to display the JOG OPERATION mode from the
alarm clear display in AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode.
Press the
key to enter JOG OPERATION mode.
Press and hold the
is displayed.
This completes preparations for jog operation.
will be displayed if the servo is not ready.
Press and hold the
is displayed.
Operation
The decimal point will move to the left.

The Servo will turn ON.
2. Execute jog operation

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Forward direction operation will be performed while the
key is
pressed, and reverse direction operation will be performed while
the
key is pressed. The motor will stop when the key is
released. The rotation speed at this time will be the speed set for
the Jog Speed (Pn604).
will be displayed if the servo is not ready.
9-28

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to return to AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode. The
servo lock will be released and the servo will be unlocked.

When performing a jog operation, be sure to first disconnect the motor from any load and remove
the control I/O connector (CN1).
When performing a jog operation, set the parameter related to gains to an appropriate value to
avoid any troubles, such as vibration. Set the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) to 0.
The motor operates in the SPEED CONTROL mode during a jog operation. Set each of the
various settings so that the motor operates correctly for speed control.
If the operation command (RUN) is turned ON during a jog operation,
will be displayed,
and the jog operation will be cancelled and a normal operation through an external command will
be performed.
Absolute Encoder Reset ABS

This resets the multi-rotation data and errors of the absolute encoder.
1. Execute absolute encoder reset

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to display the ABSOLUTE ENCODER RESET
mode from the alarm clear display in AUXILIARY FUNCTION
mode.
Press the
key to enter ABSOLUTE ENCODER RESET mode.
Operation
Press and hold the
is displayed.
Absolute encoder reset will start.
will be displayed if the absolute encoder reset could not
be performed. Check whether an unsupported encoder is
connected, and then execute the procedure again.

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
9-29

The absolute encoder reset function can be used only with systems that use an absolute encoder.
Parameter Initialization
This initializes the selected parameter.
1. Execute the initialization of the parameter.

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
mode.
key to enter PARAMETER INITIALIZATION
Press and hold the
is displayed.
The initialization of the selected parameter will start.
will be displayed if the parameter could not be
initialized. Turn OFF the driver power supply and then execute
again.
Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Operation
Press the

If alarm display No. 11 (power supply undervoltage), 36 (parameter error) or 37 (parameter
destruction) is displayed, the parameter cannot be initialized.
Front Panel Lock

This locks the front panel.
1. Displaying PARAMETER mode

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
Press
9-30

key to display PARAMETER SETTING mode.
2. Setting the parameter number

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Use the
keys to set to Pn535.
Press
Press
Press
3. Displaying parameter set values

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to display the set value.
4. Changing the parameter set value

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Use the
keys to change the value.
Press
Press
Press
Press the
key to save the new set value.
To cancel the change, instead of pressing

return to the display in procedure 2.
, press
to
Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to return to PARAMETER SETTING mode.
6. Saving changed set values

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to display PARAMETER WRITE mode.
Press the
key to enter PARAMETER WRITE mode.
Press and hold the
is displayed.
9-31
Operation
5. Returning to PARAMETER SETTING mode
Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Writing will start. (This display will appear only momentarily.)
This indicates a normal completion. In addition to this display,
either
or
may be displayed.
If
is displayed, writing has been completed normally,
but some of the changed parameters will be valid only after the
power supply has been turned OFF and ON again. Turn OFF the
driver power supply and then turn it ON again.
will be displayed if there is a write error. Write the
data again.
7. Returning to PARAMETER WRITE mode

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to return to PARAMETER WRITE mode.
8. Restart the power supply to the driver.

The items that are limited depend on the mode.
If the Front Panel Parameter Write Selection (Pn617) is set to 1, the parameter set value is
automatically written to EEPROM when changed.
Refer to the Front Key Protection Setting (Pn535) in "8-6 Extended Parameters" (P.8-46) for
details on the front panel lock function.
Operation
9-32
Front Panel Lock Release

This releases the front panel lock.
1. Release the front panel lock

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
key to display the FRONT PANEL LOCK mode
from the alarm reset display in AUXILIARY FUNCTION mode.
Press the
key to enter FRONT PANEL LOCK mode.
Press and hold the
is displayed.
The front panel lock will be released.
will be displayed if the front panel lock is not released.
Turn OFF the driver power supply and then execute again.

Key
operation
Display example
Explanation
Press the
9
Operation
9-33
9-5 Trial Operation
9-5 Trial Operation

When you have finished installation, wiring, and switch settings and have confirmed that status
is normal after turning ON the power supply, perform trial operation. The main purpose of trial
operation is to confirm that the servo system is electrically correct.
If an error occurs during the trial operation, refer to "Chapter 11, Error and Maintenance" to
eliminate the cause. Then check for safety, and then retry the trial operation.
Preparation for Trial Operation

Inspections before Trial Operation
Check the following items.
Wiring
Make sure that there is no error (especially the power supply input and motor output).
Make sure that there are no short-circuits. (Check the ground for short circuits as well.)
Make sure that there are no loose connections.
Power Supply Voltage

Make sure that the voltage corresponds to the rated voltage.
Motor Installation
Make sure that it is securely installed.
Disconnection from Mechanical System
If necessary, make sure that the motor has been disconnected from the mechanical system.
Brake Released
Operation
Make sure that the brake has been released.
9-34
9-5 Trial Operation
Trial Operation in POSITION CONTROL Mode

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Connect connector CN1.

Input power supply (12 to 24 VDC) for the control signals (24 VIN, COM).
Turn ON the power supply to the driver.
Confirm that the parameters are set to the standard set values.
Set to the output from the host device that agrees using the COMMAND PULSE
INPUT mode (Pn007).
Write the parameters to EEPROM and then turn OFF the power supply and turn it
ON again.
Connect the operation command input (RUN: CN1 pin 29) to COM (CN1 pin 41).
Servo ON status will be entered and the motor will be activated.
Input a low-frequency pulse signal from the host device to start low-speed
operation.
Check the motor rotation speed in MONITOR mode.
Check to see if the motor is rotating at the set speed and to see if the motor stops when the
command (pulses) are stopped.
9
Operation
9-35
9-5 Trial Operation
Trial Operation in SPEED CONTROL Mode

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6. Close the zero speed designation input (VZERO) and gradually increase the DC
voltage between the speed command input REF (CN1 pin 14) and AGND1 (CN1 pin
15) from 0 V. Check to see if the motor rotates.
7. Check the motor rotation speed in MONITOR mode.
Use the following parameters to change the motor rotation speed or direction.
Pn302: Speed Command Scale
Pn303: Command Speed Rotation Direction Switching
Operation
9-36
9-5 Trial Operation
Trial Operation in TORQUE CONTROL Mode

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Set a low speed in the No. 4 Internally Set Speed (Pn307).
7. Apply a positive or negative DC voltage between the torque command input TREF1
(CN1 pin 14) and AGND1 (CN1 pin 15). Check to see if the motor rotates according
to the direction (forward/reverse) set in Pn307.
Use the following parameters to change the amount of the torque, direction of the torque, or
speed limit value for the command voltage.
Pn307: No. 4 Internally Set Speed (default set value: 50 r/min)
Pn319: Torque Command Scale
Pn320: Torque Output Direction Switching
9
Operation
9-37
9-5 Trial Operation
Trial Operation in FULL CLOSING CONTROL Mode

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Connect the external scale.
Set the outputs from the host device to agree with the COMMAND PULSE mode
(Pn005).
7. Write the parameters to EEPROM and then turn OFF the power supply and turn it
ON again.
8. Connect the operation command input (RUN: CN1 pin 29) to COM (CN1 pin 41).
9. Input a low-frequency pulse signal from the host device to start low-speed
operation.
10. Check the motor rotation speed in MONITOR mode.
Operation
9-38
Adjustment Functions
This chapter explains the functions, setting methods and items to note regarding
various gain adjustments.
10-1 Gain Adjustment .........................................................10-2

Purpose of the Gain Adjustment ................................................... 10-2
Gain Adjustment Methods............................................................. 10-2
Gain Adjustment Procedure.......................................................... 10-3
10-2 Realtime Autotuning...................................................10-4

Setting Realtime Autotuning ......................................................... 10-5
Setting Machine Rigidity ............................................................... 10-5
10-3 Manual Tuning ..........................................................10-11

Basic Settings ............................................................................. 10-11
10
10-1 Gain Adjustment

Accurax G5 Servo Drives provide the realtime autotuning function.
With these functions, gain adjustments can be made easily even by those who use a servo
system for the first time. If you cannot obtain desired responsiveness with autotuning, use
manual tuning.
Purpose of the Gain Adjustment

The driver must operate the motor in response to commands from the host system with
minimal time delay and maximum reliability. The gain is adjusted to bring the actual operation
of the motor as close as possible to the operations specified by the commands, and to
maximize the performance of the machine.
Example: Ball screw
Gain setting: Low
[r/min]
+2000
Gain setting: High + feed-forward setting
Gain setting: High
0
Actual motor speed
Command speed
2000
0.0
125
250
Position loop gain

Speed loop gain
Speed loop integral time
Speed feed-forward
Inertia ratio
375
: 3.0
: 2.5
: 190.0
:
30
: 300
0.0
125
250
Position loop gain

Speed loop gain
Speed feed-forward
Inertia ratio
375
: 251.0
: 140.0
: 6.0
:
30
: 300
0.0
125
250
Position loop gain

Speed loop gain
Speed feed-forward
Inertia ratio
375
: 251.0
: 140.0
: 6.0
: 100
: 300
10
Gain Adjustment Methods

Function
Automatic
adjustment
Realtime autotuning
Manual tuning
Manual
adjustment
Basic procedure
Explanation
Reference
page
Realtime autotuning estimates the load inertia of the

machine in realtime and automatically sets the optimal gain
according to the estimated load inertia.
P.10-4
Manual adjustment is performed if autotuning cannot be

executed due to restrictions on the CONTROL mode or
load conditions or if ensuring the maximum responsiveness
to match each load is required.
P.10-11
POSITION CONTROL/FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode

adjustment
P.10-12
SPEED CONTROL mode adjustment
P.10-13
TORQUE CONTROL mode adjustment
P.10-18
Note 1.Take sufficient care for safety.

Note 2.If vibration occurs (unusual noise or vibration), immediately turn OFF the power supply or let the servo OFF
status occur.
10-2
Gain Adjustment Procedure

Start adjustment.
Automatic
adjustment?
No
Yes
Realtime
autotuning setting
Realtime autotuning
Operation OK?
Yes
No
(Default setting)
Manual tuning
Operation OK?
No
10
Yes
Write to EEPROM.
Gain Adjustment and Machine Rigidity

To improve machine rigidity:
Install the machine on a secure base so that it does not cause any play.
Use couplings that have a high rigidity, and that are designed for servo systems.
Use a wide timing belt. And use a tension within the range of allowable axial load for the motor or
Decelerator output.
Use gears with small backlash.
The specific vibration (resonance frequency) of the mechanical system has a large impact on the
gain adjustment of the servo. The servo system responsiveness cannot be set high for machines
with a low resonance frequency (low machine rigidity).
10-3
Consult OMRON.
Adjustment completed.
10-2 Realtime Autotuning

Realtime autotuning estimates the load inertia of the machine in realtime and operates the
machine by automatically setting the gain according to the estimated load inertia. At the same
time, it can lower the resonance and vibration if operated with the adaptive filter enabled.
Realtime autotuning is enabled for any control to adjust the speed loop PI control.
Speed command
Position
command
Pn101
Pn102
Pn100
Position
control
Speed
PI control
Pn004
Inertia
Torque
command
Pn104
Current loop
control
SM
Load
Estimate load
inertia.
Speed feedback
RE
Position feedback

Realtime autotuning may not function properly under the conditions described in the following
table.In such cases, use manual tuning.
Conditions under which realtime autotuning does not operate properly
Load inertia
If the load inertia is small or large compared with the rotor inertia.
(less than 3 times, more than 20 times, or more than the applicable load inertia
ratio)
If the load inertia changes quickly. (in less than 10 s)
Load
If the machine rigidity is extremely low.

If there is backlash or play in the system.
Operation
pattern
If the speed is continuously run at a low speed below 100 r/min.

If the acceleration/deceleration gradually changes at less than 2,000 r/min in 1 s.
If the acceleration/deceleration torque is too small compared with the unbalanced
load and the viscous friction torque.
If a speed of 100 r/min or an acceleration/deceleration of 2,000 r/min/s does not
continue for at least 50 ms.
10
With realtime autotuning, each parameter is fixed to the value in the machine rigidity table at the
time the machine rigidity is set. By estimating the load inertia from the operation pattern, the
operation coefficient for the speed loop gain and the integration time constant are altered. Doing
this for each pattern can cause vibration, so the estimation value is set conservatively.
10-4
Setting Realtime Autotuning

1. When setting realtime autotuning, turn the servo OFF.
2. Set REALTIME AUTOTUNING mode Selection (Pn002) depending on the load.
When the value is set to 3 to 5, the response is fast for a change in inertia during operation.
Operation, however, may be unstable depending on the operating pattern. Normally, set the
parameter to 1.
Use a setting of 3 to 5 when the vertical axis is used.
Gain switching function is enabled for set values 2 to 6.
Set
value
Realtime autotuning
Explanation
Disabled
Realtime autotuning is disabled.
STABILITY FOCUSED mode

(default setting)
No unbalanced load or friction compensation, nor gain

switching.
POSITIONING FOCUSED
mode
Used when unbalanced load and friction are small. Gain

switching is set.
VERTICAL AXIS mode
Used when unbalanced load is present like invertical axis.
FRICTION COMPENSATION
mode
Used when friction is large. Also compensates the

unbalanced load.
Tool mode
Used In combination with the software tool. The drive

detects the values and the user decide to apply or not.
Customization
Used when freely combining REALTIME AUTOTUNING

mode and APPLICABLE FILTER mode settings.
Setting Machine Rigidity

1. Set the Realtime Autotuning Machine Rigidity Selection (Pn003) according to the
table below.
Start from the lower machine rigidity number and check the operation.
Realtime Autotuning
Machine Rigidity Selection (Pn003)
Machine configuration and drive method

Ball screw direct coupling
12 to 24
Ball screw and timing belt
8 to 20
Timing belt
4 to 16
Gears, rack and pinion drives
4 to 16
Machines with low rigidity, etc.
1 to 8
Stacker crane
Perform manual tuning.
2. Turn the servo ON and operate the machine with a normal pattern.
To increase responsiveness, increase the machine rigidity number, and check the response.
If vibration occurs, enable the adaptive filter and operate. If already enabled, adjust by lowering
the machine rigidity number.
3. If there are no issues with the operation, turn the servo OFF and set REALTIME
AUTOTUNING mode Selection (Pn002) to 0 (disabled).
In this case, the adaptive filter can remain enabled. To disable the adaptive filter, read the
frequency from the adaptive filter table number display, and set to notch filter 1 frequency.
10
10-5

Unusual noise or vibration may occur until the load inertia is estimated or the adaptive filter
stabilizes after startup, immediately after the first servo ON, or when the Realtime Autotuning
Machine Rigidity Selection (Pn003) is increased. This is not an error if it disappears right away. If
the unusual noise or vibration, however, continues for 3 or more reciprocating operations, take the
following measures in any order you can.
? Write the parameters used during normal operation to the EEPROM.
? Lower the Realtime Autotuning Machine Rigidity Selection (Pn003).
? Manually set the notch filter.
Once unusual noise or vibration occurs, Inertia Ratio (Pn004), Torque Command Value Offset
(Pn607), Forward Direction Torque Offset (Pn608), and Reverse Direction Torque Offset (Pn609)
may have changed to an extreme value. In this case, also take the measures described above.
Out of the results of realtime autotuning, the Inertia Ratio (Pn004), Torque Command Value Offset
(Pn607), Forward Direction Torque Offset (Pn608) and Reverse Direction Torque Offset (Pn609)
are automatically saved to the EEPROM every 30 minutes. Realtime autotuning will use this
saved data as the default setting when the power supply is turned OFF and turned ON again.
The parameter will automatically be set based on the Realtime Autotuning Machine Rigidity
Setting (Pn003) if realtime autotuning is enabled.
10
10-6
Realtime Autotuning (RTAT) Parameter Table

Parameter
number
AT Machine Rigidity Setting (Pn003)
Parameter name
0
Pn004
Inertia Ratio
Estimated load inertia ratio
Pn100
Position Loop Gain
20
25
30
40
Pn101
Speed Loop Gain
15
20
25
30
35
45
60
75
Pn102
3700
2800
2200
1900
1600
1200
900
700
Pn103
Pn104
Torque Command Filter Time Constant 1*1 1500
1100
900
800
600
500
400
300
Pn105
25
30
40
45
55
70
95
120
Pn106
Speed Loop Gain 2
15
20
25
30
35
45
60
75
Pn107
Speed Loop Integral Time Constant 2
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
Pn108
0
*1
45
55
75
95
Pn109
1500
1100
900
800
600
500
400
300
Pn110
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Pn111
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn112
Pn113
Pn114
GAIN SWITCHING INPUT OPERATING

mode Selection
Pn115
For Pn002= 2,3,4 or 5: 10

For Pn002= 0 or 1: 0
Gain Switching Delay Time in Position Control 30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
Pn117
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn118
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Position

Control
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn119
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn120
Pn121
Pn122
Pn123
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Speed Control 0
Pn124
Pn125
Gain Switching Delay Time in Torque

Control
Pn126
Pn127
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Torque

Control
Pn605
Pn606
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn607
Estimated if Pn002=3,4 or 5
Pn608
Estimated If Pn002= 4 or 5
Pn609
Estimated if Pn002= 4 or 5
Pn610.0,
Pn610.3
Pn611
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn613
Inertia Ratio 2
Pn623
Pn624
*1. This is limited at the minimum value of 10 if a 17-bit absolute encoder is used.
10-7
10
Pn116
Parameter
number
Parameter name
8
10
10
11
12
14
15
Inertia Ratio
Pn100
Position Loop Gain
115
140
175
320
390
480
630
720
Pn101
Speed Loop Gain
90
110
140
180
220
270
350
400
Pn102
600
500
400
310
250
210
160
140
Pn103
Pn104
200
200
126
103
84
65
57
Pn105
140
175
220
380
460
570
730
840
Pn106
Speed Loop Gain 2
90
110
140
180
220
270
350
400
Pn107
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
Pn108
Pn109
200
200
126
103
84
65
57
Pn110
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Pn111
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn112
Pn113
Pn114

mode Selection
Pn115
For Pn002= 2,3,4 or 5: 10

For Pn002= 0 or 1: 0
Pn116
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
Pn117
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn118

Control
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn119
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn120
Pn121
Pn122
Pn123
Pn124
Pn125

Control
Pn126
Pn127

Control
Pn605
Pn606
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn607
Pn608
Pn609
Pn610.0,
Pn610.3
Pn611
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn613
Inertia Ratio 2
Pn623
Pn624
10-8
13
Pn004
Parameter
number
Parameter name
16
Pn004
Inertia Ratio
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Position Loop Gain
900
1080
1350
1620
2060
2510
3050
3770
Pn101
Speed Loop Gain
500
600
750
900
1150
1400
1700
2100
Pn102
120
110
90
80
70
60
50
40
Pn103
Pn104
38
30
25
20
16
13
11
Pn105
1050
1260
1570
1880
2410
2930
3560
4400
Pn106
Speed Loop Gain 2
500
600
750
900
1150
1400
1700
2100
Pn107
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
Pn108
Pn109
38
30
25
20
16
13
11
Pn110
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Pn111
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn112
Pn113
Pn114

mode Selection
Pn115
For Pn002= 2,3,4 or 5: 10

For Pn002= 0 or 1: 0
Pn116
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
Pn117
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn118

Control
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn119
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn120
Pn121
Pn122
Pn123
Pn124
Pn125

Control
Pn126
Pn127

Control
Pn605
Pn606
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn607
Pn608
Pn609
Pn610.0,
Pn610.3
Pn611
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn613
Inertia Ratio 2
Pn623
Pn624
10-9
10
Pn100
Parameter
number
Parameter name
24
Pn004
10
25
26
27
Inertia Ratio
28
29
30
31
Pn100
Position Loop Gain
4490
5000
5600
6100
6600
7200
8100
9000
Pn101
Speed Loop Gain
2500
2800
3100
3400
3700
4000
4500
5000
Pn102
40
35
30
30
25
25
20
20
Pn103
*1
Pn104
Pn105
5240
5900
6500
7100
7700
8400
9400
10500
Pn106
Speed Loop Gain 2
2500
2800
3100
3400
3700
4000
4500
5000
Pn107
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
Pn108
Pn109
Pn110
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Pn111
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn112
Pn113
Pn114

mode Selection
Pn115
For Pn002= 2,3,4 or 5: 10

For Pn002= 0 or 1: 0
Pn116
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
Pn117
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Pn118

Control
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn119
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
Pn120
Pn121
Pn122
Pn123
Pn124
Pn125

Control
Pn126
Pn127

Control
Pn605
Pn606
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn607
Pn608
Pn609
Pn610.0,
Pn610.3
Pn611
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Pn613
Inertia Ratio 2
Pn623
Pn624
The parameters Pn103, Pn108, Pn110 to Pn127, Pn605, Pn606, Pn610, Pn611, Pn613, Pn623
and Pn624 are set to fixed values.
10-10
10-3 Manual Tuning
10-3 Manual Tuning

Basic Settings
As described before, the Accurax G5 have a realtime autotuning function. However, when the
gain cannot be properly adjusted due to restrictions such as load conditions even if realtime
autotuning is performed, or when the optimum responsiveness or stability is required to match
each load, readjustment maybe required.
This section describes how to perform manual tuning for each CONTROL mode and function.
Before Manual Setting

More reliable adjustment can be performed quickly by using waveform monitoring with the data
tracing function of CX-Drive or by measuring the analog voltage waveform with the monitor
function.
Analog Monitor Output

The actual motor speed, command speed, torque, and number of accumulated pulses can be
measured in the analog voltage level using an oscilloscope or other device. The type of signal
to output and the output voltage level are set with Analog Monitor 1 Selection (Pn416) and
Analog Monitor 2 Selection (Pn418) settings. For details, refer to "12-2 Parameter List" (P.1212).
CX-Drive Data Tracing Function

Commands to the motor and motor operation (speed, torque command, and position error) can
be displayed on a computer as waveforms. Refer to the CX-Drive Operation Manual (SBCE337).
USB communications cable
10
Connect to CN7.
10-11
10-3 Manual Tuning
POSITION CONTROL/FULL CLOSING CONTROL Mode Adjustment

Use the following procedure to perform the adjustment in position control for the Accurax G5
Series.
Start adjustment.
Never adjust or set parameters to extreme values,

as it will make the operation unstable.
Failure to follow this guideline may result in injury.
Gradually change the value to adjust the
gain while checking the motor operation.
Set the realtime autotuning to disabled (Pn002 = 0)

Set each parameter according to the parameter settings for different applications.
Operate based on the normal operation pattern and load.

Are the positioning time and other performances satisfied?
No
Yes
Increase Speed Loop Gain (Pn101) to the extent

that hunching does not occur upon servo lock.
Decrease Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102) to the extent
Does hunching (vibration) occur when the motor rotates?

No
Increase position loop gain to the extent
that overshooting does not occur.
10
Yes
Decrease Speed Loop Gain (Pn101).
Increase Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102).
Write to the EEPROM in the PARAMETER WRITE mode.
If vibration persists after repeated adjustments

or the positioning is slow:
Increase Torque Command Filter Time Constant (Pn104).
Set the vibration frequency in the

Notch Filter 1 Frequency Setting (Pn201),
Notch Filter 3 Frequency Setting (Pn207) or
Notch Filter 4 Frequency Setting (Pn210).
10-12
10-3 Manual Tuning
SPEED CONTROL Mode Adjustment

Adjustments in speed control for the Accurax G5 Series are very similar to POSITION
CONTROL mode adjustment.
Use the following procedure to perform the adjustment.
Never adjust or set parameters to extreme values,

as it will make the operation unstable.
Failure to follow this guideline may result in injury.
Gradually change the value to adjust the
gain while checking the motor operation.
Start adjustment.
Set the realtime autotuning to disabled (Pn002 = 0)
Set each parameter according to the parameter settings for different applications.
Operate based on the normal operation pattern and load.

Are the speed responsiveness and other performances satisfied?
Yes
No
Increase Speed Loop Gain (Pn101) to the extent

Decrease Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102) to the extent
Does hunching (vibration) occur when the motor rotates?

No
Yes
Decrease Speed Loop Gain (Pn101).
Write to the EEPROM in the PARAMETER WRITE mode.

Increase Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102).
10
Increase Torque Command Filter Time Constant (Pn104).
Set the vibration frequency in the

Notch Filter 3 Frequency Setting (Pn207) or
Notch Filter 4 Frequency Setting (Pn210).
10-13
If vibration persists after repeated adjustments

or the positioning is slow:
10-3 Manual Tuning
Servo Manual Tuning Method

The following 4 parameters are the basic servo adjustment parameters.
If desired operation characteristics are obtained by adjusting the following 4 parameters, the
adjustments of other parameters are not necessary.
Parameter
number
Parameter name
Default setting
Parameter number 2
Pn100
Position Loop Gain
40.0 [1/s]
Pn105
Pn101
Speed Loop Gain
50.0 Hz
Pn106
Pn102
Speed Loop Integral Time

Constant
20.0 ms
Pn107
Pn104
Torque Command Filter Time

Constant
0.80 ms
Pn109
Adjustment of Each Parameter

The control loop for the servo consists of, from the outside, a position loop, speed loop and
current loop.
The inner loop is affected by the outer loop, and the outer loop is affected by the inner loop.
What determines the default setting includes the structure and the rigidity of the machine, and
the inertia ratio.
Guide of each parameter for different applications is as follows.
Parameter Settings for Different Applications

Application name
10
Inertia Rigidity
Low
Position
loop gain
[1/s]
20
Speed
loop gain
[Hz]
Speed loop
Torque command
integration filter time constant
time constant
[x 0.01 ms]
Ball screw horizontal
Large
140
35
160
Medium Medium 40
80
20
100
Small
High
80
60
15
80
Ball screw vertical
Large
Low
20
160
45
160
Ball screw vertical
Medium Medium 40
80
30
120
Ball screw vertical
Small
High
60
60
20
100
Ball screw nut rotation horizontal Large
Low
20
140
40
160
Ball screw nut rotation horizontal Medium Medium 40
100
30
120
Ball screw nut rotation vertical
Large
20
160
45
160
Ball screw nut rotation vertical
Medium Medium 40
120
25
120
Timing belt
Large
20
160
60
160
Timing belt
Medium Medium 30
120
40
120
Rack and pinion drives
Large
Low
20
160
60
160
Large
Medium 30
120
40
120
Medium Medium 40
100
20
100
Index table
Large
Medium 40
120
25
120
Index table
Small
High
80
120
20
100
Robot arm cylinder
Large
Low
15
160
60
160
Robot arm cylinder
Medium Medium 25
120
40
120
Other general-purpose
Medium Medium 30
100
30
150
Low
Low
Inertia Ratio (Pn004) is when fixed at 300%.
10-14
10-3 Manual Tuning
Inertia guide
The inertia is small.
5 times the rotor inertia max.
The inertia is medium.
5 to 10 times the rotor inertia max.
The inertia is large.
10 to 20 times the rotor inertia max.
Pn100 and Pn105 Position Loop Gain

This loop controls the number of pulses from encoder to be the designated number of pulses.
This is called an error counter, and when the pulse is equal to or lower than the specified value,
positioning is completed and the signal is output.
The ratio of maximum speed used and error counter is called a position loop gain.
Position loop gain [1/s] =
Command maximum speed [pps]

Error counter accumulated pulse (P)
For the position loop gain, use the inverse of Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102) as
a guide for setting. Setting Pn102 to 100 ms results in 10 [1/s].
There will be no overshooting under this condition. To quicken positioning, increase the value
of position loop gain. If the value is too large, overshooting or vibration will occur. In such
cases, set the value smaller.
If the speed loop or the current loop is vibrating, adjusting the position loop does not eliminate
the vibration.
Response to the position loop gain adjustment is illustrated below.
If the position loop gain is high, an overshooting occurs.
Command operation pattern
Actual operation
Speed
(r/min)
10
Time t
If the position loop gain is low, positioning completion speed becomes slow.
Actual operation
Speed
(r/min)
Time t
10-15
10-3 Manual Tuning
Pn101 and Pn106 Speed Loop Gain

The speed loop gain determines the responsiveness of the servo.
This value becomes the response frequency if the Inertia Ratio (Pn004) is set correctly.
Increasing the value of the speed loop gain improves the responsiveness and quickens
positioning, but vibration is more likely to occur. Adjustment must be made so vibration will not
occur.
This is related to Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102), and by increasing the
integration time constant, the speed loop gain value can be increased.
If the speed loop gain is low, the speed response becomes slow and a large overshooting occurs.
In such case, increase the speed loop gain.
Actual operation
Speed
(r/min)
Time t
If the speed loop gain is high, vibrations are more likely to occur. Vibration or resonance may not
disappear.
In such case, decrease the speed loop gain.
Speed
(r/min)
10
Actual operation
Time t
10-16
10-3 Manual Tuning
Pn102 and Pn107 Speed Loop Integral Time Constant

The speed loop integral time constant also determines the responsiveness of the servo.
If the speed loop integral time constant is low, vibration or resonance occur.
In such case, increase the speed loop integral time constant.
Speed
(r/min)
Actual operation
Time t
If the speed loop integral time constant is high, the response is delayed. The servo rigidity
becomes weak.
In such case, decrease the speed loop integral time constant.
Speed
(r/min)
Actual operation
Time t
10
The torque command filter applies a filter so the current command from the speed loop
becomes smooth. The result is a smooth current flow which suppresses vibration.
The default setting of the filter time constant is 80 (0.8 ms).
Increase the value to reduce vibration. Increasing the value slows the response.
As a guide, aim for about 1/25 of the Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102).
Also, the torque command filter reduces vibration due to the machine rigidity.
This is related to Speed Loop Gain (Pn101), and if Pn101 is too large, increasing the torque
command filter time constant does not reduce vibration.
If there is machine resonance such as with the ball screw, vibration is reduced by using notch
filters such as Pn201, Pn204, Pn207 and Pn210. Or, enable the adaptive filter.
10-17
Pn104 and Pn109 Torque Command Filter Time Constant (Current Loop Input
Adjustment)
10-3 Manual Tuning
Other Adjustments
If the torque loop is saturated because the acceleration time is short or the load torque is large,
an overshooting occurs for the speed response. In such case, increase the acceleration time
to prevent the torque from saturating.
Acceleration torque required to

accelerate according to
the command pattern
Overshooting occurs
by the delay from
the command.
Momentary maximum torque at

which motor output is possible
TORQUE CONTROL Mode Adjustment

This is a torque control based on the speed control loop where the speed limit is the speed limit
value from Speed Limit (Pn304, Pn305, Pn306 or Pn307). This section describes the settings
for these speed limit values.
Setting Speed Limit Values

If Torque Command/Speed Limit Selection (Pn317) is 0, speed limit will be the value set by Speed
Limit Value Setting (Pn321) and Reverse Direction Speed Limit Value Setting (Pn322). If Torque
Command/Speed Limit Selection (Pn317) is 1, the speed limit will be the value obtained by
converting the voltage applied to analog input 1 with Torque Command Scale (Pn319).
When the motor speed approaches the speed limit value, the speed control switches to that using
Speed Limit Value Setting (Pn321) and Reverse Direction Speed Limit Value Setting (Pn322) as
commands.
To have a stable operation while the speed is limited, the parameter should be set according to
"SPEED CONTROL Mode Adjustment".
The torque may not be produced as specified by the torque command because the input to the
torque limit section will be small, when the speed limit values in Speed Limit Value Setting (Pn321)
and Reverse Direction Speed Limit Value Setting (Pn322) are too low, when the speed loop gain
is too low, or when the speed loop integral time constant is 10,000 (disabled).
10
10-18
Error and Maintenance

This chapter explains the items to check when problems occur, error diagnosis
using the alarm LED display and measures, error diagnosis based on the
operating condition and measures, and periodic maintenance.
11-1 Error Processing.........................................................11-2

Preliminary Checks When a Problem Occurs............................... 11-2
Precautions When a Problem Occurs........................................... 11-3
Replacing the Servomotor and Servo Drive.................................. 11-4
11-2 Warning List ................................................................11-5

11-3 Alarm List ....................................................................11-6
11-4 Troubleshooting .......................................................11-11
Error Diagnosis Using the Alarm Displays .................................. 11-11
Error Diagnosis Using the Operation Status ............................... 11-18
11-5 Periodic Maintenance...............................................11-22

Servomotor Limit......................................................................... 11-22
Servo Drive Limit......................................................................... 11-23
Replacing the Absolute Encoder Battery .................................... 11-24
11
11-1 Error Processing

Preliminary Checks When a Problem Occurs
This section explains the preliminary checks and analytical softwares required to determine the
cause of a problem if one occurs.
Checking the Power Supply Voltage

Check the voltage at the power supply input terminals.
Main circuit power supply input terminal (L1, L2, L3)
R88D-KTxL
(50 to 400 W)
: Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60 Hz
R88D-KTxH
(100 W to 1.5 kW) : Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz
(750 W to 1.5 kW) : 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz
(2 to 15 kW)
: 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC (170 to 253 V) 50/60 Hz
R88D-KTxF
(750 W to 15 kW) : 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC (323 to 528 V) 50/60 Hz
Control circuit power supply input terminal (L1C, L2C)
R88D-KTxL
(50 to 400 W)
R88D-KTxH
(100 W to 1.5 kW) : Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz
(2 to 15 kW)
R88D-KTxF
(750 W to 15 kW) : 24 VDC (21.6 to 26.4 V)
If the voltage is out of this range, there is a risk of operation failure, so be sure that the power
supply is correct.
Check the voltage of the sequence input power supply. (+24 VIN terminal (CN1 pin 7))
Within the range of 11 to 25 VDC.
If the voltage is out of this range, there is a risk of operation failure. Be sure that the power supply
is correct.
Checking Whether an Alarm Has Occurred

Make an analysis using the 7-segment LED display area in the front of the driver and using the
Operation keys.
When an alarm has occurred
Check the alarm display that is displayed (xx) and make an analysis based on the alarm that is indicated.
11
When an alarm has not occurred

Make an analysis according to the error conditions.
In either case, refer to "11-4 Troubleshooting" (P.11-11) for details.
11-2
Precautions When a Problem Occurs

When checking and verifying I/O after a problem has occurred, the driver may suddenly start
to operate or suddenly stop, so always take the following precautions.
You should assure that anything not described in this manual is not possible with this product.
Precautions
Disconnect the wire before checking for cable breakage. Even if you test conduction with the cable
connected, test results may not be accurate due to conduction via bypassing circuit.
If the encoder signal is lost, the motor may run away, or an error may occur. Be sure to disconnect
the motor from the mechanical system before checking the encoder signal.
When measuring the encoder output, perform the measurement based on the SENGND (CN1 pin
13).
When an oscilloscope is used for measurement, it will not be affected by noise if measurements
are performed using the differential between CH1 and CH2.
When performing tests, first check that there are no persons in the vicinity of the equipment, and
that the equipment will not be damaged even if the motor runs away.
Before performing the tests, verify that you can immediately stop the machine using an immediate
stop even if it runs away.
11
11-3
Replacing the Servomotor and Servo Drive

Use the following procedure to replace the Servomotor or Servo Drive.
Replacing the Servomotor

1. Replace the motor.
2. Perform origin adjustment (for position control).
When the motor is replaced, the motor's origin position (phase Z) may deviate, so origin
adjustment must be performed.
Refer to the Position Controller's manual for details on performing origin adjustment.
3. Set up the absolute encoder.

If a motor with an absolute encoder is used, the absolute value data in the absolute encoder will
be cleared when the motor is replaced, so setup is again required.
The multi-rotation data will be different from before it was replaced, so reset the initial Motion
Control Unit parameters.
For details, refer to "Absolute Encoder Setup"(P.9-5).
Replacing the Servo Drive

1. Copy the parameters.
Use the Operation keys on the driver to write down all the contents of parameter settings.
2. Replace the driver.

3. Set the parameters.
Use the Operation keys on the driver to set all the parameters.
4. Set up the absolute encoder.

If a motor with an absolute encoder is used, the absolute value data in the absolute encoder will
be cleared when the driver is replaced, so setup is again required.
The multi-rotation data will be different from before it was replaced, so reset the initial Motion
Control Unit parameters.
For details, refer to "Absolute Encoder Setup"(P.9-5).
11
11-4
11-2 Warning List
11-2 Warning List

This is a function to output a warning signal before the protective function operates to notify the overload and other statuses in advance.
Set the warning output type to Warning Output Selection 1 (Pn440) and Waning Output Selection 2 (Pn441).
Each warning automatically returns to the status before it occurred once the system recovers from the error.
However, for the time set in the Warning Latch Hold Time Selection (Pn627), the warning status will be held.
To clear the warning during the latch hold time, do so by performing the same procedures as alarm clear.
Warning List
Warning
number
Latch*1
Warning name
Warning occurrence Warning Output Selection Warning Mask

condition
(Pn440, Pn441) *2
Setting (Pn638)
A0
Overload
warning
The load ratio is 85% or

1
more of the protection level.
bit 7
A1
Excessive
regeneration
warning
The regeneration load

ratio is 85% or more of
the protection level.
bit 5
Always
Battery voltage is 3.2 V
fixed with
or less.
no time limit
bit 0
Battery warning
A2
A3
A4
Fan warning
Encoder
communications
warning
The fan stop status

continues for 1 s.
bit 6
The number of continuous

occurrences of encoder
communications error
exceeded the specified
value.
bit 4
The encoder detects

the overheating
warning.
bit 3
A5
Encoder
overheating
warning
A6
Vibration
detection
warning
bit 9
Limit detection
warning
Always
The limit of the capacitor
fixed with
or the fan is below the
no time limit specified value.
bit 2
External scale
error warning
The external scale

detected a warning.
bit 8
The number of occurrences of

external scale
exceeded the specified value.
10
bit 10
A8
A9
External scale
communications
warning
*1. The "" fields can be set to 1 to 10 s in the Warning Latch Hold Time Selection (Pn627) or to the notime limit setting. However, the battery warning is fixed with no time limit.
*2. Select the type of warning to be output in warning output 1 (WARN1) and warning output 2 (WARN2)
in the Warning Output Selection 1 (Pn440) and Warning Output Selection 2 (Pn441).If you set this to
0, all warning types will be output.Do not set it to a value other than above.
*3. Each warning detection can be masked using the Warning Mask Setting (Pn638).The table shows the
corresponding bits.
The warning detection is masked when the bit = 1.
11-5
A7
11
Vibration is detected.
11-3 Alarm List
11-3 Alarm List

If the driver detects an error, the alarm output (ALM) will turn ON, the power drive circuit in the
driver will turn OFF, and the alarm code will be displayed.
Refer to "Error Diagnosis Using the Alarm Displays"(P.11-11) for appropriate alarm measures.
Release the alarm using one of the following methods. Remove the cause of the alarm first.
Input the alarm reset input (RESET) signal.
Turn OFF the power supply, then turn it ON again.
Execute the alarm reset on the Parameter Unit.
However, some alarms can only be reset by turning the power supply OFF then ON again. Refer
to the next item "Alarm List".
If you release an alarm while the operation command (RUN) is turned ON, the Servo Drive will
start operation as soon as the alarm is released, which is dangerous. Be sure to turn OFF the RUN
before clearing the alarm.
If the RUN is always ON, first check safety sufficiently before clearing the alarm.
When an alarm occurs, the servodrive latches the status of the servodrive just before the alarm
occurence. Those latched values can be read with the software tool for diagnostics. Refer to the
CX-Drive for details.
The stop mode in case of an alarm may vary depending on the Immediate stop attribute in each
alarm.
11
11-6
11-3 Alarm List
Alarm List
Error
number
Attribute
Error detection function
Main
Sub
11
12
Detection details and probable

cause
History
Can be Immediate
cleared stop *1
Control power supply

undervoltage
The DC voltage of the main circuit fell

below the specified value while the
operation command (RUN) input was ON.
Overvoltage
The DC voltage in the main circuit is

abnormally high.

(Insufficient voltage between P
and N)
The DC voltage of the main circuit is

low.
Main power supply

undervoltage
(AC cut-off detection)
A location was detected where the

main circuit AC power supply is cut off.
Overcurrent
Overcurrent flowed to the IGBT.
IPM error
Motor power line ground fault or short circuit.
Driver overheat
The temperature of the driver radiator

exceeded the specified value.
Overload
Operation was performed with torque

significantly exceeding the rating for several
seconds to several tens of seconds.
The regenerative energy exceeds the

processing capacity of the
Regeneration Resistor.
Regeneration Tr error
An error was detected in a driver

regeneration drive Tr.
Encoder communications
disconnection error
The encoder wiring is disconnected.
error
An encoder communications error

was detected.
23
data error
Communications cannot be performed

between the encoder and the driver.

24
The error counter accumulated pulse

exceeds the set value for the Error
Counter Overflow Level (Pn014).
During full closing control, difference

between position of load from external
scale and position of motor due to encoder
was larger than the pulse number set by
Excessive Hybrid Error Setting (Pn332).
Overspeed
The motor rotation speed exceeded the set

value of the Overspeed Level set (Pn513).
Overspeed 2
The motor rotation speed exceeded the set

value of the Overspeed Level set 2 (Pn615).
Command pulse
A command pulse frequency error was

detected.
Pulse regeneration error
The pulse regeneration output

frequency exceeded the limit.
13
14
15
16
0
0
18
1
21
25
0
26
1
27
28
11-7
Excessive hybrid error
11
11-3 Alarm List
Error
number
Attribute
Main
Sub
29
30
History
Safety input error
Safety input signal turned OFF.
Interface input duplicate

allocation error 1
A duplicate setting for the interface

input signals was detected.
Interface input duplicate

allocation error 2
Interface input function

number error 1
Interface input function

number error 2
Interface output function

number error 1
An undefined number was detected in
the interface output signal allocations.
Interface output function

number error 2
Counter reset allocation

error
The counter reset function was allocated

to something other than input signal SI7.
Command pulse
prohibition input allocation
error
The command pulse prohibition input

function was allocated to something
other than input signal SI10.
Overrun limit error
The motor exceeded the allowable

operating range set in the Overrun
Limit Setting (Pn514) with respect to
the position command input.
Data in the Parameter Save area was

corrupted when the power supply was turned
ON and data was read from the EEPROM.
The checksum for the data read from

the EEPROM when the power supply
was turned ON does not match.
Drive prohibition input

error
The forward drive prohibition and reverse
drive prohibition inputs are both turned OFF.
Excessive analog input 1
A current exceeding the Speed

Command/Torque Command Input
Overflow Level Setting (Pn424, Pn427
or Pn430) was applied to the analog
command input (pin 14).
The voltage supplied to the absolute

encoder is lower than the specified value.
The multi-rotation counter of the absolute

encoder exceeds the specified value.
The motor rotation speed exceeds the

specified value when only the battery power
supply of the absolute encoder is used.
34
36
0 to
2
37
0 to
2
38
0
0
39
1
2
Parameter error
40
41
42
An undefined number was detected in

the interface input signal allocations.

Absolute encoder system
down error
ABS
Absolute encoder counter
11-8
Can be Immediate
cleared stop *1
Error counter value based on the

encoder pulse reference exceeded
229 (536,870,912).
33
11

cause
overflow error
ABS
Absolute encoder
overspeed error ABS
11-3 Alarm List
Error
number
Attribute
Main
Sub
43
44

cause
History
Encoder initialization error

protection
An encoder initialization error was

detected.
Absolute encoder 1rotation counter error
A 1-turn counter error was detected.
Can be Immediate
cleared stop *1
A multi-rotation counter error or

phase-AB signal error was detected.
Absolute encoder status

error ABS
The rotation of the absolute encoder is

higher than the specified value.
A serial incremental encoder phase Z

pulse irregularity was detected.
A logic error was detected in the CS

signal for serial incremental encoder.
External scale connection

error
An error was detected in external

scale connection.
External scale
An error was detected in external
communications data error scale communications data.
External scale status error 0 An external scale error code was

detected.
External scale status error 1
ABS
45
Absolute encoder multirotation counter error
ABS
47
48
49
50
51
0
55
87
95
An error was detected in the external

scale phase A connection.
Phase-B connection error

scale phase B connection.
Phase-Z connection error

scale phase Z connection.
Forced alarm input error
The forced alarm input signal was

input.
The combination of the Servomotor

and Servo Drive is not appropriate.
The encoder was not connected when
the power supply was turned ON.
*1. An immediate stop means an error causing an immediate stop when the Pn510 "Stop Selection for
Alarm Generation" is set to 4 to 7. For details, refer to "Stop Selection for Alarm Generation"(P.8-50).
11-9
11
Phase-A connection error
11-3 Alarm List
Extended Alarms
Error No.
Detection details and probable cause
Main
Sub
46
Absolute Error
Absolute encoder status is abnormal
51
External Scale Error
External scale status is abnormal
U-Phase Phase Current

Detection Error
U-Phase Current Detection Value is abnormal when

objecting servo off to servo on
W-Phase Phase Current

Detection Error
W-Phase Current Detection Value is abnormal when

objecting servo off to servo on
Current Detection Syste

Error
Setting value of Current Detection Systemu is abnormal
AI2 Input Error
Analog Input Voltage 2 value is abnormal +11 V over is

lasting 200 ms
AI3Input Error
Analog Input Voltage 3 value is abnormal +11 V over is

lasting 200 ms
72
Thermal Error
Hardware is abnormal
73
VDC Detection System

Error
Hardware is abnormal
Internal RAM Error
Microcomputer is abnormal
Internal ROM Error
Internal ROM is abnormal
77
Stacke Error
Lack of Stack Area
78
Encoder EEPROM Error
Encoder EEPROM Check is abnormal
96
LSI Initialization Error
Falut of MNM1223 initialization
97
Setting Error
Encoder type and control mode are unmatching
99
Hardware Error
Power curcuit detects the something hardware error
99
Encoder Setting Error
Encoder Setting is not correct
70
71
76
11
11-10
11-4 Troubleshooting
If an error occurs in the machine, determine the error conditions from the alarm displays and
operation status, identify the cause of the error, and take appropriate measures.
Error Diagnosis Using the Alarm Displays

Alarm
display
11
Error conditions
Power supply
undervoltage
Status when error

occurs
Occurs when the servo is

turned ON.
Occurs when the power

supply is turned ON.
Cause
Increase the power

supply capacity.
Change the power
supply.
Turn ON the power
supply.

is insufficient.
Increase the power

supply capacity.
Phase loss
Connect the phases (L1,

L2, L3) of the power
supply voltage correctly.
For single-phase, connect
to L1 and L3 correctly.
The main circuit power

supply is damaged.
Control PCB error.
Replace the driver.
Main circuit power

supply voltage is out of
allowable range.
Change the main circuit

power supply voltage to
within allowable range.
Load inertia is too

large.
Calculate the regenerative

energy and connect an
Resistor with the required
regeneration absorption
capacity.
Extend the deceleration time.
Overvoltage
Main circuit power

supply voltage is out of
allowable range.
Change the main circuit

power supply voltage to
within allowable range.
Gravitational torque is
too large.
Add a counterbalance
to the machine to lower
gravitational torque.
Reduce the descent speed.
capacity.
Occurs during descent

(vertical axis).
11-11
11
The power supply

voltage is low.
Momentary power
interruption occurred.
is insufficient.
The power supply voltage
is reduced because the
main power supply is OFF.
The main power supply
is not input.
Occurs when the motor is

decelerating.
12
Measures
Alarm
display
13
Error conditions
Status when error

occurs
Cause
Measures

turned ON.
The power supply

voltage is low.
Momentary power
interruption occurred.
is insufficient.
The power supply voltage
is reduced because the
main power supply is OFF.
The main power supply
is not input.
Check the power

supply capacity.
Change the power
supply.
Turn ON the power
supply.
Extend the Momentary
Hold Time (Pn509).
Main circuit power

supply undervoltage
Correctly connect the phases

of the power supply voltage.
Phase loss
Correctly connect the
single-phase.

The main circuit power
supply is damaged.
Control PCB damage.
Replace the driver.
Control PCB error
Replace the driver.
The motor power line is

short-circuited or
ground-faulted
between phases.
Repair the short-circuited or

ground-faulted power line.
Measure the insulation
resistance at the motor
and, if there is a short
circuit, replace the motor.
Phase U, phase V, phase

W, and the ground are
wired incorrectly.
Wire correctly.
Motor winding is
burned out.
Measure the winding

resistance, and if the
winding is burned out,
replace the motor.
The relay for the

dynamic brake has
been deposited.
Do not frequently input

the operation
command (RUN) input.
Do not operate the
system by turning the
servo ON and OFF.
Use a motor that is

appropriate for use
with the driver.
The pulse input timing

is too soon.
Wait at least 100 ms before

inputting pulses after
turning ON the operation
command (RUN).
The resistor in the

driver is abnormally
overheating.
Reduce the ambient

temperature of the
driver to 55C or lower.
If the relay does not
click when the power
supply is turned ON,
replace the driver.
11
14
11-12
Overcurrent

turned ON.
Alarm
display
15
Error conditions
Driver overheat
Status when error

occurs
Occurs during operation.

turned ON.
16
The ambient
temperature is too
high.
The load is too large.
Measures
Lower the ambient
temperature.
Increase the capacity
of the driver and motor.
Reduce the load.
Extend the acceleration/
deceleration times.
There is an error in the

Wire the motor power
motor wiring (the wiring or
cable correctly.
the connections are faulty).
The electromagnetic
brake is ON.
Turn OFF the brake.
The Servo Drive is faulty.
Replace the driver.
The effective torque

Review the load conditions
exceeds the rated torque.
and operating conditions.
The initial torque exceeds Review the motor
the maximum torque.
capacity.
Overload
Occurs when the motor is

decelerating.
Unusual noise or
vibration is caused by
faulty gain adjustment.
Adjust the gain

correctly.
The Servo Drive is faulty.
Replace the driver.
Load inertia is too

large.

with the required regeneration
absorption capacity.
The deceleration time

is too short.
The motor rotation
speed is too high.
Reduce the motor

rotation speed.
capacity.
The operating limit of the

Set Pn016 to 2.
Resistor is limited to 10% duty.
"Parameters Details".
Gravitational torque is
too large.
Occurs during descent
(vertical axis).
Add a counterbalance
to the machine to lower
gravitational torque.
Reduce the descent speed.
capacity.
The operating limit of the

Set Pn016 to 2.
Resistor is limited to 10% duty.
"Parameters Details".
11-13
11
18
Cause
Alarm
display
21
Error conditions
Encoder
Status when error

occurs
Cause
Measures
The encoder is
disconnected.
Connector contacts
are faulty.
Fix the locations that

are disconnected.
Wire correctly.
The encoder is wired

incorrectly.
Wire correctly.
The encoder is damaged. Replace the motor.
23
Encoder
communications data
error

Or, occurs during
operation.
The driver is faulty.
Replace the driver.
The motor is
mechanically held.
If the motor shaft is

held, release it.
The encoder signal line

is wired incorrectly.
Wire correctly.
Noise on the encoder wiring

causes incorrect operation.
Take measures against

noise on the encoder wiring.
The encoder power

supply voltage has
dropped (especially
when the cable is long.)
Provide the required

encoder power supply
voltage (5 VDC 5%).
The motor power line or the

encoder wiring is incorrect.
Wire correctly.
Occurs when the motor

does not rotate even when
The motor is
command pulses are
mechanically held.
input.
Occurs during high-speed

rotation.
11
24
Control PCB error
Replace the driver.
The motor power line

or the encoder wiring is
incorrect.
Wire correctly.
Gain adjustment is
insufficient.
Adjust the gain.
Occurs when a long string

The acceleration/
of command pulses is
deceleration is too rapid.
given.
25
11-14
Excessive hybrid
deviation error
If the motor shaft is

held, release it.
Release the
electromagnetic brake.

deceleration times.
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.

Select a suitable motor.
The set value for the

Error Counter Overflow
Level (Pn014) is
exceeded.
Increase the set value

of Pn014.
Reduce the rotation speed.
Reduce the load.
deceleration times.
Occurs for full closing

control.
There is deviation
between the load
position according to
the external scale and
the motor position
according to the
encoder.
Check the motor and

load connection.
Check the external scale
and driver connection.
Check the external scale
load position and encoder
motor position settings.
Alarm
display
Error conditions
Status when error

occurs
Cause
The speed command
input is too large.
26
Overspeed
The setting for the Electronic

Gear Ratio Numerator
(Pn009, Pn500 to Pn502) is
Occurs during high-speed
not appropriate.
rotation.
The maximum rotation
speed is exceeded due
to overshooting.
Occurs when torque limit

switching function is used.
27
28
Command pulse error
Pulse regeneration
error
Occurs when control

signal is input or
command is input.
Measures
Set the command pulse
frequency to 500 Kpps max.
Set the electronic gear
ratio numerator so that the
command pulse frequency
is 500 Kpps max.
Adjust the gain.
Reduce the maximum
command speed.
Wire correctly.
The set value for the

Overspeed Detection
Level setting (Pn513)
is exceeded.
If torque limit switching

function is used, correctly
set the allowable operating
speed for Pn014.
The command pulse

input frequency
exceeded the limit.
Check the command

pulse input.
of Pn532.
The setting for the Electronic

Gear Ratio Numerator
(Pn009, Pn500 to Pn502) is
not appropriate.
Set the electronic gear

ratio numerator so that the
command pulse frequency
is 500 Kpps max.
The pulse regeneration

output frequency
exceeded the limit.
Check the set value of

Pn011 and Pn503.
Set Pn533 to 0 to
disable the function.
Check that the motor
rotates according to
the position command.
Check on the torque
monitor that the output
torque is not saturated.
Adjust the gain.
Increase the setting for
Pn013 or Pn524 to the
maximum.
Wire the encoder correctly.
29
The error counter value

for the encoder pulse
reference exceeded
229 (536,870,912).
30
Safety input error
Safety input signal

turned OFF.
Check the statuses of

safety inputs 1 and 2.
There is a duplicate
setting in the I/O signal
function allocation.
Specify the undefined
number with the I/O
signal function allocation.
Set the function

allocation correctly.
There is a mistake in the

counter function allocation.
Allocate to SI7.
There is a mistake in the

command pulse prohibition
input function allocation.
Allocate to SI10.
33
Interface I/O allocation Occurs when the power

error
11-15
11
The encoder is wired

incorrectly.
Alarm
display
Error conditions
Status when error

occurs
Measures
The Overrun Limit

Setting (Pn514) was
exceeded during
operation.
Adjust the gain.

of Pn514.
Set Pn514 to 0 to
disable the function.
There are data errors in the

parameters that were read.
Reset all parameters.
The driver is faulty.
Replace the driver.

The parameters that

were read are corrupt.
Replace the driver.
38
Drive prohibition input

error

turned ON.
Or, occurs during
operation.
The forward drive

prohibition (POT) input
and reverse drive
prohibition (NOT) input
were both OFF at the
same time.
Wire correctly.
Replace the limit sensor.
Check whether the
power supply for control
is input correctly.
Check whether the setting for
Drive Prohibition Input
Selection (Pn504) is correct.
39
Excessive analog input 1 Occurs during operation.
The voltage input to pin

14 is too high.
Reduce the input voltage.

Change the value for
Pn424, Pn427, and Pn430.
40
Absolute encoder
system down error

The voltage supplied to

the absolute encoder is
low.
Set up the absolute encoder.

Connect the battery
power supply.
The multi-rotation counter of

the absolute encoder
exceeds the specified value.
Properly set the Operation

Switch when Using
Absolute Encoder (Pn015).

The motor rotation speed

Reduce the motor
exceeds the specified
rotation speed and
value when the battery
supply power.
power supply is turned ON.
Check the wiring.
The wiring is incorrect.
34
36
37
Overrun limit error
Parameter error

ABS
41
Absolute encoder
counter overflow error
ABS
42
Absolute encoder
overspeed error
ABS
11
Cause
44
Absolute encoder 1-turn Occurs when the power

counter error ABS
The encoder is faulty.
Replace the
Servomotor.
45
Absolute encoder multiOccurs when the power

rotation counter error
The encoder is faulty.
Replace the
Servomotor.
47
Absolute encoder
status error ABS
The motor was moving

when the power supply
was turned ON.
Do not let the motor

move when the power
48
Encoder phase-Z error Occurs during operation.
A phase Z pulse from

the encoder was not
detected regularly.
Replace the motor.
49
Encoder PS signal error Occurs during operation.
A logic error was

Replace the motor.
detected in the PS
signal from the encoder.
ABS
11-16

Alarm
display
50
51
Error conditions
External scale
External scale status

error
Status when error

occurs
Cause
Measures
The disconnection detection

function was activated
because communications
between the external scale
and driver were interrupted.
Wire correctly.
are disconnected.
There was a
in data from external
scale.
Provide the required external

scale power supply voltage.
Wire correctly.
Connect the shield to FG.
An external scale error

code was detected.
Check the external

scale specifications.
From the front panel, clear
the external scale error,
then turn the power supply
OFF, then ON again.
Check the connection.
55
Phases-A, B and Z
connection error
A disconnection or
other error was
detected in external
scale phase A, phase B,
or phase Z connection.
87
Forced alarm input error Occurs during operation.
The forced alarm input

signal was input.
Turn OFF the EMGSTOP signal.
The motor and driver

combination is incorrect.
Use a correct
combination.
The encoder wiring is

disconnected.
Wire the encoder wiring.

are disconnected.
95

11
11-17
Error Diagnosis Using the Operation Status

Symptom
Probable cause
Items to check
Measures
The PWR LED

The power supply cable is
indicator does not wired incorrectly.
light when the
power supply is
turned ON.
Check whether the power supply

input is within the allowed power
supply voltage range.
Supply the correct power

supply voltage.
Check whether the power supply

input is wired correctly.
Wire correctly.
The motor does

not rotate even if
commands are
input from the
controller.
(Continued on next
page)
In MONITOR mode, check whether

the RUN signal is ON or OFF.
The operation command

(RUN) is OFF.
The forward drive prohibition In MONITOR mode, check whether

(POT) and reverse drive
the POT signal and NOT signal are
prohibition (NOT) are OFF. ON or OFF.
The CONTROL mode is not Check the CONTROL mode
correct.
Selection (Pn001).
The error counter reset
(ECRST) is ON.
In MONITOR mode, check whether

the ECRST signal is ON or OFF.
The COMMAND PULSE

mode (Pn007) selection is
incorrect.
Check the controller's command

pulse type and the Servo Drive's
command pulse type.
The zero speed designation In MONITOR mode, check whether

(VZERO) is OFF.
the VZERO signal is ON or OFF.
Turn ON the operation

command (RUN).
Wire correctly.
Turn ON the POT and
NOT signals.
If the POT and NOT inputs are
not used, set them to be disabled.
Set the CONTROL mode to
match the command type.
Turn OFF the ECRST signal.
Wire correctly.
Set the Servo Drive's pulse
type to match the controller's
command pulse type.
Turn ON the VZERO signal.
Wire correctly.
The internally set speeds are not set. Check the set value of Pn304 to Pn311. Set the desired speeds.
11
The No. 1 Torque Limit

(Pn013) or No. 2 Torque
Limit (Pn522) is set to 0.
Check the set value of Pn013 and

Pn522.
Return the set value to the

default setting.
The motor power cable is

wired incorrectly.
Check the wiring.
Wire correctly.
The encoder cable is wired

incorrectly.
The control I/O connector
(CN1) is wired incorrectly.
Check the command pulse's wiring. Wire correctly.

Check the command pulse type.

command pulse type.
Check the command pulse's voltage. Connect a resistor that

matches the voltage.
The power supply is not ON. Check whether the power supply is
Turn ON the power supply.
ON and check the PWR LED indicator.
Check the voltage across the power Wire the power supply's ON
supply terminals.
circuit correctly.
The speed command is
disabled.
11-18
Check if the speed command

method is correct.
Set the external analog

command correctly.
Set the internal speed correctly.
Symptom
The motor does
not rotate even if
commands are
input from the
controller.
(Continued from
previous page)
Probable cause
Items to check
The torque command is

disabled.
Check if the torque command input

method is correct.
The CW input and CCW

input are ON at the same
time.
Check the command pulse's wiring.
Servo Drive is faulty.
Measures
Set the torque command
correctly.
Input the pulse signal either to
the CW input or CCW input.
Always turn OFF the
terminal that is not input to.
Replace the Servo Drive.
The motor operates The motor power cable is

Check the wiring of the motor power Wire correctly.
momentarily, but
wired incorrectly.
cable's phases U, V, and W.
then it does not
The encoder cable is wired incorrectly. Check the encoder cable's wiring.
Wire correctly.
operate after that.
Set the correct command pulse input.
The motor rotates The command pulse input is Check the command pulse type.
without a
incorrect.
Check the command pulse's voltage. Connect a resistor that
command.
matches the voltage.
Replace the Servo Drive.
The motor rotates in The CW input and CCW

the reverse direction input connections are
from the command. reversed.

command pulse type.
Connect the CW pulse signal

to the CW input and the CCW
pulse signal to the CCW input.
Motor rotation is
unstable.
The motor power cable or

encoder cable is wired
incorrectly.
Check the wiring of the motor power Wire correctly.

cable's phases U, V, and W and
check the encoder cable's wiring.
The coupling system between the

motor shaft and the mechanical
system has eccentricity or loose
screws, or the load torque is
fluctuating due to engagement
between pulleys or gears.
Check the mechanical system's

coupling section.
Servo Drive is faulty.
Review and adjust the

machine.
Try rotating the motor without a load.

(Disconnect it from the mechanical
system.)
The load's moment of inertia Try rotating the motor without a load. Reduce the load.
exceeds the Servo Drive's (Disconnect it from the mechanical
Replace the Servomotor
allowable value.
system.)
and Servo Drive with
higher capacity models.
The pulse signal line's
connections are loose.
Wire correctly.

command pulse type.

command pulse type.
The gain is wrong.
The CN1 input signal is

chattering.
Check the operation command (RUN), Wire correctly so that there is

error counter reset (ECRST), zero speed no chattering.
designation (VZERO), internally set
speed selection 1 (VSEL1) and internally
set speed selection 2 (VSEL2).
The ambient temperature is Check that the ambient temperature Lower the ambient temperature
too high.
around the motor is 40C or less.
around the motor to 40C or
less. (Use a fan or air
conditioner.)
Ventilation is obstructed.
Check to see whether anything is

blocking ventilation.
The motor is overloaded.
Try rotating the motor without a load. Reduce the load.

(Disconnect it from the mechanical
Replace the Servomotor
system.)
and Servo Drive with
higher capacity models.
The motor is vibrating.
Improve ventilation.
11-19
11
The motor is
overheating.
Check the pulse signal line's wiring

at the controller and Servo Drive.
Symptom
Probable cause
Items to check
Measures
The motor holding Power is supplied to the

brake is
holding brake.
ineffective.
Check whether power is supplied to Configure a circuit that cuts

the holding brake.
power supply to the holding brake
when the motor stops and the
load is held by the holding brake.
The motor does not The load inertia is too large.

stop or is hard to stop
even if the operation
command (RUN) is
The stop circuit failed.
turned OFF while the
motor is rotating.
Check the following:

Review the load conditions, and
Is the load too large?
replace the Servomotor and Servo
Is the motor rotation speed too high? Drive with appropriate models.
Replace the driver.
The motor is
There are problems with the
producing unusual machine's installation.
noises or the
machine is
vibrating.
(Continued on next
page)
There is a problem with the
bearings.
Check whether the Servomotor's

mounting screws are loose.
Retighten the mounting

screws.
Check whether the axes are

misaligned in the coupling.
Align the coupling.
The gain is wrong.
Check whether the coupling is unbalanced. Adjust the coupling's balance.

Check for noise or vibration around
the bearings.
Contact your OMRON dealer

or sales office.
The Speed Feedback Filter

Check the set value of Pn??.
Time Constant (Pn??) is wrong.
Return the set to 0 (default

set) or increase the set value.
Noise is entering the control I/O Check that it is a twisted-pair wire or Use control I/O signal cable
signal cable because the cable twisted-pair shielded cable with core that meets specifications.
does not meet specifications. wires that are at least 0.08 mm2.
11
Noise is entering the control I/O Check the length of the control I/O
signal cable because the cable is signal cable.
longer than the specified length.
Shorten the control I/O signal

cable to 3 m or less.
Noise is entering the cable

Check that it is a twisted-pair
because the encoder cable
shielded cable with core wires that
does not meet specifications. are at least 0.12 mm2.
Use encoder cable that meets

specifications.
Noise is entering the encoder Check the length of the encoder

cable because the cable is
cable.
longer than the specified length.
Shorten the encoder cable to

less than 50 m.
Noise is entering the signal lines Check the encoder cable for
because the encoder cable is damage.
stuck or the sheath is damaged.
Correct the encoder cable's

pathway.
Too much noise is entering

the encoder cable.
Check whether the encoder cable is Install the encoder cable

bound together with or too close to where it won't be subjected to
high-current lines.
surges.
The FG's potential is

fluctuating due to devices
near the Servomotor, such
as welding machines.
Check for ground problems (loss of

ground or incomplete ground) at
equipment such as welding
machines near the Servomotor.
Ground the equipment

properly and prevent currents
from flowing to the encoder
FG.
Errors are being caused by There are problems with mechanical Reduce the mechanical
excessive vibration or shock vibration or motor installation (such vibration or correct the
on the encoder.
as the precision of the mounting
Servomotor's installation.
surface, attachment, or axial offset).
11-20
Symptom
Probable cause
Items to check
The motor is
The machine and the motor Check whether the machine is
producing unusual are resonating.
resonating.
noises or the
machine is
vibrating.
(Continued from
previous page)
Measures
Readjust the torque
command filter time
constant.
If there is resonance, set
the Notch Filter 1
Frequency (Pn201), Notch
Filter 1 Width (Pn202), and
Notch Filter 1 Depth
(Pn203).
Vibration is
Inductive noise is occurring. Check whether the driver control
Shorten the control signal
occurring at the
signal lines are too long.
lines.
same frequency as
Check whether the control signal
Separate control signal
the power supply.
lines and power supply lines are not
lines from power supply
bound together.
lines.
Use a low-impedance
power supply for control
signals.
The position is
misaligned.
(Position
misalignment
occurs without an
alarm being
output.)
There is an error in the

Check whether the coupling of the
coupling of the mechanical mechanical system and the
system and the Servomotor. Servomotor is misaligned.
Correct the coupling between

the mechanical system and
the Servomotor.
Noise is entering the error

counter reset (ECRST).
Check whether the control signal

Separate the control signal
lines and power supply lines are not lines from the power lines or
bound together.
take other measures against
noise.
The gain is wrong.
The load inertia is large.

Inspect the following.
Is the load too large?
Is the motor rotation speed too
high?

Adjust the gain.
Review the load
conditions, and replace the
Servomotor and Servo
Drive with appropriate
models.
11
11-21
11-5 Periodic Maintenance
Caution
After replacing the unit, transfer to the new unit all data
needed to resume operation, before restarting the operation.
Never repair the product by disassembling it.
Servomotors and Servo Drives contain many components and will operate properly only when
each of the individual components is operating properly.
Some of the electrical and mechanical components require maintenance depending on
application conditions. Periodic inspection and replacement are necessary to ensure proper
long-term operation of Servomotors and Servo Drives. (Quotes from The Recommendation for
Periodic Maintenance of a General-purpose Inverter published by JEMA.)
The periodic maintenance cycle depends on the installation environment and application
conditions of the Servomotors and Servo Drives.
Recommended maintenance times are listed below for Servomotors and Servo Drives. Use
these for reference in periodic maintenance.
Servomotor Limit
The lifetime for the different motor parts is listed below.
Bearings:
20,000 hours
Oil seal:
5,000 hours
Encoder:
30,000 hours
These values presume an ambient motor operating temperature of 40C, within the allowable
axial load, rated operation (rated torque and rated rotation speed), and proper installation as
described in this manual.
The oil seal can be replaced.
11
The radial load during operation (rotation) on timing pulleys and other components contacting
belts is twice or more the still load. Consult with the belt and pulley manufacturers and adjust
designs and system settings so that the motor allowable axial load is not exceeded even during
operation. If a motor is used under a shaft load exceeding the allowable limit, the motor shaft can
break, and the bearings can burn out.
11-22
Servo Drive Limit

The lifetime for the different drive parts is listed below.
Aluminum electrolytic capacitors: 28,000 hours
(at an ambient driver operating temperature of 55C, constant output of rated torque, constant
output of rated rotation speed, and installation as described in this manual)
Axial-flow fan: 10,000 to 30,000 hours (The limit depends on the operating conditions.)
Inrush current prevention relay: Approx. 20,000 operations (The limit depends on the operation
conditions.)
When using the driver in continuous operation, use fans or air conditioners to maintain an ambient
temperature below 40C.
We recommend that ambient temperature and the power supply ON time be reduced as much as
possible to lengthen the service life of the driver.
The limit of aluminum electrolytic capacitors is greatly affected by the ambient operating
temperature. Generally, an increase of 10C in the operating ambient temperature will reduce
capacitor limit by 50%. Following equation shows an example for 25C: .
Lifetime 25C = Lifetime 55C 2
55
25----------------10 =
224000 hours
The aluminum electrolytic capacitors deteriorate even when the Servo Drive is stored with no
power supplied. If the driver is not used for a long time, we recommend a periodic inspection and
replacement schedule of 5 years.
If the Servomotor or Servo Drive is not to be used for a long time, or if they are to be used under
conditions worse than those described above, a periodic inspection schedule of 5 years is
recommended.
Upon request, OMRON will examine the Servo Drive and Servomotor and determine if a
replacement is required.
11
11-23
Replacing the Absolute Encoder Battery
ABS
Replace the absolute encoder backup battery if it has been used for more than 3 years or if an
absolute encoder system down error (alarm display No. 40) has occurred.
Replacement Battery Model and Specifications

Item
Specifications
Name
Absolute Encoder Backup Battery Unit
Model
R88A-BAT01G
Battery model
ER6V (Toshiba)
Battery voltage
3.6 V
Current
capacity
2,000 mA/h
Mounting the Backup Battery

Mounting the Battery for the First Time
Connect the absolute encoder battery to the motor, then set up the absolute encoder.Refer to
"Absolute Encoder Setup"(P.9-5).
Once the absolute encoder battery is attached, it is recommended that the control power
supply be turned ON and OFF once a day to refresh the battery.
If you neglect to refresh the battery, battery errors will occur due to voltage delay in the battery.
Replacing the Battery

If a battery warning occurs, the absolute encoder power supply must be replaced.
Replace the battery with the control power supply of the driver ON. If the battery is replaced
with the control power supply of the driver OFF, data held in the encoder will be lost.
Once the absolute encoder battery has been replaced, clear the battery warning by alarm clear
from the front panel. Refer to "Alarm Clear"(P.9-26) for information on clearing alarms.
11
Note. If the absolute encoder is cleared using the front panel or the absolute values are cleared using
communications, all error and multi-rotation data will be lost and the absolute encoder must be set
up. Refer to "Absolute Encoder Setup"(P.9-5).
11-24
Battery Mounting Method

1. Prepare the replacement battery (R88A-BAT01G).
R88A-BAT01G
2. Remove the battery box cover.
Raise the tabs and remove the cover.
3. Put the battery into the battery box.
11
Plug in the connector.
Insert the battery.
4. Close the cover to the battery box.

Close the battery box cover
by making sure the connector
wires are not pinched.
11-25
Appendix
This chapter provides connection examples using OMRON's PLC and Position
Controller, a list of parameters and Safety Certification.
12-1 Connection Examples ................................................12-2

12-2 Parameter List...........................................................12-12
12-3 Safety Certification ...................................................12-33
12
12-1 Connection Examples

Connection Example 1: Connecting to SYSMAC CJ1W-NC133/233/433
OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
T
Ground to
100 or less
CJ1W-NC133/233/433
Description
5-V power supply for pulse output
5-V ground for pulse output
No.
A4
A3
A1

CCW (+) output
X-axis
CCW () output
pulse
CW (+) output
output
CW () output
A2
A7
A8
A5
A6
Main circuit contact

surge suppressor
MC1 MC2 X1
5 VDC
CNA
L1C
L2C
L1
L2
L3
Reactor
MC1 MC2
5
6
3
4
+CCW
CCW
+CW
CW
30 ECRST
23
+Z
Z
24
39
INP
38 INPCOM
X-axis origin line-driver input A14

X-axis origin common A12
X-axis positioning completed input A11
A20
24 VDC
X-axis external interrupt input

X-axis origin proximity input
X-axis CCW limit input
X-axis CW limit input
X-axis emergency stop input
SUP
R88D-KTx
CN1
X-axis error counter reset output A9
Input common
MC2
MC1
Noise filter
X1
A15
A17
A19
A18
A16
X1
24 VDC
XB
+24VIN
29
RUN
31 RESET
10 BKIRCOM
36 ALMCOM
37 /ALM
11 BKIR
Shell
FG
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
CN2
R88M-Kx
Red Motor power cables
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
Encoder cables
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
12
Appendix
The example shows a 3-phase, 200-VAC input to the driver for the main circuit power supply. Be
sure to provide a power supply and wiring conforming to the power supply specifications for the
driver in use.
Incorrect signal wiring can cause damage to units and the driver.
Leave unused signal lines open and do not wire them.
Use mode 2 for origin search.
The diode recommended for surge absorption is the RU 2 (Sanken Electric Co., Ltd.) or the
equivalent.
Make the setting so that the servo can be turned ON/OFF with the RUN signal.
12-2
Connection Example 2: Connecting to SYSMAC CJ1W-NC113/213/413

MC2
OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Description
T
Ground to
100 or less
CJ1W-NC113/213/413
MC1
Noise filter
SUP
MC1 MC2 X1
R88D-KTx
CN1
No.
A1
24 VDC
0-V power supply for output A2

CCW (With resistance)
X-axis
CCW (Without resistance)
pulse
CW (With resistance)
output
CW (Without resistance)
A8
A7
A6
A5
X-axis error counter reset output

X-axis origin line-driver input
X-axis origin common
X-axis positioning completed input
A9
A14
A12
A11
Input common
A20

5
6
3
4
+CCW
CCW
+CW
CW
30 ECRST
+Z
23
24
Z
INP
39
38 INPCOM
7
X1
A15
A17
A19
A18
A16
X1
24 VDC
XB

surge suppressor
CNA
L1C
L2C
L1
L2
L3
Reactor
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
+24VIN
RUN
29
31 RESET
10 BKIRCOM
36 ALMCOM
37 /ALM
11 BKIR
Shell
FG
CN2
Encoder cables
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
12-3
12
Appendix
driver in use.
equivalent.
Connection Example 3: Connecting to SYSMAC CS1W-NC133/233/433

MC2
OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
T
Ground to
100 or less
CS1W-NC133/233/433
Description
No.
5-V power supply for pulse output A4
5-V ground for pulse output A3
24-V power supply for output A1
MC1
Noise filter
SUP
MC1 MC2 X1
R88D-KTx
CN1
5 VDC
24 VDC
CCW (+) output
X-axis
CCW () output
pulse
CW (+) output
output
CW () output
5
6
3
4

+CCW
CCW
+CW
CW
30 ECRST
23
+Z
Z
24
39
INP
38 INPCOM
X-axis origin line-driver input A16

X-axis origin common A14
X-axis positioning completed input A12
A24
CNA
L1C
L2C
L1
L2
L3
Reactor
MC1 MC2
A2
A7
A8
A5
A6
X-axis error counter reset output A10
Input common

surge suppressor
24 VDC
X1
A19
A21
A23
A22
A20
X1
24 VDC
XB
+24VIN
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
CN2
Encoder cables
29
RUN
31 RESET
10 BKIRCOM
36 ALMCOM
37
/ALM
11 BKIR
Shell
FG
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
12
Appendix
driver in use.
equivalent.
12-4
Connection Example 4: Connecting to SYSMAC CS1W-NC113/213/413 or C200HW-NC113/213/413

MC2
OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
T
Ground to
100 or less
CS1W-NC113/213/413
C200HW-NC113/213/413
Description
No.
A1
A2
X-axis CCW (With resistance)

pulse CCW (Without resistance)
output CW (With resistance)
CW (Without resistance)
A8
A7
A6
A5
X-axis error counter reset output

X-axis origin line-driver input
X-axis origin common
X-axis positioning completed input
A10
A16
A14
A12
Input common
A24
SUP
+CCW
CCW
+CW
CW
30 ECRST
23
+Z
Z
24
39
INP
38 INPCOM
7
A19
A21
A23
A22
A20
X1
X1
24 VDC
XB

surge suppressor
MC1 MC2 X1
R88D-KTx
CN1
5
6
3
4
24 VDC
MC1
Noise filter
CNA
L1C
L2C
L1
L2
L3
Reactor
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
+24VIN
29
RUN
31 RESET
10 BKIRCOM
36 ALMCOM
37
/ALM
11 BKIR
FG
Shell
CN2
Encoder cables
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
12-5
12
Appendix
driver in use.
equivalent.
Connection Example 5: Connecting to a SYSMAC Motion Control Unit

MC2
OFF ON MC1MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
CS1W-MC221/421 (V1)
DRV connector
Description
24-V input
24-V input ground
X-axis alarm input
X-axis operation command output
X-axis alarm reset output
X-axis SEN signal ground
X-axis SEN signal output
X-axis feedback ground
X-axis phase-A Input
X-axis phase-A Input
X-axis phase-B Input
X-axis phase-B Input
X-axis phase-Z Input
X-axis phase-Z Input
X-axis speed command
X-axis speed command ground
24-V output
24-V output ground
I/O connector
Description
24-V input
24-V input ground
Noise filter
R
S
T
Ground to
100 or less
No.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R88D-KTx
CN1
24 VDC
19
20
No.
1
2
4
6
10
14
24 VDC
XB
37
/ALM
29
RUN
31 RESET
13 SENGND *
20
SEN *
25 ZCOM
21
+A
22
A
49
+B
48
B
23
+Z
Z
24
14
REF
15 AGND
FG
Shell
7 +24VIN
36 ALMCOM
10 BKIRCOM
11 BKIR
MC1
SUP

surge suppressor
MC1 MC2
CNA
L1C
L2C
L1
L2
L3
Reactor
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
CN2
Encoder cables
24 VDC
Battery*
2.8 to 4.5 VDC
CN1
42
BAT *
43 BATGND *
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC

driver in use.
Connect terminals and wiring marked with an asterisk (*) when using an absolute encoder.
This wiring diagram is an example of X-axis wiring only. For other axes, connections must be
made in the same way with the driver.
Always short unused NC input terminals at the Motion Control Unit I/O connectors.
Appendix
12
12-6
Connection Example 6: Connecting to SYSMAC CP1H-YxxDT-D

OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
CP1H-Y20DT-D
T
Ground to
100 or less
MC2
SUP

surge suppressor
PL
Servo error display
MC1
Noise filter
X1
R88-KTx
CN1
MC1 MC2 X1
CNA
Reactor
Output terminal block

CW0+
Pulse CW0
Output CCW0+
0
CCW0
3
4
5
6
30
Origin search 0 (101 word, bit 02)

24-VDC input terminal (+)
24-VDC input terminal ()
COM (for 101 word, bit 00 to 03)
Input terminal block
Pulse 0 origin input signal (0 word, bit 00)
COM(0CH)
+CW
CW
+CCW
CCW
ECRST
39
INP
25 ZCOM
Z
19
7 +24VIN
24 VDC
Pulse 0 origin proximity input signal (0 word, bit 01)
X1
29
RUN
L1
L2
L3
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
CN2
Encoder cables
X1
10 BKIRCOM
36 ALMCOM
37 /ALM
XB
11
BKIR
Shell
FG
24 VDC
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
12-7
12
Appendix
Do not share the power supply for brakes (24 VDC) with the 24-VDC power supply for controls.
equivalent.
Connection Example 7: Connecting to SYSMAC CP1H-XxxDT-D/CP1L-xxxDT-D

OFF ON MC1MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Noise filter
R
S
T
Ground to
100 or less
CP1H-X40DT-D
MC2
SUP

surge suppressor
PL
Servo error display
MC1
X1 MC1 MC2 X1
R88-Kx
CN1
CNA
Reactor
1 +24VCW
CW
4
2 +24VCCW
6 CCW
Output terminal block

CW0 (100 word, bit 00)
Pulse COM (for 100 word, bit 00)
Output CCW0 (100 word, bit 01)
0 COM (for 100 word, bit 01)
30
Origin search 0 (101 word, bit 02)

24-VDC input terminal (+)
24-VDC input terminal ()
COM (for 101 word, bit 00 to 03)
Input terminal block
Pulse 0 origin input signal (0 word, bit 00)
ECRST
25 ZCOM
17 AGND
7 +24VIN
COM (0 word)
24 VDC
Pulse 0 origin proximity input signal (0 word, bit 01)
X1
29
RUN
L1
L2
L3
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
CN2
Encoder cables
X1
36 ALMCOM
10 BKIRCOM
37 /ALM
XB
11
BKIR
Shell
FG
24 VDC
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
12
Appendix
equivalent.
12-8
Connection Example 8: Connecting to SYSMAC CJ1M

OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Noise filter
R
S
T
Ground to
100 or less
CJ1M
X1
R88-KTx
CN1
Pulse
Output
0
Origin
input signal
Positioning
completion signal
Origin proximity
input signal
39
1 +24VCW
CW
4
2 +24VCCW
6 CCW
31
CCW output 32
24 VDC
0V/LD
24 VDC
0V/LD
24 VDC
0V/LD

surge suppressor
MC1 MC2 X1
PL
Servo error display
CNA
Reactor
24 VDC
CW output
SUP
MC1
Description
No.
Output power supply input 37
Output COM
MC2
30 ECRST
25 ZCOM
19
Z
35
1
5
13
17
2
6
INP
39
7 +24VIN
X1
29
RUN
10 BKIRCOM
36 ALMCOM
X1
37
/ALM
XB
11
BKIR
Shell
FG
L1
L2
L3
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
CN2
Encoder cables
24 VDC
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
12-9
12
Appendix
Use the power supply for command pulse (24 VDC) as a dedicated power supply.
equivalent.
Connection Example 9:
Connecting to a SYSMAC CS1W-HCP22-V1 Customizable Counter Unit
MC2
OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
CS1W-HCP22-V1
Special I/O connector
Description
No.
Output power supply 24 VDC A19
MC1
Noise filter
R
S
T
Ground to
100 or less
SUP
MC1 MC2 X1
R88D-KTx
CN1
24 VDC
A20
Common
A16
5
6
3
4
+CCW
CCW
+CW
CW
Phase-Z LD+
Phase-Z LD
I/O connector
Output 24 V
Error counter clear *1
Output common
Positioning completion signal *1
B5
A5
23
24
+Z
Z
Servo ON *1
Alarm reset *1
Origin proximity input signal *1
CCW limit input signal *1
CW limit input signal *1
Input common *1
B5
B4
B12
B8
B9
A10
CCW (1.6 k)
Pulse
Output CW (1.6 k)
1
A18
A1
B3
B1
B7
30 ECRST
39
7
X1
X1
24
VDC
XB

surge suppressor
CNA
L1C
L2C
L1
L2
L3
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
INP
+24VIN
29
RUN
31 RESET
28 INPCOM
36 ALMCOM
/ALM
37
11 BKIR
10 BKIRCOM
FG
Shell
Reactor
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
CN2
Encoder cables
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
*1. The I/O signals for the HCP22 depend on the memory allocations in the Internal Memory area.
Change the wiring according to the allocations.
12
Appendix
equivalent.
12-10
Connection Example 10:

Connecting to a SYSMAC CS1W-HCA12/22-V1 Customizable Counter Unit
MC2
OFF ON MC1 MC2
NFB
3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
CS1W-HCA12/22-V1
Special I/O connector
Description
Phase-A LD+
Phase-A LD
Phase-B LD+
Phase-B LD
Phase-Z LD+
Phase-Z LD
Analog output 1 (+)
Analog output 1 ()
Analog output 2 (+)
Analog output 2 ()
I/O connector
Origin proximity input signal *1
CCW limit input signal *1
CW limit input signal *1
Input common *1
Servo ON *1
Alarm reset *1
T
Ground to
100 or less
SUP
24 VDC
X1
24
VDC
21
22
49
48
23
24
14
15
16
17
+A
A
+B
B
+Z
Z
REF
AGND
TREF2
AGND
+24VIN
XB
CNA
L1C
L2C
L1
L2
L3
RUN
RESET
Reactor
MC1 MC2
CNB
B1
B3
B2
U
V
W
36 ALMCOM
/ALM
37
29
31

surge suppressor
MC1 MC2 X1
R88D-KTx
CN1
No.
B1
A1
B3
A3
B5
A5
A19
A20
B19
B20
B12
B8
B9
A10
B5
B4
MC1
Noise filter
R88M-Kx
White
Blue
Green/Yellow
CN2
Encoder cables
11 BKIR
10 BKIRCOM
Shell
FG
Brake cables
XB
B
24 VDC
*1. The I/O signals for the HCA12/22 depend on the allocations in the Internal Memory area. Change the
wiring according to the allocations.
12-11
Appendix
equivalent.
12
12-2 Parameter List
12-2 Parameter List

Some parameters are enabled by turning the power supply OFF and then ON again. (Those
parameters are indicated in the table.) After changing these parameters, turn OFF the power
supply, confirm that the power supply indicator has gone OFF, and then turn ON the power supply
again.
Do not change the parameters marked "Reserved". Do not change the settings marked
"Reserved".
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
Basic Setting Parameters
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Set the relation between the command

direction and the motor rotation direction.
Rotation
000 Direction
Switching
The +command indicates the forward

1
direction as viewed from the shaft end (CW).
The +command indicates the reverse

direction as viewed from the shaft end (CCW).
0 to 1
Yes
0 to 6
Yes
0 to 6
See
Note 1
0 to 31
250
0 to
10,000
Select the driver CONTROL mode.
001
Position control (pulse train command)
Speed control (analog command)
Torque control (analog command)
CONTROL
3
mode Selection
No. 1: Position control

No. 2: Speed control
No. 1: Position control

No. 2: Torque control
No. 1: Speed control

No. 2: Torque control
Full closing control
12
Appendix
Set the OPERATION mode for realtime autotuning.

0
Disabled
Emphasizes stability
Emphasizes positioning
REALTIME
002 AUTOTUNING 3
mode selection
If there is an unbalanced load like in a

vertical axis.
When friction is large (unbalanced load

is estimated also).
Monitor mode in combination with the tool
Tuning where you can select the applied

algorithms with Pn632.
Realtime
Set the machine rigidity for executing
003 Autotuning Machine
realtime autotuning.
Rigidity Setting
004 Inertia Ratio
12-12
Set the load inertia as a percentage of the

motor rotor inertia.
Parameter
name
Command
005 Pulse Input
Selection
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Select the command pulse input.

0
0 to 1
Yes
0 to 1
Yes
90 phase difference (A/B) signal inputs

for rotation in forward direction
Forward pulse/reverse pulse for rotation

in forward direction
1
0 to 3
Yes
90 phase difference (A/B) signal inputs

for reverse rotation
Feed pulse/direction signal for rotation

in reverse direction
Pulse
0 to 220
Yes
Electronic Gear Set the electronic gear ratio.

009 Ratio
If Pn009 = 0, the encoder resolution is set as 0
Numerator 1
the numerator.
0 to 230
Electronic Gear
010 Ratio
Denominator
1 to 230
P/r
0 to
262,144
Yes
0 to 3
Yes
0 to 500
Set the range of the error counter overflow

Error Counter
Command
100000
0 to 227
level. Detection of error counter overflow
Overflow Level
unit
level error will be disabled if the set value is 0.
Photocoupler input
Input for line driver only
Command Pulse Set the command pulse count direction.

Rotation Direction
0 Forward direction
006
Switching
Selection
1 Reverse direction
Set the COMMAND PULSE mode.
COMMAND
007 PULSE mode
Selection
008
011
Electronic Gear Set the number of command pulses per

Integer Setting motor rotation.
10000
10000
Encoder Dividing Set the number of phase A and phase B

2500
Numerator
output pulses, respectively per motor rotation.
Select the phase B logic for pulse
regeneration output and the output source.
0
Encoder Output
Direction
012
1
Switching
Selection
2
Phase B logic: Reversed

Output source: Encoder
Phase B logic: Not reversed

Output source: External scale
Phase B logic: Reversed
Output source: External scale
013 No. 1 Torque Limit Set the No. 1 limit value for the output torque of the motor. 500
014
Select the absolute encoder usage method.

0
Operation
Switch when
1
015
Using Absolute
Encoder
2
Used as absolute encoder.

Used as an incremental encoder.
0 to 2
Yes
Used as absolute encoder.

(Multi-rotation counter overflows are
ignored.)
12-13
12
Appendix
Phase B logic: Not reversed

Output source: Encoder
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Select the Regeneration Resistor used.
Regeneration
016 Resistor
Selection
Use the Built-in Resistor.

Triggering of regeneration overload
protection (alarm display No. 18)
depends on the Built-in Resistor (with
approx. 1% duty).
Use an External Resistor.

The regeneration processing circuit
See
operates and regeneration overload
Note 2
protection (alarm display No. 18) is
triggered when the operating rate of the
Regeneration Resistor exceeds 10%.
Use an External Resistor.

Regeneration overload protection
(alarm display No. 18) does not operate.
No Regeneration Resistor
All regeneration power is processed
with built-in capacitors.
0 to 3
Yes
0 to 4
Yes
Select the type of load ratio calculation for

the External Regeneration Resistor.
0
External
017 Regeneration
Resistor Setting 1
Regeneration load ratio is 100% when

operating rate of the External
Regeneration Resistor is 10%.
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Note 1: Pn003 default settings:

12
(1) Pn016 = 0 - For 200V drives of 750 W or upper and 400V drives
(2) Pn016 = 3 - For 200V drives of less than 750 W
12-14
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
Appendix
Gain Adjustment Parameters
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
100 Position Loop Gain Set the position loop gain 1.
See
Note 1
0.1/s
101 Speed Loop Gain Set the speed loop gain 1.
See
Note 2
0.1 Hz 1 to 32,767
0 to 30,000
102
Speed Loop Integral

See
Set the speed loop integration time constant 1.
Time Constant
Note 3
0.1 ms
1 to
10,000
103
Speed Feedback
The speed feedback filter 1 can be set to one
0
Filter Time Constant of 6 values.
0 to 5
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
See
Torque Command
Set the time constant for the torque filter 1.
Note 4
Filter Time Constant
0.01
ms
0 to
2,500
105 Position Loop Gain 2 Set the position loop gain 2.
See
Note 5
0.1/s
0 to 30,000
106 Speed Loop Gain 2 Set the speed loop gain 2.
See
Note 6
0.1 Hz 1 to 32,767
104
Speed Loop
107 Integration Time Set the speed loop integration time constant 2. 10000
Constant 2
0.1 ms
1 to
10,000
Speed
Feedback Filter The speed feedback filter 2 can be set to one
0
108
Time Constant of 6 values.
2
0 to 5
Torque
Command Filter
See
109
Set the time constant for the torque filter 2.
Time Constant
Note 7
2
0.01
ms
0 to
2,500
300
0.1%
0 to
1,000
50
0.01
ms
0 to
6,400
0.1%
0 to
1,000
0.01
ms
0 to
6,400
0 to 1
110
Speed FeedSet the speed feed-forward amount.

forward Amount
Speed FeedSet the speed feed-forward filter time

111 forward
constant.
Command Filter
112
Torque FeedSet the torque feed-forward amount.

forward Amount
Torque Feed113 forward

Set the torque feed-forward filter.
Command Filter
GAIN
SWITCHING
114 INPUT
OPERATING
mode Selection
Execute optimum tuning using the gain

switching function.
0
Gain 1 (PI/P switching enabled)
Gain 1 and gain 2 switching available
Select the gain switching condition for

position control.
It is necessary that Pn114 be set to 1.
Always gain 1
Always gain 2
Switching using gain switching input (GSEL)
3
SWITCHING
115 mode in
4
Position Control
5

Always gain 1
0 to 10
Command speed
Command pulses received
Positioning completion signal (INP) OFF
Actual motor speed
10 Combination of command pulse input and speed
12-15
Appendix
12
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Gain Switching
Set the delay time for switching from gain 2
116 Delay Time in
50
to gain 1.
Position Control
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
0.1 ms
0 to
10,000
50
0 to
20,000
33
0 to
20,000
0.1 ms
0 to
10,000
0 to 5
Gain Switching
121 Delay Time in
0
to gain 1.
Speed Control
0.1 ms
0 to
10,000
Gain Switching
122 Level in Speed Set the gain switching level.
Control
0 to
20,000
Gain Switching
123 Hysteresis in
Set the hysteresis for gain switching.
Speed Control
0 to
20,000
0 to 3
Gain Switching
125 Delay Time in
0
to gain 1.
Torque Control
0.1 ms
0 to
10,000
Gain Switching
126 Level in Torque Set the gain switching level.
Control
0 to
20,000
Gain Switching
127 Hysteresis in
Torque Control
0 to
20,000
117
Gain Switching Level

Set the gain switching level.
in Position Control
Gain Switching
118 Hysteresis in
Position Control
119
Position Gain
Set the position gain switching time for gain
33
Switching Time switching.
Select the gain switching condition for speed
control.
0
Always gain 1
1
SWITCHING
120 mode in Speed
Control
2
Always gain 2
(GSEL)
Speed command change amount
Command speed
Select the gain switching condition for

torque control.
12
Appendix
0
SWITCHING
124 mode in Torque
1
Control
12-16
Always gain 1
Always gain 2

(GSEL)
12-2 Parameter List

12
Appendix
12-17
12-2 Parameter List
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
Vibration Suppression Function Parameters
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Set the operation of the adaptive filter.
200
Adaptive Filter
Selection
Notch 1
201 Frequency
Setting
Appendix
12-18
Disabled
1 enabled. Frequency limited after adaptation.
2 enabled. Frequency limited after adaptation. 0
1 enabled. Adaptation performed at all times.
2 enabled. Adaptation performed with 1

filter at all times.
0 to 4
Set the notch frequency of resonance

suppression notch filter 1.
5000
Hz
50 to
5,000
202
Notch 1 Width
Setting
Set the notch width of the resonance

0 to 20
203
Notch 1 Depth
Setting
Set the notch depth of resonance

0 to 99

5000
Hz
50 to
5,000
Notch 2
204 Frequency
Setting
12
205
Notch 2 Width
Setting

0 to 20
206
Notch 2 Depth
Setting

0 to 99
Notch 3
207 Frequency
Setting

This is set automatically when an adaptive
notch is enabled.
5000
Hz
50 to
5,000
Notch 3 Width
208
Setting

notch is enabled.
0 to 20
Notch 3 Depth
209
Setting

notch is enabled.
0 to 99
Notch 4
210 Frequency
Setting

notch is enabled.
5000
Hz
50 to
5,000
Notch 4 Width
211
Setting

notch is enabled.
0 to 20
Notch 4 Depth
212
Setting

notch is enabled.
0 to 99
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Select the vibration filter switching method.
213
214
Vibration
Frequency 1
Vibration
Frequency 2
Vibration Filter
217
2 Setting
218
Vibration
Frequency 3
When VS-SEL1 input open:

When VS-SEL1 input shorted:
When VS-SEL1 open and VS-SEL2 open:

Vibration filter 1 enabled
When VS-SEL1 shorted and VS-SEL2 open:
0
When VS-SEL1 open and VS-SEL2
shorted:
When VS-SEL1 shorted and VS-SEL2
shorted:
Forward direction:
Reverse direction:
Vibration
Frequency 4
Vibration Filter
221
4 Setting
0 to 3
Set the vibration frequency 1. The function is

0
enabled if the set value is 10 (= 1 Hz) or greater.
0.1 Hz
0 to
2,000
Finely adjust damping control function 1. If

torque saturation occurs, lower this setting;
0
to increase responsiveness, raise this
setting.
0.1 Hz
0 to
1,000

0
enabled if the set value is 10 (= 1 Hz) or greater.
0.1 Hz
0 to
2,000

0
setting.
0.1 Hz
0 to
1,000

enabled if the set value is 10 (= 1 Hz) or
0
greater.
0.1 Hz
0 to
2,000

0
setting.
0.1 Hz
0 to
1,000

enabled if the set value is 10 (= 1 Hz) or
0
greater.
0.1 Hz
0 to
2,000

0
setting.
0.1 Hz
0 to
1,000
0.1 ms
0 to
10,000
Set the time constant of the FIR filter for the

0
position command.
0.1 ms
0 to
10,000
Position
Set the time constant of the first-order lag
222 Command Filter
filter for the position command.
Time Constant
Smoothing
223 Filter Time
Constant
12-19
12
Appendix
Vibration Filter
219
3 Setting
220
Enabled
Vibration Filter
Selection
Vibration Filter
215
1 Setting
216
12-2 Parameter List
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
Speed, Torque Control, and Full Closing Control Parameters
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Select the speed command when using speed control.
Command
300 Speed
Selection
Speed
Command
301
Direction
Selection
302
Appendix
12-20
Analog speed command
No. 1 Internally Set Speed to No. 4

Internally Set Speed (Pn304 to Pn307)

Internally Set Speed (Pn304 to Pn306),
analog speed command

Internally Set Speed (Pn304 to Pn311)
0 to 3
0 to 1
500
(r/min)/ 0 to
V
2,000
Select the method for designating the direction for the

speed command
0
By analogue command polarity
By digital input VSIGN
Speed Command Set the input gain for the analog speed
Scale
command input.
Analog Speed
Command
303 Rotation
Direction
Switching
12
Set the polarity for analog speed commands.

0
+Voltage: Forward direction

-Voltage: Reverse direction
+Voltage: Reverse direction

-Voltage: Forward direction
0 to 1
304
No. 1 Internally Set the No. 1 internal speed command

Set Speed
value.
r/min
305

Set Speed
value.
r/min
306

Set Speed
value.
r/min
307

Set Speed
value.
r/min
308

Set Speed
value.
r/min
309

Set Speed
value.
r/min
310

Set Speed
value.
r/min
311

Set Speed
value.
r/min
-20,000
to 20,000
Soft Start
312 Acceleration
Time
Set the acceleration processing acceleration

0
time for speed commands.
ms/
0 to
(1,000
10,000
r/min)
Soft Start
313 Deceleration
Time
Set the deceleration processing acceleration

0
time for speed commands.
ms/
0 to
(1,000
10,000
r/min)
Parameter
name
S-curve
Acceleration/
314
Deceleration
Time Setting
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Set the acceleration/deceleration

processing S-curve time for speed
commands.
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
ms
0 to
1,000
0 to 3
30
r/min
10 to
20,000
0 to 2
The direction depens on the polarity of

0
the analogue torque command
0 to 1
The direction depens on a digital input

(TSIGN)
0.1 V/
100%
10 to 100
0 to 1
r/min
0 to
20,000
Reverse Direction
Switch the speed limit value according to the
0
322 Speed Limit
direction.
Value Setting
r/min
0 to
20,000
0 to 2
Yes
Select the function of the zero speed

designation input (ZEROSPD).
Zero Speed
315 Designation
Selection
316
Position Lock
Level Setting
Disabled
The speed command is 0.
0
If the speed command is 0 and the
actual speed is less than the zero speed
designation, the servo is locked.
If the speed command is less than the zero

speed designation level, the speed command
becomes 0 and the servo is locked.
Set the threshold for position lock moving.

Select the torque command and speed limit value.
Torque
Command/
317
Speed Limit
Selection
Torque
Command
318
Direction
Selection
319
Torque command: Analog input 1

Speed limit: Pn321 set value

Speed limit: Analog input 1

Speed limit: Pn321 and Pn322 set values
Select the method for selecting the direction

for the torque command.
Torque
Set the input gain for analog torque
Command Scale command input.
30
321
Speed Limit
Value Setting
Set the speed limit value.
12
Select the external feedback pulse type.

0
External
323 Feedback Pulse 1
Type Selection
2
Phase AB output
Serial communications (Incremental
Serial communications (Absolute

12-21
Appendix
Set the analog torque command input polarity.

Analog Torque
Command
320
0 Forward operation
0
Rotation Direction
Switching
1 Reverse operation
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
External Feedback
Pulse Dividing
Set the external feedback pulse dividing
324
Numerator
numerator.
Selection
0 to 220
Yes
External Feedback
Set the external feedback pulse dividing
325 Pulse Dividing
denominator.
Denominator
10000
1 to 220
Yes
0 to 1
Yes
0 to 1
Yes
16000
Command
1 to 227
unit
Yes
Rotation 0 to 100
Yes
Reverse the external feedback pulse count

External
direction by changing the setting.
Feedback Pulse
326
0
Direction
0 Count direction not reversed
Switching
1 Count direction reversed
Set disconnection detection in the Phase-Z
unconnected state when a phase AB output
type external feedback pulse is used.
External
327 Feedback Pulse
Phase-Z Setting 0
Enabled
Disabled
Internal/External
Feedback Pulse Set the threshold for feedback pulse
328
Error Counter
deviation errors.
Overflow Level
Internal/External
Clear to 0 the feedback pulse error value for
329 Feedback Pulse
0
each set rotation speed.
Error Counter Reset
Appendix
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
400
Input Signal
Selection 1
Set the input signal 1 function and logic.
855309
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
401
Input Signal
Selection 2
848729
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
402
Input Signal
Selection 3
953985
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
403
Input Signal
Selection 4
394758
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
404
Input Signal
Selection 5
4108
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
405
Input Signal
Selection 6
197379
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
406
Input Signal
Selection 7
3847
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
407
Input Signal
Selection 8
263172
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
408
Input Signal
Selection 9
328965
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
12
12-22
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
Interface Monitor Setting Parameters
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
409
Input Signal
Selection 10
3720
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
410
Output Signal
Selection 1
Set the output signal 1 function allocation.
197379
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
411
Output Signal
Selection 2
131586
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
Do not change the set value.
65793
0 to
Yes
00FFFFFFh
0 to 21
412 Not used

413
Output Signal
Selection 4
Select the type for analog monitor 1.

0
Motor speed
Torque command
Encoder Position Error
Full closing Error
Hybrid Error
9 P-N voltage
Analog Monitor
416
10 Regeneration load ratio
1 Selection
11 Overload load ratio
12 Forward direction torque limit

13 Reverse direction torque limit
14 Speed limit value
15 Inertia Ratio
16 Analog input 1
12
17 Analog input 2
18 Analog input 3
20 Driver temperature
21 Encoder 1-rotation data
417
Analog Monitor
Set the output gain for analog monitor 1.
1 Scale Setting
0 to
214,748,364
418
Select the type for analog monitor 2.

Analog Monitor
The set values for this parameter are the
2 Selection
same as Analog Monitor 1 Type (Pn416).
0 to 21
419
Analog Monitor
Select the output gain for analog monitor 2. 0
2 Scale Setting
0 to
214,748,364
12-23
Appendix
19 Reserved
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Select the analog monitor output voltage method.

0
421
Analog Monitor
Output Setting 1
2
Output range: -10 to 10 V

Data output: Positive, negative
Output range: 0 to 10 V
0 to 2
0.359 mV
-5,578 to
5,578
Output range: 0 to 10 V
422 Analog Input 1 Offset Set the analog input 1 offset.

423
Analog Input 1 Filter

Set the analog input 1 filter.
Time Constant
0.01
ms
0 to
6,400
424
Excessive
Analog Input 1
0.1 V
0 to 100
5.86 mV -342 to 342
Set the voltage after offset for the excess

level of analog input 1 input voltage.

426

Time Constant
0.01
ms
0 to
6,400
427
Excessive
Analog Input 2
0.1 V
0 to 100
5.86 mV -342 to 342


429

Time Constant
0.01
ms
0 to
6,400
430
Excessive
Analog Input 3
0.1 V
0 to 100
431
Positioning
Set the allowed number of pulses for the
Completion Range 1 positioning completion range.
10
Command 0 to
unit
262,144
0 to 3

Set the judgment conditions for positioning completion output.
12
Appendix
Positioning
Completion
432
Condition
Selection
12-24
Positioning completion output turns ON

when the position error is within the
Positioning Completion Range 1 (Pn431).
Positioning completion output turns ON when the

position error is within the Positioning Completion
Range 1 (Pn431) and there is no position command.
Positioning completion output turns ON when the 0

zero speed detection signal is ON, the position
error is within the Positioning Completion Range
1 (Pn431), and there is no position command.
Positioning completion output turns ON when

the position error is within the Positioning
Completion Range 1 (Pn431) and there is no
position command. The ON status will then be
held until the next position command is received.
433
Set the positioning completion hold time.
Hold Time
1 ms
0 to
30,000
434
Zero Speed
Detection
50
r/min
10 to
20,000
Speed
Set the detection threshold for speed conformity
output (V-COIN) with the difference between
50
435 Conformity
Detection Range the speed command and the actual speed.
r/min
10 to
20,000
Set the detection threshold for zero speed

(ZSP).
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Rotation Speed
Set the detection threshold for speed
436 for Motor Rotation
reached output (AT-SPEED).
Detection
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
1000
r/min
10 to
20,000
437
Brake Timing
when Stopped
Set the operation time for the mechanical

brake at stop.
1 ms
0 to
10,000
438
Brake Timing
Set the operation time for the mechanical
during Operation brake during operation.
1 ms
0 to
10,000
439
Brake Release
Speed Setting
30
r/min
30 to
3,000
Yes
0 to 10
441
Select the warning type for warning output 2.

Warning Output
The relationships among the set values for this parameter 0
Selection 2
are the same as for Warning Output Selection 1 (Pn440).
0 to 10
442
Positioning
Set the allowable number of pulses for the
Completion Range 2 second positioning completion range.
Command 0 to
unit
262,144
Set the speed threshold for mechanical

brake output judgment during operation.
Select the warning type for warning output 1.
440
No
Overload warning
Excessive regeneration warning
Warning Output 3
Selection 1
4
Battery warning
Fan warning
Encoder communications warning
Encoder overheating warning
External scale error warning
10 External scale communications error warning
10
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
Expansion Setting Parameters
Explanation
0 to 230
0 to 230
0 to 230
Encoder Dividing Set the denominator when the number of pulses per
0
Denominator
motor rotation in pulse regeneration is not an integer.
0 to
262,144
Yes
500
503
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
12-25
12
Appendix
Electronic Gear
Set the electronic gear ratio.
Ratio Numerator 2 If Pn500, Pn501, Pn502 = 0, the encoder
resolution is set as the numerator.
Electronic Gear
501
Ratio Numerator 3
or
or
Electronic Gear
502
Ratio Numerator 4
Default
setting
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Set the operation to be performed upon forward/

reverse direction drive prohibition input.
0
Drive
504 Prohibition
Input Selection 1
Forward or reverse direction drive

prohibition input enabled
1
0 to 2
Yes
The torque in the drive prohibit direction is

disabled, and the dynamic brake is activated.
0
disabled, and free-run deceleration is performed.
0 to 2
Yes
1
2

disabled, and an immediate stop is performed.
0 to 9

prohibition input disabled
prohibition input enabled
Make the setting upon drive prohibition input.

Stop Selection
for Drive
505
Prohibition
Input
Set the stop operation when the servo is turned OFF.
506
Appendix
12
12-26
Stop Selection
with Servo OFF
During deceleration: Dynamic brake

After stopping: Dynamic brake
Error counter: Clear
During deceleration: Free-run


After stopping: Servo free


Error counter: Hold

Error counter: Hold

Error counter: Hold

Error counter: Hold


Parameter
name
Stop Selection
with Main
507
Power Supply
OFF
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Set the stop operation when the main power

supply is turned OFF.
0
The set values for this parameter are the same
as Stop Selection with Servo OFF (Pn506).
0 to 9
Undervoltage
Select whether to trip the LV or turn OFF the
1
Alarm Selection servo if there is a main power supply alarm.
0 to 1
1 ms
70 to 2,000 Yes
0 to 7
511 Immediate Stop Torque Set the torque limit for immediate stops.
0 to 500
Overload Detection
512
Set the overload detection level.
Level Setting
0 to 500
0 to
20,000
508
509 Momentary Hold Time Set the main power supply alarm detection time. 70
Set the alarm sequence.
Stop Selection
510 for Alarm
Generation




During Immediate stop alarm

deceleration: Immediate stop



Overspeed Detection
Set the overspeed error detection level.
Level Setting
r/min
514
Overrun Limit
Setting
10
0.1
0 to
Rotation 1,000
0 to 3
Yes
0 to 1
Set the motor over-travel distance for

position commands.
Select from one of 4 values for the IF read cycle.
Control Input
515 Signal Read
Setting
Alarm Reset
516 Condition
Setting
0.166ms
0.333 ms
1 ms
1.666 ms
Set the alarm clear input detection method.

0
120 ms
Follow the Control Input Signal Read Setting (Pn515).
12-27
Appendix
513
12
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Set the counter clear input signal clear conditions.

0
Disabled
Clears the error counter with the level.

(Shorted for 500 s or longer)
Error Counter
517 Reset Condition 2
Selection
Clears the error counter with the level.

(Shorted for 1 ms or longer)
Command
Pulse
518
Prohibition
Input Setting
Clears the error counter with the edge. (Change

from open to shorted for 100 s or longer)
Clears the error counter with the edge.

(Change from open to shorted 1 ms or longer)
0 to 4
0 to 1
0 to 4
0 to 1
Yes
0 to 6
0 to 500
Enable or disable the command pulse

prohibition input signals (INH).
0
Enabled
Disabled
Select the signal read cycle for the command pulse prohibition input.
Command
Pulse
519 Prohibition
Input Read
Setting
0.166ms
0.333 ms
1 ms
1.666 ms
0.166 ms
Select the positioning completion range and

error counter overflow level setting unit.
520
Position Setting
Unit Selection 0
1
Command unit
Encoder unit
Set the forward or reverse direction torque

limit selection method.
12
Appendix
521
Torque Limit
Selection
Use P-ATL and N-ATL as analog torque limit inputs.
Pn013 is the limit value for both forward

and reverse directions.
Forward operation: Set by Pn013,

Reverse operation: Set by Pn522.
1
When TL-SEL input is open: Use Pn013.
When TL-SEL input is shorted: Use Pn522.
When TL-SEL input is open: Forward direction,

use Pn013; Reverse direction, use Pn522.
When TL-SEL input is shorted: Forward direction,
use Pn525; Reverse direction, use Pn526.
522 No. 2 Torque Limit Set the No. 2 limit value for the motor output torque. 500
12-28
523
Torque Limit
Set the change rate (fluctuate) for when the
0
Switching Setting 1 torque limit is switched from No. 1 to No. 2.
ms/
100%
0 to
4,000
524
Torque Limit
Set the change rate (fluctuate) for when the
0
Switching Setting 2 torque limit is switched from No. 2 to No. 1.
ms/
100%
0 to
4,000
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
525
Forward External Set the forward direction torque limit for TL-SEL
500
Torque Limit
input when Pn521 Torque Limit Selection is set to 6.
0 to 500
526
Reverse External Set the reverse direction torque limit for TL-SEL
500
Torque Limit
input when Pn521 Torque Limit Selection is set to 6.
0 to 500
527
Analog Torque
Limit Scale
0.1 V/
100%
10 to 100
Set the gain of conversion for analog torque

30
limit input.
Select the data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED
initially when the control power supply is turned ON.
Command
unit
Motor speed
r/min
r/min
r/min
Torque command
Total encoder pulses
Pulse
Pulse
Total External Scale Feedback Pulses
Pulse
CONTROL mode
10 I/O signal status
11 Analog input value
12 Error factor, history
13 Warning number
528 Default Display 14 Regeneration resistance load ratio
%
%
16 Inertia Ratio
17 Reason for no rotation
18 Display of the number of I/O signal changes
times
20 Absolute encoder data
21 Absolute external scale position
22 Monitor for the number of encoder communications errors
times
23 Display of axis numbers for communication
24 Position error (encoder unit)
25 External scale error (external scale unit)
26
Hybrid error
Yes
12
Command
unit
27 P-N voltage
28 Soft version
29 Driver serial number
30 Motor serial number
0 to 35
Appendix
15 Overload load ratio
12-29
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
31 Accumulative operation time
32 Automatic Motor Recognition Function
33 Driver temperature
35 Safety status monitor
528 Default Display
531 Axis Number
Set the axis number for communication.
Command Pulse Set the maximum command pulse input.

532 Input Maximum
Setting
Pulse
Regeneration
533
Limit Output
Setting
Front Key
535 Protection
Setting
0 to 35
Yes
0 to 127
Yes
4000
kpps
250 to
4,000
Yes
0 to 1
Yes
0 to 1
Yes
Set the detection of pulse regeneration limit error.

0
Disabled
Enabled
Set the operation limit for the front panel.

0
Operation not blocked
Operation blocked
Appendix
12
12-30
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
12-2 Parameter List
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
Special Setting Parameters
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
Analog Torque
600 Feed-forward
Gain Setting
Set the input gain for analog torque feed

forward.
0 to 9 will be disabled.
0.1 V/
100%
0 to 100
604 Jog Speed
Set the command speed during JOG trial

operation (speed control).
300
r/min
0 to 500
605
Gain 3 Effective Set effective time of gain 3 of three-step gain

0
Time
switching.
0.1 ms
0 to
10,000
606
Gain 3 Ratio
Setting
50 to
1,000
607
Torque Command
Set offset torque to add to torque command. 0
Value Offset
-100 to
100
608
Forward Direction Set the value to add to a torque command

Torque Offset
for forward direction operation.
-100 to
100
609
Reverse Direction Set the value to add to a torque command

Torque Offset
for reverse direction operation.
-100 to
100
610
Function
Set the function expansion. The setting
Expansion Setting contents vary depending on the function.
0 to 63
611
Electric Current
Make fine adjustment on electric current
Response Setting response with default setting as 100%.
100
50 to 100
250
0 to
10,000
Alarm Generation Set the allowable time until stopping when

614 Allowable Time an immediate stop is actuated upon alarm
Setting
generation.
200
ms
0 to
1,000
Overspeed Detection During an immediate stop upon alarm

615 Level Setting at
generation, if the motor speed excess this
Immediate Stop
set value, this is an overspeed 2 error.
r/min
0 to
20,000
0 to 1
Yes
0 to 1
Yes
613 Inertia Ratio 2
Absolute
Interface
616
Function
Selection
Set the inertia ratio switching.
100
12
Select the absolute encoder data transfer.

0
Disabled
Enabled
Front Panel
617 Parameter
0
Write Selection
1
Writing not to be performed when a

parameter is changed.
Writing to be performed when a
parameter is changed.
618
Power Supply ON Set initialization time after power supply ON

0
Initialization Time to the standard 1.5 s plus some.
0.1 s
0 to 100
Yes
619
Finely adjust the encoder phase-Z width when

Encoder Phasethe number of output pulses per motor rotation 0
Z Setting
after the division of pulse output is not an integer.
Pulse
0 to
32,767
Yes
12-31
Appendix
Select the EEPROM write specifications

when a parameter is changed.
Parameter
name
Setting
Pn number
12-2 Parameter List
Explanation
Default
setting
Unit
Power
Setting supply
range OFF to
ON
External Scale
620 Phase-Z
Set the external scale phase-Z output width. 0
Expansion Setting
0 to 400
Yes
Serial Absolute
Set the phase-Z regeneration position when
621 External Scale
0
the serial absolute external scale is used.
Phase-Z Setting
Pulse
0 to 228
Yes
0 to 1
Yes
Phase-AB
Regeneration
Method Selection
622
for External Scale
of Phase-AB
Output Type
Select the regeneration method of pulse

outputs OA and OB when an external scale
of phase AB-output type is used.
0
Without signal regeneration
With signal regeneration
623
Disturbance Torque Set the compensation gain for disturbance

Compensation Gain torque.
-100 to
100
624
Disturbance Observer Set the filter time constant for disturbance

Filter Setting
torque compensation.
53
0.01
ms
10 to
2,500
0 to 10
Yes
Estimation result is finalized when load

estimation stabilizes.
For load characteristics change, the estimation

1
is made at time constant of approx. 7 minutes.
0 to 3

is made at time constant of approx. 4 seconds.

is made at time constant of approx. 2 seconds.
-32,768
to 32,767
r/min
1,000 to
3,000
Select the warning latch time.

Warning Latch
627 Hold Time
Selection
Latch time infinite
1Latch time in seconds

10
Set the load characteristics estimated speed
when realtime autotuning is enabled.
Realtime
Autotuning
631 Estimated
Speed
Selection
REALTIME
AUTOTUNING Set the CUSTOMIZATION mode detail for
632
CUSTOMIZATIO realtime autotuning.
N mode Setting
12
Appendix
Absolute Encoder
Set the pulse regeneration speed when the
Initial Pulse
1000
633
initial pulse is output.
Regeneration
Speed
12-32
634
Hybrid Vibration Set the hybrid vibration suppression gain

Suppression Gain during full closing control.
0.1/s
0 to
30,000
635
Hybrid Vibration Set the hybrid vibration suppression filter

Suppression Filter time constant during full closing control.
10
0.01
ms
0 to
6,400
Vibration
637 Detection
Threshold
Set the vibration detection threshold.

If torque vibration that exceeds this setting is
0
detected, the vibration detection warning will
occur.
0.1%
0 to
1,000
Warning Mask
638
Setting
Set the warning detection mask setting.If

you set the corresponding bit to 1, the
corresponding warning detection will be
disabled.
-32,768
Yes
to 32,767
12-3 Safety Certification
12
Appendix
12-33
Appendix
12
12-34
12
Appendix
12-35
Index
Index
Numerics
1,000-r/min motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 3-89
2,000-r/min motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-76
3,000-r/min motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 3-60
A
Absolute encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Absolute encoder backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Absolute encoder battery cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Absolute Encoder Initial Pulse Regeneration
Speed (Pn633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Absolute encoder reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Absolute encoder setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Absolute Interface Function Selection (Pn616) . . 8-61
Adaptive filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Adaptive Filter Selection (Pn200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Alarm clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Alarm clear attribute output (ALM-ATB) . . . . . . . . 3-49
Alarm Generation Allowable Time Setting (Pn614) 8-60
Alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Alarm output (/ALM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Alarm Reset Condition Selection (Pn516) . . . . . . 8-53
Alarm reset input (RESET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Allowable current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Analog Input 1 Filter Time Constant (Pn423) . . . . 8-40
Analog Input 1 Offset (Pn422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Analog input automatic offset adjustment. . . . . . . 9-27
Analog Monitor 1 Scale Setting (Pn417). . . . . . . . 8-38
Analog Monitor 1 Selection (Pn416) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Analog Monitor 2 Scale Setting (Pn419). . . . . . . . 8-38
Analog Monitor 2 Selection (Pn418) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Analog monitor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Analog Monitor Output Selection (Pn421) . . . . . . 8-39
Analog Speed Command Rotation Direction
Switching (Pn303) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Analog Torque Command Rotation Direction
Switching (Pn320) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Analog Torque Limit Scale (Pn527) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Axis Number (Pn531) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Backup battery input (BAT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Brake cable connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Brake cables (robot cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Brake cables (standard cables) . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-19
Brake interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Brake interlock output (BKIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Brake Release Speed Setting (Pn439). . . . . . . . . 8-45
Brake Timing during Operation (Pn438) . . . . . . . . 8-44
Brake Timing when Stopped (Pn437). . . . . . . . . . 8-44
C
Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Changing the mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Index-2
Clamp core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Command Pulse Input Maximum Setting (Pn532) 8-57
Command Pulse Input Selection (Pn005) . . . . . . . . 8-4
COMMAND PULSE mode Selection (Pn007) . . . . . 8-4
Command Pulse Prohibition Input Read Setting
(Pn519) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Command Pulse Prohibition Input Setting (Pn518) 8-53
Command Pulse Rotation Direction Switching
Selection (Pn006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Command Speed Selection (Pn300) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Communications connector specifications (CN3A) 3-56
Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Connector specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Connector-terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Connector-terminal block cables . . . . . . . . 2-25, 3-123
Connector-terminal Block Conversion Unit . . . . . 3-125
Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Control cable specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Control circuit connector specifications (CND) . . . 4-23
Control I/O connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Control I/O connector specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Control input circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Control input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Control Input Signal Read Setting (Pn515) . . . . . . 8-52
CONTROL mode Selection (Pn001) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
CONTROL mode switching (TVSEL) . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Control output circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Control output sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
D
Damping control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Default Display (Pn528). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Disturbance Observer Filter Setting (Pn624). . . . . 8-62
Disturbance Torque Compensation Gain (Pn623) 8-62
Drive Prohibition Input Selection (Pn504) . . . . . . . 8-47
Driver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Driver general specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Driver part functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Driver part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
E
EC directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Electric Current Response Setting (Pn611). . . . . . 8-60
Electronic gear function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Electronic Gear Integer Setting (Pn008) . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Electronic Gear Ratio Denominator (Pn010) . . . . . . 8-6
Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 1 (Pn009) . . . . . . 8-6
Electronic Gear Ratio Numerator 2 (Pn500) . . . . . 8-46
Electronic gear switching 1 (GESEL1) . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Electronic gear switching 2 (GESEL2) . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Emergency stop input (EMG-STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Encoder cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Encoder cables (robot cables). . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 3-95
Encoder Cables (Standard Cables). . . . . . . 2-15, 2-17
Encoder connector specifications (CN2) . . . . . . . . 3-50
Encoder connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Encoder Dividing Denominator (Pn503) . . . . . . . . 8-46
Encoder Dividing Numerator (Pn011) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Index
Encoder Output Direction Switching Selection
(Pn012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Encoder outputs (Phases A, B and Z). . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Encoder specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Error Counter Overflow Level (Pn014) . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Error Counter Reset Condition Selection (Pn517) 8-53
Error counter reset input (ECRST) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Error diagnosis using the alarm displays . . . . . . 11-11
Error diagnosis using the operation status . . . . . 11-18
Error processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Excessive Analog Input 1 (Pn424) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
External Feedback Pulse Direction Switching
(Pn326) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
External Feedback Pulse Dividing Denominator
(Pn325) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
External Feedback Pulse Dividing Numerator
(Pn324) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
External Feedback Pulse Phase-Z Setting
(Pn327) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
External Feedback Pulse Type Selection (Pn323) 8-33
External Regeneration Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
External Regeneration Resistor connector
specifications (CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19, 4-23
External Regeneration Resistor dimensions . . . . . 2-72
External Regeneration Resistor Setting (Pn017) . . 8-8
External Regeneration Resistor specifications . . 3-146
External scale connector specifications (CN4) . . . 3-50
F
Forward Direction Torque Offset (Pn608) . . . . . . . 8-59
Forward drive prohibition input (POT) . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Forward External Torque Limit (Pn525) . . . . . . . . 8-56
Forward torque limit input (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Front Panel Parameter Write Selection (Pn617). . 8-61
FULL CLOSING CONTROL mode adjustment . . 10-12
Function Expansion Setting (Pn610). . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
H
Harmonic current measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Hybrid vibration suppression filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Hybrid vibration suppression gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
I
Immediate Stop Torque (Pn511) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Improving Control I/O Signal Noise Resistance. . . 4-44
Improving encoder cable noise resistance . . . . . . 4-43
Incremental encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Inertia Ratio (Pn004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Inertia Ratio 2 (Pn613). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Inertia ratio switching input (JSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Input Signal Selection 1 (Pn400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Input Signal Selection 10 (Pn409) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error
Counter Overflow Level (Pn328) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Internal/External Feedback Pulse Error Counter
Reset (Pn329) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Internally set speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Internally set speed selection 1, 2 and 3
(VSEL1, 2 and 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
J
Jog operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Jog Speed (Pn604) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
G
Gain 3 Effective Time (Pn605) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain 3 Ratio Setting (Pn606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain switching (GSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Switching Delay Time in Position Control
(Pn116) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Pn121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Switching Delay Time in Torque Control
(Pn125) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain switching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Position Control
(Pn118) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Speed Control
(Pn123) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Switching Hysteresis in Torque Control
(Pn127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAIN SWITCHING INPUT OPERATING mode
Selection (Pn114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Switching Level in Position Control (Pn117).
Gain Switching Level in Speed Control (Pn122) . .
Gain Switching Level in Torque Control (Pn126). . 8-20

General control cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 3-121
General-purpose input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
8-59
8-59
10-2
3-39
L
Leakage Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
8-16
8-18
8-20
6-25
8-16
8-18
8-20
8-13
8-16
8-18
Main circuit connector specifications (CNA)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-10, 3-14, 4-18, 4-19, 4-22
Main circuit terminal block specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Manual tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Momentary Hold Time (Pn509) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Monitor connector specifications (CN5) . . . . . . . . . 3-54
MONITOR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Motion Control Unit Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Motor characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Motor connector specifications (CNB)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-10, 3-14, 4-18, 4-19, 4-22
Motor connector specifications (CNC) . . . . . 3-10, 3-14
Motor connector specifications (CND) . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Index-3
Index
Motor general specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Motor power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Motor power cables (robot cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Motor power cables (standard cables) . . . . . 2-16, 2-18
Mounting brackets (L-brackets for rack mounting) 2-26
Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
N
No. 1 Internally Set Speed (Pn304) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
No. 1 Torque Limit (Pn013) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
No. 2 Torque Limit (Pn522) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
No-fuse breaker (NFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Noise filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Noise filters for brake power supply . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Notch 1 Depth Setting (Pn203). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Notch 1 Frequency Setting (Pn201) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Notch 1 Width Setting (Pn202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
O
Operation command (RUN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Operation Switching when Using Absolute
Encoder (Pn015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Operational procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Output during speed limit (V-LIMIT) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Output Signal Selection 1 (Pn410) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Overload Detection Level Setting (Pn512) . . . . . . 8-51
Overrun Limit Setting (Pn514) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Overspeed Detection Level Setting (Pn513) . . . . 8-52
Overspeed Detection Level Setting at Immediate Stop
(Pn615) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
P
Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
PARAMETER SETTING mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
PARAMETER WRITE mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Phase-Z output (open collector output) . . . . . . . . 3-44
Pin arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Position Command Filter Time Constant (Pn222) 8-24
Position command pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28, 3-29
Position command status output (P-CMD) . . . . . . 3-49
Index-4
Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

POSITION CONTROL mode adjustment . . . . . . 10-12
Position Control Unit-Servo Relay Unit cable
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
Position feedback output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Position Gain Switching Time (Pn119) . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Position Lock Level Setting (Pn316) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Position Loop Gain (Pn100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Position Loop Gain 2 (Pn105) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Position Setting Unit Selection (Pn520). . . . . . . . . 8-54
Positioning Completion Condition Selection
(Pn432) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Positioning Completion Hold Time (Pn433). . . . . . 8-42
Positioning completion output 1 (INP1) . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Positioning completion output 2 (INP2) . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Positioning Completion Range 1 (Pn431) . . . . . . . 8-41
Positioning Completion Range 2 (Pn442) . . . . . . . 8-45
Power cable connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Power cables with brakes (robot cables). . . . . . . 3-103
Power cables without brakes (robot cables)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97, 3-98
Power Supply ON Initialization Time (Pn618) . . . . 8-61
Preparing for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Pulse prohibition input (IPG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Pulse Regeneration Output Limit Setting (Pn533). 8-58
R
Radio noise filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148, 4-45
Reactor to reduce harmonic current . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Realtime autotuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
REALTIME AUTOTUNING CUSTOMIZATION
mode Setting (Pn632) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Realtime Autotuning Estimated Speed Selection
(Pn631) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Realtime Autotuning Machine Rigidity Setting
(Pn003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
REALTIME AUTOTUNING mode Selection
(Pn002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Regeneration absorption capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Regeneration Resistor Selection (Pn016) . . . . . . . . 8-8
Regenerative energy absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Regenerative energy with an External Regeneration
Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Replacement method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4, 11-24
Replacing the absolute encoder battery . . . . . . . 11-24
Replacing the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Replacing the Servo Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Replacing the Servomotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Reverse Direction Speed Limit Value Setting
(Pn322) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Reverse Direction Torque Offset (Pn609) . . . . . . . 8-59
Reverse drive prohibition input (NOT) . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Reverse External Torque Limit (Pn526) . . . . . . . . 8-56
Reverse torque limit input (NCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Rotation Direction Switching (Pn000) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Rotation speed characteristics
(1,000-r/min motors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
(2,000-r/min motors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
(3,000-r/min motors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Index
Rotation Speed for Motor Rotation Detection
(Pn436) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Terminal block specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-24, 4-25
Terminal Block Wire Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Terminal block wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Torque Command Direction Selection (Pn318) . . . 8-31
Torque Command Filter Time Constant (Pn104). . 8-12
Torque Command Filter Time Constant 2 (Pn109) 8-12
Torque command input (TREF1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Torque command input 1 (TREF1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Torque command input 2 (TREF2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Torque Command Scale (Pn319) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Torque command sign input (TSIGN) . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Torque Command Value Offset (Pn607) . . . . . . . . 8-59
Torque Command/Speed Limit Selection (Pn317) 8-31
Torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
TORQUE CONTROL mode adjustment . . . . . . . 10-18
Torque Feed-forward Amount (Pn112) . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Torque Feed-forward Command Filter (Pn113). . . 8-13
Torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33, 6-34
Torque Limit Selection (Pn521) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Torque limit switching (TLSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Torque Limit Switching Setting 1 (Pn523) . . . . . . . 8-56
Torque Limit Switching Setting 2 (Pn524) . . . . . . . 8-56
Torque limiting signal (TLIMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Trial operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Safety connector specifications (CN8) . . . . . . . . . 3-56

S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting
(Pn314) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Sensor input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Sensor ON input (SEN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Sequence output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Servo Drive and Servomotor combination list . . . . 2-12
Servo Drive dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Servo Drive installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Servo Drive limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Servo Drive models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Servo ready completed output (READY) . . . . . . . 3-47
Servo Relay Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 3-128
Servo Relay Unit cables for Servo Drives . . . . . . . 2-23
Servo Relay Unit cables for Position Control Units 2-24
Servomotor installation conditions . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-7
Servomotor limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Servomotor models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Setting the mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Smoothing Filter Time Constant (Pn223) . . . . . . . 8-25
Soft Start Acceleration Time (Pn312) . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Soft Start Deceleration Time (Pn313) . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Speed Command Direction Selection (Pn301) . . . 8-26
Speed command input (REF) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28, 3-36
Speed Command Scale (Pn302) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Speed command sign input (VSIGN) . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Speed command status output (V-CMD) . . . . . . . 3-49
Speed Conformity Detection Width (Pn435) . . . . . 8-43
Speed conformity output (TGON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Speed conformity output signal (VCMP) . . . . . . . . 3-48
Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
SPEED CONTROL mode adjustment. . . . . . . . . 10-13
Speed Feedback Filter Time Constant (Pn103) . . 8-12
Speed Feedback Filter Time Constant 2 (Pn108). 8-12
Speed Feed-forward Command Filter (Pn111) . . . 8-13
Speed Feed-forward Gain (Pn110) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Speed limit input (VLIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28, 3-36
Speed limit value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Speed Limit Value Setting (Pn321) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Speed Loop Gain (Pn101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Speed Loop Gain 2 (Pn106) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn102) . . . . 8-11
Speed Loop Integral Time Constant 2 (Pn107). . . 8-12
Stop Selection for Alarm Generation (Pn510). . . . 8-50
Stop Selection for Drive Prohibition Input (Pn505) 8-47
Stop Selection with Main Power Supply OFF
(Pn507) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Stop Selection with Servo OFF (Pn506) . . . . . . . . 8-48
Surge absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Surge suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Switching control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
SWITCHING mode in Position Control (Pn115) . . 8-14
SWITCHING mode in Speed Control (Pn120) . . . 8-16
SWITCHING mode in Torque Control (Pn124) . . . 8-19
System block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
System configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
U
UL and cUL standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Undervoltage Alarm Selection (Pn508) . . . . . . . . . 8-49
USB connector specifications (CN7) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
V
Vibration detection threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vibration Filter 1 Setting (Pn215). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vibration Filter Selection (Pn213) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vibration filter switching 1 (DFSEL1) . . . . . . . . . . .
Vibration filter switching 2 (DFSEL2) . . . . . . . . . . .
Vibration Frequency 1 (Pn214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-63
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-24
8-22
3-39
3-39
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-24
Warning Latch Hold Time Selection (Pn627). . . . .

Warning mask setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning output 1 (WARN1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning output 2 (WARN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Output Selection 1 (Pn440) . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Output Selection 2 (Pn441) . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring conforming to EMC directives. . . . . . . . . . .
8-62
8-64
3-48
3-48
8-45
8-45
4-30
4-32
Index-5
Index
Z
Zero speed designation (VZERO) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zero Speed Designation Selection (Pn315) . . . . .
Zero Speed Detection (Pn434) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zero speed detection signal (ZSP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index-6
3-41
8-29
8-42
3-48
Cat. No. I571-E2-02A
Austria
Tel: +43 (0) 2236 377 800
www.industrial.omron.at
France
Tel: +33 (0) 1 56 63 70 00
www.industrial.omron.fr
Netherlands
Tel: +31 (0) 23 568 11 00
www.industrial.omron.nl
Spain
Tel: +34 913 777 900
www.industrial.omron.es
Belgium
Tel: +32 (0) 2 466 24 80
www.industrial.omron.be
Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 2173 680 00
www.industrial.omron.de
Norway
Tel: +47 (0) 22 65 75 00
www.industrial.omron.no
Sweden
Tel: +46 (0) 8 632 35 00
www.industrial.omron.se
Czech Republic
Tel: +420 234 602 602
www.industrial.omron.cz
Hungary
Tel: +36 (0) 1 399 30 50
www.industrial.omron.hu
Poland
Tel: +48 (0) 22 645 78 60
www.industrial.omron.com.pl
Switzerland
Tel: +41 41 748 13 13
www.industrial.omron.ch
Denmark
Tel: +45 43 44 00 11
www.industrial.omron.dk
Italy
Tel: +39 02 32 681
www.industrial.omron.it
Portugal
Tel: +351 21 942 94 00
www.industrial.omron.pt
Turkey
Tel: +90 (0) 216 474 00 40
www.industrial.omron.com.tr
Finland
Tel: +358 (0) 207 464 200
www.industrial.omron.fi
Middle East & Africa

Tel: +31 (0) 23 568 11 00
www.industrial.omron.eu
Russia
Tel: +7 495 648 94 50
www.industrial.omron.ru
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0) 870 752 08 61
www.industrial.omron.co.uk
Accurax G5 servo system with Analogue/Pulse control
Omron Europe B.V. Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands.
Tel: +31 (0) 23 568 13 00 Fax: +31 (0) 23 568 13 88 www.industrial.omron.eu
USERS MANUAL
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.

Cat. No. I571-E2-03
I571-E2-03+Accurax-G5(AP)+UsersManual_Cover.indd 1

r88d KT Servo OMRON

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

r88d KT Servo OMRON

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

r88d KT Servo OMRON

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

Accurax G5 servo system

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Items Requiring Acknowledgment

Items Requiring Acknowledgment

3. Conditions for Intended Application

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Items Requiring Acknowledgment

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

Safety Precautions Document

When an incorrect handling can lead to a dangerous

When an incorrect handling can lead to a dangerous

This symbol indicates a compulsory item (item that must be done).

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

For Safe Use of This Product

Never touch the parts inside the driver.

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

Do not perform wiring or any operation with wet hands.

Do not store or install the product in the following environment:

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

Storage and Transportation

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

Installation and Wiring

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

Operation and Adjustment

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

Maintenance and Inspection

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Safety Precautions Document

Location of Warning Label

Warning label display location

Instructions on Warning Label

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Items to Check after Unpacking

Items to Check after Unpacking

Accessories of This Product

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Manual Revision History

Manual Revision History

Description of revision and revised page

First Print. European version

Second Print. European version

Third Print. European version

Accurax G5 AC SERVOMOTOR AND SERVO DRIVE USER'S MANUAL

Structure of This Document

This chapter explains the models of Servo Drive, Servomotor, and

This chapter explains the general specifications, characteristics,

This chapter explains the installation conditions, wiring methods

This chapter gives outline of applied functions such as damping

This function stops the motor based on a signal from a Safety

This chapter explains the operating procedures and how to operate in